Programming Manual

A50-031167-003 NA
ISSUE 6.0
Copyright
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time
without notice.

NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without
prior written approval of NEC Corporation.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright 2011 - 2016

NEC Corporation
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction
Section 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING.......................................................... 1-1
Section 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL........................................................................... 1-1
Section 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE...................................................... 1-2
Section 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE........................................................... 1-2
Section 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS................................ 1-3
Section 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES......................................... 1-4
Section 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING...................................................... 1-4
Section 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN......................................... 1-5
Section 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES........................................................... 1-5
Section 10 CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER...................................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 Programming the SL1100

Section 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM.................................................................... 2-1
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup.................................................................. 2-3
10-01 : Time and Date....................................................................................... 2-3
10-02 : Location Setup....................................................................................... 2-4
10-03 : ETU Setup............................................................................................. 2-5
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup............................................................................. 2-9
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup................................................................................ 2-10
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup....................................................... 2-11
10-12 : CPU Network Setup............................................................................. 2-13
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup......................................................................... 2-16
10-14 : Managed Network Setup..................................................................... 2-17
10-15 : Client Information Setup...................................................................... 2-18
10-16 : Option Information Setup..................................................................... 2-19
10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection........................................................ 2-22
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment...................................................... 2-23
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup...................................................... 2-25
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup........................................................................ 2-26
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup................................................................. 2-27
10-27 : IP System ID ....................................................................................... 2-28
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup............................................................. 2-29
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup.............................................................. 2-31
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup (Not Used)................................ 2-33
10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup .................................................................. 2-34
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup...................................... 2-35
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup........................................... 2-36
10-37 : UPnP Setup......................................................................................... 2-37
10-39 : Fractional Setup................................................................................... 2-38
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability.............................................................................. 2-39
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting............................................................. 2-40
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup........................................................................ 2-41
10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup......................................................... 2-42
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup......................................... 2-44
10-48 : License Activation................................................................................ 2-45
10-49 : License File Activation......................................................................... 2-46
10-50 : License Information.............................................................................. 2-47
10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of PRI....................................................................... 2-48
10-52 : Free/Demo License Information........................................................... 2-49

Programming Manual i
SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package............................................. 2-50

10-58 : Network Address.................................................................................. 2-51
10-60 : Audio Port Setup ................................................................................. 2-53
10-61 : Relay Port Setup.................................................................................. 2-54
10-62 : NetBIOS Setting................................................................................... 2-55
10-63 : DHCP Client Setting............................................................................ 2-56
10-65 : NTP Server Setting.............................................................................. 2-57
Program 11 : System Numbering............................................................................... 2-58
11-01 : System Numbering............................................................................... 2-58
11-02 : Extension Numbering........................................................................... 2-65
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering................................................................ 2-66
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers........................................................ 2-67
11-09 : Trunk Access Code.............................................................................. 2-68
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator).................................. 2-70
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)................................. 2-73
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)............................................ 2-77
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)............................................................. 2-81
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)............................................................ 2-83
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access).................... 2-85
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup.......................................................... 2-87
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number..................................................................... 2-88
11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup............................................. 2-89
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table............................................................... 2-90
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup................................................................................ 2-91
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup................................................................. 2-91
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns........................................................ 2-92
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching.......................................................... 2-94
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching.......................................................... 2-95
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions.................................... 2-96
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks........................................... 2-97
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode..................................................................... 2-98
12-08 : Night Mode Service Range.................................................................. 2-99
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing............................................................................ 2-100
13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup........................................................... 2-100
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins.................................................................. 2-101
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions.............................. 2-102
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name..................................................... 2-103
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group.................................................................... 2-105
13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name.......................................................... 2-106
13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name........................................................... 2-107
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup............................................................................. 2-108
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup..................................................................... 2-108
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup................................................................... 2-112
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup............................................................................. 2-115
14-05 : Trunk Group....................................................................................... 2-116
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing.......................................................................... 2-117
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup................................................................... 2-119
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks....................................................... 2-121
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks................................ 2-122
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk.......................................................................... 2-123
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk.................................................... 2-124
14-18 : IP Trunk Data Setup.......................................................................... 2-125
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup...................................................................... 2-126
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup.............................................................. 2-126

ii Programming Manual
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup............................................... 2-128

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup........................................... 2-134
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup........................................... 2-137
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions..................................................... 2-140
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys............................................................ 2-141
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup..................................... 2-148
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment.................................................... 2-150
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup........................... 2-151
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment...................................... 2-152
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions.......................... 2-153
15-13 : Loop Keys.......................................................................................... 2-154
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys ....................................................... 2-155
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension.................................................. 2-156
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication......................................................... 2-157
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options.......................................... 2-158
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup..................................................................... 2-160
15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal............................................... 2-161
15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup.................................. 2-162
Program 16 : Department Group Setup................................................................... 2-163
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup................................................ 2-163
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions.................................. 2-165
16-03 : Secondary Department Group........................................................... 2-166
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups................................... 2-167
Program 20 : System Option Setup......................................................................... 2-168
20-01 : System Options.................................................................................. 2-168
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones........................................... 2-170
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones...................................... 2-173
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions............................................... 2-175
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions......................................................... 2-176
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)................................. 2-177
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)............................. 2-179
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)............................. 2-181
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)....................................... 2-183
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service).............................. 2-185
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)............................ 2-187
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)........................... 2-188
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M............................................ 2-192
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup............................................................................... 2-194
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages............................................................ 2-196
20-17 : Operator Extension............................................................................ 2-198
20-18 : Service Tone Timers.......................................................................... 2-199
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID............................................................. 2-200
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data............................................. 2-201
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation............................................. 2-202
20-23 : System Options for CTI...................................................................... 2-203
20-25 : ISDN Options..................................................................................... 2-204
20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost............................................................... 2-206
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation.............................................................. 2-207
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension.................................................................. 2-208
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks....................................................................... 2-209
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment.......................................................... 2-210
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup..................................................... 2-213
20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting............................................................. 2-214
20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting.................................................................... 2-215

Programming Manual iii

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup....................................................... 2-216

20-38 : Operator Group Setting...................................................................... 2-217
20-42 : Night Mode for each package............................................................ 2-218
20-43 : Power supply for each package......................................................... 2-219
20-44 : Watch Mode Setup............................................................................ 2-220
20-45 : Remote Watch Setup......................................................................... 2-221
20-46 : Security Sensor Setup....................................................................... 2-222
20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode................................................. 2-223
20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor............................................ 2-224
20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup......................................... 2-225
20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor........................................................ 2-226
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup........................................................................... 2-227
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls.................................................... 2-227
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions.................................................. 2-230
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks........................................................ 2-231
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions.................................................. 2-232
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class.......................................................................... 2-233
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup....................................................... 2-235
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup.......................................... 2-237
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup.............................................................................. 2-238
21-09 : Dial Block Setup................................................................................. 2-239
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension........................................ 2-240
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment........................................ 2-241
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks.................................... 2-242
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions............................. 2-243
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup........................................... 2-244
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions................................. 2-245
21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking................................................. 2-246
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk....................... 2-247
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension................. 2-248
21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension.............................. 2-249
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting).................... 2-250
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings........................ 2-251
21-26 : Home NPA Setup............................................................................... 2-252
21-27 : HNPA Exceptions Setup.................................................................... 2-253
21-28 : Foreign NPA Locals Setup................................................................. 2-254
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup........................................................................... 2-255
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls.................................................... 2-255
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup................................................................. 2-257
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range..................................................................... 2-258
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment.................................... 2-260
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment........................................... 2-261
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode............................................................. 2-262
22-07 : DIL Assignment.................................................................................. 2-263
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination........................................................ 2-264
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup........................................................................ 2-265
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup.............................................................. 2-267
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion................................................. 2-268
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group.................................................................. 2-271
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment............................ 2-272
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG......................................................... 2-273
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group.................................. 2-274
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup.............................................. 2-275
22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern...................... 2-276

iv Programming Manual
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup.......................................................... 2-277

22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup................................................... 2-278
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup..................................................................... 2-279
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups............................................................................ 2-279
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer.......................................................... 2-280
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions................................. 2-281
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup........................................................................... 2-282
24-01 : System Options for Hold.................................................................... 2-282
24-02 : System Options for Transfer.............................................................. 2-283
24-03 : Park Group......................................................................................... 2-285
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup............................... 2-286
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup......................................... 2-287
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings................................................................. 2-288
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup................................................................................ 2-290
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup...................................................... 2-290
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message................................................................... 2-291
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing..................... 2-292
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy..................... 2-293
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment.............................................. 2-294
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup...................................... 2-295
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA............................................................ 2-297
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup........................................................................... 2-299
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users........................................................ 2-300
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA........................................................... 2-301
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class................................................................ 2-302
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA........................................... 2-303
25-13 : System Option for DISA..................................................................... 2-304
25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup............................................................... 2-305
Program 26 : ARS Service....................................................................................... 2-306
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service........................... 2-306
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS............................................................... 2-307
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments......................................................................... 2-308
26-04 : ARS Class of Service......................................................................... 2-309
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table.................................................................... 2-310
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS....................................... 2-311
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup................................................................... 2-312
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode........................................................... 2-312
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment................................................. 2-313
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment.......................................................... 2-314
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer......................................................... 2-319
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table.................................................................. 2-320
Program 31 : Paging Setup..................................................................................... 2-322
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging..................................... 2-322
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment.................................................... 2-324
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings.......................................................... 2-325
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group............................................................. 2-327
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page........................................... 2-328
31-06 : External Speaker Control................................................................... 2-329
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments......................................................... 2-330
31-08 : BGM on External Paging................................................................... 2-331
31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting................................................. 2-332
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup.............................................................. 2-333
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup...................................................................... 2-333
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment................................................................ 2-334

Programming Manual v
SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup........................................................................ 2-335

32-04 : Door Box Name Setup....................................................................... 2-336
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup.................................................................................... 2-337
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup................................................................. 2-337
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service.......................................................... 2-338
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines............................................ 2-339
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class................................................... 2-340
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction..................................................... 2-341
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line..................................................... 2-342
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer........................................................................... 2-343
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines............................................. 2-344
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options................................................................. 2-345
34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI....................................................................... 2-348
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup.............................................................. 2-349
35-01 : SMDR Options................................................................................... 2-349
35-02 : SMDR Output Options....................................................................... 2-351
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group........................................... 2-354
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups............................... 2-355
35-05 : Account Code Setup.......................................................................... 2-356
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table.............................................................. 2-358
Program 40 : Voice Recording System.................................................................... 2-359
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup...................................................................... 2-359
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS................................... 2-360
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option................................................ 2-361
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment........................................................ 2-363
Program 41 : ACD Setup......................................................................................... 2-364
41-01 : System Options for ACD.................................................................... 2-364
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments................................................. 2-365
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group............................ 2-366
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules.............................................................. 2-367
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules....................................................................... 2-368
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup............................................................ 2-369
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options....................................................................... 2-370
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting.............................................................. 2-372
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement................................................................ 2-373
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup............................................................... 2-375
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement.............................. 2-376
41-14 : ACD Options Setup............................................................................ 2-377
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow................................................................... 2-379
41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement............................................... 2-380
41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings............................................................. 2-381
Program 42 : Hotel Setup........................................................................................ 2-382
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel......................................................... 2-382
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup............................................................. 2-383
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel).............................................. 2-384
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes................................................ 2-386
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer................................................................. 2-387
42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status......................................................... 2-388
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup........................................................................... 2-389
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route...................................................... 2-389
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access..................................... 2-390
44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table............................................................ 2-392
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule........................................ 2-394
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table............................................................................ 2-395

vi Programming Manual
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

44-06 : Additional Dial Table.......................................................................... 2-397

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access.................................................. 2-398
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route....................................................... 2-399
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route.................................................... 2-401
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route................................................... 2-402
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration......................................................................... 2-403
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options........................................................... 2-403
45-02 : NSL Option Setup.............................................................................. 2-405
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment....................................................... 2-406
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits................ 2-407
Program 47 : InMail................................................................................................. 2-408
47-01 : InMail System Options....................................................................... 2-408
47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options.......................................................... 2-412
47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options............................................................ 2-416
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options.................................................... 2-417
47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options......................................................... 2-421
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options............................................................. 2-423
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options........................................................ 2-425
47-10 : InMail Trunk Options.......................................................................... 2-427
47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options.............................................................. 2-429
47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules................................................................... 2-432
47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables.................................................................... 2-436
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options.................................................... 2-439
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options................................................. 2-440
47-18 : SMTP Setup....................................................................................... 2-441
47-19 : POP3 Setup....................................................................................... 2-442
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options................................... 2-443
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options..................................... 2-445
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options.................................... 2-446
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options...................................... 2-448
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System..................................................... 2-449
80-01 : Service Tone Setup............................................................................ 2-449
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup.............................................................................. 2-454
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup............................................................... 2-455
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup.................................................... 2-457
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System.................................................. 2-459
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup.................................. 2-460
80-08 : MFC Tone Setup................................................................................ 2-461
80-09 : Short Ring Setup................................................................................ 2-462
80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup................................................................... 2-464
80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup................................................................... 2-466
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk........................................................ 2-467
81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup......................................................................... 2-467
81-05 : ISDN PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup................................... 2-469
81-06 : ISDN PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup .......................................... 2-470
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port....................................... 2-472
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup........................................................................ 2-473
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting................................................. 2-476
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension................................................. 2-478
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone........................................................................... 2-478
82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup..................................................................... 2-480
82-05 : ISDN PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup.................................... 2-481
82-06 : ISDN PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup............................................ 2-482
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port..................................... 2-484

Programming Manual vii

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup .................................................................... 2-485

82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup......................................................... 2-486
82-11 : SLIU Initial Data Setup....................................................................... 2-489
82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup....................................................................... 2-490
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone..................... 2-491
82-21 : Sensor Setup..................................................................................... 2-492
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB.............................................................. 2-493
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup......................................... 2-493
84-07 : Firmware Download Setup................................................................. 2-495
84-09 : VLAN Setup....................................................................................... 2-496
84-10 : ToS Setup.......................................................................................... 2-497
84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup ................................... 2-498
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup...................................... 2-500
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup.................................................... 2-504
84-15 : SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup............................................................. 2-506
84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup................................................... 2-507
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup............................... 2-509
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup............................................. 2-512
84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup......................................... 2-513
84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup.......................................... 2-514
84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup............................ 2-516
84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP).................................................................... 2-519
84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup............................................................................... 2-520
84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup............................................. 2-522
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup.............................. 2-523
84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup........................................................... 2-524
84-32 : FAX Over IP CODEC Setup............................................................... 2-529
84-39 : SIP Trunk message customize.......................................................... 2-531
Program 90 : Maintenance Program........................................................................ 2-532
90-01 : Installation Date................................................................................. 2-532
90-02 : Programming Password Setup.......................................................... 2-533
90-03 : Save Data.......................................................................................... 2-535
90-04 : Load Data.......................................................................................... 2-536
90-05 : Slot Control........................................................................................ 2-537
90-06 : Trunk Control..................................................................................... 2-538
90-07 : Station Control................................................................................... 2-539
90-08 : System Reset..................................................................................... 2-540
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup................................................ 2-541
90-10 : System Alarm Setup.......................................................................... 2-542
90-11 : Alarm Report SMTP Setting............................................................... 2-549
90-12 : System Alarm Output......................................................................... 2-551
90-13 : System Information Output................................................................ 2-552
90-16 : Main Software Information................................................................. 2-553
90-17 : Firmware Information......................................................................... 2-554
90-19 : Dial Block Release............................................................................. 2-555
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup.................................................................. 2-556
90-21 : Traffic Report Output.......................................................................... 2-558
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones.............................................. 2-559
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup................................... 2-560
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup................................................. 2-561
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup............................................................. 2-562
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup.................................................. 2-563
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet................................................................. 2-564
90-33 : Preselected Data Setup..................................................................... 2-565

viii Programming Manual

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

90-34 : Firmware Information......................................................................... 2-582

90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup..................................................... 2-583
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting.......................................................... 2-584
90-37 : Set Temporary License...................................................................... 2-586
90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup................................................ 2-587
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset............................................................. 2-589
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data................................... 2-590
90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information................................... 2-591
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700.................................................. 2-592
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface....................................... 2-593
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone....................... 2-594
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup............................................................. 2-595
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange........................................... 2-596
90-52 : System Alarm Save........................................................................... 2-597
90-53 : System Alarm Clear........................................................................... 2-598
90-54 : PC/Web Programming....................................................................... 2-599
90-55 : Free License Select........................................................................... 2-600
90-56 : NTP Setup......................................................................................... 2-601
90-57 : Backup Recovery Data...................................................................... 2-602
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data...................................................................... 2-603
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data........................................................................ 2-604
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information..................................................... 2-605
90-62 : Security ID Information ..................................................................... 2-606
90-63 : DR700 Control................................................................................... 2-607
90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup................................... 2-608
90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup.............................................................. 2-609
90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set......................................... 2-610
90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup........................................................................ 2-611
Program 92 : Copy Program.................................................................................... 2-612
92-01 : Copy Program.................................................................................... 2-612
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers........................................................... 2-615
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number.......................................................... 2-616
92-04 : Extension Data Swap......................................................................... 2-617
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password........................................................ 2-619
92-06 : Fill Command..................................................................................... 2-620
92-07 : Delete Command............................................................................... 2-621
Program 93 : System Information............................................................................ 2-622
93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information.............................................................. 2-622
93-02 : Trunk Information............................................................................... 2-623
93-03 : Extension Information........................................................................ 2-624
93-04 : Redial List.......................................................................................... 2-626
93-05 : Department Group Information.......................................................... 2-627

Programming Manual ix
SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data....................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names................................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts.................................................................................... 1-5
Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities....................................................................... 1-5
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings................................................................ 2-59
Table 2-2 Function Number List .................................................................................... 2-142
Table 2-3 Function Number List .................................................................................... 2-145
Table 2-4 Program 15-08 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns.................................. 2-148
Table 2-5 Ringing Cycles .............................................................................................. 2-194
Table 2-6 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................. 2-258
Table 2-7 Function Number List..................................................................................... 2-314
Table 2-8 Function Number List..................................................................................... 2-318
Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default Table................................................................................... 2-415
Table 2-10 47-06-14 Default Table................................................................................. 2-420
Table 2-11 47-07-03 Default Table................................................................................. 2-422
Table 2-12 47-10-03 Default Table................................................................................. 2-428
Table 2-13 Basic Tones.................................................................................................. 2-449
Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table..................................................................................... 2-462
Table 2-15 Ring Cycle Table.......................................................................................... 2-463
Table 2-16 Default Table................................................................................................ 2-463
Table 2-17 82-01 Default Table...................................................................................... 2-479
Table 2-18 Description of Alarm..................................................................................... 2-542

x Programming Manual
Introduction
SECTION 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING 1
Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter first.

Introduction
This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a
program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find
out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into
system memory.

This Manual is created for System : SL1100

SECTION 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning of
the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into the
following headings :

Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are
also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with
the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply
to the program.

The program access level is just above the Description heading. You can only use the program if your
access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to How to Enter Programming
Mode on page 1-2 for a list of the system access levels and passwords.

Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program. You
will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a feature
may have an effect on another feature that you did not intend.

Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into system memory.
For example :
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15-07-01

15-07-01 TEL
KY01 = *01
- +

tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you
will see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of the telephone display. This indicates the
program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for the extension. The
second row of the display “KY01 = *01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of
*01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is

Programming Manual 1-1

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, refer to How to Enter Programming Mode on
page 1-2.

SECTION 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE

To enter programming mode :

1. Go to any working display telephone.

In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).

2. Do not lift the handset.

3. Press Speaker.
4. # * # *.

5. Dial the system password + Hold.

Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the passwords, use
90-02 : Programming Password Setup on page 2-533.

Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

Password User Name Level Programs at this Level

****** necam 1 (MF) Manufacture Level (MF) :

80-02, 80-03, 80-04, 80-05, 80-07, 80-10, 81-04, 81-05, 82-01, 82-04,
82-05, 82-08
12345678 sltech 2 (IN) Installation (IN) :
All programs in this section not listed for MF, SA, & SB
0000 ADMIN1 3 (SA) System Administrator - Level 1 (SA) :
10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-23,
10-24, 10-25, 10-28, 10-29, 10-45, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 12-08, 15-01,
15-07, 15-09, 15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 20-34, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11,
22-17, 25-08, 30-03, 30-04, 32-02, 45-02, 84-22, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06,
90-07, 90-19, 90-57, 90-58, 90-59, 90-65
9999 ADMIN2 4 (SB) System Administrator - Level 2 (SB) :
13-04, 13-05, 13-06, 13-11, 15-14, 21-20

SECTION 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

To-exit the programming mode :

When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit (pressing the Mute key
will exit the program option).
1. Press Mute key to exit the program options, if needed.

Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

2. Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System Data" is displayed.

1-2 Introduction
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

3. The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the telephone to an idle
mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank Compact Flash (CF) Card is required. Insert the CF Card into the
CPU and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the CF Card. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the
customer data if necessary.) Note that a CF Card can only hold one customer database. Each database to
be saved requires a separate drive.

CF card
CPU card
CF Slot (CN2)
VMDB-C1

SECTION 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS

Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and
move around in the menus.

Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data

When you want to ... Telephone Programming

Enter Data into program 0 ~ 9, *, # Line Key (1 ~ 6)
Next Index Cursor Key (Up)
Prior Index Cursor Key (Down)
Select Data Line Key (1 ~ 6)
All Clear Flash
Register Hold
Enter
Go Back to Prior Screen Mute
Clear / Back
Move Cursor Jump Up/Down DND
Delete single character Clear / Back
Next Page Help
Toggle between Number/Character
While in a Entering Number
Prior Page Transfer
Quit the programming Speaker
Exit
Move Cursor to Left Cursor Key (Left)
Soft Key1
Change Program Number Soft Key2
Change Index Number

Programming Manual 1-3

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

When you want to ... Telephone Programming

Change Program Number Soft Key3
Change Index Number
Move Cursor to Right Cursor Key (Right)
Soft Key4

SECTION 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES

Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use
the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once
for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2
three times. Press the key six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits
long.

Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit ... When you want to ...

1 Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2 Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В

* Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey in-
stead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

SECTION 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING

Each Display telephone with Softkeys provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive feature access. The
options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system
programming. Simply press the Softkey located below the option you wish and the display will change
accordingly.

_
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

Pressing the Cursor key Up or Down will scroll between the menus.

1-4 Introduction
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

_
Program Mode
Hard Mtnance

SECTION 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN

When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are displayed. These
keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the programs.

Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts

Softkey Display Prompts

If you press this Soft- The system will ...
key ...
back Go back one step in the program display.
You can press Cursor Key (UP) or Cursor Key (Down) to scroll forward or backward through a
list of programs.
Scroll down through the available programs.

Scroll up through the available programs.

select Select the currently displayed program.

Move the cursor to the left.
Move the cursor to the right.
-1 Move back through the available program options.
+1 Move forward through the available program options.

SECTION 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES

The following table provides the capacities for the SL1100 system.

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities

System Number Plan/Capacities Note

System Type Number Plan/Capacities Related Pro-
gram
System
Analog Caller ID Detector (detec- 96 channels
ted by DSP)
Classes of Service 15 20–06
Day/Night Mode Numbers 8 12–07
Day/Night Service Patterns 4 12–07
Dial Tone Detector 96
DTMF Receiver
Toll Restriction Classes 15
Verifiable Account Code Table 800 35–06
Trunk
Trunk Port Number 84

Programming Manual 1-5

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

System Number Plan/Capacities Note

System Type Number Plan/Capacities Related Pro-
gram
Trunk Ports (Total) : 76
• Analog Trunks 36
• T1/PRI Trunk Ports 48
• VoIPDB Trunk Ports 32
(VoIPDB & MEMDB is re-
quired. Need license to be
Max.)
DID Translation Tables 20 22–10
DID Translation Table Entries 800 22–10
DISA :
• Classes of Service 15 20–14
• Users 15 25–09
Ring Groups 25 22–04
Trunk Access Maps 84 14–07
Trunk Group Numbers 25 14–05
Trunk Routes 25 14–06
Extension
Telephone Extension Ports 112 (V3.5 Changed)
• Multiline Terminals 96 (V3.5 Changed)
• Single Line Phones/Analog 80 (V3.5 Changed)
Devices
• VoIPDB Extensions (SIP-MLT/ 64
Std)
(VoIPDB & MEMDB is re-
quired. Need license to be
Max. (SIP-Std))
Digital Extension Ports 01 ~ 08
• Physical Ports
Telephone Extension Number 1 ~ 89999999*
Range (*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
Virtual Extension Ports 50 11–04
Virtual Extension Number Range 1 ~ 89999999* 11–04
(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)
Door Boxes 6 32–02
Door Box Numbers 1~6 32–02
DSS Consoles Numbers : 12 30–01
• 60 Button DSS Console
Operator Access Number 0 (Default)
Operator Extension 15
Speed Dialing
Speed Dialing Groups 32 13–02
Speed Dialing Bins 0 ~ 999 13–02
Speed Dialing Table-Common 900 13–01–03
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers 1 ~ 100 25–06
Conference

1-6 Introduction
ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

System Number Plan/Capacities Note

System Type Number Plan/Capacities Related Pro-
gram
Conference Circuits 32 : maximum
(16 Parties Per Conference)
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group 1 ~ 32 16–01
Numbers
Call Pickup Group Numbers 1 ~ 32 23–02
Hotline
Internal Hotline 128
External Hotline 128
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 01 ~ 32 31–02
External Page Group Numbers 1~3 31–04
External Speakers 1~3 31–04
Park Group Numbers 1 ~ 64 24–03
Park Orbits 1 ~ 64 24–03
SMDR
SMDR Ports 1~2 35–03
VRS/VM InMail
VRS/VM InMail 1
VRS/VM Ports 16
(Need license and MEMDB)
VRS Port 16
(Need MEMDB)
VRS Attendant Messages 3
VRS Recordable Messages 100 40–10–02
VRS Ports 16
VoIPDB
RTP Ports 0 ~ 65534
RTCP Ports 0 ~ 65535
DSP Resources 32
Passwords
Programming Passwords :
Level 1 (MF) *****
PCPro/WebPro User Name : necam
Level 2 (IN) 12345678
PCPro/WebPro User Name : sltech
Level 3 (SA) 0000
PCPro/WebPro User Name : ADMIN1
Level 4 (SB) 9999
PCPro/WebPro User Name : ADMIN2
Programming Password Users 8

Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering feature in the SL1100 Features
and Specifications Manual.

Programming Manual 1-7

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

SECTION 10 CONCEPT OF SLOT NUMBER

Each unit installed to the system has a slot number assigned. Some of slot number are fixed to a unit
that be installed. Other slots are not fixed to unit but fixed to location where it is installed. Below chart
shows the slot and its number :
Main KSU Expansion KSU 1-3
Slot 0 Base Unit

Slot 10 4th Unit* Slot 11/12/- 4th Unit E

C X
Slot 3 3rd Unit P Slot 6/9/15 3rd Unit
I
Slot 2 2nd Unit U Slot 5/8/14 2nd Unit F
Slot 1 Base Unit Slot 4/7/13 Base Unit E

* Note: Lot D or higher Main KSU or FPGA Version 0100 and V3.5 or higher System Software required.
FPGA version can be found in PC Pro/Web Pro and Lot # is on side of Chassis.
- To verify if your Chassis is D or higher check the lot # (e.g. 118DCA-G). The 4th Character
needs to be D or higher.
- To verify the FPGA version connect with PC Pro/Web Pro and check version information in the
blade configuration screen.
However the maximum trunk port will be limited to 84 ports even though the expansion Trunk card
is fully mounted into the four KSUs.
Please see the hardware manual for further information.

1-8 Introduction
Programming the SL1100
SECTION 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM 2
The information contained in this chapter provides the information necessary to properly program your
system.

The programming blocks are organized into the following programming modes.

Programming the SL1100

Program Number : Program Name
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup on page 2-3
Program 11 : System Numbering on page 2-58
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup on page 2-91
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing on page 2-100
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup on page 2-108
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup on page 2-126
Program 16 : Department Group Setup on page 2-163
Program 20 : System Option Setup on page 2-168
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup on page 2-227
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup on page 2-255
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup on page 2-279
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup on page 2-282
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup on page 2-290
Program 26 : ARS Service on page 2-306
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup on page 2-312
Program 31 : Paging Setup on page 2-322
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup on page 2-333
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup on page 2-337
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup on page 2-349
Program 40 : Voice Recording System on page 2-359
Program 41 : ACD Setup on page 2-364
Program 42 : Hotel Setup on page 2-382
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup on page 2-389
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration on page 2-403
Program 47 : InMail on page 2-408
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System on page 2-449
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk on page 2-467
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension on page 2-478
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP on page 2-493
Program 90 : Maintenance Program on page 2-532
Program 92 : Copy Program on page 2-612

Programming Manual 2-1

SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program Number : Program Name

Program 93 : System Information on page 2-622

2-2 Programming the SL1100

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-01 : Time and Date
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system Program
programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728 to change the time if allowed by an
extension Class of Service.

Input Data 10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Year 10-96 (V5.0 Changed) Enter 2 digits for year (07 ~ 96). No Setting
02 Month 01 ~ 12 Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 12) for the month. No Setting
03 Day 01 ~ 31 Enter 2 digits (01 ~ 31) for the day. No Setting
04 Week 1 ~ 7 (Sun ~ Sat) Enter digit for the day of the week (1 = No Setting
Sunday, 7 = Saturday).
05 Hour 00 ~ 23 Enter 2 digits for the hour (00 ~ 23). No Setting
06 Minute 00 ~ 59 Enter 2 digits for the minute (00 ~ 59). No Setting
07 Second 00 ~ 59 Enter 2 digits for the second (00 ~ 59). No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date

Programming Manual 2-3

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-02 : Location Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.

Input Data
10 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 Country Code Dial (up to four digits) : Enter the country code. 1
0 ~ 9, *, #
02 International Access Dial (up to four digits) : Enter the international access code. No Setting
Code 0 ~ 9, *, #
03 Other Area Access Dial (up to two digits) : Enter the other area access code. 9
Code 0 ~ 9, *, #
04 Area Code Dial (up to six digits) : Enter the local area code. No Setting
0 ~ 9, *, #
05 Trunk Access Code Dial (up to eight dig- Enter the trunk access code digits required No Setting
its) : 0 ~ 9, *, # to place an outgoing call.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-4 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-03 : ETU Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each unit. Program
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to have
the system automatically define it or you may have to reseat the unit.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
10
Input Data

Slot No. 00 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

For ESIU PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 08

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Terminal Type (B1) 0 = No setting 0
1 = Multi-Line Telephone
10 = DSS Console
02 Logical Port Number 0 = No setting 0
1 = Multi-Line Telephone (1 ~
96 (V3.5 Changed) )
10 = DSS Console (1 ~ 12)
10 Bottom option information 0 = None 0
4 = WHA
12 Multi-Line Telephone Line 0 = None This program can on- 0
12 = 12 Line ly be change by using
Terminal Type (B1) PC Programming.
24 = 24 Line

For SLIU PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 08

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Logical Port Number 0 ~ 112 (V3.5 Changed) 0
03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB) 32 (0 dB)
04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 dB) 32 (0 dB)
05 Select port type 0 = SLT 0
1 = Door Phone

Programming Manual 2-5

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

For COIU Unit Setup

Physical Port Number 1~4

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Logical Port Number 1 ~ 36 0

For PRIU PKG Setup

ISDN Line Number 01 ~ 24

Program

Item No. Item Input Data Description Default

10 01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = No setting

1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point
6 = S-Point (Leased Line)
1

02 Logical Port Number [0 : No setting] = 0 The start port num- 0

[1 : T-Point] = 1 ~ 84 ber of a PRI line is
[2 : S-Point] = 1 ~ 84 displayed.
[6 : S-Point (Leased Line)] = 1 ~ 84
03 CRC Multi-frame (CRC4) 0 = off 1
(Only for 2M = 30ch Mode) 1 = on

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 Each timer value of 1

Layer 3 is set up for
each type in Program
81-06 (T-Bus)
05 CLIP Information 0 = No Based on this setting, the 1
1 = Yes system includes a Pre-
sentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted
(0) in the Setup message
to allow or deny the Call-
ing Party Number. Pro-
gram 15-01-04 must also
be set to 1 if this option is
enabled.
06 Length of Cable 0 = Level 1 2
1 = Level 2
2 = Level 3
3 = Level 4
4 = Level 5
07 S-point DDI digits 0-4 0
08 Dial Sending Mode 0 = Enbloc Sending ISDN Protocol definition 0
1 = Overlap Sending
09 Dial Information Element 0 = Keypad Facility ISDN Protocol definition 0
1 = Called Party Number Only when Dial Sending
Mode (10-03-08) is set for
1 (Overlap Sending).
13 Loss-Of-Signal Detection 0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity) If the transmit/receive 2
Limit 1 = Level 1 voltage is less than the
2 = Level 2 setting in 10-03-13, the
3 = Level 3 system considers this as
4 = Level 4 Loss-Of-Signal and the
5 = Level 5 PRI does not come up.
6 = Level 6 Note that there are differ-
7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity) ent values based on the
setting in 10-03-12 for the
PRI.

2-6 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item No. Item Input Data Description Default

14 Service Protocol for S-point 0 = Keypad facility 0
1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire sys-
tem
15 Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = Alerting 0
1 = Disconnect
16 Two B-Channel Transfer for 0 = off 0
PRI Service 1 = on
18 Type of Number 0 = Unknown ISDN Protocol definition. 2
1 = International number Select the number type
2 = National number for the ISDN circuit.
3 = Network Specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number Program
19 Numbering Plan Identifica- 0 = Unknown ISDN Protocol definition. 1
tion 1 = ISDN numbering plan Select the Numbering
2 = Data numbering plan
3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering plan
5 = Private numbering plan
Plan used for the ISDN
circuit.
10
20 Network Exchange Selec- 0 = Standard (same as NI-2) Select the ISDN protocol 7
tion 1 = reserved for the ISDN circuit
2 = reserved
3 = DMS (A211)
4 = 5ESS
5 = DMS (A233)
6 = 4ESS
7 = NI-2
21 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0
1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

For PRI (T1) PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01 ~ 24

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Logical Port Number 1 ~ 84 The start port number of a 0
T1 line is displayed, and
24 logic ports are auto-
matically assigned to a
DTI (T1) line.
02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 0
1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)
03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 0
1 = AMI/ZCS
04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 0
1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet
05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1
1 = External

Programming Manual 2-7

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0
1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

For VoIPDB PKG Setup

Program Physical Port Number 01 ~ 32

Item No. Item Input Data Default

10 01
02
Trunk Logical Port Number
Trunk Type
1 ~ 84
1 = SIP
0
1

Conditions

• When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the new device in to
have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type manually.
• The system must have a unit installed to view/change the options for that type of unit.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-8 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source. For internal Program
Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or one of eleven synthesized
selections.

Input Data 10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Music on Hold Source 0 = Internal MOH (Tone • Internal Music Tune - The tune is set by 1 (V1.5
Selection set by PRG 10-04-02) Program 10-04-02. Changed)
1 = External MOH (Tone • External Source - ACI input via audio
set by PRG 10-60-01: connector (J421) (Program10-60-01).
Audio Port No.2) • Silence - Callers on hold hear silence.
2 = Service Tone (Tone
set by PRG 80-01, tone
64)
3 = VMDB (Tone set by
PRG 10-04-02)
02 Music on Hold Tone [In case Item 1 is 0.] Download File1 : Farewell Song (by Cho- 1
Selection 1 = Download File1 pin)
2 = Download File2 Download File2 : Die Forelle (by F. Schu-
3 = Download File3 bert)
[In case Item 1 is 1, 2, or Download File3 : Plaisir d’amour (by
3.] J.P.E.Martini)
1 ~ 100 = VRS Message
Number
03 Audio Gain Setup 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 32 (0 dB)
dB)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Background Music
• Music on Hold

Programming Manual 2-9

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets
how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunk
LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing,

10
the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay,
depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Pre-Ringing 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

Conditions

• Used with Analog Trunks only.

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

2-10 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CPU for Program
either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CPU has 16 circuits initially, and an additional 16
circuits are added when a VMDB is installed. By Adding EXIFE system can have up to 128 (V3.5 or

10
higher). These are used as follows:
• Extension: DTMF receiver for single line telephone
• Trunk: DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection for analog trunks

Input Data

Circuit/Resource Number 01 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 DTMF Dial Tone Detection 0 = Common Use Resource 01 - 128 = 0
1 = Extension Only (Common) (V3.5
2 = Trunk Only Changed)
Resource 01 - 16 are
Baic resource (only use
Basic Board)
Resource 17 - 32 are
vmdb resource (only
use Basic Board)
Resource 33 - 64 are
EXIFE1 resource (only
use Expansion 1)
Resource 65 - 96 are
EXIFE2 resource (only
use Expansion 2)
Resource 97 - 128 are
EXIFE3 resource (only
use Expansion 3) (V3.5
Added)

Conditions

• CPU has 16 Channel DSP resources (receivers) only for basic CPU Unit. VMDB has additional 16
DSP resources which you can add to CPU. Addition to that EXIFE also each has 32 DSP resource
(receivers) only for expand unit.
• In case of 0 (= Common) is selected, and if 14-02-10 (Caller ID receive ability) is set to “Yes”, DSP
resources are always allocated to analog trunk only, not for analog extension. If 14-02-10 is set to
“No”, the DSP resources can be used for both analog trunk and analog extension commonly.

Feature Cross Reference

• Caller ID

Programming Manual 2-11

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

• Central Office Calls, Placing

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Program

10

2-12 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-12 : CPU Network Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-12 : CPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default Program
Gateway addresses.

10
Caution!
If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed, the system must be reset for the changes to take affect.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ Set for CPU. 192.168.0.10
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
02 Subnet Mask 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when 255.255.255.0
224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 | all Host Addresses are 0.
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 | If the network section is:
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 | 0,
255.128.0.0 | 127,
255.192.0.0 | 128.0,
255.224.0.0 | 191.255,
255.240.0.0 | 192.0.0,
255.248.0.0 | 223.255.255
255.252.0.0 | The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid.
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0 |
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 |
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
03 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 ~ Assign the default gateway IP address. 0.0.0.0
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254

Programming Manual 2-13

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
04 Time Zone 0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and Determine the offset from Greenwich 07
24 = +12 Hours) Mean Time (GMT) time.
Then enter its respective value.
For example,
Eastern Time (US and Canada) has a
GMT offset of -5.
The program data would then be 7
(0 = - 12,
1 = - 11,
2 = - 10,
3 = - 9,
4 = - 8,
5 = - 7,
Program 6 = - 6,
7 = - 5,
:

10
24 = + 12)
05 NIC Interface 0 = Auto Detect NIC Auto Negotiate 0
1 = 100Mbps, Full Du- (CPU)
plex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Du-
plex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
06 Network Address Port 0 = No (Disable) If using an external NAPT Router or not. 0
Translation (NAPT) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Router Setup (V5.0
Deleted)
07 NAPT Router IP Ad- 0.0.0.0 ~ Set the IP address on the WAN side of 0.0.0.0
dress(Default Gate- 126.255.255.254 router.
way [WAN]) 128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
08 ICMP Redirect 0= NO, Signaling pack- When receiving ICMP redirect message, 0
ets will follow the ICMP this determines if the IP Routing Table up-
redirect message. dates automatically or not.
1= YES, Signaling pack-
ets will NOT follow the
ICMP redirect message.
09 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ Assign the IP Address for the VoIPDB. 172.16.0.10
126.255.255.254 If a VoIPDB is installed in the system it is
128.0.0.1 ~ recommended to set PRG 10-12-01 to
191.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 and all connections to the system
192.0.0.1 ~ will be made through the VoIPDB.
223.255.255.254

2-14 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
10 Subnet Mask 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | Assign the subnet mask for the VoIPDB 255.255.0.0
224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 | card.
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 |
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 | Program
255.255.224.0 |
255.255.240.0 |

10
255.255.248.0 |
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
11 NIC Setup 0 = Auto Detect Set for VoIPDB. 0
1 = 100 Mbps, Full Du-
plex
3 = 10 Mbps, Full Duplex
5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex

Conditions

• The system must be reset for these changes to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-15

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the CPU.

Input Data
10 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 DHCP Server Mode 0 = Disable Enable or disable the use of the built-in 0
1 = Enable DHCP Server. This program cannot be
enabled if PRG10-63-01 is enabled.
02 Lease Time Days 0 ~ 255 Lease Time of the IP address to a cli- 0 day
ent.
Hour 0 ~ 23 0 hour
Pressing the Hold Key increments to
Minutes 0 ~ 59 the next setting data. 30 minutes

05 Last DHCP Data 0 = Disable If 10–13–01 is enabled, this setting de- 1

1 = Enable termines if DHCP resource is enabled
or disabled.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-16 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the Program
DHCP Server leases to a client.

Input Data
10
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related Pro-
No. gram
01 The Range of the IP Minimum : When Maximum has 172.16.0.100 10-13-04
address to Lease. 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 not been entered, the
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 maximum value equals
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254 the minimum value.
Maximum : 172.16.5.254
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-17

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP
server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.

10 Input Data

Client Number 1 ~ 16

Item No. Item Input Data Description Default

01 MAC Address MAC : 00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00 ~
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
IP Address 1.0.0.0 ~ The IP address should be 0.0.0.0
126.255.255.254 assigned out of the scope
128.0.0.1 ~ range set up in Program
191.255255.254 10-14.
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-18 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server to Program
each client.
The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.

Input Data
10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Router Code number 0 ~ 255 Set the Router IP ad- 3 (Fixed)
dress.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
02 DNS Server Code number 0 ~ 255 Set IP address of DNS 6 (Fixed)
Server.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
03 TFTP Server Code number 0 ~ 255 Set the name for the 66 (Fixed)
TFTP Server.
Maximum 64 character strings No setting
05 MGC Code number 0 ~ 255 129 (Fixed)
IP address 172.16.0.10
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
06 Client Host Name Code number 0 ~ 255 Set the Client Host 12 (Fixed)
Name.
Maximum 64 character strings No setting
07 DNS Domain Name Code number 0 ~ 255 Set the DNS Domain 15 (Fixed)
Name.
Maximum 20 character strings No setting
08 Download Protocol Code number 0 ~ 255 Set Download Protocol 43 (Fixed)
used for AutoConfig (for
Sub code number DR700 Series). 163 (Fixed)
1 = FTP 1
2 = HTTP
09 Encryption Information Code number 0 ~ 255 Set an Encryption Infor- 43 (Fixed)
mation used for Auto-
Sub code number Config (for DR700 ser- 164 (Fixed)
Maximum 128 character strings ies). No setting

Programming Manual 2-19

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
10 FTP Server Address Code number 0 ~ 255 Set a FTP Server Ad- 43 (Fixed)
dress used for AutoCon-
Sub code number fig. 141
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
11 Config File Name Code number 0 ~ 255 Set a File Name used for 43 (Fixed)
AutoConfig.
Sub code number 151
Maximum 15 character strings No setting
Program 12 Vender Class ID Code number 0 ~ 255 60 (Fixed)
Maximum 256 character strings NEC DR700

10
13 SNMP Server Code number 0 ~ 255 69 (Fixed)
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
14 POP3 Server Code number 0 ~ 255 70 (Fixed)
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
16 SIP Server (IP Address) Code number 0 ~ 255 120 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
172.16.0.10
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
17 SIP Server (Domain Name) Code number 0 ~ 255 If there is setting in 120 (Fixed)
10-16-16 this setting will
Maximum 20 character strings be ignored No setting

18 FTP Server Code number 0 ~ 255 141 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
19 Config File Name Code number 0 ~ 255 151 (Fixed)
Maximum 15 character strings No setting
20 LDS Server 1 Code number 0 ~ 255 162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
21 LDS Server 2 Code number 0 ~ 255 162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
22 LDS Server 3 Code number 0 ~ 255 162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

2-20 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
23 LDS Server 4 Code number 0 ~ 255 162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
24 Next Server IP Address IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
27 SIP Server Receive Port Code number 0 ~ 255 168 (Fixed)
Port: 1 ~ 65535 5080 Program

Conditions

None
10
Feature Cross Reference
None

Programming Manual 2-21

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-19 : VoIPDB DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each DSP resource
on the VoIPDB unit.

10 Input Data

DSP Resource Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 VoIPDB DSP Re- 0 = Common use for This program is used to assign the 32 re- Resource 1 = 1
source Selection both IP extensions and sources of the VoIPDB. Resource 2 ~ 32
trunks NEC recommends leaving the default set- =0
1 = Use for IP exten- tings as system default.
sions
2 = Use for SIP trunks
3 = User for Networking
(V1.5 Added)
5 = Blocked
6 = Common without
unicast paging
7 = Multicast paging
8 = Unicast paging

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-22 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for Program
communicating to external equipment.

Input Data

Type of External Equipment 1 = CTI Server

10
2 = ACD MIS (V4.0 Added)
4 = Networking System (V1.5 Added)
5 = SMDR Output
6 = DIM Output
9 = 1st Party CTI
11 = O&M Server
12 = Traffic Report Output
13 = Room Data Output for Hotel Service
14 = IP-DECT Directory Access (V3.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 TCP Port 0 ~ 65535 External Device 1 (CTI
Server) = 8181 (V3.0
Changed)
External Device 2
(ACD-MIS) = 4000
(V4.0 Added)
External Device 4 (Net-
working System) =
30000 (V1.5 Added)
External Device 5
(SMDR Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM
Output) = 0
External Device 9 (1st
Party CTI ) = 8282
(V3.0 Changed)
External Device 11
(O&M Server) = 8080
External Device 12
(Traffic Report Output)
=0
External Device 13
(Room Data Output for
Hotel Service) = 0
External Device 14 (IP-
DECT Directory Ac-
cess) = 0 (V3.0 Added)
03 Keep Alive Time 1 ~ 255 seconds 30

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-23

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

10

2-24 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system is Program
interconnected and define the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias
address for SL1100 system interconnection.

Input Data 10
System Number 001 ~ 1000

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 System Interconnection 0 = No (Disable) 0
1 = Yes (Enable)
02 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
03 Call Control Port Read Only: 1720
1 ~ 65535
04 Dial Number Up to 12 digits (0 ~ 9) No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-25

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings. As the
telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the system should automatically adjust
for daylight savings as it applies to the region in which the system is installed.

10 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Daylight Savings 0 = Disable Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability 1
Mode 1 = Enable to adjust the time for daylight savings/
standard time.
02 Time for Daylight Sav- 00:00 ~ 23:59 Enter the time of day when the system 02:00
ings should adjust for daylight savings time.
03 Start of Month (Sum- 1 ~ 12 Enter the month when the system should 3
mer Time) (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.) adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 ~ 12).
04 Start of Week 0 = Last Week of Month Enter the week of the month when the sys- 2
0~5 tem should adjust the time for daylight sav-
ings time. The week will start on the day
listed in 10-24-05.
05 Start of Week Day 1~7 Enter the day of the week when the sys- 1
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.) tem should adjust the time for daylight sav-
ings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday,
etc.).
06 End of Month 1 ~ 12 Enter the month when the system should 11
(Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.) adjust the time for standard time (01 ~ 12).
07 End of Week 0 = Last Week of Month Enter the week of the month when the sys- 1
0~5 tem should adjust the time for standard
time.
The week will start on the Day listed in
10-24-08.
08 End of Week Day 1~7 Enter the day of the week when the sys- 1
(Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.) tem should adjust the time for daylight sav-
ings time (01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday,
etc.).

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Clock/Calendar Display/Time and Date

2-26 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to Peer feature for Program
SIP MLT and SIP IP stations.

Input Data
10
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
02 RTP Forwarding Mode 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
03 SIP Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1
1 = On
By Setting PRG 10-33-05: Enable
this Setting will always be "Off"
(V4.0 Added)
04 DR700 Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1
1 = On

Conditions

• Disabling 10-26-04 results in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls using a DSP resource.
• SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in using a DSP
resource.
• Disabling 10-26-03 results in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls using a DSP resource.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-27

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-27 : IP System ID
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 10-27 : IP System ID to set the IP address of the networked IP systems.

10 Input Data

Network System ID (V4.0 Added) 1~4

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ System ID is related with the System ID in 0.0.0.0
126.255.255.254 the Numbering Plan (Program 11-01-03).
128.0.0.1 ~ When the digits are analyzed and the sys-
191.255.255.254 tem ID is determined from the System data
192.0.0.1 ~ set in the Numbering Plan, the networking
223.255.255.254 call is sent to the IP Address set in this
Program.
The IP Address should be the IP Address
of the peer CPU (Program 10-12-09).
02 Call Procedure Port 1 ~ 65535 The Port Number should be set with the 1730
same value as the H.225 setup port in Pro-
gram 84-02-33.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-28 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking. Program

Input Data

Profile
(V5.0 Added)
1~2
10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters Set the domain name of the SIP-URL. No Setting
(ex. : UserID@Host-
Name.DomainName)
02 Host Name Up to 48 Characters Set the host name of the SIP-URL. No Setting
(ex. : UserID@Host-
Name.DomainName)
03 Transport Protocol 0 = UDP Set the protocol for the connection. 0
1 = TCP
04 UserID (V5.0 Deleted) Up to 32 Characters User ID in the SIP Invite Setup message. No Setting
When assigning the Use it for outbound caller ID information if
User ID, the ID may con- no information is assigned in commands
tain only alpha charac- 21-17, 21-19, 15-16, 14-12 and 10-36. A
ters. (A space and/or call cannot be completed across the span
special characters are if there is no outbound CID info. The rea-
not allowed in the User son for this is: the from and display portion
ID field). of the invite message would be blank, and
(ex. : UserID@Host- it would not know where the call originated
Name.DomainName) from.
05 Domain Assignment 0 = IP Address If the information from Telco was a domain 0
1 = Domain Name name ([email protected]) then set to do-
main. If the information for Telco was a IP
address then set to IP Address.
06 IP Trunk Port Binding 0 = Disable Trunk port binding is only used for SIP 0
1 = Enable trunks to the provider in Non-Registration
Mode only. When this is disabled, an in-
bound call comes in and follows your DID
routing but it comes in on the first available
trunk. When enabled, the inbound call
comes in and follows your normal DID
routing but maps to that specified trunk. If
that trunk is busy, it sends back a busy un-
less you build a hunt group. To build the
hunt group, it references command
14-12-02 (pilot register ID). This then
points you to command 10-36-02. All the
numbers with the same pilot are in the
same hunt group.

Programming Manual 2-29

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

10

2-30 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup for outbound/ Program
inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode.
If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or not used,
the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if 10-29-01 is set to 0 (off),
the system still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs. 10
Input Data

Profile 1~2
(V5.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Default Proxy (Out- 0 = Off This sets whether the SIP message is al- 0
bound) 1 = On ways sent through the Default Proxy.
02 Default Proxy (In- 0 = Off Need to be registered in registration mode. 0
bound) 1 = On This sets whether the SIP message is al-
ways received through the Default Proxy.
03 Default Proxy IP Ad- 0.0.0.0 ~ This is optional and used if the provider 0.0.0.0
dress 126.255.255.254 gives you a proxy address that is different
128.0.0.1 ~ than the registration address. If the provid-
191.255.255.254 er is using domain names instead of IP ad-
192.0.0.1 ~ dresses, leave this at default.
223.255.255.254
04 Default Proxy Port 0 ~ 65535 The port number of the Default Proxy is 5060
Number set.
05 Registrar Mode 0 = None The mode registered in the registration 0
1 = Manual server is set.
06 Registrar IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ IP address of the SIP registration server is 0.0.0.0
126.255.255.254 set.
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
07 Registrar Port Num- 0 ~ 65535 The port number of the SIP registration 5060
ber server is set.
08 DNS Server Mode 0 = Off This setting determines if the DNS server 0
1 = On is used.
(Use Profile 1 Only)
(V5.0 Added)

Programming Manual 2-31

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
09 DNS Server IP Ad- 0.0.0.0 ~ If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets 0.0.0.0
dress 126.255.255.254 the IP address of the DNS server.
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
(Use Profile 1 Only)
(V5.0 Added)
10 DNS Port Number 0 ~ 65535 If 10-29-08 is 1, this is effective. This sets 53
(Use Profile 1 Only) the port number of the DNS server.
(V5.0 Added)

Program 11 Registrar Domain Up to 128 Characters This sets the domain name of the registra- No Setting
Name tion server.
12 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters This specifies the domain name of the SIP No Setting

10
server.
13 Proxy Host Name Up to 48 Characters This specifies the host name of the SIP No Setting
(SIP Profile:1-2) server.
14 SIP Carrier Choice 0 ~ 26 This selects the carrier type of the SIP 0
(V1.5 Changed) 1 = Carrier A server.
2 = Carrier B When Carrier A, B, or C is selected in
: PRG10-29-14, PRG10-29-16 Register Sub
7 = Carrier G Mode is set "On" automatically.
8 = Carrier H
:
26 = Carrier Z
15 Registration Expiry 120 ~ 65535 seconds This sets the expiration time when the SIP 3600
(Expire) Time trunk registers to the Sip server. When half
the time set here passes, the registration
update is automatically done.
16 Register Sub Mode 0 = Off (Allow invalid In- Prevents an invalid Invite message. If the 0
vite message) "register information that system send to
1 = On (Deny invalid In- SIP server" and the "Invite information that
vite message) system receive" are different, system
sends "404 Not Found" message. If
PRG10-29-05 Register Mode is 0; Off, it is
necessary to set 0; Off in PRG10-29-16.
17 DNS Source Port 0 ~ 65535 (10-29-08 must be On) 53
(Use Profile 1 Only) This sets the DNS source port number.
(V5.0 Added)
20 Authentication Trial 0~9 This is how many times it will try an au- 1
(V5.0 Added) thenticate before timing out and not regis-
tering.
21 Network Address Port 0 = No (Disable) If using an external NAPT Router or not. 0
Translation (NAPT) 1 = Yes (Enable)
Router Setup (V5.0
Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-32 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup (Not Used)
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.5 or lower)

Description Program
Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the authentication options for SIP
trunks.

Input Data
10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
02 User Name (V5.0 De- Up to 64 Characters This sets the user name of the SIP trunk. No Setting
leted)
03 Password (V5.0 De- Up to 32 Characters This sets the SIP trunk password. No Setting
leted)
04 Authentication Trial 0~9 This is how many times it will try an au- 1
(V5.0 Deleted) thenticate before timing out and not regis-
tering.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-33

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 10-31 : Network Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry count of the AspireNet
networking keep alive message. The keep alive is used for ISDN and IP networking.

10 The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination system, if the response is
not received the retry count will start. If a response is not received within the number of retries, the
networking link will be taken out of service.

When the link is taken out of service:

• Any calls that are in progress will be released.
• Park Hold orbits will be released.
• No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active.

The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is received.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Keep Alive Interval 0 ~ 65535 seconds This program is used to set the interval of 0
the Keep Alive timer.
The system does not send Keep Alive
when this item is set to 0.
02 Keep Alive Retry Tim- 1 ~ 255 Set how many times the system resends 5
er Keep Alive.

Conditions

• The Keep Alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count, for the link
to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold ordits to be released.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-34 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the registrar/proxy Program
options for SIP extensions.

Input Data
10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Registration Expire 60 ~ 65535 After this time expires, the UA’s are forced 3600
Time to reregister with the CPU. This allows the
CPU to keep a current location of the en-
tire end UA’s.
02 Authentication Mode 0 = Disable Check here if a password is desired for the 0
1 = Enable IP SIP phones to register. When checked,
15-05-16 must have a password entered
and also the SIP phone must have the
same password. When using Authentica-
tion, the station number is the authoriza-
tion name.
03 Registrar/Proxy Do- Up to 64 Characters Set the domain name of the SIP proxy. No Setting
main Name
04 Registrar/Proxy Host Up to 48 Characters Set the domain name of the SIP proxy. No Setting
Name
05 NAT Mode (V4.0 Add- 0 = Disable Enable this Mode if the System controls 0
ed) 1 = Enable the SIP Phone by the NAT router.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-35

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP trunk registration
information.

10 Input Data

Profile 1~2
(V5.0 Added)

Register ID 0 ~ 31 (V5.0 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Registration 0 = Disable This setting determines if the SIP trunk in- 0
1 = Enable formation is registered.
02 User ID Up to 32 Characters User ID in the SIP Invite Setup message. No Setting
When assigning the Use it for outbound caller ID information if
User ID, the ID may con- no information is assigned in commands
tain only alpha charac- 21-17, 21-19, 15-16, 14-12 and 10-36. A
ters. (A space and/or call cannot be completed across the span
special characters are if there is no outbound CID info. The rea-
not allowed in the User son for this is: the from and display portion
ID field). (V5.0 Added) of the invite message would be blank, and
(ex. : UserID@Host- it would not know where the call originated
Name.DomainName) from. (V5.0 Changed)
(V5.0 Added)
03 Authentication User Up to 64 Characters This sets the user name of the SIP trunk. No Setting
ID (V5.0 Changed)
04 Authentication Pass- Up to 32 Characters This sets the SIP trunk password. (V5.0 No Setting
word Changed)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-36 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options for SIP trunks. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default
10
01 UPnP Mode 0 = Disable If the system controls the SIP phone 0
1 = Enable through the NAT Router this program
should be 1: Enable. (V4.0 Added)
Router must support UPnP.

02 Retry Time 0, 60 ~ 3600 Set interval time to re-check the Router for 60
(1 ~ 59 cannot be input) the WAN IP address.
When this set as 0 it will not retry.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-37

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use fractional T1 or PRI.

Input Data
10 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 Fractional 0 = Disable (when disa- This program is used to enable/disable the 0

bled the system will as- system's ability to use a fractional PRI or
sign the PRI as a full PRI T1.
trunks.)
1 = Enable (when ena-
bled the system will not
assign any trunks to the
PRI, the trunks must be
manually configured.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-38 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP trunks and Program
assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled.

Input Data

Slot Number 0
10
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 IP Trunk Availability 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
02 Number of Ports 0 ~ 32 (Port) 0
(0 = None)
SIP trunks are assigned in increments of two.
Please note that if odd port number is set it will
use 1 extra port. (V2.0 Changed)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-39

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual Loop Back Port.

Input Data
10 Item
No.
Item Input Data Default

01 Number of Loop Back Ports 0 ~ 30 (0 = No Setting) 0

02 Logical Trunk Port Number Read Only: 0
1 ~ 84
03 Logical Station Port Number Read Only: 0
1 ~ 84
04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1
05 Calling Party Number 0 = No 1
1 = Yes
06 S-point DDI digits 0~4 0
07 Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = Alerting Message 0
1 = Disconnect Message

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-40 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table. Program

Input Data

Routing Table Number 001 ~ 100

10
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Network Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
128.0.0.0 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254
02 Subnet Mask 128.0.0.0 | 192.0.0.0 | 224.0.0.0 | 240.0.0.0 | 0.0.0.0
248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 | 254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0 |
255.128.0.0 | 255.192.0.0 | 255.224.0.0 |
255.240.0.0 | 255.248.0.0 | 255.252.0.0 |
255.254.0.0 | 255.255.0.0 | 255.255.128.0 |
255.255.192.0 | 255.255.224.0 | 255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0 | 255.255.252.0 | 255.255.254.0 |
255.255.255.0 | 255.255.255.128 |
255.255.255.192 | 255.255.255.224 |
255.255.255.240 | 255.255.255.248 |
255.255.255.252 | 255.255.255.254 |
255.255.255.255 |
03 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-41

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-46 : DR700 Server Information Setup to set up the information of DR700 Server.

Input Data
10 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
01 Register Mode 0 = Plug and Play Plug and Play: 0
1 = Auto When the phone boots up, it reports
2 = Manual the ext. assigned in the phone or
chooses the next available exten-
sion in the system. Password is not
required.
Auto:
If set to Auto, the SIP user name
and password must be entered on
the actual IP phone. These settings
must match 84-22/15-05-27, or the
phone does not come on-line.
Manual:
When the phone boots up, it
prompts user to enter a user ID and
password before logging in. It
checks this user ID/password
against 84-22/15-05-27. If there is
no match, the phone does not come
online.
04 Server Name Up to 32 characters Assign the Server name to be used sipphd
in the SIP URL.
06 Register Port 0 ~ 65535 Assign the port number in which the 5080
SIP messages are sent to on the
VoIPDB.
This same port number must be as-
signed in the SIP Multiline terminals.
If this command is changed, it re-
quires a CPU reset.
07 Encryption Mode 0 = Off 0
1 = On
08 Encryption Type Read Only: 0
0 = Mode 1
09 One Time Pass- Up to 10 characters (0 No Setting 10-46-07
word ~ 9, *, #)
10 Start Port 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 1 10-46-01
Changed)
11 Multicast IP Ad- 224.0.0.0 ~ This sets the Multicast IP address 224.0.0.10
dress 239.255.255.255 so that two or more main devices
don’t overlap on the same network,
or if Multicast is used by other IP
services.
12 Multicast Port 0 ~ 65535 30000

2-42 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
13 Subscribe Ses- 0 ~ 65535 5081
sion Port
14 NAT Mode 0 = Off When the system controls the SIP 0
1 = On multiline terminal via the NAT router,
this system data is set to On.

Conditions

None
Program

Feature Cross Reference

None
10

Programming Manual 2-43

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the information of
Terminal License Server.

10 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Register Port of TCP 0 ~ 65535 This set the register port number of TCP 6080
I/F I/F.
02 TCP Keep Alive Time 1~255 seconds This set the TCP keep alive time. 5

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-44 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-48 : License Activation
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the license server. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
10
01 Software Key Code 20-digit character No Setting
02 Activation Code 8-digit hexadecimal number No Setting
03 Feature Code 7-digit number No Setting

Conditions

The Key Operation for input item 03 is as follows;

Hold Key Edit next feature code

• Up to 10 feature code is possible to input at once.
• Register the license when 10th feature code is edited.
Soft Key2 (Back) Edit previous feature code
Soft Key3 (Submit) Register the license

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-45

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-49 : License File Activation
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the license file via CF
Card which is issued from the license server.

10 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Save License File on CF Card Dial 1 + Hold (Press Hold to cancel.) -

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-46 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-50 : License Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is stored in a system. Program

Input Data

Feature Code Number 000 ~ 9999

10
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 License Name Read Only: -
Character
02 License Quantity Read Only: -
0 ~ 32767
03 Campaign License Quantity Read Only: -
0 ~ 32767
04 Campaign License Remaining Read Only: -
Days 0 ~ 9999

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-47

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of PRI
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of PRI to select whether the unit works as PRI or T1.

Input Data
10 Slot Number 01 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 PRI/T1 Selection 0 = PRI Chose whether the unit works as PRI or 0 = PRI
1 = T1 T1.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-48 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free of charge/Demo Program
license.

Input Data
10
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Remaining days of Free/Demo Li- Read Only: -
cense 0 ~ 9999

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-49

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package to set the license information for
each unit.

10 Input Data

Slot Number 0 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

License Index Number 1 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 License Code 0000 ~ 9999 No Setting
02 License Quantity 0 ~ 255 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-50 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-58 : Network Address
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 10-58 : Network Address to set the local network address when the SIP Terminal
(V4.0 or higher) terminal connects the system via a local router.

Input Data
10
Area Table 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Network Address 0.0.0.0 ~ Sets local network address. 0.0.0.0 10-46-14
126.255.255.254 | If the system uses both the Intranet
128.0.0.1 and NAT router please input the IP
~191.255.255.254 | Network address of the terminal
192.0.0.1 ~ connected to the Internet. (V4.0
223.255.255.254 Added)
02 Subnet Mask 248.0.0.0 | 252.0.0.0 | Sets local subnet mask. 0.0.0.0 10-46-14
254.0.0.0 | 255.0.0.0
255.128.0.0 |
255.192.0.0 |
255.224.0.0
255.240.0.0 |
255.248.0.0 |
255.252.0.0
255.254.0.0 |
255.255.0.0 |
255.255.128.0
255.255.192.0 |
255.255.224.0
255.255.240.0 |
255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 |
255.255.254.0
255.255.255.0 |
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192 |
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 |
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252 |
255.255.255.254

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-51

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

10

2-52 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-60 : Audio Port Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-60 : Audio Port Setup to defines which audio port on the 084M packages are used Program
for BGM/External MOH.

Input Data

Audio Port Number 1 = BGM

10
2 = External MOH

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Slot No. 0 = Not Used Select which audio port on the 084M pack- Audio Port1
1 = 1st KSU ages are used for BGM/External MOH. (BGM) : 0 (V1.5
4 = 2nd KSU Audio Port Number 1 = BGM Changed)
7 = 3rd KSU Audio Port Number 2 = External MOH Audio Port2 (Ex-
ternal MOH) : 1
(V1.5 Changed)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-53

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-61 : Relay Port Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-61 : Relay Port Setup to defines the relay port type on the 084M.

Input Data
10 Relay Port No. 1~6

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Relay Type 0 = No Setting 0
1 = External MOH
2 = BGM resource
3 = External Speaker
4 = Door Phone
02 Destination Selection 10-61-01 = 1 or 2 : Not Use 0 (Not Used)
10-61-01 = 3 : 1 ~ 3 External Speaker Message
No.
10-61-01 = 4 : 1 ~ 6 Door Phone No.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-54 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-62 : NetBIOS Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-62 : NetBIOS Setting to set the data of NetBIOS. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default
10
01 NetBIOS Mode 0 = Disabled 1
1 = Enabled
02 NetBIOS Name Maximum 15 characters Please avoid using Space between the SL1100
words. Also when you create name
please use all upper letters.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-55

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-63 : DHCP Client Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 10-63 : DHCP Client Setting to set the data of DHCP Client.

Input Data
10 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 DHCP Client Mode 0 = Disabled If you are using IP phones/trunks it is rec- 1

1 = Enabled ommended to not use the DHCP client
function, a static IP address would be pre-
ferred. If you are going to still use the
DHCP client function then the DHCP serv-
er should be setup so that the same IP ad-
dress is always provided to the system.
When changing this program a system
reset is required.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-56 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-65 : NTP Server Setting
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 10-65 : NTP Server Setting to set the NTP Server.

Input Data 10
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 NTP Server 0 = Disable (Stop) Set 1 when you want to start the NTP 0 (Stop)
1 = Enable (Start) Server.
02 NTP Server Port 1 ~ 65535 Set the receiving port of NTP Server. 123

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-57

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-01 : System Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The numbering plan
assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access
other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan

11
does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.

Caution!
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand
the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the chart for
Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-59 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup copy of your system data.

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:

Step 1 : Enter the digit (s) you want to change

You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the Table 2-1 System
Numbering Default Settings on page 2-59, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The
remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes.
• Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example,
entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step
3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2
the entries affected are 600 ~ 699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected are 6000 ~
6999.)
• Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example,
entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program,
only * and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code
between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range
as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are
undefined.
Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (Program 11-20) to define the
codes.

Step 2 : Specify the length of the code you want to change

After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the
code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-1 System Numbering Default
Settings on page 2-59.

Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected

After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type
column in the Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-59. The choices are:

Dial Types Dial Type Descrip- Related Program Note

tion
0 --- Not Used ---

2-58 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Dial Types Dial Type Descrip- Related Program Note

tion
1 Service Code 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) on
page 2-70
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) on
page 2-73
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) on page 2-77
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) on page 2-83
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
on page 2-85
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup on page 2-87
2 Extension Number 11-02 : Extension Numbering on page 2-65
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering on page 2-66
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers on page 2-67
Program
3 Trunk Access Code 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
4 Special Trunk Access 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code
5
6
Operator Access
F-Route Access
20-17 : Operator Extension on page 2-198
44-xx 11
8 Networking Access (V1.5 Added)
(Network ID : 0 ~ 4)
9 Dial Extension Ana- 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table on page 2-90
lyze

Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates.
Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100 ~ 399. To make extension numbers
correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on each floor
from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10 ~ 11-16.)

Default

See the following tables for default settings.

Table 2-1 System Numbering Default Settings

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type
Default New Default New
1X 3 2
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 0 0
16 0 0
17 0 0
18 0 0
19 0 0
10 0 0
1* 0 0
1# 0 0

Programming Manual 2-59

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type
Default New Default New
2X 3 2
21 0 0
22 0 0
23 0 0
24 0 0
Program 25 0 0
26 0 0

11
27 0 0
28 0 0
29 0 0
20 0 0
2* 0 0
2# 0 0

3X 4 2
31 0 0
32 0 0
33 0 0
34 0 0
35 0 0
36 0 0
37 0 0
38 0 0
39 0 0
30 0 0
3* 0 0
3# 0 0

4X 3 1
41 0 0
42 0 0
43 0 0
44 0 0
45 0 0
46 0 0
47 0 0
48 0 0
49 0 0
40 0 0
4* 0 0

2-60 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type
Default New Default New
4# 0 0

5X 3 1
51 0 0
52 0 0
53 0 0 Program
54 0 0

11
55 0 0
56 0 0
57 0 0
58 0 0
59 0 0
50 0 0
5* 0 0
5# 0 0

6X 3 1
61 0 0
62 0 0
63 0 0
64 0 0
65 0 0
66 0 0
67 0 0
68 0 0
69 0 0
60 0 0
6* 0 0
6# 0 0

7X 3 1
71 0 0
72 0 0
73 0 0
74 0 0
75 0 0
76 0 0
77 0 0
78 0 0
79 0 0

Programming Manual 2-61

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type
Default New Default New
70 0 0
7* 0 0
7# 0 0

8X 1 1
Program 81 0 0
82 0 0

11
83 0 0
84 0 0
85 0 0
86 0 0
87 0 0
88 0 0
89 0 0
80 0 0
8* 0 0
8# 0 0

9X 1 3
91 0 0
92 0 0
93 0 0
94 0 0
95 0 0
96 0 0
97 0 0
98 0 0
99 0 0
90 0 0
9* 0 0
9# 0 0

0X 1 5
01 0 0
02 0 0
03 0 0
04 0 0
05 0 0
06 0 0
07 0 0

2-62 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Dial Types : 1 = Service Code, 2 = Extension Number, 3 = Trunk Access, 4 = Special Trunk Access, 5 =
Operator Access, 6 = Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking Access (V1.5 Added), 9 = Dial Extension Analyze,
0 = Not Used
Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type
Default New Default New
08 0 0
09 0 0
00 0 0
0* 0 0
0# 0 0
Program

*X 2 1

*1
11
0 0

*2 0 0

*3 0 0

*4 0 0

*5 0 0

*6 0 0

*7 0 0

*8 0 0

*9 0 0

*0 0 0

** 0 0

*# 0 0

#X 0 0
#1 2 1
#2 2 1
#3 2 1
#4 2 1
#5 2 1
#6 2 1
#7 2 1
#8 2 1
#9 2 1
#0 2 1
#* 4 1
## 2 1

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-63

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

• Flexible System Numbering

Program

11

2-64 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can Program
have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01
or Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a new location (port) and retain the same

11
extension number.

Input Data

Extension Port Number 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Extension Number Dial (Up to 8 digits) Set up extension numbers for multiline tel- Extension Port
ephones, single line telephones and IP tel- Number : Exten-
ephones. sion Number
001 ~ 112 : 101
Extension number assignments cannot ~ 212 (V3.5
be duplicated in Programs 11-02, and Changed)
11-07. 113 ~ 128 : No
Setting (V3.5
Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling
• Flexible System Numbering
• Intercom

Programming Manual 2-65

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The
extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit (s) of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.

11 Input Data

Virtual Extension Numbers 001 ~ 050

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Extension Number Dial (Up to 8 digits) Set up Virtual Extension numbers. Virtual Port Num-
ber : Extension
The extension number cannot be dupli- Number
cated in Programs 11-02 and 11-07. 1 ~ 50 : 250 ~
299 (V3.5
Changed)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Flexible System Numbering

2-66 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign a pilot number to each Program
Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department
Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have up to eight digits. The first and

11
second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.

Input Data

Department (Extension) Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Extension Group Dial (Up to 8 digits) Use this program to assign depart- Extension Group • 16-01 :
Pilot Number ment group pilot numbers. No. 1-31 : Depart-
The number set up by Program 3101-3131 ment
11-02 (Extension Numbering) can- （V3.5 (Exten-
not be used. Changed) sion)
The extension number cannot be Group
duplicated in Programs 11-02 and Basic
11-07. Data
Setup
• 16-02 :
Depart-
ment
Group
Assign-
ment for
Exten-
sions
• 16-03 :
Secon-
dary De-
part-
ment
Group

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling
• Department Step Calling

Programming Manual 2-67

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code. The trunk access code
can be set from 1 ~ 4 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is the code
extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). The Individual Trunk

11
Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.

Caution!
The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type ( ) with the Number of Digits Required set to ( ). If you change the
trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Access Dial (Up to four digits) Use this program to assign the trunk 9 • 11-01 :
Code access code. This is the code exten- System
sion users dial to access Automatic Num-
Route Selection (ARS/F-Route). bering
• 14-01 ~
07 : Ba-
sic
Trunk
Data
Setup
• 14-05 :
Trunk
Group
• 14-06 :
Trunk
Group
Routing
• 21-02 :
Trunk
Group
Routing
for Ex-
tensions

2-68 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
02 2nd Trunk Route Dial (Up to four digits) Use this program to define addition- No Setting • 11-01 :
Access Code al trunk access codes. System
When a user dials the Alternate Num-
Trunk Route Access Code, the sys- bering
tem routes their call to the Alternate • 14-01 ~
Trunk Route. 07: Ba-
sic
Trunk
Data
Setup
• 14-05 :
Trunk
Group
• 14-06 : Program
Trunk
Group

11
Routing
• 21-02 :
Trunk
Group
Routing
for Ex-
tensions
• 21-15 :
Individu-
al Trunk
Group
Routing
for Ex-
tensions

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)
• Central Office Calls, Placing
• Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual 2-69

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service
Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11 ~
11-16. The following chart shows:

11
• The number of each code (01 ~ 50).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, dialing item 26 allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Night Mode 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 718 12-xx
Switching 8 digit 20-07-01
03 Setting the Sys- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 728
tem Time 8 digit
04 Storing Common 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 753
Speed Dialing 8 digit
Numbers
05 Storing Group 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 754
Speed Dialing 8 digit
Numbers
06 Setting the Auto- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 733 24-04-01
matic Transfer 8 digit
for Each Trunk
Line
07 Canceling the 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 734 24-04-01
Automatic Trans- 8 digit
fer for Each
Trunk Line
08 Setting the Desti- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 735 24-04-01
nation for Auto- 8 digit
matic Trunk
Transfer
09 Charging Cost 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting
Display by the 8 digit
Supervisor
11 Entry Credit for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting
Toll Restriction 8 digit
12 Night Mode 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 618 12-xx
Switching for 8 digit 20-07-01
Other Group

2-70 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
16 Leaving Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 626 11-11-09
Waiting (Re- 8 digit
quires CPU to be
licensed for Ho-
tel/Motel)
17 Dial Block by Su- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 601 90-19
pervisor 8 digit
18 Off-Premise Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 722 13-05
Forward by Door 8 digit
Box
20 VRS - Record/ 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 616 20-07-13
Erase Message 8 digit Define Service Code for VRS mes- Program
sage recording or erasing.
21 VRS - General 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 611 20-07-14

22
Message Play-
back
VRS - Record or
8 digit

0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 612 20-07-15

11
Erase General 8 digit
Message
23 SMDR - Exten- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 621 20-07-18
sion Accumula- 8 digit
ted Printout
Code
24 SMDR - Group 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 622 20-07-19
Accumulated 8 digit
Printout Code
25 Account Code 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 623 20-07-20
Accumulated 8 digit
Printout Code
26 Forced Trunk 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT No Setting 20-07-11
Disconnect 8 digit
27 Trunk Port Disa- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 645 20-07-12
ble for Outgoing 8 digit
Calls
32 Set Private Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 646 14-01-27
Refuse 8 digit 20-07-24
33 Entry Caller ID 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 647 20-07-25
Refuse 8 digit
34 Set Caller ID Re- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 748 14-01-27
fuse 8 digit 20-07-25
35 Dial-In Mode 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 609 20-07-26
Switching 8 digit
41 Date Setting 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 789 20-07-30
8 digit
42 Maintenance 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 643
Service 8 digit
43 VRS Incoming 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 778 13-04
8 digit 15-02-55
44 Cutting the tele- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Sets the Service Code for power 731
phone power 8 digit cutting. (for Administrator)
45 Room Monitor 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 610
Permit 8 digit Sets Service Code (SC) for Room
monitor on/off to terminal.
SC+1+Extension Number ; Room
Monitor enable
SC+0+Extension Number ; Room
Monitor disable

Programming Manual 2-71

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
46 Watch Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 614
Setting 8 digit Service Code setting for Watching
message recording to VRS.
47 Warning Mes- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 615
sage Setting 8 digit Service Code setting for Warning
message recording to VRS.
48 Auto Dial Setting 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 617
for Security Sen- 8 digit Service Code setting for destination
sor number when Warning mode detec-
ted.
49 Auto Dial Setting 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 619
Program for Remote In- 8 digit Service Code setting for destination
spection number when remote inspection de-
tects no answer.

11 50 Night-mode Skip
(Own Group)
0~9, *, # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT, SLT 787

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-72 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service Program
Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.

The following chart shows:

• The number of each code (01 ~ 73 (V1.5 or higher)). 11
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, users to turn on or turn off Background Music by dialing the number
set at item 18.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Call Forward - All 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 741
8 digit
02 Call Forward - 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 742
Busy 8 digit
03 Call Forward - No 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 743
Answer 8 digit
04 Call Forward - 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 744
Busy/No Answer 8 digit
05 Call Forward - 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 745
Both Ring 8 digit
07 Call Forwarding - 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 746
Follow-Me 8 digit
08 Do Not Disturb 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 747
8 digit
09 Answer Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT *0 11-10-16
Waiting 8 digit
10 Cancel All Mes- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 773
sages Waiting 8 digit
11 Cancel Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 771
Waiting 8 digit
12 Alarm Clock 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 727 20-01-06
8 digit
13 Display Lan- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 678 15-02
guage Selection 8 digit
for Multiline Ter-
minal
14 Text Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting
Setting 8 digit

Programming Manual 2-73

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
15 Enable Hands- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 721 20-09-05
free Incoming In- 8 digit 20-02-12
tercom Calls
16 Force Ringing of 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 723 20-09-05
Incoming Inter- 8 digit 20-02-12
com Calls
17 Programmable 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 751 15-07
Function Key 8 digit 11-11-38
Programming (3-
Digit Service Co-
des)
Program 18 BGM On/Off 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting (V1.5
8 digit Changed)
19 Key Touch Tone 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 724

11 20
On/Off
Change Incom-
ing CO and ICM
8 digit
0~9, *, # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT 720 15-02

Ring Tones
21 Check Incoming 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 711
Ring Tones 8 digit
22 Extension Name 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 700 15-01
Programming 8 digit
23 Second Call for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 679
DID/DISA/DIL 8 digit
24 Change Station 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 677 20-13-28
Class of Service 8 digit Allows an extension user to change
the COS of another extension. Must
be allowed in Program 20-13-28.
25 Automatic Trans- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 602 20-11-17
fer Setup for 8 digit 24-05
Each Extension
Group
26 Automatic Trans- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 603
fer Cancellation 8 digit
for Each Exten-
sion Group
27 Destination of 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 604 20-11-17
Automatic Trans- 8 digit 24-05
fer Each Exten-
sion Group
28 Delayed Transfer 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 605 20-11-17
for Every Exten- 8 digit 24-05
sion Group 24-02-08
29 Delayed Transfer 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 606 20-11-17
Cancellation for 8 digit
Each Extension
Group
30 DND Setup for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 607
Each Extension 8 digit
Group
31 DND Cancella- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 608
tion for Each Ex- 8 digit
tension Group
33 Dial Block 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 600
8 digit
34 Temporary Toll 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 775 21-07
Restriction Over- 8 digit
ride

2-74 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
35 Pilot Group With- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 650
drawing 8 digit
36 Toll Restriction 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 663 21-14
Override 8 digit
37 Ring Volume Set 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 729
8 digit
38 Programmable 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 752 15-07
Function Key 8 digit 11-11-17
Programming (2-
Digit Service Co-
des)
Program
39 Station Speed Di- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 755
al Number Entry 8 digit

11
41 Tandem Ringing 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT No Setting 15-07
8 digit 30-03
42 Transfer Dial Set- 0~9, *, # Maximum of - 689 13-06
ting for Out of 8 digit
Range
43 Headset Mode 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 688
Switching 8 digit
45 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 682 24-09
Forward All 8 digit
(Split)
46 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 683 24-09
Forward Busy 8 digit
(Split)
47 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 684 24-09
Forward No An- 8 digit
swer (Split)
48 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 685 24-09
Forward Busy No 8 digit
Answer (Split)
49 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 686 24-09
Forward Both 8 digit
Ring (Split)
50 Set Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT No Setting
Waiting Indica- 8 digit
tion
51 Cancel Message 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT No Setting
Waiting Indica- 8 digit
tion
52 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 790 24-09
Forward All Des- 8 digit
tination (No
Split)
53 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 791 24-09
Forward Busy 8 digit
Destination (No
Split)
54 Set/Cancel Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 792 24-09
Forward No An- 8 digit
swer Destination
(No Split)
55 Call Forward 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 793 24-09
Busy No Answer 8 digit
Destination (No
Split)

Programming Manual 2-75

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
58 Call Forward 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 713
with Personal 8 digit
Greeting
59 Call Forward to 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 696 15-01-08
Attendant except 8 digit
Busy
60 Call Forward to 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 697 15-01-09
Attendant/No An- 8 digit
swer
62 Adjust of Head- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting 11-11-37
set Ring Volume 8 digit 15-02-12
Program 15-02-41
15-02-42
65 Headset Mode 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting

11 68
Switching
IntraMail Lan-
guage Selection
8 digit
0~9, *, # Maximum of
8 digit
Terminal: MLT,SLT 664 47-02-16

for own exten-

sion
69 IntraMail Lan- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT,SLT 665 20-13-53
guage Selection 8 digit 47-02-16
for specific ex-
tension
70 Backlight Bright- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 705 15-02-61 ~
ness 8 digit 15-02-63
71 Auto Backlight 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 706 15-02-64
8 digit 15-02-65
72 Headset V.An- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 714
nounce 8 digit
73 Select Incoming 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 761 15-28-01
Ring Tones at 8 digit
trunk (V1.5 Add-
ed)

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-76 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes Program
which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10,
11-11, and 11-14 through 11-16.

The following chart shows:

• The number of each code (01 ~ 64). 11
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, dialing (Item 05) cancels a previously set Camp- On.
• Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Bypass Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 707
8 digit Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Override. This code is avail-
able only if you disable the voice
mail Single Digit dialing code in Pro-
gram 11-16-09.
02 Conference 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #1
8 digit
03 Override (Off- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 709
Hook Signaling) 8 digit
04 Set Camp-On 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 750
8 digit
05 Cancel Camp-On 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 770
8 digit
06 Switching of 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 712
Voice Call and 8 digit
Signal Call
07 Step Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 708
8 digit
08 Barge-In 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 710
8 digit
09 Change to STG 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT No Setting 16-02
(Department 8 digit
Group) All Ring
10 Station Speed Di- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Assign the service code used for ac- #2
aling 8 digit cessing common speed dialing (sys-
tem speed dialing) bins.
The service code assigned must be
within your valid numbering plan in
PRG.

Programming Manual 2-77

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
11 Group Speed Di- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #4
aling 8 digit
12 Last Number Dial 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #5
8 digit
13 Saved Number 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 715
Dial 8 digit
14 Trunk Group Ac- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 704
cess 8 digit
15 Specified Trunk 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #9
Access 8 digit
Program
16 Trunk Access via 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 726
Networking (V1.5 8 digit
Added)

11 17

18
Clear Last Num-
ber Dialing Data
Clear Saved
0~9, *, # Maximum of
8 digit
0~9, *, # Maximum of
Terminal: MLT, SLT

Terminal: MLT, SLT

776

785
Number Dialing 8 digit
Data
19 Internal Group 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 701 31-01-01
Paging 8 digit
20 External Paging 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 703
8 digit
21 Meet-Me Answer 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 764 31-02-01
to Specified In- 8 digit
ternal Paging
Group
22 Meet-Me Answer 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 765
to External Pag- 8 digit
ing
23 Meet-Me Answer 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 763 31-02-01
in Same Paging 8 digit
Group
24 Combined Pag- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT *1 31-02-01
ing 8 digit 31-07
25 Direct Call Pick- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 756
up - Own Group 8 digit
26 Call Pickup for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 768 23-02
Specified Group 8 digit
27 Call Pickup 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT *# 23-02
8 digit
28 Call Pickup for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 769 23-02
Another Group 8 digit
29 Direct Extension 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT **
Call Pickup 8 digit Customize the Service Codes for di-
rect extension call pickup.
30 Specified Trunk 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 672
Answer 8 digit
31 Park Hold 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #6 24-03
8 digit
32 Answer for Park 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT *6 24-03
Hold 8 digit
33 Group Hold 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 732
8 digit
34 Answer for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 762
Group Hold 8 digit

2-78 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
35 Station Park 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 757
Hold 8 digit
36 Door Box Access 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 702
8 digit
37 Common Cancel- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT *9
ing Service Code 8 digit
38 General Purpose 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 783 15-07-56
Indication 8 digit 15-07-57
40 Station Speed Di- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #7
aling 8 digit
Program
41 Voice Over 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 690 11-16-08
8 digit

11
42 Flash on Trunk 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT #3
lines 8 digit
43 Answer No-Ring 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #0 14-05
Line (Universal 8 digit 14-06
Answer)
44 Callback Test for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT 799
SLT 8 digit
45 Enabled On 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT 749 15-03-07
Hook When 8 digit
Holding (SLT)
46 Answer On Hook 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT 759 15-03-08
When Holding 8 digit
(SLT)
47 Call Waiting An- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT 794 11-12-03
swer/Split An- 8 digit Splitting (switching) between calls
swer
48 Account Code 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT ##
8 digit
51 VM Access 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT *8
8 digit
53 Live Recording 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 654
at SLT 8 digit
54 VRS Routing for 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 782
ANI/DNIS 8 digit Use when setting up ANI/DNIS
Routing to the VRS Automated At-
tendant. Using the Transfer feature,
this also allows a call to be transfer-
red to the VRS.
56 E911 Alarm Shut 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT 786 21-01-13
Off 8 digit Enter the Service Code that an ex- 21-01-14
tension user can dial to shut off the
E911 Alarm Ring.
57 Tandem Trunking 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT #8
8 digit
58 Transfer Into 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 624
Conference 8 digit Assign the Service Code a user di-
als to Transfer a call to a Confer-
ence call.
59 Trunk Drop Oper- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: SLT 660
ation for SLT 8 digit
62 Security Sensor 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 716
Reset 8 digit Service Code setting for cancel
Warning message sending and
emergency call.

Programming Manual 2-79

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
63 Watch Mode 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 717
Start 8 digit Service Code (SC) setting for on/off
watch mode.
SC+1;Watch mode start
SC+0; Watch mode end.
64 Security Sensor 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT, SLT 719
Mode Start 8 digit Service Code (SC) setting for on/off
security sensor.
SC+1; Start sensor detection
SC+0; Ignore sensor detection

Program MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

11 Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-80 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service Codes which are used
with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01 ~ 06). 11
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 ACD Log In/Log Out 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to Login *5
(for KTS) digit (MLT/SLT) and Logout (MLT/SLT) ACD
Agents.
The service code assigned must be within
your valid numbering plan in PRG.
02 ACD Log Out (for 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to Logout 655
SLT) digit SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within
your valid numbering plan in PRG.
03 Set ACD Wrap-Up 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to set Wrap- 656
Time (for SLT) digit Up on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within
your valid numbering plan in PRG.
04 Cancel ACD Wrap-Up 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to cancel 657
Time (for SLT) digit Wrap-Up on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within
your valid numbering plan in PRG.
05 Set ACD Off Duty (for 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to set Off 658
SLT) digit Duty on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within
your valid numbering plan in PRG.
06 Cancel ACD Off Duty 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Assign the service code used to cancel Off 659
(for SLT) digit Duty on SLT ACD Agents.
The service code assigned must be within
your valid numbering plan in PRG.

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Programming Manual 2-81

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Program

11

2-82 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are Program
used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~
11-12, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can be used only at telephones registered as hotel

11
terminals in Program 42-02.

The following chart shows:

• The number of each code (01 ~ 19).
• The function of the Service Code.
• The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
• The default entry.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Set DND for Own Ex- 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 627
tension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to set DND for own
extension.
02 Cancel DND for Own 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 628
Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to cancel DND for
own extension.
03 Set DND for Other Ex- 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 629
tension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to set DND for an-
other extension.
04 Cancel DND for Other 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 630
Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to cancel DND for
another extension.
05 Set Wake Up Call for 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 631
Own Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to set wake up call
for own extension.
06 Cancel Wake Up Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 632
for Own Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to cancel wake up
call for own extension.
07 Set Wake Up Call for 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 633
Other Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to set wake up call
for another extension.
08 Cancel Wake Up Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 634
for Other Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to cancel wake up
call for another extension.

Programming Manual 2-83

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
09 Set Room to Room 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 635
Call Restriction digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to Set Room to
Room Call Restriction.
10 Cancel Room to 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 636
Room Call Restriction digit Determine what the service code should
(Hotel) be for an internal party to cancel Room to
Room Call Restriction.
11 Change Toll Restric- 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 637
tion Class for Other digit Determine what the service code should
Extension be for an internal party to change the toll
Program restriction class for another extension.
12 Check-In 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 638
digit Determine what the service code should

11
be for an internal party to check-in another
extension.
13 Check-Out 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 639
digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to check-out anoth-
er extension.
14 Room Status Change 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 640
for Own Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to change room
status on their extension.
15 Room Status Change 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 641
for Other Extension digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to change room
status on another extension.
16 Room Status Output 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT 642
digit Determine what the service code should
be for an internal party to output the status
of hotel rooms via a printer.
17 Hotel Room Monitor 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT 675
digit Determine what the service code should
be for initiating Hotel Room Monitor.
19 Hotel Room Data Set 0~9, *, # Maximum of 8 Terminal: MLT, SLT No Setting
digit

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

2-84 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special
Access)
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the
special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.

The following chart shows:

11
• The number of each code (01 ~ 14).
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
• The default entry.
• Programs that may be affected when changing the code.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Remote Mainte- 0~9, *, # Maximum of 730
nance 8 digit
02 ACD Access in 0~9, *, # Maximum of 760 22-04
Dialin Conver- 8 digit 22-11
sion Table (V1.5
Added)
05 System Program- 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT # * #* 11-01
ming Mode, Log- 8 digit
On
09 Transfer to In- 0~9, *, # Maximum of No Setting
coming Ring 8 digit
Group
12 Extension Data 0~9, *, # Maximum of Terminal: MLT No Setting 92-04
Swap 8 digit
13 Remote Access 0~9, *, # Maximum of No Setting 22-02
from DISA 8 digit
14 Modem Access 0~9, *, # Maximum of 740
8 digit

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-85

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

11

2-86 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes Program
used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15.

The following chart shows:

• The number of each code (01 ~ 11). 11
• The function of the Service Code.
• The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (Item 03) when calling an extension switches the call from
either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently defined).
• Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Step Call 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit 2
02 Barge-In 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit No Setting
03 Switching of Voice/Signal 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit 1
Call
04 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit *
05 Camp-On 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit #
06 DND/Call Forward Override 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit No Setting
Bypass
07 Message Waiting 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit 0
08 Voice Over 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit 6
09 Access to Voice Mail 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit 8
10 (Department) STG All Ring 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit No Setting 16-01-05
Mode
11 Station Park Hold 0~9, *, # Maximum of 1 digit No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-87

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each ACD
Group. This is the number a user dials to transfer calls to the ACD Group. Normally, you should use

11 unassigned extension numbers for the master number. If you want to use an extension number which,
by default, has a port number assigned, first remove the default assignment.

Input Data

ACD Group Number 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 ACD Group Pilot Dial (Up to eight digits) Assign the ACD Master Number for each No Setting
Number ACD Group.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2-88 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot number to be Program
used for the Remote Conference. This is the number that outside parties will call in order to connect to
a conference.

Input Data 11
Conference Group Number 1~4

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Remote Conference Group Dial (Up to 8 digits) See 20-13-46
Pilot Number 20-34

No Remote Conference Pilot Numbers assigned to any Conference Group (1 ~ 4).

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Conference, Remote

Programming Manual 2-89

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on three or more
digits. This program is relevant only if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9 (Dial Extension Analyze).

11 Input Data

Dial Extension Analyze Table 001 ~ 128

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Dial Extension Analyze Table Dial (Up to eight digits : 0, 1 ~ 9, #, *, @) No Setting 11-01
02 Dial Extension Analyze Table Type of Dials : 0 11-01
0 = Not used
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access

Conditions

• When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial type, the lower table
has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used
to determine the dial type.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-90 Program 11 : System Numbering

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the Program
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
12
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Manual Night 0 = Off (Manual Night Allow/Prevent a activating Night 1 11-10-01
Mode Switching Mode changes are not Service by dialing a service code.
allowed.)
1 = On (Manual Night
Mode changes are al-
lowed.)
02 Automatic Night 0 = Off (Automatic According to a preset schedule, en- 0 12-02
Mode Switching Night Mode disabled) able or disable Automatic Night 12-03
1 = On (Automatic Service for the system.
Night Mode enabled)

Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the schedule set
up.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Programming Manual 2-91

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the Automatic
Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 12-03 and
12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer Settings.

12 Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Time Pattern Number 01 ~ 10

Set Time Number 01 ~ 20

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Start Time 0000 ~ 2359 Per Night Service Group, Per Time Pat- Refer below
tern, assign a starting time pattern. The
first time pattern must start at 00:00 (mid-
night).
02 End Time 0000 ~ 2359 Per Night Service Group, Per Time Pat- Refer below
tern, assign an ending time pattern. Each
used time pattern must have a starting and
ending time assigned.
03 Operation Mode 1 ~ 8 = Night Modes 1 ~ Refer below
8

Example :

Time Pattern 1
0 :0 0 9 :0 0 1 2 :0 0 1 3 :0 0 1 7 :0 0 1 8 :0 0 2 2 :0 0 0 :0 0
M ode 3 M ode 1 M ode 4 M ode 1 M ode 4 M ode 2 M ode 3
(m id n ig h t) (d a y) (re st) (d a y) (re st) (n ig h t) (m id n ig h t)

To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:

Time setting 01 : 00 : 00 to 09 : 00 Mode 3 (midnight)

Time setting 02 : 09 : 00 to 12 : 00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 03 : 12 : 00 to 13 : 00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 04 : 13 : 00 to 17 : 00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 05 : 17 : 00 to 18 : 00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 06 : 18 : 00 to 22 : 00 Mode 2 (night)
Time setting 07 : 22 : 00 to 00 : 00 Mode 3 (midnight)

2-92 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Time Pattern 2

00 : 00 00 : 00
Mode 2
(night)

Time setting 01 : 00 : 00 to 00 : 00 Mode 2 (night)

Default

Time Pattern 1 Program

Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode

01
02
0000
0800
0800
1700
2
1 12
03 1700 0000 2
04 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 2

Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode

01 0000 0000 2
02 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 3 ~ 10

Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode

01 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Programming Manual 2-93

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of night-switch
settings. 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

12 Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Day of the Week 01 = Sunday Refer below
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
04 = Wednesday
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday
Time Schedule Pattern Number 0 ~ 10

Default

Day of the Week Time Schedule Pattern Number

01 = Sunday 2
02 = Monday 1
03 = Tuesday 1
04 = Wednesday 1
05 = Thursday 1
06 = Friday 1
07 = Saturday 2

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

2-94 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday night- Program
switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days when the company is expected to
be closed, such as a national holiday.

Input Data 12
Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Days and Months 0101 ~ 1231 No Setting
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1, 1231 = Dec. 31)
Time Pattern Number 0 ~ 10
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Programming Manual 2-95

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day/Night Mode
Group for each extension.

12 Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Night Mode Service 1 = Night Mode Group 1 Assign extension numbers into one of the 1
Group Number 2 = Night Mode Group 2 four Night Mode Service Groups.
3 = Night Mode Group 3
4 = Night Mode Group 4

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

2-96 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode Program
Group for each trunk port.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

12
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Night Mode Service 1 = Night Mode Group 1 Assign the trunks into one of the four Night 1
Group Number 2 = Night Mode Group 2 Mode Service Groups.
3 = Night Mode Group 3
4 = Night Mode Group 4

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Programming Manual 2-97

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is displayed
on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.

12 Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Text Message Maximum 12 Characters Assign the data that will be displayed on Mode 1 = No
(alphabetic or numeric) the phones display when the system en- Setting
ters one of the eight different night modes. Mode 2 =
Only phones that have manual night mode <Night>
switching enabled in class of service (PRG Mode 3 = <Mid-
20-07-01) will display the text. night>
Mode 4 = <Rest>
Mode 5 =
<Day2>
Mode 6 =
<Night2>
Mode 7 = <Mid-
night2>
Mode 8 =
<Rest2>

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

2-98 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of toggle key for each Program
Day/Night Mode.

Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01 ~ 04

12
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Range 2~8 When a Night Mode Key (PRG 15-07 key 2
09) is assigned as a toggle key (PRG
20-01-17), this data determines how many
night modes a user toggles through when
the Night Mode key is pressed. Each press
of the Night Mode key toggles to the next
mode.
02 Lamp setting of tog- 0 = Off Whether the Lamp of toggle key sets on or 0
gle key (V5.0 Added) 1 = On off.

Example :

When Program 12-08-01 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed, the following modes are switched :
• Press once = Night
• Press twice = Mid-night
• Press third = Day
• Default = 2

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Programming Manual 2-99

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup to define the Speed Dialing functions.

Input Data
13 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
01 Speed Dialing 0 = Trunk Outgoing Set where the Speed Dial bins will 0 13-05
Auto Outgoing Mode (Use trunk group use Trunk Routing (0) or dial the bin
Call Mode assigned in PRG as though it is an Intercom number
13-05.) (1).
1 = Intercom Outgoing
Mode (Follow the sys-
tem routing for the
trunk access code en-
tered.)
02 Private Speed Di- 0 = Do not use Define use additional 20 Private 1 13–06
al 1 = Use speed dial bin beside 1000 Com-
mon speed dial bin or not.
03 Number of Com- 0 ~ 1000 Assign the number of Speed Dial 900 13-04
mon Speed Dial- 0 = No Common Speed bins that are used for System Speed
ing Bins Dialing (No System Dials.
Speed Dial)
04 Trunk Access 0 = Trunk Group 0 = PRG13-05 defines a trunk group 0
Routing (V3.0 1 = Trunk Route in PRG14-05 to select a trunk from.
Added) 1 = PRG13-05 refers to a trunk ac-
cess route in PRG14-06.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-100 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be used by Program
each Speed Dialing group.
(Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions on page 2-102.)

Input Data 13
Speed Dialing Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Start Address of Speed Dialing Bin 0 ~ 990 Refer below
End Address of Speed Dialing Bin 0, 9 ~ 999

Default

Abbreviated dial group No. Start address of ABB Bin End address of ABB Bin
1 0 0
: : :
32 0 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

Programming Manual 2-101

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Speed Dialing
Group for each extension. There are 32 available Speed Dialing groups.

13 Input Data

Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Group Number 01 ~ 32 Assign each extension to a speed dialing 1
Assign group number for group.
extension

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-102 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data in the Speed Program
Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the Speed Dialing numbers.

Input Data

Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 ~ 999

13
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Speed Dialing 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, Pause Per speed dial bin (000 ~ 999) as- No Setting
Data (Press line key 1), sign the telephone number that is to
Recall/Flash (Press line be called when the bin is accessed.
key 2), If 13-01-01 is set to (0) do not in-
@ = Code to wait for clude the trunk access code.
answer supervision in If 13-01-01 is set to (1) include the
ISDN (Press line key 3) trunk access code.
(Maximum 36 digits)
02 Name Maximum 12 Charac- Per Speed Dialing bin (000 ~ 999) No Setting
ters (Use dial pad to assign a name to be used when
enter name) searching through the directory.
If a name is not assigned for a
speed dial bin the speed dial entry
will not be listed in the directory.
03 Transfer Mode 0 = Not Used (Calls will Each time when this setting is 0
not be routed based off changed Program 13-04-04 will
a users caller ID.) be reset. (V1.5 Added)
1 = Internal Dial (Calls
will be routed to an in-
ternal number specified
in PRG 13-04-04.)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group (Calls will be
routed to a ring group
specified in PRG
13-04-04.)
3 = Remote Monitor
(Used for the security
feature and not Flexible
Caller ID routing.)

Programming Manual 2-103

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
04 Transfer Destina- If Transfer mode is (Re- This setting can be changed only No Setting 13-04-03
tion Number fer to 13-04-03) : when Program 13-04-03 is set
1 = Internal Dial Mode other than 0. Also if the Program
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, P, R, @ 13-04-03 is set to 3 only Exten-
(Maximum 36 Charac- sion number can be changed.
ters) (V1.5 Added)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
0 ~ 25 (IRG Number)
P = Pause
R = Recall
@ = Additional Digits
when using ISDN func-
Program tionality
3 = Remote Monitor
Dial (Up to 8 digits)

13 05 Incoming Ring
Pattern
0 = Normal System
Ring Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern 1
~4
When set 1 or 2 at PRG13-04-03,
this program is used to assign a ring
pattern for the caller ID routed call.
0 13-04-03

5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern 1
~5
10 ~ 13 = Tone Pattern
5 ~ 8 (V3.0 Added)
07 VRS Message 0 ~ 100 If the VRS can not be played it 0
Number will use a Program 13-04-05
Ringing Pattern. (V1.5 Added)
08 Memo1 (V1.5 De- Maximum 28 digit Can only be changed in WebPro No Setting 15-02-58
leted) or PCPro.
09 Memo2 (V1.5 De- Maximum 28 digit Can only be changed in WebPro No Setting 15-02-58
leted) or PCPro.
10 Memo3 (V1.5 De- Maximum 28 digit Can only be changed in WebPro No Setting 15-02-58
leted) or PCPro.
11 Mailbox Number 0 ~ 544 This setting only works when 0 40-02
Program 13-04-01 Speed Dial
and Incoming Trunk Call match.
(V1.5 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-104 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized for each Program
Speed Dialing number.

If this program has an entry of 0 (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group routing
of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is available only in External Speed
Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01). 13
Input Data

Speed Dialing Bin Number 000 ~ 999

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Trunk Group/Route Number (V3.0 0 = Follow the caller's extension trunk group rout- No Setting
Changed) ing (PRG 21-02)
1 ~ 25 = Trunk group 1 ~ 25

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

Programming Manual 2-105

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name
Level:
SB

Description
Program Use Program 13-06 : Speed Dial Number and Name to set up the dial number and name of each
Speed Dial Number.

13 Input Data

Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Speed Dial Number 01 ~ 20

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Speed Dialing Data 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, Pause (Press line key 1), Recall/ No Setting
Flash (Press line key 2),
@ = Code to wait for answer supervision in
ISDN (Press line key 3)
(Maximum 36 digits)
Name Maximum 12 Characters
(Use dial pad to enter name)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing/Speed Dial

2-106 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-11 : Abbreviated Dial Group Name to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group Program
Name.

Input Data

Group Number 01 ~ 32
13
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Group Name Up to 12 characters 1 = ABB : GROUP01
:
32 = ABB : GROUP32

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-107

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to
the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

14 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Name Up to 12 characters Set the names for trunks. The trunk Refer below
name displays on a multiline termi-
nal for incoming and outgoing calls.
02 Transmit Level 1 ~ 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 32 (0 dB)
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB gain for the trunk. The option sets
in 0.5 dB intervals) the gain (signal amplification) for the
trunk you are programming.
03 Receive Level 1 ~ 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 32 (0 dB)
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB gain for the trunk. The option sets
in 0.5 dB intervals) the gain (signal amplification) for the
trunk you are programming.
04 Transmit Gain 1 ~ 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 32 (0 dB)
Level for Confer- (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB gain type used by the trunk when it
ence and Trans- in 0.5 dB intervals) is part of an Unsupervised Confer-
fer Calls ence.
05 Receive Gain 1 ~ 63 Use this option to select the CODEC 16 (- 8 dB)
Level for Confer- (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB gain type used by the trunk when it
ence and Trans- in 0.5 dB intervals) is part of an Unsupervised Confer-
fer Calls ence.
06 SMDR Printout 0 = No (trunk will not be This option can include/exclude 1
reported in the SMDR trunks from being reported in the
print out.) SMDR printout.
1 = Yes (trunk will be If a trunk is set to No Print Out (set-
reported in the SMDR ting data of 0) any calls made or re-
print out.) ceived on this line will not be repor-
ted in the SMDR printout.
07 Outgoing Calls 0 = Deny (No) Use this option to allow/prevent out- 1
1 = Allow (Yes) going calls on the trunk you are pro-
gramming.
08 Toll Restriction 0 = Restriction Disa- Use this option to enable/disabled 1 21-04
bled (Toll restriction will Toll Restriction for the trunk. If ena- 21-05
not be applied to calls bled, the trunk follows Toll Restric- 21-06
on this trunk.) tion programming (example: Pro-
1 = Restriction Enabled grams 21-05, 21-06). If disabled, the
(Toll restriction will be trunk is a toll free line.
applied to calls on this
trunk.)

2-108 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 Private Line 0 = Disable Private 0
Line (Normal)
1 = Enable Private Line
(Private Line)
10 DTMF Tones for 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable (1) or disa- 0
Outgoing Calls 1 = Enable (Yes) ble (0) DTMF tones for outgoing
trunk calls.
11 Account Code 0 = Disabled (user can- Per trunk enable or disable the abili- 1
Required not enter account co- ty to enter an account code on an
des using this trunk.) inbound or outbound trunk call.
1 = Enabled (user can
enter account codes Program
using this trunk.)
13 Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable (1) or disa- 1

14
Transfer 1 = Enable (Yes) ble (0) loop supervision for the
trunk. This option is required for Call
Forwarding Off-Premise and Tan-
dem Trunking only.
14 Long Conversa- 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable or disable 0 20-21-03
tion Cutoff 1 = Enable (Yes) the Long Conversation Cutoff fea- 20-21-04
ture for each trunk.
15 Long Conversa- 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable or disable 0 20-21-01
tion Alarm Be- 1 = Enable (Yes) the Long Conversation Alarm for 20-21-02
fore Cutoff each trunk.
16 Forced Release 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable/disable 0 24-01-01
of Held Call 1 = Enable (Yes) forced release for calls on Hold. If 24-01-05
enabled, the system disconnects a
call if it is on Hold longer than a pro-
grammed interval (Program
24-01-05). If disabled, forced dis-
connection does not occur. Program
24-01-01 also affects this option.
17 Trunk to Trunk 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable or disable 0
Warning Tone for 1 = Enable (Yes) the Warning Tone for Long Conver-
Long Conversa- sation feature for DISA callers.
tion Alarm
18 Warning Beep 0 = Disable (No) 0
Tone Signaling 1 = Enable (Yes)
19 Privacy Mode 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable or disable 0
Toggle Option 1 = Enable (Yes) a trunk ability to be switched from
private to non-private mode by
pressing the line key or Privacy Re-
lease function key.
20 Block Outgoing 0 = Prevent (No) Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system 0 14-01-21
Caller ID 1 = Allow (Yes) from automatically blocking outgoing 20-08-15
Caller ID information when a user
places a call. If allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code (de-
fined in 14-01-21) before the user
dialed digits.
21 Caller ID Block Dial (up to eight dig- Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that *67 14-01-20
Code its) should be used as the Caller ID 20-08-15
Block Code. This code is automati-
cally inserted before dialed digits if
Program 14-01-20 is set to 1.
22 Caller ID to Voice 0 = Disable (Caller ID Enable or disable the system ability 0
Mail not sent to VM.) to send the Caller ID digits (Remote
1 = Enable (Caller ID is Log-On Protocol) to voice mail.
sent to VM.)

Programming Manual 2-109

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
24 Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable (Caller ID Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability 0
Outgoing Caller not forwarded out.) to send the original Caller ID
ID through Mode 1 = Enable (Caller ID is through when the call is Forward
forwarded out.) Off-Premise.
25 Continued/ 0 = Disable (No) Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability 0 20-28-01
Discontinued 1 = Enable (Yes) to dial a service code to continue or 20-28-02
Trunk-to-Trunk disconnect the Trunk-to-Trunk con- 20-28-03
Conversation versation after the alert tone is 24-02-07
heard. 24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08

Program 26 Automatic Trunk- 0 = Normal Transfer 0 24-02-11

to-Trunk Transfer (Normal) 24-02-12
Mode 1 = Step Transfer
(Step)

14 27 Caller ID Refuse
Setup
0 = Disable (CID refuse Per trunk enable or disable the abili-
will not function.)
1 = Enable
ty to use the caller ID refuse feature.
0

28 Effectively of 0 = No Effect (No) 1 15-12

"Conversation 1 = Available (Yes)
Recording Desti-
nation for Exten-
sion"
30 Flexible Ringing 0 = Disable (No) 1 13-04
by Caller ID 1 = Enable (Yes)
32 Anti-trombone 0 = No Effect (No) 0
Function 1 = Available (Yes)
33 APSU(VM00) 1 ~ 63 Additional PAD when a trunk call 32 (0 dB)
Trunk Receive (- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB connects to APSU Voice Mail.
Gain in 0.5 dB intervals)
36 Calling Party 0 = Off (when set to Off This program enables/disabled the 0
Name notifica- the system will not ability to send calling party name in-
tion (ISDN Trunk) send any outbound formation on a per trunk basis.
calling party informa-
tion.)
1 = On (when set to ON
the system will send
calling party informa-
tion.)
38 Outgoing CLI se- 0 = Contract Number Shows what number to show. 0 21-13-01
lection (V3.0 Add- 1 = Extension Number 21-18-01
ed) 2 = Extended Table 21-19-01
3 = PRG21-13 21-25-01
4 = PRG21-18
5 = PRG21-19
6 = No Digits
39 CLI composition 0 = Prefer extension If the flag has the default value 0: 0
(V3.0 Added) 1 = Combine trunk + "prefer extension", the extension's
extension CLI is sent out, if it is not empty. If it
is empty, the trunk's CLI is sent in-
stead.
If the flag has the value 1: "combine
trunk+extension", the trunk's CLI is
stored in the sending buffer, padded
with the extension's CLI.

2-110 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
40 ISDN Queue an- 0 = send CONNECT When a VRS queue message is to 0 22-14
nouncement 1 = send PROGRESS be played back (configured in PRG 22-15
connect mode #8 22-14, PRG 22-15, PRG 41-11, or 41-11
(V2.0 Added) PRG 41-19, the system shall, in- 41-19
stead of a CONNECT message,
send a PROGRESS message in-
cluding a ProgressIE #8 “in-band
tones and announcements availa-
ble”.
41 Incoming Caller 0 = Use This program will determines that 0
Name Usage 1 = Ignore the caller name information from the
(V2.0 Added) network is valid or not. If the pro-
gram is set to 1, the caller name in- Program
formation the network provides is ig-
nored.

14
46 Collect Call 0 = Disable Can block the Collect only when 0 20-09-09
Blocking (V4.0 1 = Enable ISDN line is in use.
Added)

Default

Item01 : Trunk Name

Trunk Port Number Name

1 Line 001
2 Line 002
: :
84 Line 84

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-111

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analog trunk port.
Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

14 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Signaling Type 0 = Dial Pulse (10 PPS) This option sets the signaling type 2
(DP/DTMF) 2 = DTMF for the trunk.
02 Ring Detect Type 0 = Normal/delayed This option sets Extended Ring De- 1
1 = Immediate Ringing tect or Immediate Ring Detect for
the trunk. For T1 loop/ground start
trunks, this option must be set to 1
for the trunks to ring and light cor-
rectly.
03 Flash Type 0 = Open Loop Flash This option selects the flash type 0
1 = Ground (open loop flash or ground). Always
set this option for open loop flash.
04 Hooking Type 0 = Timed Flash (Hook- This option lets you use Flash for 0 81-01-14
ing) Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or 81-01-15
1 = Disconnect (Cut) Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A
user implements Flash by pressing
the FLASH key while on a trunk
call.)
05 Dial Tone Detec- 0 = Dial Tone Detection Use this option enable/disable dial 0 21-01-04
tion for Manually Not Used tone detection for directly accessed
Accessed Trunks 1 = Dial Tone Detection trunks. If disabled, the system out-
Used dials on the trunks without monitor-
ing for dial tone.
06 Pause at 1st Dig- 0 = No Pause (No) 1 21-01-06
it after Line Seize 1 = Pause (Yes)
in Manual Dial
Mode

2-112 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
07 DP to DTMF Con- 0 = Automatic Determine how a user can convert a 2 21-01-03
version Options 1 = Automatic and Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call.
Manual For each trunk, set the type of DP to
2 = Manual DTMF conversion required. There
are three conversion options: Auto-
matic (0), Automatic and Manual (1),
or Manual (2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs au-
tomatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs au- Program
tomatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before

14
dialing the next digit. In addition, the
user can dial # to switch a DP trunk
to DTMF dialing.
Manual:
Users can dial # to switch a DP
trunk to DTMF dialing.
08 Answering Con- 0 = Polarity Reversing 1 21-01-03
dition (Polarity)
1 = Polarity Reversing
or Timer (Int Digit)
09 Busy Tone De- 0 = Disable (No) 0
tection 1 = Enable (Yes)
10 Caller ID 0 = Off (Caller ID not Enable or disable a trunk ability to 1 (V1.5
displayed.) receive Caller ID information. Changed)
1 = On ( Caller ID is
displayed.)
11 Next Trunk in Ro- 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to enable/disable the 0
tary if No Dial 1 = Enable (Yes) system ability to skip over a trunk if
Tone dial tone is not detected. This option
pertains to calls placed using Speed
Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
12 Detect Network 0 = Disable (No) 1
Disconnect Sig- 1 = Enable (Yes)
nal
13 Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable (No) 0
Limitation 1 = Enable (Yes)
18 Busy Tone De- 0 = Disable 0
tection on Talk- 1 = Enable
ing
19 Busy Tone De- 1 ~ 255 1 14-02-18
tection Frequen-
cy
20 Busy Tone De- 0 ~ 64800 (x 100 ms) 0 14-02-18
tection Interval
23 Caller ID Receiv- 0 = Wait Caller ID Rings extension before receiving 1
ing Method 1 = Immediate Ring Caller ID (1) or after receiving Caller
ID (0).
24 Use Call Waiting 0 = Off Set the Call Waiting Caller ID. 1 14-02-10
Caller ID (V4.0 1 = On
Added)

Programming Manual 2-113

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

14

2-114 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is Program
one item for each mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

14
Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related Pro-

No. gram
01 Type of Connection 0 = Stand Alone (Trunk) 0 22-02
1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
3 = CTX assume 9

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2-115

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-05 : Trunk Group
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the
outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks
in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.

14 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Trunk Group Number 0 ~ 25
Priority Number 001 ~ 084

Default

Trunk Port Group Priority

1 1 1
: : :
084 1 084

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Trunk Groups

2-116 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups Program
you assigned in Program 14-05. When a user dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority)
specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route

14
the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The
system contains 25 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access.
There are 25 available Trunk Group Numbers.

Example for setting:

With less than four trunk groups,

Route Number 1 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 1

: Order 2 - Trunk Group 2

For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in
trunk group 2.

With more than four trunk groups,

Route Number 1 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 1

: Order 2 - Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 - Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 - 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
Route Number 2 : Order 1 - Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 - Trunk Group 5

For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system searches for
an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.

Input Data

Route Table Number 001 ~ 025

Priority Order Number 1~4

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Group Routing 0 = Not Set Refer below 14-01-07
001 ~ 025 = Trunk group No. 14-05
101 ~ 104 = 100 + Networking System No. (V1.5 15-01-02
Added) 21-02
1001 ~ 1025 = 1000 + Route Table No.

Programming Manual 2-117

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Default

Route No. Order Data

Route 1 1 1 (Trunk group 1)
2 0 (Not specified)
3 0 (Not specified)
4 0 (Not specified)
Route 2 1 0 (Not specified)
2 0 (Not specified)
3 0 (Not specified)
Program 4 0 (Not specified)
: 1 0 (Not specified)

14 2
3
4
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
0 (Not specified)
Route 25 1 0 (Not specified)
2 0 (Not specified)
3 0 (Not specified)
4 0 (Not specified)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-118 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an Program
extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can place only outgoing calls on
trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 084 Access Maps with all 084 trunk ports

14
programmed in Map 1 with full access.

An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign Trunk
Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map.
Emergency calls will override Program 14-07 settings.

Input Data

Access Map Number 001 ~ 084

Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Access 0 = No access Trunk Port Number = Refer below
Map 1 = Outgoing access only 001 ~ 084
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on
Hold
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on
Hold
6 = Incoming and Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access
when trunk on Hold

Default

Access map No. Trunk Port No. Default

1 1 7 (T, R, H)
2 7 (T, R, H)
: :
084 7 (T, R, H)
2 1 7 (T, R, H)
2 7 (T, R, H)
: :
084 7 (T, R, H)

Programming Manual 2-119

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Access map No. Trunk Port No. Default

: 1 7 (T, R, H)
2 7 (T, R, H)
: :
084 7 (T, R, H)
084 1 7 (T, R, H)
2 7 (T, R, H)
: :
084 7 (T, R, H)

Program

Conditions

14 None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing

2-120 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold source for a trunk Program
as COI port.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

14
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 MOH Type 0 = Internal/External Select whether the system will use the 0
MOH built in Music on Hold/External Music on
1 = BGM Source Hold or a Customer provided source con-
nected to the BGM port.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Music on Hold

Programming Manual 2-121

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the Conversation
Recording destination for each trunk.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.

14 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Recording Destina- Maximum eight digits Enter the extension number where the No Setting
tion Extension Num- trunk calls should be recorded.
ber
02 Automatic Recording 0 = Off Determine if incoming trunk calls should 0
for Incoming Calls 1 = On be automatically recorded.
04 Automatic Recording 0 = Off 0
for Outgoing Call 1 = On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-122 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This program refers to Program
incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing IP Trunk call. This program is
used only for H.323.

Input Data 14
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 IP Trunk ID 0 ~ 65535 0
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

• This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call.

• This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call.
• It is not notified when ID is 0.
• Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the partner system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-123

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register ID for IP Trunks.

Input Data
14 Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Register ID 0 ~ 31 0
02 Pilot Register ID 0 ~ 31 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-124 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-18 : IP Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V5.0 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 14-18 : IP Trunk Data Setup to define the basic setting of each IP Trunk.

Input Data 14
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
05 SIP Profile (SIP Trunk) 1=Profile 1 1
2=Profile 2

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-125

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension.

Input Data
15 Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Extension Name Up to 12 Characters Define the extension/virtual exten- Ext. 101 ~ 212 =
sion name. No Setting (V3.5
Changed)
02 Outgoing Trunk 0 = Off Use this option to set the extension 0 14-06
Line Preference 1 = On outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If 21-02
enabled, the extension user re-
ceives trunk dial tone when they lift
the handset. The user hears trunk
dial tone only if allowed by Trunk
Access Map programming (Pro-
grams 14-07 and 15-06). Refer to
the Line Preference feature for more
details.
03 SMDR Printout 0 = None (Station will Use this option to include or exclude 1
not be reported in the the extension in the SMDR report.
SMDR print out.)
1 = Yes (Station will be
reported in the SMDR
print out.)
04 ISDN Caller ID 0 = Disabled (CPN is If both Program 15-01-04 and 1 10-03-05
NOT sent.) 10-03-05 are enabled, the system 20-08-13
1 = Enabled (CPN is includes Caller ID in the Setup mes-
sent.) sage as Presentation Allowed. If
these options are disabled, it is Pre-
sentation Restricted.
05 Restriction for 0 = Supervise dial de- Enable or disable supervised dial 0 21-01-15
Outgoing Disable tection detection for an extension. 21-01-16
on Incoming Line 1 = Not supervise dial 21-01-17
detection 80-03-01
07 Do-Not-Call 0 = Off 0 21-01-19
1 = On
08 Call Attendant 0 ~ 100 0 11-11-59
Busy Message (0 = No Setting) 40-10-08
09 Call Attendant 0 ~ 100 0 11-11-60
Answer Message (0 = No Setting) 40-10-09

2-126 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
10 Extension Num- 0 = Off (when set to Off This program enables/disables the 0
ber the system will not ability to send calling party name in-
send any outbound formation on a per station basis.
calling party informa-
tion.)
1 = On (when set to ON
the system will send
calling party informa-
tion.)
13 Special ringtone 0 = Incoming extension When an incoming call is received 0 15-02-03
choice (V2.0 Add- ring tone from the extension defined in this
ed) 1 = Tone pattern 1 PRG this item defines the ringtone
2 = Tone pattern 2 presented. Program
3 = Tone pattern 3
4 = Tone pattern 4
5 = Tone pattern 5
(V3.0 Added)
6 = Tone pattern 6
(V3.0 Added)
7 = Tone pattern 7
15
(V3.0 Added)
8 = Tone pattern 8
(V3.0 Added)
14 SMDR output of 0 = Disable When set 0 it will not record the in- 0 15-01-49
made intercom 1 = Enable ternal calls that been made.
calls (V2.0 Add-
ed)
15 SMDR output of 0 = Disable When set 0 it will not record the in- 0 15-01-49
answered inter- 1 = Enable ternal calls that been received.
com calls (V2.0
Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-127

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various Multiline telephone
options.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Display Lan- 1 = English This program sets the Display Lan- 1
guage Selection 2 = German guage for the extension port you are
3 = French programming.
4 = Italian (To select options 6 ~ 11, dial 6 or
5 = Spanish press Help until 2 shows in the far
6 = Dutch right of screen , then press line keys
7 = Portuguese 1 ~ 6. To select options 12 ~ 16, dial
8 = Norwegian 12 or press Help until 3 shows in the
9 = Danish far right of screen, then press line
10 = Swedish keys 1 ~ 6.)
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American
Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish
02 Trunk Ring Tone 1 = High Use this option to set the tone 2 22-03
2 = Medium (pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for
3 = Low the extension port you are program-
4 = Ring Tone 1 ming.
5 = Ring Tone 2
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
03 Extension Ring 1 = High Use this option to set the tone 8
Tone 2 = Medium (pitch) of the incoming extension call
3 = Low ring for the extension port you are
4 = Ring Tone 1 programming. Also refer to Program
5 = Ring Tone 2 15-08.
6 = Ring Tone 3
7 = Ring Tone 4
8 = Ring Tone 5
04 Redial (Speed Di- 0 = Common Abbrevi- Use this option to control the func- 0
al) Control ated Dial tion of the extension Redial key
1 = Group Speed Dial- when used with Speed Dialing. The
ing Redial key can access either the
Common/Individual or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.

2-128 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
05 Transfer Key Op- 0 = Transfer Use this option to set the operating 0
eration Mode 1 = Serial Call (call mode of the extension Transfer key.
back) The keys can be for Call Transfer,
2 = Flash Serial Calling or Flash. When select-
ing the Flash option (selection 2),
refer also to Program 81-01-14.
06 Hold Key Operat- 0 = Normal (Common) Use this option to set the function of 0
ing Mode 1 = Exclusive Hold the Multiline Hold key. The Hold key
can activate normal Hold or Exclu-
sive Hold.
07 Automatic Hold 0 = Hold When talking on a CO call and an- 1
for CO Lines 1 = Disconnect (Cut) other CO line key is pressed, the Program
original trunk is placed on Hold (0)
or Disconnected (1).

15
08 Automatic 0 = Preselect Use this option to set whether 1
Handsfree 1 = One-Touch (Auto- pressing a key access a One-Touch
matic Handsfree) Key or if it preselects the key.
09 Auto answer to 0 = Off 1
incoming call 1 = On
from Extension
10 Ringing Line 0 = Idle (Off) Use this option to select between 1
Preference for 1 = Ringing (On) Idle and Ringing Line Preference for
Trunk Calls trunk calls.
11 Callback Auto- 0 = Off Use this option to enable or disable 1
matic Answer 1 = On automatic answer of calls recalling
to a station. For example, if a Trans-
fer Recall or Hold Recall is ringing
back to a station, the following hap-
pens:
If Program 15-02-11 is enabled, the
station will automatically answer the
recall when it goes off-hook. If Pro-
gram 15-02-11 is disabled, a station
does not automatically answer the
recall when it goes off-hook. The
user must first press the line ap-
pearance of the recalling call or
press the answer key.
12 Off-Hook Ringing 0 = Muted Off-Hook Use this option to set the telephone 5
Ringing Off-hook signaling. Off-hook signal-
1 = No Off-Hook Ring- ing occurs when a telephone user
ing receives a second call while busy on
3 = Beep in Speaker a handset call. To enable/disable
(SP) Off-hook signaling for an extension
4 = Beep in Handset Class of Service, use Program
(HS) 20-13-06.
5 = Speaker and Hand-
set Beep
13 Redial List Mode 0 = ICM/Trunk (Exten- Select whether the Redial List fea- 0
sion/Trunk Mode) ture should store internal and exter-
1 = Trunk Mode nal numbers (0), or only external
numbers (1).
15 Storage of Call- 0 = Disable (Off) 1
er-ID for an- 1 = Enable (On)
swered call
16 Handsfree Oper- 0 = Disable (Off) Enable or disable an extension abili- 1
ation 1 = Enable (On) ty to use the speakerphone on out-
side calls. When disabled, users can
hear the conversation, but cannot
respond handsfree.
18 Power-Saving 0 = Normal mode 1
Mode 1 = Power-Saving
Mode (Eco-Mode)

Programming Manual 2-129

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
21 Virtual Extension 0 = DSS Determine whether a Virtual Exten- 2
Access Mode 1 = Outgoing (OTG) sion (VE) should function as a DSS
(when idle Virtual 2 = Ignore key or a Virtual Extension. When
Extension key DSS (0) is selected, the key func-
pressed) tions as a DSS key to the extension
and for incoming calls to that exten-
sion. When Outgoing (1) is selected,
the key functions as a virtual exten-
sion and can be used for incoming
and outgoing calls. When Ignore (2)
is selected, the key functions can re-
ceive incoming calls only.
Program 22 Multiple Incom- 0 = Disable If enabled, this affects how a Hotline 1 22-01-01
ing From Inter- 1 = Enable key lights, based on the setting in
com and Trunk Program 22-01-01. If 22-01-01 is set
to 1 for trunk priority, the Hotline key

15 lights solid when a trunk call rings

in. If 22-01-01 is set to 0 for inter-
com priority, the Hotline key does
not light for incoming trunk calls, but
lights solid for intercom calls. If
15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline keys
light solid for any incoming calls re-
gardless of the setting in Program
22-01-01.
23 Speed Dial Pre- 0 = Preview This option defines how a speed dial 0
view Mode 1 = Outgoing Immedi- key functions when pressed. If set to
ately Preview (0), the speed dial number
can be previewed before dialing. If
set to Outgoing Immediate (1), the
number is dialed immediately.
27 Handset Volume 0 = Back to Default Determine how an extension hand- 1
(Back) set volume is set after it is adjusted
1 = Stay at previous during a call.
level (Stay)
When 1 is assigned in this pro-
gram and a user sets the volume
to maximum, the volume is reset
to a level to meet FCC standards
when the user hangs up.
28 Message Waiting 0 = Green Determine whether an extension 1
Lamp Color 1 = Red Message Waiting Lamp lights Green
(0) or Red (1) when a message is
received.
29 PB Back Tone 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ This program allows adjustment of 32 (0 dB)
Level + 15.5 dB) the PB Back Tone Level when you
are calling an ISDN Line.
30 Toll Restriction 0 = Virtual Extension Select the Toll Restriction Class to 1 15-02-21
Class (Follows virtual exten- use when placing a call from a virtu-
sion Toll Class in PRG al extension.
21-04.)
1 = Real Extension
(Follows physical sta-
tions Toll Class in PRG
21-04.)
34 Call Register 0 = Trunk Mode The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk 1
Mode 1 = Extension/Trunk calls only (0), or both Internal and
Mode Trunk calls (1).
35 Message Waiting 1 = Cycle 1 Select the cycle method that the 3
Lamp Cycle for 2 = Cycle 2 Large LED flashes when the exten-
Calling Exten- 3 = Cycle 3 sion has set Message Waiting.
sion 4 = Cycle 4
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

2-130 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
36 Message Waiting 1 = Cycle 1 Select the cycle method that the 2
Lamp Cycle for 2 = Cycle 2 Large LED flashes when the exten-
Called Extension 3 = Cycle 3 sion has Message Waiting set to the
4 = Cycle 4 extension.
5 = Cycle 5
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
37 Voice Mail Mes- 0 = Green Select the color of the Large LED 1
sage Wait Lamp 1 = Red when a voice mail message is wait-
Color ing at the extension.
38 Voice Mail Mes- 1 = Cycle 1 Select the cycle method that the 2
sage Wait Lamp 2 = Cycle 2 Large LED flashes when the exten- Program
Cycle 3 = Cycle 3 sion has a VM Message Waiting set
4 = Cycle 4 to the extension.
5 = Cycle 5

15
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7
40 Additional Dial Up to four digits (0, 1 ~ Enter the digits to be dialed in front No Setting
for Caller ID Call 9, #, *) of the Caller ID when using the Call-
Return er ID Return function.
41 Incoming Ring 0=Speaker Normal 0 11-11-37
Setup Ring 11-11-62
1=Headset Ring 15-02-12
15-02-42
20-13-06
42 Incoming Off- 0=Speaker Off-Hook 0 11-11-37
Hook Ring Setup Ring 11-11-62
1=Headset Off-Hook 15-02-12
Ring 15-02-41
43 Headset Ring 0=No Switch to Speak- 0 11-11-62
Duration er Ring 15-02-41
1=10 sec 15-02-42
2=20 sec
3=30 sec
4=40 sec
5=50 sec
6=1 minute
46 Backlight LCD 0 = Continuous on Set how long the Backlight LCD 2
duration 1 = 5 seconds stays on.
2 = 10 seconds
3 = 15 seconds
4 = 30 seconds
5 = 60 seconds
48 Short Ring Setup 0 = Disable 0 80-09-01
1 = Enable 80-09-02
80-09-03
50 Mute Lamp Sta- 0 = normal 0
tus Change 1 = Lamp Status
Change
52 Voice Mail Mes- 0 = Light the VM F-Key This program is not followed if one 0 15-07-01
sage Waiting only of the F-keys is assigned as a VM
Lamp Setup 1 = Light the MW lamp key of some other mailbox.
only
2 = Light both MW
Lamp and VM Key
54 Menu Operation 0 = Automatic Close 0
Mode 1 = Manual Close
55 VRS Message 0 ~ 100 0
Number
57 Caller Log on 0 = Off 1 15-02-34
busy 1 = On

Programming Manual 2-131

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
58 Display mode of 0 = Caller ID 0 13-04-08
trunk incoming 1 = Memo Information 13-04-09
(V1.5 Deleted) 13-04-10
60 Soft Key/Naviga- 0 = Standard Mode 2
tion key Mode 1 = Advanced Mode1
2 = Advanced Mode2
61 Backlight Max 0~8 6
Brightness
62 Backlight Min 0~8 0
Brightness
Program 63 Auto Backlight 0 = Off 0 15-02-64
1 = On
64 Auto Backlight 0 ~ 13 13 15-02-63

15
bound threshold
(auto setting)
65 Auto Backlight 0 ~ 13 0
bound threshold
(manual setting)
66 Dial Button 0 = Off 1
Backlight 1 = On
67 Caller ID shared 0 = Personal 0 20-49-01
groups 1 ~ 8 = Shared Group
68 Mode setting for Read Only: This program can only be 1
incoming call 0 = Voice change by using PC Program-
from extension 1 = Signal ming.
69 Mute Operation 0 = Do not change 0
on Handsfree Mute status
(3.0 Added) 1 = Start with enabled
Mute
2 = Start with muted
Mute
70 Mute Key Opera- 0 = Enabled (Active) This program determines whether 0
tion (V2.0 Added) 1 = Disabled the Mute key is operational during a
call.
71 Disable Softkey 0 = Off When set to 1 (On), disable Softkey 0
(V3.0 Added) 1 = On and cursor key operation at the ter-
minal.

Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern (Program 15-02-35, 36, 38)

Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38

Input Cycle
1 Cycle 1 500 ms - ON / 500 ms - OFF
2 Cycle 2 250 ms - ON / 250 ms - OFF
3 Cycle 3 125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
4 Cycle 4 125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF / 125 ms - ON / 625 ms - OFF
5 Cycle 5 875 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
6 Cycle 6 625 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF / 125 ms - ON / 125 ms - OFF
7 Cycle 7 1000 ms - ON

2-132 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15-02 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal Fre- Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation

quency Pattern
External Incoming Signal High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 16 Hz
Frequency (Pattern 1) Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz
External Incoming Signal High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz
Frequency (Pattern 2) Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz
External Incoming Signal High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz
Frequency (Pattern 3) Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz
Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 16 Hz
External Incoming Signal High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz
Program
Frequency (Pattern 4) Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz
Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 8 Hz
Internal Incoming Signal Fre-
quency
High
Middle
Low
1100 Hz
660 Hz
520 Hz
1400 Hz
760 Hz
660 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
8 Hz
15
Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-133

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line
telephone options.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 SLT Signaling 0 = DP Use this option to tell the system the 1 15-03-03
Type 1 = DTMF type of dialing the connected tele- 45-01-01
phone uses.
For Analog Wireless telephones to
function correctly, this must be set to
0 (dial pulse). If this option is set for
DTMF, after an outside call is
placed, the system cannot dial any
additional digits.
This program change is automatical-
ly performed when the Analog Wire-
less telephone is registered. When
upgrading software from prior ver-
sions, the previous default of 1 is
saved from the prior database so
this option must be changed man-
ually.
03 Terminal Type 0 = Normal Enter 1 for this option to allow a sin- 0 15-03-01
1 = Special gle line port to receive DTMF tones 45-01-01
after the initial call setup. Enter 0 to
have the port ignore DTMF tones af-
ter the initial call setup. For Voice
Mail, always enter 1 (e.g., receive
DTMF tones).
04 Flashing 0 = No Enables/disables Flash for single 1
1 = Yes line telephones.
05 Trunk Polarity 0 = Off Do Not Change Default Entry as 0
Reverse 1 = On DTMF issues may arise with voice
mail.
06 Extension Polari- 0 = Disable (Off) Do Not Change Default Entry as 0
ty Reverse 1 = Enable (On) DTMF issues may arise with voice
mail.
07 Enabled On- 0 = No 1 11-12-45
Hook When 1 = Yes
Holding (SLT)
08 Answer On-Hook 0 = Disable (No) 1 11-12-46
when Holding 1 = Yes (Enable)
(SLT)

2-134 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 Caller ID Func- 0 = Disable (Caller ID Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller 0
tion - For Exter- not displayed.) ID FSK signal for an external Caller
nal Module 1 = Enable (Caller ID is ID module or a 3rd party vendor tel-
displayed.) ephone with Caller ID display.
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting
must be disabled for the system in-
tegration codes to be correct.
With a Single Line Telephone,
this must be set to 0 for incoming
callers to have a talk path.
10 Caller ID Name 0 = Disable Determine if an extension user tele- 1 15-03-09 Program
1 = Enable phone should display the Caller ID
name.

15
11 Caller ID Type 0 = FSK Determine whether the Caller ID 0
1 = DTMF type is FSK or DTMF.
12 Fixed Cadence 0 = Normal 1
1 = Fixed
13 MW sending type 0 = Lamp 0
1 = Caller ID
14 Forwarded Caller 0 = Calling Extension Determine what the display shows 0
ID Display Mode Number (Calling) when a multiline terminal receives a
1 = External Caller ID forwarded outside call.
(Forward)
15 Disconnect with- 0 = Normal Determine whether or not to discon- 0
out dial after 1 = Disconnect nect a held call when on-hook with-
hooking hold out any dialing after hooking-hold.
16 Special DTMF 0 = No Determine whether or not to send 0 45-01-16
Protocol Send 1 = Yes the extension number of the phone
forwarded to the extension when
Program 15-03-04 is set to Special
(1) and not in the VM group.
17 Dial Tone Select 0 = Normal When the function of MW has been 0
1 = New DT set from another extension or VM,
the dial tone upon off hook is selec-
ted.
18 Select Special 0 = Fax This PRG is used for selecting Spe- 0 15-03-03
Terminal Type 1 = Modem cial Terminal Type (Fax or Modem).
(V2.0 Added) This setting influences how to trans-
mit data via SIP trunk. This PRG is
effective at the time of when
PRG15-03-03 1: Special.
19 Door Phone 1~6 Set the SLT door phone number. 0 10-03-05
Number (V4.0 When unlocking the door PRG10-61 (SLIU)
Added) will be in effect. 10-61
15-05-46
Do not set
the same
door phone
number be-
tween
PRG10-03-0
5 (SLIU) and
PRG15-05-4
6.

Programming Manual 2-135

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Normal

Outgoing Call Idle

Reverse

Normal

Incoming Call Idle

Reverse

Normal

Program Call Pickup Idle

Reverse

15 (1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Single Line Telephones

2-136 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP Program
telephone.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

15
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Terminal Type Read Only: -
0 = NGT
1 = H.323
2 = SIP
3 = MEGACO
4 = SIP-MLT
02 IP Phone Fixed MAC address MAC Address of registered SIP MLT 00-00-00- 15-05-01
Port Assignment 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ phone is stored and/or can input the 00-00-00
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF MAC address of an SIP MLT phone
so when it comes online it is provi-
ded with the extension in which the
MAC address matches.
04 Nickname Up to 48 characters Nickname section on Invite mes- No Setting 15-05-17
sage.
Example :
Extension 100 has a Nickname set
to PAUL.
Extension 101 has command
15-05-17 set to Nickname.
The inbound call to extension 101,
from 100, shows PAUL.
Nickname must be unique in the
system.
07 Using IP Address Read Only: - 15-05-01
0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
09 Call procedure Read Only: - 15-05-01
port 0 ~ 65535
15 CODEC Type 1 = Type 1 Assign the CODEC Type of the SIP 1 84-24
2 = Type 2 MLT. 84-11
3 = Type 3 15-05-01
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
16 Authentication Up to 24 characters Assign the authentication password No Setting 15-05-01
Password for SIP single line telephones.

Programming Manual 2-137

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
18 IP Duplication Al- 0 = Not Used If there is an adapter that has one IP 0 15-05-01
lowed Group 1 = Group 1 address coming into it but has multi-
2 = Group 2 ple extensions off of it.
3 = Group 3 Assign all the extensions to a group
4 = Group 4 so that way the CPU knows that the
5 = Group 5 one IP address is assigned to multi-
6 = Group 6 ple extensions.
7 = Group 7
8 = Group 8
9 = Group 9
10 = Group 10
20 Bottom Option Read Only: Shows the type of adapter installed. 0 10-03-10
Program Information 0 = No Option
1 = ADA
2 = BHA
3 = WHA

15 26 DR700 Terminal
Type
0 = Not Set
2 = ITL-()D-1D/
ITL-24BT-1D/
0

ITL-24PA-1D (without
8LKI (LCD)-L)
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
9 = IP4WW-24TIXH
27 Personal ID In- 0 ~ 128 (V3.5 When the SIP Multiline telephone is 0 84-22
dex Changed) using manual/auto registration, as-
sign each phone a unique personal
index. Then go to command 84-22
to assign the user name and pass-
word.
28 Addition Infor- 0 = Do not inform Select whether to inform of addition- 0 15-01-01
mation Setup 1 = Inform al information or not. 15-02-13
15-02-15
15-02-34
29 Terminal WAN- Read Only: 0.0.0.0
side IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
30 DTMF Play dur- 0 = Do Not Play 0
ing Conversation 1 = Play
at Receive Exten-
sion
31 Alarm Tone dur- 0 = Off 1
ing Conversation 1 = On
(RTP packet loss
alarm)
33 LAN Side IP Ad- Read Only: 0.0.0.0.
dress of Terminal 0.0.0.0 ~
255.255.255.255
35 Encryption Mode Read Only: 0
On/Off 0 = Off
1 = On
36 DR700 Firmware Read Only: Indicate a current firmware Version. 00.00.00.00
Version 00.00.00.00 ~ ff.ff.ff.ff
38 Paging Protocol 0 = Multicast Sets the protocol mode for the Pag- 0
Mode 1 = Unicast ing function.
2 = Auto
39 CTI Override 0 = Disable 0
Mode 1 = Enable

2-138 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
40 Calling name dis- 0 = Both name and 0
play info via number
trunk for stand- 1 = Name only
ard SIP 2 = Number only
3 = None
41 Time Zone(hour) 0 ~ 24 12
(- 12 ~ + 12 hour)
43 Video Mode 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
44 Using STD-SIP 0 = Disable 0
Display for CPN 1 = Enable
Program
45 NAT plug & play 0 = OFF Effect this program only when PRG 1 10-46-14
1 = ON 10-46-14 (for DR700) or PRG
10-33-05 (for Standard SIP Termi-
nal) are set to NAT mode. (V4.0 or
higher)
If you are setting the SIP Terminal
using remote router by turning this
15
setting ON you don't need to set the
Port Forward on remote router side.
(V4.0 Added)
Select sending RTP port number to
remote Router, use from negotiation
result (0) or received RTP packet (1)
47 Registration Ex- 0 = Disable On a per station basis, this setting 180 84-23-01
pire Timer for 60 ~ 65535 (sec) defines the SIP registration expiry
NAT (V4.0 timer. This setting applies to DR700
Changed) stations or Standard SIP Terminal
connected via NAPT. If this value is
set to 0, for a NAPT terminal, the
value in PRG 84-23-01 (for DR700)
or PRG 10-33-01 (for Standard SIP
Terminal) are applied.
48 Subscriber Ex- 0 = Disable On a per station basis, this setting 180 84-23-02
pire Timer for 60 ~ 65535 (sec) defines the SIP subscribe expiry
NAPT (V4.0 timer. This setting only applies to
Changed) DR700 stations or Standard SIP
Terminal connected via NAPT. If this
value is set to 0, for a NAPT termi-
nal, the value in PRG 84-23-02 (for
DR700) or PRG 10-33-01 (for
Standard SIP Terminal) are applied.
49 Receiving SIP IN- 0 = Disable Enables to receive a SIP INFO mes- 2
FO (V4.0 Added) 1 = Allowed any time sage from a standard SIP phone as
2 = Allowed while RTP a dial information.
is not available

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-139

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each
extension. An extension can place only outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. Use
Program 14-07 to define the available access maps.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Access Map Number 001 ~ 084 1 14-07

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing

2-140 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a multiline terminal line Program
keys.

For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the function 26
appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program
Function Keys using Service Codes. 15
To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Default Settings

Line Key Function Number Additional Data

LK01 *01 (Trunk Line Key) 1
: : :
LK12 *01 (Trunk Line Key) 12
LK13 0 (No setting) 0
: : :
LK24 0 (No setting) 0

Item No. Item Input Data Additional Data

01 Line Key Number 1 ~ 24 Refer to Table 2-2 Function Number
List on page 2-142.
Function Number 0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99 Refer to Table 2-2 Function Number
(Normal Function Code) (Service Code List on page 2-142.
751 by default)
*00 ~ *99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service
Code 752 by default)

Default

Programmable keys 1 ~ 8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2, etc.). All
other programmable keys are undefined.

Function Number List

Programming Manual 2-141

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Table 2-2 Function Number List

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99) (Service Code 751)

Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note

Number
01 DSS/One-Touch Extension number On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy
or any numbers (up Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND Transfer,
to 36 digits) CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW Busy/Noans, CFW
Both, CFW FL ME
Fast Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND All, CFW
Imm
02 Microphone On (Red) : Mic On
(Mute) Key (ON/ Off : Mic Off
Program OFF)
03 DND Key On (Red) : DND Setup
04 BGM (ON/OFF) On (Red) : Active

15 05
06
Headset
Transfer Key
On (Red) : Headset Operating
None
07 Conference Key On (Red) : Conference Operating
08 Incoming Call Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID
Log On (Red) : Existing Checked CID
Off : No CID
09 Day/Night Mode Mode number (1 ~ On : While each mode
Switch 8) (0 = toggle)
10 Call Forward - On (Red) : Setup
Immediate
11 Call Forward - On (Red) : Setup
Busy
12 Call Forward -No On (Red) : Setup
Answer
13 Call Forward - On (Red) : Setup
Busy/No Answer
14 Call Forward - On (Red) : Setup
Both Ring
15 Call Forward - Fast Blink (Red) : Setup
Follow Me Slow Blink : To be setup
18 Text Message Selectable Display On (Red) : Setup
Setup Message Numbers
(01 ~ 20)
19 External Group External Paging On (Red) : Active
Paging Number
(1 ~ 6)
20 External All Call On (Red) : Active
Paging
21 Internal Group Internal Paging On (Red) : Active
Paging Number
(01 ~ 32)
22 Internal All Call None
Paging
23 Privacy Release None
24 Call Pickup for None
own group
25 Call Pickup for None
Another Group
26 Call Pickup for Call Pickup Group None
Specified Group Number (01 ~ 32)

2-142 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note

Number
27 Speed Dial - Speed Dial Number None
Common/Private (Common / Private)
28 Speed Dial - Speed Dial Number None
Group (Group)
29 Repeat Redial On (Red) : Repeat Dialing
30 Saved Number None
Redial
31 Memo Dial None
32 Meet - Me Con- None
ference Program
33 Override (Off- None
Hook Signaling)
34
35
Break - In
Camp On
None
On (Red) : Active 15
36 Step Call None
37 DND/FWD Over- None
ride Call
38 Message Waiting None
39 Room Monitoring Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring
Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored
41 Buzzer Extension Number On (Red) : Calling party
Fast Blink (Red) : Called party
42 Boss - Secretary Extension Number On (Red) : Active
Call
43 Series Call None
44 Common Hold None
45 Exclusive Hold None
46 Department On (Red) : Withdrawing
Group Log Out
47 Reverse Voice Extension Number Same as DSS
Over
Softphone
doesn't sup-
port Re-
verse Voice
Over. (V1.5
Added)
48 Voice Over On (Red) : Responding
Slow Blink (Red) : Listening
49 Call Redirect Extension Number None
or Voice Mail Num-
ber
50 Account Code None
52 Automatic An- Incoming Ring On (Red) : Setup
swer with Delay Group
Message Setup (01 ~ 25)
53 Automatic An- On (Red) : Delay Message Answering
swer with Delay
Message Start
54 External Call For- On (Red) : Setup
ward by Door
Box

Programming Manual 2-143

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note

Number
55 Extension Name None
Change
56 General Purpose 001 ~ 100 : 001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Off
LED Operation (Red) On Off

57 General Purpose 001 ~ 100 : 001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Off

LED Indication (Red) On Off

58 Automatic Trans- Extension Group Slow Blink (Red) : Set

fer at Department Number Off : Cancel
Group Call (01 ~ 32)
59 Delayed Transfer Extension Group Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Program at Department Number Off : Cancel
Group Call (01 ~ 32)
60 DND at Depart- Extension Group Slow Blink (Red) : Set

15
ment Group Call Number Off : Cancel
(01 ~ 32)
62 Flash Key None
63 Outgoing Call On (Red) : Mode enabled
Without Caller ID
(ISDN)
66 CTI (V3.0 De- On (Red) : CTI active
leted)
72 Keypad Facility
Key
73 Keypad Hold Key
74 Keypad RE-
TRIEVE Key
75 Keypad Confer-
ence Key
76 Application Key Any dial data (8 dig- None
it)
77 Voice Mail (In- Extension Number <InMail>
Skin) or Pilot Number Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own Mail-
box.
Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mail-
box.
<External VM>
On (Red) : Access to Voice Mail
Fast Blink (Green) : New Message (s) in own Mail-
box.
Slow Blink (Red) : New Message (s) in other Mail-
box.
78 Conversation Re- Fast Blink : Recording
cording - Voice
Mail
79 Automated At- Extension Number On (Red) : Setup - All calls
tendant (In-Skin) or Pilot Number Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec
off) (Red) : Setup - busy calls
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup – busy/noans calls
80 Tandem Ringing 1 = Set On (Red) : Master Side
0 = Cancel Exten- Slow Blink : Slave Side
sion Number to Tan-
dem Ring
81 Automatic Trans- Trunk Line No. Off : Cancel
fer to Transfer (001-084) Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Key

2-144 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Function Function Additional Data LED Indication Note

Number
83 Conversation Re- 0 = Pause
cording Function 1 = Re-recording
(VMSU) 2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page
84 Drop Key None
86 Private Call Re- None Off : Cancel
fuse Slow Blink (Red) : Set
87 Caller ID Refuse None Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
88 Dial-In Mode Program 22-17 Ta- Off : Pattern 1, Pattern 5 ~ 8 Program
Switching ble No. On (Red) : Pattern 2
(1 ~ 500) Slow Blink (Red) : Pattern 3
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/625msec

91 Live Recording
Key
off) (Red) : Pattern 4
Slow Blink (Green) : Set 15
94 Call Attendant Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer calls
(125 ms : On / 125 ms : Off / 125 ms : On / 625 ms :
Off) (Red) : Setup - Busy calls
On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls
97 Door Box Access Door Box Number On (Red) : Doorphone Busy
Key (1-6) Off : Doorphone Idle
Fast Blink (Red) : Doorphone Incoming
#02 -- Cutting the tel- Package Number On (Red) : Set
ephone power -- (2-9, 13-15) (V3.5 Off : Cancel
Changed)
#03 -- Remote Moni- Slow Blink (Red) : Remote Monitor Permit
tor Permit -- Off : Remote Monitor Deny
#07 Fix Operation Night Mode Service
Mode (V3.0 Add- Group No. (1-4)
ed)
#10 Conference Re- On (Red): Recording
cord (V6.0 Add- Off : Cancel
ed)

Table 2-3 Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~ *99) (Service Code 752)

Func- Function Additional Da- LED Indication Note

tion ta
Number

*00 ICM Key None

*01 Trunk Key Trunk Number Fast Blink (Green) : Incoming(own)/Recall(own)

(001 ~ 084) Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(other)
On (Green) : Speaking(own)
On (Red) : Speaking(other)
Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)/Transferring(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Transferring(other)/
Recall(other)

*02 Trunk Group Trunk Group Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming (own/other)
Number (001 ~
025)

Programming Manual 2-145

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Func- Function Additional Da- LED Indication Note

tion ta
Number

*03 Virtual Extension Extension Num- Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming(own/other)/Recall(own)

Key ber or Depart- On (Green) : Speaking(own)
ment Group Num- On (Red) : Speaking(other)
ber Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)/Transferring(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)/Transferring(other)/
Recall(other)

*04 Park Key Park Number (01 Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)
~ 64) Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding(other)

*05 Loop Keys 0 = Incoming None

Program Use Programs 1 = Outgoing
15-13-01 and/or 2 = Both
15-13-02 to as-
sign the loop key

15 *06
to a trunk group.
Trunk Access via
Networking
Network System
No. 1 ~ 4
None (V1.5 Added)

*07 Station Park Hold None Slow Blink (Green) : Holding(own)

Fast Blink (Green) : Recall(own)

*10 ACD Log in / Log On : Logged in (V1.5 Added)

out Off : Logged out

*13 ACD off-duty On : While Setup (V1.5 Added)

mode (Rest Slow Blink : Rest Mode Setup
Mode)

*17 ACD Work wrap On : While wrap up time (V1.5 Added)

up time Slow Blink : While setup wrap up time

*19 ACD Queue Sta- None (V1.5 Added)

tus Display

*32 Warning Mes- On (Red) : Play warning message

sage Off : Stop warning message

*33 Sensor Mode On (Red) : Security Sensor On

Off : Security Sensor Off
(125msec:on / 125msec:off / 125msec:on /
625msec:off) : Security Sensor Delay Timer
(PRG20-50-01) is starting. (V1.5 Added)

2-146 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

L E D P a tte rn 0 :[O F F ]

On

O ff
L E D P a tte rn 1 :[F L : O n (5 0 0 m s)/Off(5 0 0 m s)]

On

O ff
L E D P a tte rn 2 :[W K : O n (2 5 0 m s)/Off(2 5 0 m s)]

On

O ff
L E D P a tte rn 3 :[R W : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]

On Program
O ff

15
L E D P a tte rn 4 :[IR : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/ O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(6 2 5 m s)]
On

O ff

L E D P a tte rn 5 :[IL O n (8 7 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]

On

O ff

L E D P a tte rn 6 :[IW O n (6 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]

On

O ff

L E D P a tte rn 7 :[O N ]

On

O ff

LED Indication Reference :

ON = LED pattern 7.
OFF = LED pattern 0.
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3.
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5.
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1.
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3.
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4.

Conditions

• When a key is programmed using service code 752, it cannot be programmed with a function using
the 751 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing
752 + *04 must be undefined by dialing 752 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over
key by dialing 751 + 48.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-147

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range (0 ~
4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you enable
ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see

15
Program 22-03. The chart below shows the available tones. There are 084 available extension ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Incoming Ring Pat- 0 = Tone Pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual extension 0
tern 1 = Tone Pattern 2 is assigned to the function key on the key
2 = Tone Pattern 3 telephone, select the ring tone when re-
3 = Tone Pattern 4 ceiving a call on that key.
4 = Incoming Ring Tone
Extension
5 = Tone pattern 5 (V3.0
Added)
6 = Tone pattern 6 (V3.0
Added)
7 = Tone pattern 7 (V3.0
Added)
8 = Tone pattern 8 (V3.0
Added)

Table 2-4 Program 15-08 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation

Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 16 Hz
Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz
Pattern 2 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz
Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz
Pattern 3 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz
Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz
Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 16 Hz
Pattern 4 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz
Middle 1400 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz
Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 8 Hz
Internal Incoming Sig- High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz
nal Frequency Middle 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz

2-148 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

15

Programming Manual 2-149

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an
extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program
15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.

15 Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual
Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code *03). There are 50 Virtual Extension Ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Key Number 01 ~ 24

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Ringing 0 = No Ringing 0
1 = Ring

Conditions

• Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from
telephone programming.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-150 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority (1 ~ 4) Program
for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring an
extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only

15
flash. There are 50 Virtual Extension ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item No. Item Input Data Description Related Program

01 Priority Or- 1~4 When two or more virtual 15-08
der extensions are set on a
function key on the tele-
Data 0 = Tone Pattern 1 phone, and the tone pat-
1 = Tone Pattern 2 tern by which the sound
2 = Tone Pattern 3 of each extension differs,
3 = Tone Pattern 4 the priority of ring sound
4 = Incoming Extension Ring Tone is set up.
5 = Tone Pattern 5 (V3.0 Added)
6 = Tone Pattern 6 (V3.0 Added)
7 = Tone Pattern 7 (V3.0 Added)
8 = Tone Pattern 8 (V3.0 Added)

Default

• By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order :

Priority Order Ring Tone (Set in Program 15-08)

1 0 (Tone Pattern 1)
2 1 (Tone Pattern 2)
3 2 (Tone Pattern 3)
4 3 (Tone Pattern 4)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-151

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing
options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in
Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode. There are 50 Virtual

15
Extension Ports.

Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports.
Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code *03).

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Key Number 01 ~ 24

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Ringing 0 = Immediate Ring 0 20-04-03
1 = Delayed Ring 15-09-01

Conditions

• Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from telephone
programming.
• Program 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the VE key to Delay
Ring.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-152 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the Conversation Program
Recording destination for each extension.
If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12 is followed.

Input Data
15
Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Recording Destina- Maximum eight digits Enter the extension number to which the No Setting
tion Extension Num- trunk calls should be recorded.
ber
02 Automatic Recording 0 = Off Determine if an extension incoming calls 0
for Incoming Calls 1 = On should be automatically recorded.
03 Recording Contents 0 = Save to dialed Mail 0
Storing Method Box
1 = Save to own Mail
Box
04 Automatic Recording 0 = Off Determine if an extension outgoing calls 0
for Outgoing Calls 1 = On should be automatically recorded.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-153

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-13 : Loop Keys
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset terminal. Loop Keys
can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the entry in item 1. Incoming Loop
Keys use the entry in item 2. Both Way Loop Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Key Number 01 ~ 24

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Outgoing Option 0 ~ 25 0: Programming Func-
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key for ARS, 1 ~ 25 = As- tion Key No. = 01 ~ 24
signs the Loop Key to the trunk group specified)
02 Incoming Option 0 ~ 25 0: Programming Func-
(0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups, tion Key No. = 01 ~ 24
1 ~ 25 = Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group
specified)

Conditions

• Please set Loop Key at Program 15-07 before setting Program 15-13.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-154 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each Program
multiline terminal.

For each SL1100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of Range feature, enter the
destination number (up to 36 digits) and name (up to 12 characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure
to add any required trunk access codes for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either
through 15-14-01 or through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also
15
changed.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Key Number 01 ~ 10

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Dial Data Maximum of 36 digits (0 If PRG 15-02-60 is set to a (0) then the No Setting
~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) stations personal speed dial entries are
@ = Wait for Answer Su- programmed here.
pervision - ISDN trunks Per key number (1 ~ 10) assign the tele-
only phone number that is to be called when
P = Pause - Analog the bin is accessed.
Trunk Only
R = Hook flash - Analog
Trunk Only
02 Name Maximum of 12 charac- Per key number (1 ~ 10) assign a name to No Setting
ters be used when searching through the direc-
tory.
If a name is not assigned for a speed dial
bin the speed dial entry will not be listed in
the directory.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-155

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register ID for
Extensions.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Profile 1~2
(V5.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Register ID None, 0 ~ 31 No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-156 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting LED Flash Program
assignment on each CO line.

Input Data

Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits

15
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 LED Flash Assignment 0 = LED Off 0
1 = LED On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-157

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the operation when a
Virtual Extension Key is pressed.

15 Input Data

Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Virtual Extension 0 = Release Define if calls to a Virtual Extension 1 20-04-01
Key Operation 1 = Land on the key Key land on the Virtual or on the ex-
Mode tension/CO appearance.
This is assigned for the Virtual
Extension Key, not the extension
it resides on.
02 Display mode 0 = Secondary Exten- Defines if calls to or from a Virtual 1
when placing a sion Name Extension Key display the Virtual
call on Virtual 1 = Actual Station Extension Key name or the name of
Extension Key Name the extension it resides on.
03 Show CLI (V3.0 0 = No CLI info When set to a 0, the caller ID of a 0 15-09-01
Added) 1 = Show CLI info trunk call/station call pointed to a vir-
tual extension will not be displayed if
the virtual extension is not set to
ring. When set to a 1, the caller ID
of a trunk call pointed to a virtual ex-
tension will be displayed if the virtual
extension is not set to ring. Station
calls to a virtual that is not assigned
to ring will display the station name
or number if PRG 15-18-04 is set to
a 1.
04 Show Internal 0 = Do Not Show When set to a 0, internal calls to the 0 15-09-01
Caller Informa- 1 = Show virtual extension will not show the 15-18-03
tion (V3.0 Added) name or number of the extension
that is calling.
When set to 1, internal calls to the
virtual extension will show the name
or number of the extension that is
calling if the virtual is assigned to
ring or if PRG 15-18-03 is set to a 1.
05 One Ring (V3.0 0 = Normal Ring Cycle When set to a 0, the virtual exten- 0 15-09-01
Added) 1 = One Ring sion follows the normal ring cycle.
When set to a 1, the virtual exten-
sion will only ring one time (the virtu-
al extension must be first set to ring
in PRG 15-08).

2-158 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Condition

• If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must be set to 1.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

15

Programming Manual 2-159

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the Mobile Extension
feature.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Mobile Extension Tar- 0 = No Setting Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call 0
get Setup 1 ~ 999 = Speed Dial when the Mobile extension is called.
Bin 1 ~ 999 (PRG 13-04)
02 Connect Confirmation 0 = Always (User must Per Mobile Extension, assigned in PRG 0
dial * when answered 11-02, select whether a confirmation is re-
for the call to cut through quired (user dials*) to allow the call to cut
on ALL line types.) through when answered.
1 = On Analog Line
(User must dial * when
answered for the call to
cut through on Analog
lines only.)
2 = Never (When the call
is answered the call is
immediately cuts
through.)
03 Trunk Access Code 0 = Normal Trunk Ac- Select if the Normal (0) or Individual (1) 0
cess (PRG 11-09-01) Trunk access is used when making the call
1 = Individual Trunk Ac- to the mobile number.
cess (PRG 11-09-02)
04 Call Back 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-160 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 15-24 : Registration of Standard SIP Terminal to register data in the standard SIP
terminal where Register is not used.

Input Data
15
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Using IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ IP Address of the standard SIP terminal 0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255 that is used as the SIP extension. When
Program 15-24-03 is set to 1, this Program
cannot be changed from 0.0.0.0 (except
using PCProgramming).
02 Call Procedure Port 0 ~ 65535 Call procedure port of the standard SIP 5060
terminal that is used as SIP extension.
03 Registration Setting 0 = Disable Enables or disables the Registration meth- 0
when REGISTER isn't 1 = Enable od. An error will occur if Program 15-24-01
used is 0.0.0.0 and this Program is set to 1 (ex-
cept using PCProgramming).

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-161

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 15-28 : Trunk Incoming Ring Tone of Extension Setup to define the ringing tone for
each trunk port of extension.

15 Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Trunk port number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Incoming 0 = Trunk incoming ring Assign individual ring tones at ex- 0 22-03
Ring Tone tone tension for each trunk and each 15-02-02
1 = High Night mode.
2 = Middle When 0 (Trunk incoming ring tone)
3 = Low is selected, it follows the setting of
4 = Melody 1 Program 15-02-02.
5 = Melody 2
6 = Melody 3
7 = Melody 4
8 = Melody 5

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-162 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each Program
department group. There are 32 available Department Groups.

Input Data

Department Group Number 1 ~ 32

16
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Department Maximum 12 charac- This program is used to assign a No Setting 11-07
Name ters name to the department group.
02 Department Call- 0 = Normal Routing Use this option to set the call routing 0 16-02
ing Cycle (Priority) for Department Calling. Routing can
1 = Easy - UCD Rout- be either circular (cycles to all
ing (Circular) phones in group) or priority (cycles
to highest priority extensions first).
03 Department 0 = Normal (Intercom Set this option to set how the sys- 0 16-02
Routing when caller hears busy tone.) tem routes an Intercom call to a
Busy (Auto Step 1 = Circular (Intercom busy Department Group member.
Call) caller routes to an idle Intercom callers to the extension
group member.) can either hear busy or route to the
first available department number.
This only occurs for calls to the ex-
tension directly, not the department
number assigned in Program 11-07.
04 Hunting Mode 0 = Last extension is Use this option to set the action tak- 0
called and hunting is en when a call reaches the last ex-
stopped tension in the Department Group (0
1 = Circular = hunting stopped, 1 = hunting re-
peats with circular routing through
the Department Group).
05 Extension Group 0 = Manual (Ring the Determine whether calls ringing a 0 11-16-10
All Ring Mode extensions one at a Department Group should ring all
Operation time when the service extensions in the group simultane-
code are pressed.) ously automatically or manually
1 = Automatic (Ring all when using the service code defined
extensions.) in Program 11-12-09.
When set to (1) Automatic, only
ICM Calls and DID Calls will
ring all the stations in the De-
partment Group.
06 STG Withdraw 0 = Disabled (Call will 0
Mode camp on to the group.)
1 = Automatic (Call fol-
lows PRG 22-11-11.)
07 Call Recall Re- 0 = Disabled (Call will Determine whether or not an unan- 0
striction for STG recall.) swered call transferred to a Depart-
1 = Enabled (Call will ment Group should recall the exten-
not recall.) sion from which it was transferred.

Programming Manual 2-163

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
08 Maximum Queu- 0 ~ 32 This program sets the amount of 0
ing number for 0 = No Queuing calls that can queue to a department
Department group when all members of the
Group Call group are busy.
09 Department 0 ~ 64800 seconds Set how long a call rings a Depart- 15
Hunting No An- ment group extension before hunt-
swer Time ing occurs.
10 Enhanced Hunt 0 = No hunting Set the type of hunting for each Ex- 0
Type 1 = Hunting When Busy tension (Department) Group.
2 = Hunting When Not
Answered
Program 3 = Hunting When Busy
or No Answer

16 Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling

2-164 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department Program
Groups. The system uses these groups (32 Department Groups) for Department Calling. Assign pilot
numbers to Department Groups you set up in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the

16
departments. Use Program 16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group.
When a call comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default Description Related Program

No.
01 Group Num- 1 ~ 32 1 - xxx Set up the Department Group called 11-07
ber (See ) by the pilot number and the exten- 16-01
sion priority when a group is called.
Priority 1 ~ 999 Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.

The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Programs 11-02 and 11-04.
(Extension ports are 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 or higher) Virtual extension ports are 1 ~ 50.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling

Programming Manual 2-165

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for
extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group. There are 32 available
Department Groups.

16 Input Data

Department (Extension) Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item No. Item Input Data Description

01 Secondary Extension Num- 1 ~ 16 This program is set up when placing tele-
ber phones in two or more groups.
Extension Number Maximum 8 digits
Priority Order 0 ~ 999

Default

• All extension groups : No setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling

2-166 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal calls between Program
members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted on a per group basis. Each
department group can restrict calls to up to 8 department groups in Department Group - Departmental

16
Call Restriction.

Input Data

Extension (Department) Group Number 1 ~ 32

Restricted Group Index 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Restrict Department 0 ~ 32 Calls between members of different De- 0
Group Number partment (Station) groups can be restricted
on a per group basis.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-167

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-01 : System Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.

Input Data
20 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
01 Operator Access 0 = Step Call Use this program to set up priority of 0 20-17
Mode 1 = Circular a call when calling an operator tele-
phone.
02 Text Message 0 = Call mode Use this program to select the mode 1 11-11-14
Mode 1 = No Answer/Busy when calling the telephone which 15-07-08
mode set up the text message.
04 Interval timer for 0 ~ 64800 While on Networking Operation It 0
BLF Data (V1.5 (0 ~ 6480 seconds) sends a BLF message to other sys-
Added) tem interval of per 100s.
05 DTMF Receive 0 ~ 64800 seconds For OPXs, analog telephones and 10 25-07-01
Active Time certain analog trunks (like DISA),
the system attaches a DTMF receiv-
er to the port for this time. The sys-
tem releases the receiver after the
time expires.
06 Alarm Duration 0 ~ 64800 seconds This time sets the duration of the 30 11-11-12
alarm signal.
07 Callback Ring 0 ~ 64800 seconds Callback rings an extension for this 15 11-12-05
Duration Time time. 15-07-35
08 Trunk Queuing 0 ~ 64800 seconds Trunk Queuing callback rings an ex- 15 11-12-05
Callback Time tension for this time. 15-07-35
09 Callback/Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds The system cancels an extension 64800 11-12-05
Queuing Cancel Callback or Trunk Queuing request 15-07-35
Time after this time.
10 Trunk Guard 0 ~ 64800 seconds The amount of time the system 1
Timer waits to seize the next outside line
after the system releases an outside
line.
12 Telephone/Web 1 ~ 86400 The system automatically logs out of 900
Pro Logout Time (86400 seconds = 1 a Telephone/Web Pro session after (15 min.)
day) inactivity lasting this time.
16 Mobile Extension 1 ~ 64800 seconds The amount of time the system 15 15-22-04
Callback time waits to until system ends the call
back.
17 Day/Night 0 = Toggle (Will follow This program sets the operation 0 (V4.0 15-07
Change Key PRG 12-08-01.) mode for the Night Mode Key (PRG Changed)
Mode 1 = Skip (When press- 15-07 key 09).
ed the system will step
to the next night mode
time period in PRG
12-02.)

2-168 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
20 ProgressTone for 0 = Disable Enable/Disable the ProgressiveTone 1
Mobile Extension 1 = Enable when calling a Mobile Extension.
Setting (V4.0
Added)

Conditions

None

Program

Feature Cross Reference

None
20

Programming Manual 2-169

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various system options for
multiline telephones.

20 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Loop Key Op- 0 = Keep Lamp 1
eration Mode 1 = Extinction
Mode 0 = Keep Lamp 1 = LED Off
Incoming : 300 IPM Red blink
Talking : Green Lighting LED Off
(on Talking TEL)
Holding : 60 IPM Green LED Off
blink (on holding
TEL)
02 Trunk Group Access 0 = Outgoing / Incoming Use this option 0
Key Operating Mode 1 = Outgoing to set the oper-
2 = Incoming ating mode of
the extension
trunk group
keys. The keys
are for incom-
ing access,
outgoing ac-
cess, or both.
04 Retrieve the Line Af- 0 = Not Holding (No Keep) Enable (1) or 1
ter Transfer 1 = Holding (Keep) disable (0) an
extension abili-
ty to answer a
call after it has
been transfer-
red, but before
it is answered.
05 Headset Busy Mode 0 = No (Disable) Set the condi- 0 20-09-07
1 = Yes (Enable) tions under
which a head-
set extension
is busy to in-
coming callers.
06 Pre-selection Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds When a multi- 5
line terminal
user preselects
a line key, the
system re-
members the
pre-selection
for this time.

2-170 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
07 Time and Date Dis- 1~8 Set how the 3
play Mode Type 1 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3 : 15 PM Time and Date
Type 2 = (12 hour) 3 : 15 PM MAR 10 TUE appear on dis-
Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3 : 15 PM play tele-
Type 4 = (12 hour) 3 : 15 PM TUE 10 MAR phones. There
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15 : 15 are eight dis-
Type 6 = (24 hour) 15 : 15 MAR 10 TUE play modes.
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15 : 15
Type 8 = (24 hour) 15 : 15 TUE 10 MAR
08 LCD Display Hold- 0 ~ 64800 seconds 5
ing Time
09 Disconnect Supervi- 0 = Disable (Off) Use this option 1 Program
sion 1 = Enable (On) to enable or
disable discon-
nect supervi-

20
sion for the
system trunks.
10 Time Before Shifting 0 = No Shift (Power saving mode off) 0 15-02-18
to Power-Saving 1 = 1 minute
Mode 2 = 2 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = 8 minutes
5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes
11 Handsfree Micro- 0 = Off Use this option 1
phone Control 1 = On to control the
setting for Mul-
tiline Terminal
Handsfree mi-
crophone after
being discon-
nected and re-
connected. If
set to 0, the
microphone is
always off
when the ter-
minal is recon-
nected. If set to
1, the micro-
phone remains
in the same
state it was in
when the ter-
minal is recon-
nected.
12 Forced Intercom 0 = Disable (Voice) Use this option 1
Ring (ICM Call Type) 1 = Enable (Signal) to enable or
disable Forced
Intercom Ring-
ing. If enabled,
incoming Inter-
com calls nor-
mally ring. If
disabled, Inter-
com calls
voice-an-
nounce.
15 Caller ID Display 0 = Name and Number (Both) 0
Mode 1 = Name
2 = Number
18 Dialing Record Dis- 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30
play Time

Programming Manual 2-171

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
19 DSS Key - Virtual 0 = No Sets the mode 0
Extension Mode 1 = Yes of a virtual ex-
tension key
that appears
on a DSS con-
sole.
24 LCD scroll mode 0 = Character 0
1 = Dot

Program Conditions

None

20 Feature Cross Reference

None

2-172 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for Program
single line telephones.

Input Data
20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 SLT Call Waiting 0 = Hook Flash (Hook- For a busy single line telephone, set 0 11-12-47
Answer Mode ing) the mode used to answer a camp-
1 = Hook Flash + Serv- ed-on trunk call.
ice Code 794
02 Ignore Received 0 = Do Not Ignore (No) Use this option to define whether 0 15-03-01
DP Dial on DTMF 1 = Ignore (Yes) the system should receive dial pulse
SLT Port and DTMF signals (0) or ignore dial
pulse and only accept DTMF signals
(1).
03 SLT DTMF Dial to 0 = Receive all dialed • Type 0 : The system keeps the 0 20-03-04
Trunk Lines data, before sending digits dialed by the single line tel-
(All) ephone on a trunk in a buffer. Af-
1 = Direct through out ter all the digits are received, the
(Direct) system sends all the digits to the
trunk. If the time space between
digits is longer than the time in
Item 4, the system considers all
digits received.
• Type 1 : The system passes the
received digits from the single line
telephone to the trunk immediate-
ly. If the single line telephone has
a Last Number Dial key without a
pause, this key may not be able to
use the Last Number Dial key with
the Type 1 setting.
When using a third-party external
paging device, set this option to 1.
In addition, set Program 20-03-04 to
1
04 Dial Sending 0 ~ 64800 seconds When ARS or an analog extension 3 20-03-03
Start Time for user accesses a trunk and dials an
SLT or ARS outside call, the system waits this
time before outdialing the first digit.
When using a third-party external
paging device, set this option to 1.
In addition, set Program 20-03-03 to
1.
05 SLT Operation 0 = Normal Mode 0
Mode 1 = Extended Mode 1
2 = Extended Mode 2

Programming Manual 2-173

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
06 Headset Ringing 0 ~ 64800 seconds Define the headset ringing start 5 20-13-38
Start Time (for time. After this time expires from the
SLT) time when a single line telephone is
off-hook, the system sets the single
line telephone to headset ringing
mode.
07 Trunk Call Dial 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 20-03-03
Forced Sending 20-03-04
Start Time
(Forced Dial)

Program
Conditions

20 None

Feature Cross Reference

• Single Line Telephones

2-174 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various system options for Program
Virtual Extensions. There are 50 available Virtual Extension ports.

Input Data
20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
03 Virtual Extension 0 ~ 64800 seconds Virtual Extensions set for Delayed 10
Delay Interval Ringing (see Program 15-11) ring
the extension after this time.
04 Virtual Extension 0 = Normal When set to Enhanced, the BLF will 1
Key Seize Mode 1 = Enhanced Option not show as being busy when the
station is on a trunk call.
When set to Normal, the BLF will
show as being busy when on a trunk
call.
05 Ringtone mode 0 = Off Enable the distinctive ring tone 0 22-03-01
for incoming to 1 = On when incoming ring. 15-08-01
VE (V2.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Virtual Extensions

Programming Manual 2-175

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service (COS) to an
extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class
of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for

20
each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Class of Service for Extensions 1 ~ 15 Extension 101 is Class
15 and other Extension
are Class 1

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

2-176 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator Program
service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Manual Night 0 = OFF (User cannot Turns off or on an extension for COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-01
Service Enabled control manual night manual Night Service Switching. COS15 = 1
mode.)
1 = ON (User can con-
trol manual night
mode.)
02 Changing the 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-02
Music on Hold 1 = On change the Music on Hold tone. COS15 = 1
Tone
03 Time Setting 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to set COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-03
1 = On the Time via Service Code 728. COS15 = 1
04 Storing Speed 0 = Off (Deny) Turns off or on an extension to store COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-04
Dialing Entries 1 = On System or Group Speed Dialing COS15 = 1
numbers.
05 Set/Cancel Auto- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-06
matic Trunk-to- 1 = On ability to use the Trunk-to-Trunk For- COS15 = 0 11-10-07
Trunk Transfer warding service codes. 11-10-08
06 Charging Cost 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-09
Display 1 = On COS15 = 0/1
10 Programmable 0 = Off Turns off or on the ability for an ex- COS1 ~ 14/ 11-11-38
Function Key 1 = On tension user ability to program the COS15 = 1
Programming Appearance function keys using
(Appearance Service Code 752.
Level)
11 Forced Trunk 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-26
Disconnect (ana- 1 = On ability to use Forced Trunk Discon- COS15 = 1
log trunk only) nect.
12 Trunk Port Disa- 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-27
ble 1 = On COS15 = 1
13 VRS Record 0 = Off Turns off or on extension user ability COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-20
(VRS Msg Opera- 1 = On to record, erase and listen to VRS COS15 = 0/1
tion) messages.
14 VRS General 0 = Off Turns an extension off or on to dial 4 COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-21
Message Play 1 = On or Service Code 611 to listen to the COS15 = 0/1
General Message.

Programming Manual 2-177

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
15 VRS General 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-22
Message Record/ 1 = On ability to dial Service Code 612 and COS15 = 0/1
Delete record, listen to, or erase the Gener-
al Message.
18 SMDR Printout 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-23
Accumulated Ex- 1 = On COS15 = 1
tension Data
19 SMDR Printout 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-24
Department 1 = On COS15 = 1
Group (STG) Da-
ta
Program 20 SMDR Printout 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-25
Accumulated Ac- 1 = On COS15 = 1
count Code Data

20 21

23
Register and de-
lete DECTPP
CO MSG Waiting
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off Enable or Disable an extension abil-
COS1 ~ 14/
COS15 = 1
COS1 ~ 14/
Indication Call- 1 = On ity to receive CO Message Waiting COS15 = 1
back Number Indication.
Programming
24 Set/Cancel Pri- 0 = Off (User cannot Per class of service (PRG 20-06-01) COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-32
vate Call Refuse control the feature.) this program is used to allow or de- COS15 = 1
1 = On ny the stations ability to set or can-
cel the Private Call Refuse feature.
25 Set/Cancel Caller 0 = Off (User cannot Enable or Disable an extension abil- COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-33
ID Refuse control the feature.) ity to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse. COS15 = 1 11-10-34
1 = On
26 Dial-In Mode 0 = Off (Station cannot COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-35
Switch control DDI switching.) COS15 = 1
1 = On (Station can
control DDI switching.)
27 Do-Not-Call Ad- 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 25-01-07
ministrator 1 = On COS15 = 1 15-07-89
20-01-19
30 Date Setting 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/ 11-10-41
1 = On COS15 = 1
31 System Wide call 0 = Off COS1 ~ 14/
forward clear 1 = On COS15 = 0/1
33 Caller ID Check- 0 = Off This program sets the Caller ID COS 1 ~ 5 = 0
ing (V4.0 Added) 1 = On Checking.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

2-178 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing call Program
feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Intercom Calls 0 = Off Turns off or on Intercom calling for COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On the extension.
02 Trunk Outgoing 0 = Off Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Calls 1 = On for the extension.
03 System Speed 0 = Off (Deny) Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Dialing 1 = On to make outbound calls using sys-
tem speed dial numbers.
04 Group Speed Di- 0 = Off (Deny) Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
aling 1 = On to make outbound calls using group
speed dial numbers.
05 Dial Number Pre- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension for us- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
view (Preset Dial) 1 = On ing Dial Number Preview.
06 Toll Restriction 0 = Off Turns off or on Toll Restricting Over- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 21-01-07
Override 1 = On ride (Service Code 663). 21-07
07 Repeat Redial 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On Repeat Redial.
08 Toll Restriction 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Dial Block 1 = On Dial Block.
09 Hotline/Exten- 0 = Off Turns off or on Ringdown Extension COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
sion Ringdown 1 = On for extensions with this COS.
10 Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension allow- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ing it to force Handsfree Answer-
back or Forced Intercom Ringing for
outgoing Intercom calls.
11 Protect for the 0 = Off (Internal Call) COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Call Mode 1 = On
Switching from
Caller
12 Department 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Group Step Call- 1 = On Department Group Step Calling.
ing

Programming Manual 2-179

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
13 ISDN CLIP 0 = Off (when set to Off Determines if the ISDN calling line COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 10-03-05
the system will not identity presentation and screening 15-01-04
send any outbound indicators are allowed.
calling party informa-
tion.)
1 = On (when set to ON
the system will send
calling party informa-
tion for the station or
trunk.)
14 Call Address In- 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
formation 1 = On
Program
15 Block Outgoing 0 = Off Turns off or on the system ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 14-01-20
Caller ID 1 = On automatically block outgoing Caller 14-01-21
ID information when a user places a

20
call.
If this option is on, the system auto-
matically inserts the Caller ID block
code (defined in Program 14-01-21)
before the user-dialed digits.
16 Display E911 Di- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to dis- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
aled Extension 1 = On play the name and number of the
Name and Num- extension that dialed E911.
ber
17 ARS Override of 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Trunk Access 1 = On to override the trunk access map
Map programming for outgoing calls.
19 Hotline for SPK 0 = Off The ability of an extension to have COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-08-09
1 = On Hotline activated or deactivated
when going off hook via the speaker
key.
20 Hot Key Pad 0 = Off The ability of an extension to make COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
1 = On a call by just dialing the number
without first going off hook.
21 Automatic Trunk 0 = Off The ability of an extension to auto- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Seizing by Press- 1 = On matically access Trunk Route when
ing SPK Key going off hook via the speaker key.
22 Voice Over to 0 = Off The ability of an extension to make COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Busy Virtual Ex- 1 = On Voice Over to Busy Virtual Exten-
tension sion.
23 Display indica- 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
tion for security 1 = On
sensor detection
24 Display indica- 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
tion for emergen- 1 = On
cy call by remote
inspection

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

2-180 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming call Program
feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Second Call for 0 = Off (2nd call will not Turns off or on the extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
DID/ be allowed.) to receive a second call from a DID,
DISA/DIL/E&M 1 = On (2nd call is al- DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
Override lowed.)
With this option set to 1, the des-
tination extension must be busy
for a second DNIS caller to ring
through. If the destination exten-
sion does not have a trunk key
available for the second call and
a previous call is ringing the ex-
tension but has not yet been an-
swered, the second caller hears
busy regardless of this program
setting.
02 Caller ID Display 0 = Off Turns off or on the Caller ID display COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On at an extension. (V1.5 Changed)
04 Notification for 0 = Off Determines whether or not an ex- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Incoming Call 1 = On tension display shows Check List
List Existence when an incoming call is missed by
a user.
05 Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-11-15
1 = On enable Handsfree Answerback or 11-11-16
Forced Intercom Ringing for their in-
coming Intercom calls.
06 Incoming Time 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Display 1 = On
07 Call Queuing 0 = Off (Calls are not Turn off or on an extension ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 20-13-06
queued.) have calls queued if a call rings the
1 = On (Calls are extension when it is busy.
queued.)
09 Deny Collect Call 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Receiving 1 = On
13 DND Active 0 = Immediate When set to 0, and if set DND dur- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
While Ringing 1 = Next call ing an incoming call, the call for the
(V3.0 Added) terminal stops immediately.
When set to 1, and if set DND dur-
ing an incoming call, the call for the
terminal continues ringing and set
for the next call.

Programming Manual 2-181

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Program

20

2-182 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature Program
availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Group Call Pickup 0 = Off Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
(Within Group) 1 = On ringing an extension Pickup Group and
ringing group calls (Service Code *#).
02 Group Call Pickup 0 = Off Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
(Another Group) 1 = On ringing outside a group (Service Code
769).
03 Group Call Pickup for 0 = Off Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Specific Group 1 = On specific group (Service Code 768).
04 Telephone Call Pick- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to be picked COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
up 1 = On up by a call pickup
05 Directed Call Pickup 0 = Off Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
for Own Group 1 = On calls ringing an extension Pickup Group
(Service Code 756).
06 Meet-Me Conference 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to use Meet- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
and Paging 1 = On Me Conference and Paging.
07 Automatic Off-Hook 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to use Univer- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Answer 1 = On sal Auto Answer (no service code re-
quired).
08 Virtual Extension Off- 0 = Off (Ringing Line Turns off or on an extension to answer an COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Hook Answer Preference Disabled) incoming call on a Virtual Extension simply
1 = On (Ringing Line by lifting the handset.
Preference Enabled)
09 Call Pickup Callback 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On Call Pickup to pick up Callback calls.
10 Answer Preset 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
1 = On

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-183

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

20

2-184 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and Program
Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Call Forward All 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to ini- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tiate Call Forwarding All.
02 Call Forward When 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Busy 1 = On Call Forward when Busy.
03 Call Forwarding 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
When Unanswered 1 = On Call Forward when Unanswered.
04 Call Forwarding (Both 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to acti- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Ringing) 1 = On vate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing.
05 Call Forwarding with 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to ini- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Follow Me 1 = On tiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me.
06 Unscreened Transfer 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
(Ring Inward Trans- 1 = On Unscreened Transfer.
fer)
07 Transfer Without 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Holding 1 = On Transfer Without Holding.
08 Transfer Information 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability for in- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Display 1 = On coming Transfer preanswer display.
09 Group Hold Initiate 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to ini- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tiate a Group Hold.
10 Group Hold Answer 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to pick COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On up a call on Group Hold.
11 Automatic On-Hook 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to use COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Transfer 1 = On Automatic On Hook Transfer.
12 Call Forwarding Off 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to set COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Premise (External 1 = On up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their
Call Forwarding) telephone.
13 Operator Transfer Af- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability to have COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
ter Hold Callback 1 = On a call which recalls from hold transfer to
the operator.
14 Trunk-to-Trunk Trans- 0 = Off Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
fer Restriction 1 = On Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer is not possible.
15 VRS Personal Greet- 0 = Off Turns off or on a Service Code to record, COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
ing (Message Greet- 1 = On listen to, or erase the Personal Greeting
ing) Message.

Programming Manual 2-185

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
16 Call Redirect 0 = Off Turns off or on a multiline terminal user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ability to transfer a call to a predefined
destination (such as an operator, voice
mail, or another extension) without an-
swering the call.
17 Department Group 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Trunk-to-Trunk Trans- 1 = On set Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a De-
fer (Each Telephone partment Group.
Group Transfer)
18 No Recall 0 = Off No Recall set to "Allow" (1) will not stop COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
1 = On transferred calls from recalling from a virtu-
Program al extension.
19 Hold/Extended Park 0 = Off Determine if an extension Class of Service COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
1 = On should allow either a normal or extended

20
Park.
20 No Callback 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension to receive COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
1 = On callbacks.
21 Restriction for Tan- 0 = Allow Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
dem Trunking on 1 = Deny ability to set up a tandem/conference call
Hang Up automatically when they hang up.
22 Restricted Unsuper- 0 = Allow Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
vised Conference 1 = Deny to initiate an unsupervised conference.
23 VE Call Forward Set/ 0 = Off Turn on or off an extension ability to set or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Cancel 1 = On cancel call forwarding for a virtual exten-
sion.
24 Trunk Park Hold 0 = Non Exclusive Hold Set the hold type when a trunk call is put COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Mode (Off) on hold by an extension.
1 = Exclusive Hold (On)
25 Transfer Park Call 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension ability to trans- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On fer a parked call.
26 Station Park Hold 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
mode 1 = On
27 Call Park Automati- 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
cally Search 1 = On
28 Both Ring Enhance- 0 = Normal COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
ment 1 = Enhanced
30 Disable Call FWD In- 0 = Off When set to 1, Call FWD setting is not COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
dication on LCD (V3.0 1 = On shown on the terminal LCD.
Added)
31 Transfer to Remote 0 = Off Use this option to enable or disable an ex- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Conference (V6.0 1 = On tensions ability to transfer a call to a re-
Added) mote conference.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

2-186 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging Program
Cost service availability for each extension service class.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

20
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
02 Advice of Charge (ISDN-AOC) 0 = Off COS 01~15 = 0
1 = On
03 Cost Display (TTU) 0 = Off COS 01~15 = 1
1 = On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Programming Manual 2-187

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the
supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

20 Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Long Conversa- 0 = Off Turns off or on the Warning Tone for COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
tion Alarm 1 = On Long Conversation (not for single
line telephones).
02 Long Conversa- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
tion Cutoff (In- 1 = On to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
coming) incoming calls.
03 Long Conversa- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
tion Cutoff (Out- 1 = On to use Long Conversation Cutoff for
going) outgoing calls.
04 Call 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Forward/DND 1 = On to use Call Forwarding/DND Over-
Override (Bypass ride.
Call)
05 Intercom Off- 0 = Off (ICM off hook Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Hook Signaling signaling disabled.) to receive off-hook signals.
1 = On (ICM off hook
signaling enabled.)
06 Automatic Off- 0 = Off (manually) Allows a busy extension ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Hook Signaling 1 = On (automatically) manually (0) or automatically (1) re-
(Automatic Over- ceive off-hook signals.
ride)
07 Message Waiting 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On to leave Message Waiting.
08 Conference 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ability to initiate a conference or
Meet-Me Conference.
09 Privacy Release 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ability to initiate a Voice Call Confer-
ence.
10 Barge-In Monitor 0 = Speech Enables the extension Barge-In COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-13-45
1 = Monitor Mode to be Speech mode (0) or
Monitor mode (1).
11 Room Monitor, 0 = Off Turns off or on extension user ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Initiating Exten- 1 = On to Room Monitor other extensions.
sion

2-188 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
12 Room Monitor, 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Extension Being 1 = On be monitored by other extensions.
Monitored
13 Continued Dial- 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
ing (DTMF) Sig- 1 = On ability to use Continued Dialing,
nal on ICM Call which allows DTMF signal sending
while talking on extension.
14 Department Call- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
ing (PLT No 1 = On ability to call a Department Group
Called Exten- Pilot.
sion)
15 Barge-In, Initiate 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 Program
1 = On ability to barge-in on other's calls.
16 Barge-In, Re- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 0

17
ceive

Barge-in Tone/
1 = On

0 = Off
to have other extensions barge-in
on calls.
Turns off or on the Barge-In tone. If COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
20
Display (Intru- 1 = On on, callers hear an alert tone and
sion Tone) their display indicates the Barge-In
when another extension barges into
their conversation. If off, there is no
alert tone or display indication.
18 Programmable 0 = Off Turns off or on extension user ability COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Function Key 1 = On to program General function keys
Programming using Service Code 751 (by default).
(General Level) (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for
Service Code 752.)
19 Selectable Dis- 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user 1
play Messaging 1 = On ability to use Selectable Display
(Text Messaging) Messaging.
20 Account Code/ 0 = Off (Call restricted.) Turns off or on operator alert when COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Toll Restriction 1 = On (Call routed to an extension user improperly enters
Operator Alert operator.) an Account Code or violates Toll Re-
(Restricted Oper- striction.
ation Transfer)
21 Extension Name 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ability to program its name.
22 Busy Status Dis- 0 = Off Turns off or on the ability to display COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-13-06
play (Called Par- 1 = On the detailed state of the called party.
ty Status)
23 Display the Rea- 0 = Off Select whether an extension should COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
son for Transfer 1 = On display the reason a call is being
transferred to their extension (Call
Forward Busy, Call Forward No An-
swer, and DND).
24 Privacy Release 0 = Off Turns off or on a user ability to press COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
by Pressing Line 1 = On a line key to barge into an outside
Key call. The Barge-In feature must be
enabled if this option is to be used.
26 Group Listen 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ability to use Group Listen.
27 Busy on Seizing 0 = Off If set to 1, you can call a busy ex- COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Virtual Extension 1 = On tension which is talking on a virtual
extension key. Program 20-13-06
(Call Waiting) must be set to 0 for
this option to work.
28 Allow Class of 0 = Off Turns off or on the ability of an ex- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Service to be 1 = On tension Class of Service to be
Changed changed via Service Code 677.

Programming Manual 2-189

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
29 Paging Display 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On ability to display paging information.
30 Background Mu- 0 = Deny (user cannot Allow or Deny an extension user to COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
sic control background mu- turn Background Music on and off.
sic on their station.)
1 = Allow (user can
control background mu-
sic on their station.)
31 Connected Line 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Identification 1 = On
(COLP)
Program 32 Deny Multiple 0 = Off Allows or Denies an extension from COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Barge-Ins 1 = On having multiple users Barge into
their conversation.

20 34 Block Manual
Off-Hook Signal-
ing
0 = Off
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension user
ability to block off-hook signals man-
ually sent from a co-worker.
COS 01 ~ 15 = 0

35 Block Camp On 0 = Off ( Camp On Turns off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 0

blocked.) ability to block callers from dialing to
1 = On (Camp On al- Camp On.
lowed.)
36 Call Duration 0 = Off Turns off or on an extension display COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Timer Display 1 = On of the Call Duration Time. The sys-
tem waits until the interdigit time
(Program 21-01-01) expires before
beginning this timer.
38 Headset Ringing 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
for SLT 1 = On ability to use the Headset ringing
39 ACD Queue Sta- 0 = Off Turn off or on the ACD Queue Sta- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 41-20
tus Display (V1.5 1 = On tus Display for an extension Class of
Added) Service. Any extension, which has
this option enabled, also hears the
queue alarm.
40 Do Not Disturb 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-11-08
1 = On ability to set or cancel Do Not Dis- 15-07-03
turb.
41 Voice Mail Mes- 0 = Off Turn off or on the Voice Mail Mes- COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
sage Indication 1 = On sage Indication for an extension on
on DSS a DSS console.
42 Extension Data 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-15-12
Swap Enabling 1 = On ability to use Extension Data Swap.
44 Live Monitor En- 0 = Off Turn off or on an extension user COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
abling 1 = On ability to use Live Monitor.
45 Mute Key Mode 0 = Off Set per class of service, when in COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 20-13-10
while Call Moni- 1 = On Call Monitoring Mode determines if
toring the monitored parties receive the
barge in alert tone when Coaching
Mode is enabled.
46 Remote Confer- 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 1 11-19
ence 1 = On 20-34
47 Station Number 0 = Off Determine if a station Number will COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Display 1 = On be displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
in an idle state.
48 Station Name 0 = Off Determine if a station Number will COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Display 1 = On be displayed (On) or not displayed
(Off) in the LCD when the phone is
in an idle state.

2-190 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
49 BLF Indication 0 = Off (Disabled) Determine if a BLF of the station will COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
on CO Incoming 1 = On (Enabled) light when a Normal CO call is ring-
State ing the phone.
51 Number and 0 = Off Determine if an extension name and COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Name appear in 1 = On number will be listed (On) or unlis-
the Directory ted (Off) in the directory.
52 VoIPDB All DSP 0 = Disable Set whether “All DSP Busy” alarm COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Busy Display 1 = Enable displays on LCD when the caller
makes an IP call and there is no
VoIPDB DSP resource.
53 Language Selec- 0 = Disable COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 11-11-68
tion for specific 1 = Enable 15-02-01 Program
extension 47-02-16
54 Call waiting for 0 = Disable COS 01 ~ 15 = 0 20-13-05
standard SIP ter-
minal
1 = Enable 20-13-06
20-09-01
20-09-07
20
55 Intercom Call to 0 = Off COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Room Monitor 1 = On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Programming Manual 2-191

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie line
Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign
tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.

20 Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by this program.
However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog trunk calls are NOT supported by this
program.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 First Digit Absorption 0 = Off For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
(Delete First Digit Di- 1 = On absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit.
aled) Use this to make the tie trunk compatible
with 3- and 4-digit tie line service. This op-
tion does not apply to DISA.
02 Trunk Group 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
Routing/ARS Access 1 = On tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk
Group Routing or Automatic Route Selec-
tion (ARS/F-Route).
03 Trunk Group Access 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tie trunk caller ability to access trunk
groups for outside calls (Service Code
704).
04 Outgoing System 0 = Off This option enables or disables DISA or tie COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
Speed Dial 1 = On trunk caller ability to use the System
Speed Dialing.
05 Operator Calling 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tie trunk caller ability to dial 0 for the tele-
phone system operator.
06 Internal Paging 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone
system Internal Paging.
07 External Paging 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone
system External Paging.
08 Direct Trunk Access 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
1 = On tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Trunk
Access (Service Code #9).
09 Forced Trunk Discon- 0 = Off This option enables or disables a tie trunk COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
nect <Not for ISDN T- 1 = On caller ability to use Forced Trunk Discon-
point> nect (Service Code 11-10-26). This option
is not available to DISA callers.

2-192 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
10 Call Forward Setting 0 = Off Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
by Remote via DISA 1 = On use the Call Forward service codes (Pro-
grams 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05).
11 DISA/Tie Trunk Barge- 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 0
In 1 = On tie trunk caller ability to use the Barge-In.
12 Retrieve Park Hold 0 = Off This option enables or disables a DISA or COS 01 ~ 15 = 1
1 = On tie trunk caller ability to retrieve a Park
Hold call.

Conditions Program

None

20
Feature Cross Reference
• Class of Service
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2-193

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type.

Input Data
20 Item
No.
Item Input Data Default

01 Incoming Signal Type : Normal In- Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 2

coming Call on Trunk
02 Incoming Signal Type : PBX, CES Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 8
Incoming Call
03 Incoming Signal Type : Incoming Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 12
Internal Call
04 Incoming Signal Type : DID/ Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 8
DISA/VRS
05 Incoming Signal Type : DID/DDI Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 8
06 Incoming Signal Type : Dial-In in Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 12
the E&M Tie Line
07 Incoming Signal Type : Door Box Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 8
Ringing for SLT
08 Incoming Signal Type : Virtual Ex- Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 8
tension Ring
09 Incoming Signal Type : Callback Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 11
10 Incoming Signal Type : Alarm for Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 5
SLT
11 Incoming Signal Type : VRS Wait- Ringing Cycle Number : 1 ~ 13 6
ing Message Incoming Call

Table 2-5 Ringing Cycles

Number Ringing Cycle

1 On
2 On : 2.0 / Off : 4.0
3 On : 1.0 / Off : 2.0
4 On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5
5 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25
6 On : 0.5 / Off : 0.5 / On : 0.5 / Off : 1.5
7 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 5.25
8 On : 0.375 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.375 / Off : 2.0
9 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 0.125 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.0
10 On : 1.0 / Off : 4.0

2-194 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Number Ringing Cycle

11 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 4.25
12 On : 1.0 / Off : 3.0
13 On : 0.25 / Off : 0.25 / On : 0.25 / Off : 2.25

Conditions

None

Program
Feature Cross Reference
None
20

Programming Manual 2-195

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages.
There are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 48 characters. Use the following chart when
programming messages.

20 Use this keypad digit ...

1
When you want to ...
Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2 Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В

* Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex :
TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft
key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data

Selectable Display Message Number 01 ~ 20

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Selectable Display Messages 48 characters Refer below

Default

Number Message
1 IN MEETING UNTIL ## : ##
2 MEETING ROOM - ########
3 COME BACK ## : ##
4 PLEASE CALL ###########

2-196 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Number Message
5 BUSY CALL AFTER ## : ##
6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ## : ##
7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ## / ##
8 BUSINESS TRIP ##########
9 GONE FOR THE DAY
10 ON VACATION UNTIL ## / ##
11 MESSAGE 11
12 MESSAGE 12
13 MESSAGE 13
Program
14 MESSAGE 14
15 MESSAGE 15
16
17
MESSAGE 16
MESSAGE 17
20
18 MESSAGE 18
19 MESSAGE 19
20 MESSAGE 20

Conditions

• Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Display Messages

Programming Manual 2-197

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-17 : Operator Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials 0
(defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program.

If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension

20 assigned in this option.

Input Data

Operator Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Operator’s Ex- Up to eight digits Define the extension numbers which 101 11-01
tension Number are to be used by operators. 20-01-01
02 Operator Con- 0 = Normal Key Set Determines an operator console 0
sole 1 = Special Operator type when any extension user dials
Console "0" , the assigned extensions shall
ring.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Intercom

2-198 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service tone timers. Program
Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Extension Dial 0 ~ 64800 seconds After getting Intercom dial tone, a 30
Tone Time telephone user has this time to dial
the first digit of the Intercom call.
02 Busy Tone Timer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 15
03 Congestion Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds A Busy Tone when system resour- 10
ces run short. (Such as DTMF re-
ceiver resources).
04 Call Waiting Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds This option sets the time between 10
Timer Call Waiting tones. This timer also
sets the time between Off-Hook Sig-
naling alerts.
05 Multiline Confir- 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10
mation Tone
06 Interval of Call 3 ~ 64800 seconds 10
Waiting Tone
07 Intrusion Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds After a call is interrupted (such as 0
Repeat Time Barge-In, Voice Mail Conversation
Recording, or Voice Over), the sys-
tem repeats the Intrusion Tone after
this time. Normally, you should enter
0 to disable this time.
08 Conference Tone 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
Interval
09 Warning Beep 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60 14-01-18
Tone Signaling
Interval

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns

Programming Manual 2-199

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID
feature.

20 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Caller ID Displaying 0 = First 10 digits (Up- (if displaying digits are more than 12 digits) 0
Format per)
1 = Last 10 digits (Low-
er)
02 Caller ID Wait Timer 0 ~ 30 seconds When an incoming CO call is received, the 5
SL1100 starts the timer. It will wait the pro-
grammed time for Caller ID information
from Telco before connecting the CO call.
03 Caller ID Edit Mode 0 = Off If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled (0), no 0
(V2.0 Added) 1 = On access code will be added to the Caller ID.
If this option is enabled (1), the access
code entered in PRG 10-02-02 & 10-02-03
will be added to the beginning of the Caller
ID.
04 Wait Facility IE Timer 0 ~ 64800 seconds This timer is used with ISDN trunks to de- 10
termine how long the system waits for the
Caller ID name from the Telco.
05 Caller ID Sender 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
Queuing Time (Send-
er Wait)
07 Long Distance Code Up to two digits 1
08 Area Code Up to six digits No Setting
09 Calling party Name Maximum of 12 digits (0 When a name is programmed in this pro- No Setting
for ISDN Trunk ~ 9, *, #) gram this will be the name sent out for all
callers that have PRG 15-01-10 enabled.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Caller ID

2-200 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which are Program
displayed when no Caller ID information is received.

Input Data
20
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric Characters PRIVATE
02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric Characters OUT OF AREA
03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric Characters NO CALLER INFO

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Caller ID

Programming Manual 2-201

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for the
Long Conversation feature.

20 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds The warning tone for long toll calls 170 14-01-15
tion Alarm 1 sounds after this time.
02 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds After the initial long toll call warning 180 14-01-15
tion Alarm 2 tone, additional warning tones
sound after this time.
03 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds This timer determines how long the 0 14-01-14
tion Cutoff for In- system waits before disconnecting
coming Call an incoming call.
04 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds This timer determines how long the 0 14-01-14
tion Cutoff for system waits before disconnecting
Outgoing Call an outgoing call.
05 Conversation 0 ~ 64800 seconds 180
cutoff for remote
monitor

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Long Conversation Cutoff

2-202 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default
20
01 Delayed ring timer for 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30 seconds
CTI
02 ALERT replay time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 8 seconds
(CTI)
03 Trunk Virtual Bridge - 0 = Disable (No) Enable or disable the system to send trunk 0
TSP Driver 1 = Enable (Yes) or virtual extension information to the TSP
driver.
04 The Timer that waits 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30 seconds
for an off-hook for
Single Line Telephone
06 3rd Party CTI IP Ad- 0.0.0.0 - Read Only: 0.0.0.0
dress (V3.0 Added) 255.255.255.255 Displays the IP address of 3rd Party CTI
Server currently connected.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-203

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-25 : ISDN Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.

Input Data
20 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 Send the Release 0 = Service Off 1

Message After Sub- 1 = Service On
scriber Hangs Up
02 Progress Indicate In- 0 = Service Off 1
formation Element 1 = Service On
Detect
03 Bearer Capability Se- 0 = 3.1 KHz Audio 0
lect from SLT Outgo- 1 = Speech
ing
04 Send DT until user di- 0 = Service Off With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network 0
als first digit (Local 1 = Service On side stops dial tone when CLI is included
Dial Tone) in the SETUP message, the system sends
dial tone until the user dials the first digit
instead of the network.
05 T305 Timer Start After 0 = Service Off 1
Sending Disconnect 1 = Service On
Message
06 Call Proceeding Send 0 = Service Off 1
Mode 1 = Service On
07 Local Busy Tone 0 = Local Busy Tone Off 0
Mode Set When Dis- 1 = Busy Tone from NT
connect Message Re- (network side)
ceived
08 Use of Lower Layer 0 = Disable (Off) This Program must be set to (0 = Disable) 0
Compatibility (LLC) 1 = Enable (On) for International Dialing when using Calling
Number Presentation (CPN) from station.
09 High Layer Compati- 0 = Disable (Off) 0
bility (HLC) Sending 1 = Enable (On)
10 S-Point Terminal 0 = Disable (Off) 1
Seizes Analog Trunk 1 = Enable (On)
11 Automatic Changing 0 = Disable (Off) 0
System Clock When 1 = Enable (On)
Date/Time Information
Element Received
12 Call Forward Options 0 = Normal - No Mes- Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automati- 0
(Auto Connect Send) sage (Off) cally Return Connect Message When Out-
1 = Normal - No Mes- going Call Receives Alerting Message.
sage (On)
13 Local Busy Tone (Re- 0 = Off Busy tone sends when T-point receiving a 0
lease) 1 = On RELEASE message from Network.

2-204 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
14 No Response Release 0 = Off Operation mode setting for when second 0
Send 1 = On T303 timer expires.
15 Call Reference selec- 0 = Off 0
tion for PRI 2B-Ch 1 = On
Transfer
18 Include CPN on Pre- 0 = Not include When the presentation indicator bit is set 0
sentation Restriction 1 = Include (by pressing key 63 in PRG 15-07) the
(V3.0 Added) ISDN setup message is changed as fol-
lows:
When set to "Include" the CPN from the
station or trunk is sent in the setup mes-
sage. Program
When set to "Disable" the CPN from the
station or trunk is NOT sent in the setup
message.
19 Send Progress Mes-
sage on Forward
(V3.0 Added)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
When enabled if an ISDN call forwards out
of the system a Progress Message will be
sent for the initial call.
0
20
Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Programming Manual 2-205

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost to define the Multiplier for charging cost to each
extension service class.

20 Input Data

Service Class 01 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Value (%) 100 ~ 500 100

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-206 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for Trunk to Trunk Program
Conversation.

Input Data
20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Conversation 0 ~ 9, *, # Input the code that can be dialed to No Setting 14-01-25
Continue Code (Set for one digit only) continue the conversation after the 20-28-03
Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning 24-02-07
Tone is heard. 24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08
02 Conversation 0 ~ 9, *, # Input the code that can be dialed to No Setting 14-01-25
Disconnect Code (Set for one digit only) disconnect the conversation after 24-02-07
the Trunk-to-Trunk Release Warning 24-02-10
Tone is heard. 25-07-07
25-07-08
03 Conversation 0 ~ 64800 seconds Input how long the conversation ex- 0 14-01-25
Continue Time tends when the Conversation Con- 20-28-01
tinue Code is dialed. 24-02-07
24-02-10
25-07-07
25-07-08

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-207

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each extension. There
are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night
Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension numbers.

20 The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Timer Class for Extension 0 ~ 15 0
0 = Not assigned

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-208 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk. There are 16 Program
Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program, one for each Night Service
Mode. The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.

Input Data 20
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Timer Class for Trunks 1 ~ 15 0
0 = Not assigned

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-209

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers on a class of
service basis.

20 Input Data

Timer Class Number 0 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Trunk Queuing 0 ~ 64800 seconds Trunk Queuing Callback rings an ex- 15 20-01-08
Callback Dura- tension for this amount of time
tion Time
02 Callback / Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds The system cancels an extension 64800 20-01-09
Queuing Cancel Callback or Trunk Queuing request
Time after this amount of time.
03 Virtual Extension 0 ~ 64800 seconds Virtual Extensions set for Delayed 10 20-04-03
Delay Interval Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual Ex-
tension Delayed Ring Assignment)
ring the extension after this time.
04 Intercom Interdi- 0 ~ 64800 seconds When placing Intercom calls, exten- 10 21-01-02
gits Time (Inter- sion users must dial each digit in
com I/D Timer) this time.
05 Trunk Interdigits 0 ~ 64800 seconds The system waits for this time to ex- 10 21-01-03
Time (Trunk I/D pire before placing the call in a talk
Timer) state (Call Timer starts after time ex-
pires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).
06 Hotline Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds A Ringdown extension automatically 5 21-01-09
Start Time (Hot- calls the programmed destination af-
line Start) ter this time.
07 Ring No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds If a trunk rings a multiline telephone 60 22-01-03
Alarm Time longer than this time, the system
changes the ring cadence. This indi-
cates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.
08 DIL/Incoming 0 ~ 64800 seconds A DIL that rings its programmed 0 22-01-04
Ring Group No destination longer than this time di-
Answer Time verts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
09 DID Ring-No-An- 0 ~ 64800 seconds In systems with DID Ring-No-An- 20 22-01-06
swer Time swer Intercept, this time sets the
Ring-No-Answer time. This time is
how long a DID call rings the desti-
nation extension before rerouting to
the intercept ring group.

2-210 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
10 Hold Recall Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call on Hold recalls the extension 60 (V1.5 24-01-01
(Non Exclusive that placed it on Hold after this time. Changed)
Hold) This time works with the Hold Recall
Callback Time (Program 24-01-02 ).
11 Hold Recall Call- 0 ~ 64800 seconds A trunk recalling from Hold or Park 30 24-01-02
Back Time (Non rings an extension for this time. This
Exclusive Hold) time works with Hold Recall Time or
Park Hold Time. After this time, the
system invokes the Hold Recall
Time again. Cycling between time
Program 24-01-01 and 24-01-02
and Program 24-01-06 and
24-01-07 continues until a user an- Program
swers the call.
12 Exclusive Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls 90 24-01-03

20
Recall Time the extension that placed it on Hold
after this time.
13 Exclusive Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an 30 24-01-04
Recall Callback extension for this time. If not picked
Time up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
14 Park Hold Time - 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this 60 (V1.5 24-01-06
Normal time interval recalls the extension Changed)
that initially parked it.
15 Delayed Call For- 0 ~ 64800 seconds If activated at an extension, Delayed 10 24-02-03
warding Time Call Forwarding occurs after this
(Call Forward No time. This also sets how long a
Answer) Transferred call waits at an exten-
sion forwarded to Voice Mail before
routing to the called extension mail-
box.
16 Transfer Recall 0 ~ 64800 seconds An unanswered transferred call re- 20 (V1.5 24-02-04
Time calls after this time to the extension Changed)
that initially transferred it.
17 DID/DISA No An- 0 ~ 64800 seconds A VRS/DISA caller can ring an ex- 0 25-07-02
swer Time (Dis- tension for this time before the sys-
connect or IRG tem sets the call as a Ring No An-
or VM) swer. After this time expires, the call
follows the programmed Ring No
Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and 25-04).
18 Disconnect after 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60 25-07-03
Re-transfer to
IRG
19 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Determine the time a DISA caller or 3600 25-07-07
tion Warning any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem
Tone Time (Trunk Trunking) conversation can last be-
to Trunk) fore the Long Conversation tone is
heard
20 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds This time determines how long the 10 25-07-08
tion Disconnect system waits before disconnecting a
(Trunk to Trunk) DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk
(such as Tandem Trunking) conver-
sation call after the Long Conversa-
tion tone is heard.
21 DISA Internal 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an In- 30 25-07-09
Paging Time ternal Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than
this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.

Programming Manual 2-211

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
22 DISA External 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an 30 25-07-10
Paging Time External Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system termi-
nates the DISA call.
23 Page Announce- 0 ~ 64800 seconds This timer sets the maximum length 1200 31-01-02
ment Duration of Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only)
24 Mobile Extension 1 ~ 64800 seconds 3 22-01-12
answer time
25 Mobile Extension 1 ~ 64800 seconds 15 20-01-16
Program callback time

20 Conditions

• These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to 16 in 20-29-01 or
20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide timer is used.
• All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-212 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote Conference options. Program

Input Data

Remote Conference Group Number 1~4

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Conference Name Up to 12 characters Enter the name displayed at the time of a Group1 = Conf1
Remote Conference. This entry will display Group2 = Conf2
on the keyset LCD. Group3 = Conf3
Group4 = Conf4
02 Password 4 digits Fixed Define the password of a Remote Confer- Group1 = 1111
(0 ~ 9, @ = wild charac- ence. Group2 = 2222
ter) Group3 = 3333
Group4 = 4444
03 Max participants 0 ~ 16 Define the maximum number of partici- 8
pants of a Remote Conference.
04 Max Conference Du- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Define the maximum duration of a Remote 7200
ration Conference.
When this time passes, the conference is
disconnected by the SL1100.
05 End Tone Alert Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds Determine how long prior disconnecting a 300
Remote Conference call (based on the
maximum conference duration above) the
SL1100 should send out a beep. This is
used to warn the conference participants
of the pending disconnect.
08 Automatic Recording 0 = Disable Enable or Disable automatic recording for 0
(V6.0 Added) 1 = Enable a Remote Conference. If disabled, a line
key must be used to start recording.
09 Recording Destina- 1 ~ 128 Enter the mailbox number where record- No Setting
tion Mail Box (V6.0 ings are to be stored.
Added)
This is the mailbox number not the ex-
tension number for a mailbox.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Conference, Remote

Programming Manual 2-213

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-35 : Extension's Operator Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an operator group.

Input Data
20 Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Extension’s Operator Setting 0 ~ 15 ( 0 = Not Set) 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-214 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-36 : Trunk's Operator Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator group. Program

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Trunk’s Operator Set- 0 ~ 15 Allows the user to select Operator Group 0
ting (0 = No Setting) per trunk when DISA is being used. After
the user enters the 6 digit DISA password
if the user dials 0 this command will decide
which operator to route the call to.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-215

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in the operator
group.

20 Input Data

Operator Group 1 ~ 15

Operator Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Operator Extension Group Setup Up to eight digits No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-216 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling an operator Program
telephone.

Input Data

Operator Group 1 ~ 15
20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Operator Access 0 = Step Assign if the operator is called, starting 0
Mode 1 = Circular with the first operator, every time (0) or a
different operator is tried first (1)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-217

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-42 : Night Mode for each package
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-42 : Night Mode for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package.
This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).

20 Input Data

PKG Number 02 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Ecology Mode 1~4 Assign Night mode group number 1 12-02
group No per each package (slot)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-218 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-43 : Power supply for each package
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-43 : Power supply for each package to assigns the Night Mode to each package. Program
This Program uses ecology function (Program 20-43).

Input Data

PKG Number 02 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

20
Operation Mode 01 ~ 08

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Ecology Mode 0 = Cut the power Assigns the power supply mode to each 1
1 = Power Supply package base

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-219

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-44 : Watch Mode Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-44 : Watch Mode Setup to defines the watch mode.

Input Data
20 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 Internal Paging Group 0 ~ 32 Define Internal paging group number for 0

for Watch Message Watching message.
02 External Paging 0~8 Define External paging group number for 0
Group for Watch Mes- Watching message
sage
03 VRS Message for 0 ~ 100 Define VRS number used for Watching 0
Watch Mode message
04 Interval Timer for 0 ~ 60 Define interval time for sending Watching 0
Watch Message message.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-220 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-45 : Remote Watch Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-45 : Remote Watch Setup to defines the remote watch. Program

Input Data

Terminal Number 1~6

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Ring Terminal for Re- Extension Number (Up Extension number for Remote Inspection No Setting
mote Inspection to 8 digits)
02 Ring Time Setting 0000 ~ 2359 Ringing start time for Inspected Extension 0000
03 Ring Timer 0 ~ 60 Ringing continue time for inspected exten- 0
sion
04 Auto Dial Number 0 ~ 999 Speed dial number when detect no answer 0
Area Setting at extension and make emergency call
05 VRS Message for An- 0 ~ 100 VRS message number when inspected ex- 0
swer tension answered
06 VRS Message for Au- 0 ~ 100 VRS message number when emergency 0
to Dial call destination answered.
07 Time of Repeat Auto 0 ~ 255 Repeat number for making emergency 0
Dial call.
08 Auto Dial Calling 0 ~ 3600 Calling continue time when making emer- 0
Time gency call.
09 Interval of Auto Dial 0 ~ 3600 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-221

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-46 : Security Sensor Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-46 : Security Sensor Setup to defines the security sensor.

Input Data
20 Security Sensor Number 1~6

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Sensor Mode 0 = Off Define door port (084M 3, 4) to use as 0
1 = On Sensor.
02 Internal Paging Group 0 ~ 32 Define Internal paging group number for 0
for Warning Message Warning message
03 Ring Timer 0~8 Define External paging group number for 0
Warning message.
04 VRS Message for 0 ~ 100 Define VRS number used for Warning 0
Warning message.
05 Auto Dial Number 0 ~ 999 Define Speed dial number when sensor 0
Area Setting detects warning.
06 VRS Message for An- 0 ~ 100 Define VRS message number when emer- 0
swer gency call destination answered.
07 Auto Dial Wait Timer 0 ~ 64800 Define wait time before making emergency 30
auto dial.
08 Time of Repeat Auto 0 ~ 255 Define repeat number for making emer- 3
Dial gency call.
09 Auto Dial Calling 0, 1 ~ 3600 Define calling continue time when making 30
Time 0 = No Auto Dial emergency call.
10 Monitored Terminal Extension Number (Up Define extension number for monitor from No Setting
to 8 digits) outside. IP terminal cannot set as moni-
tored extension.
11 Interval of Auto Dial 0 ~ 3600 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-222 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-47 : Time pattern setting for Watch Mode to defines the watch mode time pattern. Program

Input Data

Time Pattern 01 ~ 08
20
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Watch Mode Time 0 = Off Define watch mode on/off against time pat- 0
Pattern 1 = On tern 1-8

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-223

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 20-48 : Time pattern setting for Security Sensor to defines the Security Sensor time
pattern.

20 Input Data

Time Pattern 01 ~ 08

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Security Sensor Time 0 = Off Define security sensor on/off against time 0
Pattern 1 = On pattern 1-8

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-224 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-49 : Caller ID Shared Group Basic Data Setup to defines the function mode for Program
each Caller ID shared group.

Input Data

Caller ID shared group Number 01 ~ 08

20
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Group Name Maximum 12 charac- Caller ID shared group Name Group 1 = Group 15-02-67
ters Name: Group 1
:
Group 8 = Group
Name: Group 8

Default

Group Group Name

1 Group1
2 Group2
3 Group3
4 Group4
5 Group5
6 Group6
7 Group7
8 Group8

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-225

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-55 : Delay Timer for Security Sensor
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 20-55 : Delay Timer for Secuirty Sensor to set time for Security to be operational.
Once it reach the time the Security will starts if the Security sets manually.

20 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Sensor delay timer 0 ~ 3600 (seconds) 60
0 = Sensor will start immediately

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-226 Program 20 : System Option Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing Program
Call Service.

Input Data
21
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Seizure Trunk 0 = Priority Route Select the trunk based off the Trunk 0 14-05
Line Mode 1 = Circular Route Route Priority (0) or based off the 14-06
trunk that has not been used in the
longest time (1).
02 Intercom Interdi- 0 ~ 64800 seconds When placing Intercom calls, exten- 10
git Time sion users must dial each digit in
this time.
03 Trunk Interdigit 0 ~ 64800 seconds The system waits for this time to ex- 5 14-02-08
Time (External) pire before placing the call in a talk
state (Call Timer starts after time ex-
pires, Voice Over and Barge-In is
not allowed until after time expires).
04 Dial Tone Detec- 0 ~ 64800 seconds If dial tone detection is enabled, the 5 14-02-05
tion Time system waits this time for the Telco
to return dial tone. When the time
expires, the system assumes dial
tone is not present. To disable this
time (and have the system wait con-
tinuously), enter 0.
05 Disconnect Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system 3
when Dial Tone skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
not Detected detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Speed Dial, ARS,
Last Number Redial or Save Num-
ber dialed. It does not pertain to line
key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
06 Dial Pause at 0 ~ 64800 seconds 1
First Digit
07 Toll Restriction 0 ~ 64800 seconds After dialing the Toll Restriction 10 20-08-06
Override Time Override codes, the system re- 21-07
moves Toll Restriction from the ex-
tension for this time.
08 Preset Dial Dis- 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10
play Hold Time
09 Ringdown Exten- 0 ~ 64800 seconds A Ringdown extension automatically 5 20-08-09
sion Timer (Hot- calls its programmed destination af- 21-11
line Start) ter this time.

Programming Manual 2-227

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
10 Dial Digits for 0 ~ 36 If this option is programmed with an 0
Toll Restriction entry other than 0, a call does not
Path have a talk path unless the user di-
als at least the number of digits en-
tered in this option when placing an
outgoing call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 911 (USA on-
ly). Since it is only a 3-digit number,
the call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatch-
er from hearing the caller. This op-
Program tion should be kept at its default set-
ting of 0 to prevent any problems
with dialing 911 (USA only).

21 11 Inter-Digit Time
for Toll Restric-
tion Path Control
0 ~ 60 seconds 0

12 Dial E911 Rout- 0 = Trunk Access Code If enabled (1), an extension user 1
ing Without Required can dial 911 (USA only) without first
Trunk Access 1 = Trunk Access Code dialing a trunk access code or
Not Required pressing a line key. If disabled (0),
an extension user must dial a trunk
access code (e.g., 9) or press a line
key before dialing 911 (USA only).
13 Alarm Ring Tim- 0, 1~ 64800 seconds Use this option to set the duration of 0 11-12-56
er (E911) (0 = Off) the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 20-08-16
0, the E911 Alarm does not ring.
14 Forced Account 0 ~ 64800 seconds If the user does not enter the ac- 3
Code Inter-digit count code in the amount of time
Timer specified in this program the call will
be restricted.
15 Outgoing Disable 0 = Disable (Off) Enable or disable the Outgoing Dis- 0 15-01-05
on Incoming Line 1 = Enable (On) able on Incoming Line feature. 21-01-16
(Toll Restriction) 21-01-17
80-03-01
16 Supervise Dial 0 ~ 64800 seconds With the Outgoing Disable on In- 20 15-01-05
Detection Timer coming Line feature, if dial tone is 21-01-16
not detected after the extension an- 21-01-17
swers an incoming line, the system 80-03-01
determines the call is unable to
complete and releases the DTMF
receiver.
17 Restriction Digit Digits 1 ~ 9 With the Outgoing Disable on In- 4 15-01-05
in Outgoing Dis- coming Line feature, determine the 21-01-15
able on Incoming number of digits to be dialed before 21-01-16
Line the call should be disconnected. 80-03-01
18 Reset Dial After 0 = Disable (Off) Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability 1
Failure of Trunk 1 = Enable (On) to continue to dial codes or exten-
Access sions after receiving Trunk Busy.
This needs to be set to Enabled (1)
for the Forced Trunk Disconnect
feature to work.
19 Do-Not-Call-Set- 0 = No service 0 15-01-07
up 1 = Extented common
restriction
20 Caller ID Call- 0 = Disable 0 = Disable (same as before R3) 0 21-01-21
back with Home 1 = Manual Call Back 1 = CID Call Back is manual 21-01-22
Area Code Mode 2 = Automatic Call 2 = Call Back is automatic based on 21-26-01
(V4.0 Added) Back the entries of the Home NPA, HNPA 21-27-01
Exceptions, and Foreign NPA Locals 21-28-01

2-228 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
21 HNPA Exception 0 = Toll Sets the exception of HNPA list. 0 21-01-20
Type (V4.0 Add- 1 = Local 21-01-22
ed) 21-26-01
21-27-01
21-28-01
22 10 Digit Local 0 = 7 digits (without Decide if the local call needs to dial 0 21-01-20
Calls (V4.0 Add- Area code) with Area Code or not. 21-01-21
ed) 1 = 10 digits (with Area 21-26-01
Code) 21-27-01
21-28-01

Program
Conditions

None
21
Feature Cross Reference
• Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2-229

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.

21 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Route Table Number 0 ~ 25 1 14-06
0 = No Setting (Calls will not route.) 14-01-07

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-230 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Automatic Program
External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

21
Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Route Table Number 0 ~ 25 1 14-06
(0 = No Setting) 14-07-01

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual 2-231

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll Restriction class to an
extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06.
A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls.

21 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 = Toll Class 1 ~ 15 2 14-01-08
21-05

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-232 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction classes (1 ~ 15). Program

Input Data

Toll Restriction Class Number 1 ~ 15

21
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 International Call 0 = Unassign (No inter- This option assigns/unassigns the Class No1, 6 ~ 21-06-01
Restriction Table national restrict table International Call Restrict Table for 15 : 0
applied.) the Toll Restriction Class you are Class No2 ~ 5 : 1
1 = Assign (Table in programming. Enter International
PRG 21-06-01 is ap- Call Restrict Table data in Program
plied.) 21-06-01.
02 International Call 0 = Unassign (No inter- This option assigns/unassigns the Class No1, 3 ~ 21-06-02
Permit Code Ta- national permit table International Call Permit Table for 15 : 0
ble applied.) the Toll Restriction Class you are Class No2 : 1
1 = Assign (Table in programming. Enter International
PRG 21-06-02 is ap- Call Permit Table data in Program
plied.) 21-06-02.
04 Maximum Num- 0 = No Table Applied Select the table (defined in Class No1 ~ 2, 6 21-06-03
ber of Digits Ta- 1 ~ 4 = Tables 1 ~ 4 21-06-03) to be used to determine ~ 15 : 0
ble Assignment ( Defined in PRG the maximum number of digits al- Class No3 : 1
21-06-03) lowed for outgoing calls. Class No4 : 2
Class No5 : 3
05 Common Permit 0 = Unassign (No com- It chooses whether the table set up Class No1, 8 ~ 21-06-04
Code Table mon permit table ap- by 21-06-04 is referred to, or not re- 15 : 0
plied.) ferred to. Class No2 ~ 7 : 1
1 = Assign (Table in
PRG 21-06-04 is ap-
plied.)
06 Common Re- 0 = Unassign (No com- It chooses whether the table set up Class No1, 6 ~ 21-06-05
striction Table mon restrict table ap- by 21-06-05 is referred to, or not re- 15 : 0
plied.) ferred to. Class No2 ~ 5 : 1
1 = Assign (Table in
PRG 21-06-05 is ap-
plied.)
07 Permit Code Ta- 0 = No Permit Table Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring Class No1 ~ 2, 6 21-06-06
ble Assigned to the table set up by 21-06-06. ~ 15 : 0
1 ~ 4 = Permit Tables 1 Class No3 : 1
~ 4 (assigned in PRG Class No4 : 2
21-06-06) Class No5 : 3
08 Restriction Table 0 = No Permit Table Set the tables 1 ~ 4 when referring 0 21-06-07
Assigned to the table set up by 21-06-07.
1 ~ 4 = Restrict Tables
1 ~ 4 (assigned in PRG
21-06-07)

Programming Manual 2-233

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 Restriction for 0 = Does Not Restrict Use this option to enable/disable 0
Common Speed 1 = Following Restric- Toll Restriction for Common Speed
Dials tion Check Dialing numbers. If enabled, System
Speed Dialing numbers have the
same restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
10 Restriction for 0 = Does Not Restrict Use this option to enable/disable 0
Group Speed Di- 1 = Following Restric- Toll Restriction for Group Speed Di-
als tion Check aling numbers. If enabled, Group
Speed Dialing numbers have the
same restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
Program
11 Intercom Call Re- 0 = Disable (ICM call Determine if incoming intercom calls 0
striction not restricted.) are restricted.
1 = Enable (ICM call re-

21
stricted.)
12 PBX Call Restric- 0 = Disable (PBX/CTX Use this option to set how the sys- Class 1 ~ 6 = 0
tion call not restricted.) tem Toll Restricts calls over PBX Class 7 = 1
1 = Enable (PBX/CTX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Re- Class 8 ~ 15 = 0
call restricted.) striction, the system begins Toll Re-
striction after the PBX access code.
The user cannot dial a PBX exten-
sion. If you disable PBX Toll Restric-
tion, the system only restricts calls
that contain the PBX access code.
The system does not restrict calls to
PBX extensions. Refer to the PBX
compatibility feature. Make sure
Program 21-05-04 (Maximum Num-
ber of Digits Table Assignment) al-
lows for PBX Toll Call Dialing (nor-
mally 12 digits).
13 Restriction of Tie 0 = Disable (No) It chooses whether the toll restric- 0 34-08
Line Calls 1 = Enable (Yes) tion of the dial set up by 34-08 is en-
abled or disabled.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-234 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll Restriction data. Dial Program
1 ~ 9, 0, *, # can be entered in each table.

Input Data
21
Item Item Table Input Data Default
No.
01 International Call Restriction Table [caption: table] Dial (Up to four Tables 1 ~ 10 = No Set-
This option lets you program the Restrict Ta- 1 ~ 10 digits) ting
ble for international calls.
The system has 10 International Call Restrict
Tables.
Each entry can have up to four digits.
02 International Call Permit Code Table [caption: table] Dial (Up to six dig- Tables 1 ~ 20 = No Set-
This option lets you program the Permit Ta- 1 ~ 20 its) ting
ble for international calls.
The system has 20 International Call Permit
Tables.
Each entry can have up to six digits.
03 Maximum Number Digits Table Assign- [caption: table] 4 ~ 30 Tables 1 ~ 4 = 30
ment 1~4
This option selects the maximum number of
digits allowed in outgoing calls for each ta-
ble.
04 Common Permit Code Table [caption: table] Dial (Up to four Table 1 = 911
This option lets you program the Common 1 ~ 10 digits) Table 2 = 1800
Permit Code Table. Table 3 = 1888
This table contains up to 10 codes you com- Table 4 =1822
monly allow users to dial. Table 5 = 1833
Table 6 =1844
Table 7 = 1855
Table 8 = 1866
Table 9 = 1877
Table 10 = No Setting
05 Common Restriction Table [caption: table] Dial (Up to 12 dig- Table 1 = 900
This option lets you program the Common 1 ~ 10 its) Table 2 = 1900
Restrict Code Table. Table 3 = 976
This table contains up to 10 codes you com- Tables 4 ~ 10 = No set-
monly prevent users from dialing. ting
06 Permit Code Table [caption: table] Dial (Up to 12 dig- Tables 1 ~ 4 = No Setting
This option lets you program the Permit 1 ~ 4 (table) its)
Code Tables. 001 ~ 200 (Entry)
If the system has Toll Restriction enabled,
users can dial numbers only if permitted by
these tables and the Common Permit Table
(21-06-04).
There are four Permit Code Tables, with up
to 200 entries in each table.
The system permits calls exactly as you en-
ter the code.

Programming Manual 2-235

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Table Input Data Default

No.
07 Deny Restriction Table [caption: table] Dial (Up to 12 dig- Tables 1 ~ 4 = No Setting
This option lets you program the Restrict 1 ~ 4 (table) its)
Code Tables. 1 ~ 60 (Entry)
If the system has Toll Restriction enabled,
users cannot dial numbers listed in these ta-
bles.
There are four Restrict Code Tables, with up
to 60 entries in each table.
The system restricts calls exactly as you en-
ter the code.
08 PBX Access Code [caption: table] Dial (Up to two Tables 1 ~ 4 = No Setting
Use this option to enter the PBX Access 1~4 digits)
Program Code.
When the system is behind a PBX, this is the
code users dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access

21 code.
For PBX trunks (Program 14-04) the system
only Toll Restricts calls that contain the ac-
cess code.
Always program this option when the system
is behind a PBX, even if you don’t want to
use Toll Restriction.
PBX Access Codes can have up to two dig-
its, using 0-9, #, * and LINE KEY 1 (don’t
care).
When using Account Codes, do not use an
asterisk in a PBX access code. Otherwise,
after the *, the trunk stops sending digits to
the central office.
Entries 1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access
Codes.
Each code can have up to two digits.
09 Specific Dial Outgoing Code [caption: table] Dial (Up to eight Tables 1 ~ 20 = No Set-
1 ~ 20 digits) ting
10 Outgoing Call Code Setup [caption: table] Dial (Up to four Tables 1 ~ 20 = No Set-
1 ~ 20 digits) ting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-236 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Override Program
codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9, # and *.
Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code.

Input Data 21
Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Password Four Digits (Fixed) No Setting 21-01-07
20-08-06

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-237

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.

Input Data
21 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 Repeat Redial Count 0 ~ 255 Sets how many times a Repeat Redial au- 3
tomatically repeats if the call does not go
through.
02 Repeat Redial Interval 0 ~ 64800 seconds Set the time between Repeat Redial at- 60
Time tempts.
03 Repeat Dial Calling 0 ~ 64800 seconds After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial 30
Timer maintains the call after this time. After this
time, the system terminates the call, waits
the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02) and
tries again.
04 Time for Send Busy 0 ~ 64800 seconds Sets the time (sec) to send out Busy Tone 0
Tone for ISDN Trunk with an ISDN line, when called party is
busy.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-238 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and Dial Program
Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.

Input Data
21
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service 15
With Dial Block when the Dial Block feature is used.
02 Supervisor Password 0 ~ 9,*, # Assign a 4-digit password to be used by No Setting
(4-digit fixed) the supervisor to enable or disable Dial
Block for other extensions.

Conditions

• This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned
extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor if
they know the Dial Block password.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-239

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll Restriction
Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll
Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.

21 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Toll Restriction Class 0, 1 ~ 15 0
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-240 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destination Program
number for each extension number.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

21
Item Item Input Data Default Related
No. Program
01 Hotline Destination Number 1 ~ 0, *, #, Pause, Hook Flash, @ (Code to wait No Setting 20-08-09
for answer supervision) (maximum 36 digits) 21-01-09

Conditions

• The @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to VM Auto
Attendant. This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls. Internal calls and analog outbound
calls are not supported.

Feature Cross Reference

• Ringdown Extension (Hotline), Internal/External

Programming Manual 2-241

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party
Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which
does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling

21
number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21-12.
If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Calling Party Number Maximum of 16 digits (0 This program is used to assign a calling No Setting
Data ~ 9, *, #) party number per trunk.
Most Telco's will only ac- If CPN information is programmed on both
cept 10 digits. the trunk and station when a call is made
the CPN from the station will be sent to the
Telco.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

2-242 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each extension a Program
Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of
the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling

21
Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in
Program 21-12.
If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends the data in
Program 21-13.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Calling Party Number Maximum of 16 digits (0 This program is used to assign a calling No Setting
Data ~ 9, *, #) party number per station.
Most Telco's will only ac- If CPN information is programmed on both
cept 10 digits. the trunk and station when a call is made
the CPN from the station will be sent to the
Telco.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Programming Manual 2-243

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll
Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code has six digits, using any combination of 0 ~ 9,
# and *.

21 Input Data

ID Table Number 1 ~ 500 (V6.0 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 User ID Dial (Six digits) No Setting
02 Walking Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 1
Number

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Code Restriction/Toll Restriction

2-244 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate the alternate Program
trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to
Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code on page 2-68 when setting up alternate trunk codes. Refer to

21
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing on page 2-117 to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this
option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Route Table Number 0 ~ 25 This assigns extensions per day/night 0
0 = No Setting (Calls will mode to a route table (PRG 14-06-01).
not route.) This program follows the special trunk ac-
cess code from PRG 11-01-01 and
11-09-02.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2-245

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networking to assign Program 14-06 routes for a
networked system. This is required to seize the trunk in a networked system (Extension in System A

21 tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B).

The route number is specified for each system ID (01 ~ 04).

Input Data

System ID 01 ~ 04

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Route Table 0 ~ 25 If a call comes in from across the 1 14-06-01
Number 0 = No Setting (Calls network, this program determines
will not route.) the route table (PRG 14-06-01) that
will be accessed in the local system.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• SL-Net

2-246 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the SIP calling party Program
number for individual trunks.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

21
Item Item Input Data Default Related
No. Program
01 Calling Party Number (V2.0 Up to 16 digits No Setting 15-01-04
Changed) (1 ~ 0, *, #) 20-08-13

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-247

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for
Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to set the SIP
calling party number for an individual extension.

21 Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Profile 1~2
(V5.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Calling Party Number Up to 16 Digits No Setting 15-01-04
(1 ~ 0, *, #) 20-08-13

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-248 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 21-20 : SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension to set the SIP Trunk Call Program
Discernment.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

21
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Discernment Tone 0 = Off 1
1 = On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-249

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis
Setting)
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to define the toll
restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined by Programs 21-05 and 21-06.

21 This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1 ~ 9 (9 = Power Failure mode)

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 = Toll Class 1 ~ Per Day/Night Mode assign a toll re- 1 14-01-08
15 striction class to each trunk. 21-05
It is recommended to not use class
2, because by default all stations
are assigned in class 2.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-250 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication - Call Back Settings to define the settings of Program
CO Message Waiting Indication.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

21
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 CO MWI Call Back En- 0 = No VMWI Service Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back. 0
abling 1 = Enable VMWI Serv-
ice
02 CO MWI Call Back 0 ~ 999 Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI 999
Number Area Setting Call Back.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-251

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-26 : Home NPA Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 21-26 : Home NPA Setup to set the home NPA dial. Order to use this program PRG
21-01-20 needs to set to 2: Automatic Call Back.

21 Input Data

Index 1 ~ 16

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Home NPA Up to 3 digits (0 ~ 9, *) Set the NPA (Home Area Code) None 21-01-20
* = Wild Card If using wild card "*" make sure
21-01-21
21-01-22
it is 3 digits (Example: 1**) 21-27-01
21-28-01

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-252 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-27 : HNPA Exceptions Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 21-27 : HNPA Exceptions Setup to set the dial number sent. Order to use this program
PRG 21-01-20 needs to set as 2: Automatic Call Back.

Input Data
21
Index 1 ~ 96

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 HNPA Excep- Up to 6 digits (0 ~ 9, *) It is a 6 digits starting with Area None 21-01-20
tions * = Wild Card Code which you want to have an ex- 21-01-21
ception to it. 21-01-22
21-26-01
If using wild card "*" make sure 21-28-01
it is 6 digits (Example: 123***)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-253

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-28 : Foreign NPA Locals Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 21-28 : Foreign NPA Locals Setup to set the dial number sent. Order to use this
program PRG 21-01-20 needs to set as 2: Automatic Call Back.

21 Input Data

System Number 1 ~ 96

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Foreign NPA Ex- Up to 6 digits (0 ~ 9, *) Foreign NPA Locals, this is used to None 21-01-20
ceptions * = Wild Card make exceptions of some area code 21-01-21
office code combinations that are 21-01-22
not within your home area code but 21-26-01
may be dialed as a local call (Such 21-27-01
as Metro-Lines)
If using wild card "*" make sure
it is 6 digits (Example: 123***)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-254 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incoming Program
calls.

Input Data
22
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Incoming Call 0 = Intercom Call Priori- Use this option to determine if Inter- 1 15-02-22
Priority ty com calls or trunk calls have answer
1 = Trunk Call Priority priority when both are ringing simul-
taneously.
02 Incoming Call 0 = Disable (Off) If enabled, an incoming call that 0 22-01-03
Ring No Answer 1 = Enable (On) rings longer than the Ring No An- 22-01-04
Alarm swer Alarm interval (22-01-03),
changes to a unique ring cadence to
indicate that the call has been ring-
ing too long. If disabled, this does
not occur.
03 Ring No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds If a trunk rings a multiline telephone 60 22-01-02
Alarm Time longer than this interval, the system
changes the ring cadence. This indi-
cates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.
04 DIL No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds A DIL that rings its programmed 0
Recall Time 0 = No Overflow destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).
06 DID Ring-No-An- 0 ~ 64800 seconds In systems with DID Ring-No-An- 20 22-12
swer Time swer Intercept, this sets the Ring-
No-Answer time. This time is how
long a DID call rings the destination
extension before rerouting to the in-
tercept ring group.
07 DID Incoming 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20
Ring Group No
Answer Time
08 DID Pilot Call No 0 ~ 64800 seconds 60
Answer Time
09 DID to Trunk to 0 ~ 64800 seconds 20
Trunk no answer
timer
10 VRS Waiting 0 = Automatic Opera- Set up the operation mode for Auto 0 22-14
Message Opera- tion Attendant and Queuing Message. 22-15
tion 1 = Manual Operation 22-08
22-04
22-01-04
20-15-11
15-07

Programming Manual 2-255

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
11 VRS Waiting 0 ~ 64800 seconds Setup the sending duration time of 20 22-14-06
Message Interval the Auto - Attendant & Queuing. 22-15-06
Time The message is repeatedly sent out 41-11-06
during the specified time.
12 Mobile Extension 0~ 64800 seconds 3 15-22-04
answer time

Conditions

Program None

22 Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

2-256 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. Program
There is one item for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

22
Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Incoming Type 0 = Normal Use this option to set the feature 0 14-04
1 = VRS (second dial type for the trunk you are program-
tone if no VRS instal- ming.
led)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID (DDI) Mode
Switching

Conditions

• When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the Telco connected T1
service type, the T1 cable or the T1 unit must be unplugged and then reconnected for the T1 unit to
sync.
• When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04 for each DID
feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.
• When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for each DID is not
supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned as VRS.

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

Programming Manual 2-257

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk
uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Eight ring tones are available.
Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.

22 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Related
Item Input Data Description Default
No. Program
01 Ring Tone Pat- 0 = Ring Tone Pattern 1 Use this program to select the ring 0 15-02
tern 1 = Ring Tone Pattern 2 tone range for the trunk. The trunk
2 = Ring Tone Pattern 3 uses a ring tone in the range selec-
3 = Ring Tone Pattern 4 ted when it rings an extension. Four
4 = Melody 1 Ring Tones are available (V2.0 or
5 = Melody 2 lower).
6 = Melody 3 Eight Ring Tones are available (V3.0
7 = Melody 4 or higher).
8 = Melody 5
9 = Ring Tone Pattern 5
(V3.0 Added)
10 = Ring Tone Pattern
6 (V3.0 Added)
11 = Ring Tone Pattern
7 (V3.0 Added)
12 = Ring Tone Pattern
8 (V3.0 Added)

Table 2-6 Program 22-03 - Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 1 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 16Hz
Middle 660Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 16Hz
Pattern 2 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz
Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz
Pattern 3 High 2000Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 16Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Pattern 4 High 2000Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 8Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Pattern 5 (V3.0 Added) High 1400Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Middle 760Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Low 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz

2-258 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Incoming Signal
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Frequency Pattern
Pattern 6 (V3.0 Added) High 1400Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Middle 760Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Low 660Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Pattern 7 (V3.0 Added) High 2000Hz 1100Hz 16Hz
Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 16Hz
Low 1100Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Pattern 8 (V3.0 Added) High 2000Hz 1100Hz 8Hz
Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 8Hz
Low 1100Hz 760Hz 8Hz

Program
Conditions

22
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

Programming Manual 2-259

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign
trunks to Ring Groups and use Program 22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring

22
Group (IRG) can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned.
There are 25 available Ring Groups.

Input Data

Incoming Ring Group Number 01 ~ 25

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Extension Num- Maximum eight Digits Use this program to assign exten- Group01 has 22-02
ber sions (up to 32) to Ring Groups. 101, 102, 103, 22-05
Calls ring extensions according to 104, 105, 106, 22-06
Ring Group programming. 107, and 108
(First 8 ports
ringing)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Ring Groups

2-260 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Program
Groups. There are 25 available Ring Groups.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

22
Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Incoming Group 0 = No Setting Use this program to assign Normal 1 22-04
Number (V1.5 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming 22-06
Changed) Ring group Ring Groups (22-04).
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Ring Groups

Programming Manual 2-261

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should ring
for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.

22 Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Incoming Group Number 0 = No Ring 1 22-04
1 = Ring 22-05

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

2-262 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling Program
Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or
Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. Use Program

22
22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service
mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Number of Transfer- Maximum of 8 digits (0 ~ Assign extension or department group No Setting
ring Destination 9, *, #) number for DIL trunk.

Conditions

• Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Programming Manual 2-263

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level:
IN

Description
Program For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL
No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires
(Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. Make

22
eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Incoming Group Number (V1.5 0 = No Setting Group01 has 101, 102,
Changed) 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring group 103, 104, 105, 106,
102 = VM 107, and 108 (First 8
103 = Centralized VM ports ringing)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Line (DIL)
• Ring Group

2-264 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls for Program
each trunk group.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

22
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Expected Number of 1~8 Enter the number of digits the table ex- 4
Digits pects to receive from the Telco. Use this
program to make the system compatible
with 3- and 4-digit DID service. If ISDN
trunks, we analyze the last digits that are
set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID, it ana-
lyzes the first digits that are assigned here.
02 Received Vacant 0 = Disconnect (call de- If the system receives a DID that is not 0
Number Operation nied) routed this program sets what the system
1 = Transfer (call routed does with the call.
to PRG 22-12) If the setting data is a (0), Disconnect, the
system will deny the call.
If the setting data is a (1), Transfer, the call
will be routed to the ring group specified in
PRG 22-12-01.
03 Sub-Addressing 0 = Extension # Specify 0
Mode (Intercom)
1 = DID Conversion Ta-
ble
04 DID Receiving Mode 0 = Enbloc Receiving 0
for ISDN 1 = Overlap Receiving
05 Local Code Digits 0 ~ 15 (0 = No Local (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 0
Code)
06 Local Code Dial (maximum 16 digits) (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) No Setting
07 Pilot Code Dial (1 digit : 0 ~ 9) (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) No Setting
08 T302 Time-out Opera- 0 = Disconnect (Cut) (Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 0
tion 1 = Transfer (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID In-
tercept Ring Group.)

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-265

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Program

22

2-266 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables. Program
There are 800 (V1.5 or higher) Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation
Tables.

Input Data 22
Conversion Table Area Number 01 ~ 20

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 1st Area Setup (Start Address) 0 ~ 800 Refer below
(0 = No Setting)
1st Area Setup (End Address)
2nd Area Setup (Start Address)
2nd Area Setup (End Address)

Default

Conversion Ta- 1st 2nd

ble Area
Start Table End Table Start Table End Table
1 1 200 0 0
2 201 400 0 0
3 401 600 0 0
4 601 800 0 0
5 0 0 0 0
: : : : :
20 0 0 0 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual 2-267

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table
entry (800).
• The digits received by the system (eight maximum)

22 • The extension the system dials after translation (36 digits maximum)
• The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12 characters maximum)
• The Transfer Target - 1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer
destination (Program 22-10).
• Operation Mode

Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first
character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times.

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ... When you want to ...
1 Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters: 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В

* Enter characters: * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex :
TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right ar-
row soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data

Conversion Table Number 001 ~ 800

2-268 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Received Number Maximum eight digits This is the received DID digits. No Setting
(0 ~ 9, *, #)
02 Target Number Maximum 36 digits Enter the destination number to which the No Setting
(0 ~ 9, *, #, @) DID number is sent.
03 DID Name Maximum 12 characters This is the name that is assigned to the No Setting
DID digits when it rings the extension.
04 Transfer Operation 0 = No Transfer The transfer operation mode allows DID 0
Mode 1 = Busy calls to have more routing options than just
2 = No Answer the target number. If the transfer operation
3 = Busy/No Answer mode is set to "No Transfer" calls will only
be delivered to the Target Number speci- Program
fied in PRG 22-11-02. If set to one of the
three other modes, it will follow that mode
through all assigned transfer destinations.
05 Transfer Destination
Number 1
0 = No setting
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring
Group
102 = VM
0
22
103 = Centralized VM
(V1.5 Added)
201 ~ 232 = Department
Group
400 = VRS
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = Valid Exten-
sion Number/VRS Mes-
sage (V2.0 Change)
(VRS Message No.)
1000 ~ 1999 = Common
ABB Dial (000 ~ 999)
06 Transfer Destination 0 = No setting 400 - Allow the outside party to dial a dif- 0
Number 2 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring ferent extension number in the translation
Group table (for example, ring no answer to a di-
102 = VM aled number, the caller then hears a dial
103 = Centralized VM tone, allowing them to enter another Valid
(V1.5 Added) Extension Number).
201 ~ 232 = Department 401 - Provide the caller with DISA dialing
Group options (requires using the DISA pass-
400 = VRS word).
401 = DISA
501 ~ 599 = Valid Exten- This applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.
sion Number/VRS Mes-
sage (V2.0 Change)
(VRS Message No.)
1000 ~ 1999 = Common
ABB Dial (000 ~ 999)
07 Call Waiting 0 = Disable (No) Program 20-09-07 overrides this setting. 0
1 = Enable (Yes)
08 Maximum Number of 0 ~ 084 (0 = No limit) Per DID translation table a DID can be 0
DID Calls 0 = No Limit (Can re- limited to only accept a certain amount of
ceive as many calls as calls. If a call is delivered to the system
you have available when the limit has been reached, the out-
trunks.) side caller will receive a busy tone.
09 Music on Hold Source 0 = IC/MOH Port 0
1 = BGM Port

Programming Manual 2-269

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
11 Incoming Ring Group 0 = Disable (Calls will Enable (1) or disable (0) each conversa- 1
Transfer not be routed to PRG tion tables ability to follow the Ring Group
22-12.) programming defined in Program
1 = Enable (Calls will be 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group. If
routed to PRG 22-12.) Program 22-11-05 (DID Translation Num-
ber Conversion, Transfer Destination Num-
ber 1) and Program 22-11-06 (DID Trans-
lation Number Conversion, Transfer Desti-
nation Number 2) are set, the priority of
transferring is in this order (Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06) then if
Program 22-11-11 is enabled, the calls will
overflow from Transfer Destination Num-
Program ber 2 to the destination programmed in
PRG 22-12-01.
If the terminal is in Power Cutting mode

22 from the ecology feature this command

will not be applied.

Conditions

When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for each DID feature is
not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks when assigned as VRS.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-270 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level:
IN

Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the first Program
destination group for DID calls.

Depending on the entry in Programs 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route to the first
destination group by the following:
• Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no station unit is
installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
22
• Busy intercept
• Ring-no-answer intercept

If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11 based
on the table assigned to the DID trunk.
If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.

For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed, but the
second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the first
destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but the third destination is, the
call goes directly to the third destination.

Input Data

Conversion Table Area Number 01 ~ 20

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Incoming Group Number (V1.5 0 = No setting 1
Changed) 01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring group
102 = VM
103 = Centralized VM

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual 2-271

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk
Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one
type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a

22
Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 1 ~ 25

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Conversion Table Area Number 0 ~ 20 1
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2-272 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to define for each Program
incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of tone for VRS Waiting Message.

Input Data

Incoming Ring Group Number 1 ~ 25

22
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 1st Delayed Message 0 ~ 64800 seconds Time before the VRS Delay Message is 0
Start Time played for IRG.

02 1st Delayed Message 0 ~ 101 VRS message that is used for the 1st De- 0
Number 0 = No Message layed Message.
101 = Fixed Message
03 1st Delayed Message 0 ~ 255 (time) This is the number of times the 1st Delay 0
Sending Count Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st De-
lay Message is not played.
04 2nd Delayed Message 0 ~ 101 VRS message that is used for the 2nd De- 0
Number 0 = No Message layed Message.
101 = Fixed Message
05 2nd Delayed Message 0 ~ 255 (time) This is the number of times the 2nd Delay 0
Sending Count Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd De-
lay Message is not played.
06 Tone Kind at Message 0 = Ring Back Tone What is heard between the Delay Mes- 0
Interval 1 = MOH Tone sage.
2 = BGM Source
07 Disconnect Time Af- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are 60
ter the End of VRS 0 = No Disconnect played, before the caller is disconnected.
Delayed Message

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-273

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for each Department
(Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Delayed Message. There
are 32 available Department Groups.

22 Input Data

Extension Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 1st Delayed Message 0 ~ 64800 seconds Time before the VRS Delay Message is 0
Start Time played for Department Group.

02 1st Delayed Message 0 ~ 101 VRS message that is used for the 1st De- 0
Number 0 = No Message layed Message.
101 = Fixed Message
03 1st Delayed Message 0~255 (time) This is the number of times the 1st Delay 0
Sending Count Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st De-
lay Message is not played.
04 2nd Delayed Message 0 ~ 101 VRS message that is used for the 2nd De- 0
Number 0 = No Message layed Message.
101 = Fixed Message
05 2nd Delayed Message 0 ~ 255 (time) This is the number of times the 2nd Delay 0
Sending Count Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd De-
lay Message is not played.
06 Tone Kind at Message 0 = Ring Back Tone What is heard between the Delay Mes- 0
Interval 1 = MOH Tone sage.
2 = BGM Source
07 Disconnect Time Af- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are 60
ter the End of VRS 0 = No Disconnect played, before the caller is disconnected.
Delayed Message

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Group

2-274 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial group number for Program
Private Call Refuse.

Input Data
22
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Speed Dial Group 0 ~ 32 This program is used to assign a speed di- 0
Number 0 = No Group Assigned al group (1 ~ 32) to be used for the caller
(Caller ID refuse will not ID refuse number matching storage.
function.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Group

Programming Manual 2-275

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time
Pattern
Level:
SA

Description
Program
Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to define Time Zone
and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.

22 Input Data

Conversion Table Number 001 ~ 500 (V2.0 Changed)

Time Pattern Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Received Dial Up to eight digits No Setting
02 Start of Time 0000 ~ 2359 (Time) Define the Starting Time for each DID 0000
Translation table in PRG 22-17-01.
03 End of Time 0000 ~ 2359 (Time) Define the Ending Time for each DID 0000
Translation table in PRG 22-17-01.
04 Dial-In Conversion Ta- 1 ~ 800 (These are the 0
ble Number table entries in PRG
22-11.)
05 Day of week (V2.0 1: Sun Assign Day of Week for each DID conver- 1
Added) 2: Mon sion table.
3: Tue
4: Wed
5: Thu
6: Fri
8: Sun
9: Holiday
0 = Off
1 = On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-276 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and incoming ring pattern Program
for Private Calls.

Input Data
22
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Transfer Mode 0 = Not Defined (Pri- Leave this program set to (0) Not 0 14-01-27
vate call will not trans- Defined to route the Private caller to 15-02-02
fer to a user in the sys- a VRS message to refuse the call. 40-10-06
tem, can be routed to This program can also be used to
VRS message in PRG route the Private caller to an internal
40-10-06.) destination (PRG 22-18-02) or a
1 = Internal Dial (Speci- Ring Group (PRG 22-04).
fied in PRG 22-18-02)
2 = Incoming Ring
Group (Specified in
PRG 22-04)
02 Destination Num- 1 = Internal Dial (up to No Setting 14-01-27
ber 36 digits) 15-02-02
0 ~ 9, *, #, P, R, @ 40-10-06
2 = Incoming Ring
Group
0 ~ 25
03 Incoming Ring Incoming Ring Pattern 0 14-01-27
Pattern (0 ~ 13) (V3.0 15-02-02
Changed) 40-10-06
0 = Normal pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone pattern (1
~ 4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale pattern (1
~ 5)
10 ~ 13 = Tone pattern
(5 ~ 8) (V3.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-277

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by Caller ID per timer
pattern mode.

22 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 01 ~ 08

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Flexible Ringing 0 = Disable 1 13-04
1 = Enable 14-01-30

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-278 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This program Program
also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at
the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.
There are 32 available Call Pickup Groups.
23
Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Group Number 1 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Priority Group No. - Priority Or- Use this program to assign exten- 1 - xxx 11-12-26
der sions to Call Pickup Groups other (Note; default 11-12-27
(1 - 32) - ( 1 - 999) than the extension group set up by a value follows the 11-12-28
Program 16-02. port order of 15-07-24
PRG11-02 or 15-07-25
PRG11-04.) 15-07-26

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Group Call Pickup

Programming Manual 2-279

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in Program 14-06)
to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extension assigned
route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call.

23 You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other
extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls
based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing
calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line
Preference feature in the SL1100 Features and Specifications Manual for more information.
Make one entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Route Table 0 ~ 25 Use this program to let an extension 0 14-06
Number user automatically answer trunk
calls that ring other extensions.
When the user lifts the handset,
they automatically answer the ring-
ing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Line Preference
• Night Service

2-280 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook automatic Program
response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone.
There are 50 available Virtual Extension Ports.

Input Data
23
Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Priority Order 1~4

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Extension Group 0 ~ 32 When an extension has a virtual ex- 0 16-02
Number (0 = No Setting) tension assigned to a Programma-
ble Function Key, this program de-
termines the priority for automatical-
ly answering the ringing calls when
the handset is lifted. If 0 or 00 is se-
lected, when the user lifts the hand-
set, the user answers a ringing call
from any group.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Virtual Extensions

Programming Manual 2-281

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature.

Input Data
24 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
01 Hold Recall Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call on Hold recalls the extension 60 (V1.5
that placed it on Hold after this time. Changed)
This time works with the Hold Recall
Callback Time (Item 2).
02 Hold Recall Call- 0 ~ 64800 seconds A trunk recalling from Hold or Park 30
back Time rings an extension for this time. This
time works with Hold Recall Time or
Park Hold Time. After this time, the
system invokes the Hold recall time
again. Cycling between time 01 and
02 and 06 and 07 continues until a
user answers the call.
03 Exclusive Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls 90
Recall Time the extension that placed it on Hold
after this time.
04 Exclusive Hold 0 ~ 64800 seconds An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an 30
Recall Callback extension for this time. If not picked
Time up, the call goes back on System
Hold.
05 Forced Release 0 ~ 64800 seconds Depending on the setting of Pro- 1800 14-01-16
of Held Call gram 14-01-16, the system discon-
nects calls on Hold longer than this
time.
06 Park Hold Time - 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this 60 (V1.5 20-31-14
Normal time recalls the extension that initial- Changed)
ly parked it.
07 Park Hold Time - 0 ~ 64800 seconds A call left parked longer than this 300
Extended (Re- time recalls the extension that initial-
call) ly parked it.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hold
• Park

2-282 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for the Transfer Program
feature.

Input Data
24
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Busy Transfer 0 = Disable (No) Use this option to prevent or allow 1
1 = Enable (Yes) extensions to Transfer calls to busy
extensions. If disabled, calls trans-
ferred to busy extensions recall im-
mediately.
02 MOH or Ring- 0 = Hold Tone Use this option to enable or disable 1 (V1.5 20-03-02
back on Trans- 1 = Ring Back Tone MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a Changed)
ferred Calls transferred caller hears MOH while
their call rings the destination exten-
sion. If disabled (1), a transferred
caller hears ringback while their call
rings the destination extension.
03 Delayed Call For- 0 ~ 64800 seconds If activated at an extension, Delayed 10 20-31-15
warding Time Call Forwarding occurs after this
time. This also sets how long a
Transferred call waits at an exten-
sion forwarded to Voice Mail before
routing to the called extension mail-
box.
04 Transfer Recall 0 ~ 64800 seconds An unanswered transferred call re- 20 (V1.5 20-31-16
Time calls to the extension that initially Changed)
transferred it after this time.
05 Message Wait 0 ~ 64800 seconds For Single Line Telephones (SLTs) 30
Ring Interval without message waiting lamps, this
Time is the time between intermittent ring-
ing. If this value is set to 0, the sys-
tem rings once.
07 Trunk-to-Trunk 0 ~ 64800 seconds Time starts when a trunk begins 1800 14-01-25
Transfer Release talking with another trunk (for exam- 20-28-01
Warning Tone ple : trunk-to-trunk transfer, outgoing 20-28-02
from trunk, Tandem Trunking). 20-28-03
When this time expires, a warning 24-02-10
tone is heard. If Program 24-02-10
is set, the conversation disconnects
after time expires. This time is set
again when the external digit timer
expires. One of the trunks used
must be an analog trunk (or leased
line).
08 Delayed Transfer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10 11-11-28
Time for all De- 11-11-29
partment Groups 15-07-59

Programming Manual 2-283

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 Two B-Channel 0 ~ 30 seconds 10 10-03-16
Transfer Retry (PRI)
Timer
10 Disconnect 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 14-01-25
Trunk-to-Trunk 20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07
11 No Answer Step 0 ~ 64800 seconds 10 14-01-26
Transfer
12 No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0 14-01-26
Program Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
13 Hook Flash 0 ~ 64800 seconds Time before sending the hook flash 2

24 Sending Timer
When the Sys-
tem Answers Au-
tomatically
for Call Forward Centrex.

15 SIP Out of Range 0 ~ 30 seconds When not receiving any response 4

Timer (V3.0 Add- within this timer setting, the system
ed) determines that the SIP terminal is
out of range. When set to 0, timer is
invalid.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Transfer

2-284 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-03 : Park Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a total Program
of 64 Park Groups. An extension user can pick up only a call parked in orbit by an extension user in
own group.

Input Data 24
Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Park Group Num- 1 ~ 64 Assign an extension to a Park 1 15-07-01
ber Group. The system allows a total of
64 Park Groups.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Park

Programming Manual 2-285

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing
number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.

24 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
01 Speed Dial Area Number 0 ~ 999 999 The destination telephone number of the 11-10-08
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number 13-04
registered into the Speed Dial. Use this 24-05
program to setup the Speed Dial Bin
Number.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

2-286 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Speed Dialing bin Program
which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension Group.
There are 32 available Department Groups.

Input Data
24
Extension Group Number 01 ~ 32

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Speed Dial Area 0 ~ 999 The Speed Dialing area is used to 999 11-11-27
Number program the destination number of 13-04
the transferred telephone number 24-04
when a Department Group call is
transferred using the Trunk-to-Trunk
Forwarding feature.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Transfer

Programming Manual 2-287

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type and the destination
number for each extension/virtual extension. The destination can have up to 24 digits, using 0 ~ 9, *,
#, and @. Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-

24
premise.
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol.

Pause can be set by LK 1.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Call Forwarding Type 0 = No Call Forwarding 0
1 = Call Forward Both
2 = Call Forward No Answer
3 = Call Forward All
4 = Call Forward Busy No Answer
5 = Call Forward Busy
02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) (V1.5 No Setting
Both Ring, All Call, No Answer Changed)
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol

03 Intercom Call Forwarding Destina- Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) (V1.5 No Setting

tion for Both ring, All Call, No An- Changed)
swer
04 CO Call Forwarding Busy Destina- Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) (V1.5 No Setting
tion Changed)
05 Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) (V1.5 No Setting
Destination Changed)
06 Call Forwarding Destination for Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) (V1.5 No Setting
CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer Changed)
07 Call Forwarding Destination for Maximum of 36 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @, P, R) (V1.5 No Setting
CTX/PBX for Busy Changed)

Conditions

None

2-288 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Feature Cross Reference

• Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Program

24

Programming Manual 2-289

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each VRS/
DISA line.

25 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 VRS/DISA Dial - In Mode 0 = Extension Number Service Code Specify (In- 0 22-11
tercom)
1 = Use Dial Conversion Table
02 DISA User ID 0 = Off 1 25-08
1 = On
03 VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm 0 = Normal (Off) 0
1 = Alarm (On)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-290 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number to be used as the Program
Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as a VRS/DISA.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

25
Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Additional Data Default
No.
01 Message (Talkie) Source 0 = No Talkie 1 = 01 ~ 100 (VRS Message Number) Talkie Type = 1
1 = VRS 3 = 01 ~ 32 (Station Group Number) Additional Data = 1
3 = SLT

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2-291

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect
Dialing
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what happens
to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The

25 call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When
setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Incoming Group Number 0 = Disconnect 0 22-04
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group
102 = VMI
103 = Centralized VM (V1.5 Added)
104 = Assign the Speed Dial Number (V3.0 Add-
ed)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-292 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/
Busy
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operating
mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant
caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an
alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode,
make an entry for each Night Service mode.
25
Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Incoming Group Number 0 = Disconnect 0 22-04
01 ~ 25 = Incoming Ring Group
102 = VMI
103 = Centralized VM (V1.5 Added)
104 = Assign the Speed Dial Number (V3.0 Add-
ed)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2-293

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to
be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers,
enter the VRS message (1 ~ 100) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no

25
error message), the call reroutes according to Programs 25-03 and 25-04.

For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 VRS Message Number 0 ~ 100 0
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-294 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing Program
through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator,
Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (refer

25
to Programs 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:
• The digit the VRS caller dials (0 ~ 9, *, #). Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits,
outside callers cannot dial system extensions.
• The destination reached (Maximum eight digits ) when the caller dials the specified digit.

The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master
number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message.

Example:

Message Number = 01, Destination = 2, Next Message Number = 0, Dial = 399

In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to 399. This means
that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users during/after VRS Message 01.

Input Data

Attendant Message Number 01 ~ 100

Received Dial 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Next Attendant Mes- 0 ~ 100 (0 = No Setting) Defines the next attendant message num- 0
sage Number 101 = Voice Mail an- ber or destination number for each 1-digit
swers access code in Automated Attendant serv-
104 = Refer to 25-04 : ice
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring
Group With No Answer/
Busy on page 2-293
105 = Dial the other ex-
tension
106 =record VRS
02 Destination Number Up to eight digits No Setting
Must be a valid ex-
tension number that
is programmed in
command 11-02 or
11-04.

Programming Manual 2-295

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

• Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined
here.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)

Program

25

2-296 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system timers which Program
affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default
setting.

Input Data 25
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 VRS/DISA Dial 0 ~ 64800 seconds After answering a DISA trunk, the 10 seconds 25-04
Tone Time system waits this time for the caller
to dial the first digit of the DISA
password. If the caller fails to dial
during this time, the system drops
the call.
02 VRS/DISA No An- 0 ~ 64800 seconds A VRS/DISA caller can ring an ex- 0 25-04
swer Time tension for this time before the sys- 20-31-17
tem sets the call as a Ring No An-
swer. After this time expires, the call
follows the programmed Ring No
Answer routing (set in Programs
25-03 and 25-04).
03 Disconnect after 0 ~ 64800 seconds From DISA trunk, when the call may 60 seconds 20-31-18
VRS/DISA re- go to Incoming Ring Group of Pro-
transfer to IRG grams 25-03 and 25-04. This setting
determines how long the call is ring-
ing in the IRG.
04 Calling Time to 0 ~ 64800 seconds Set the answering waiting time of 10 seconds
Automatic An- the automatic answering extension
swering Tele- when an incoming DID trunk call is
phone Set received.
05 Duration Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds Set the announcement time of the 10 seconds
for Guidance automatic answering extension after
Message by Au- which an incoming DID trunk caller
tomatic Answer- is disconnected.
ing Telephone
Set
07 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Determine the time a DISA caller or 3600 14-01-25
tion Warning any trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem 20-28-01
Tone Time Trunking) conversation can talk be- 20-28-02
fore the Long Conversation tone is 20-28-03
heard. 20-31-19
08 Long Conversa- 0 ~ 64800 seconds This time determines how long the 10 14-01-25
tion Disconnect system waits before disconnecting a 20-28-01
Time DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk 20-28-02
(such as Tandem Trunking) conver- 20-28-03
sation call after the Long Conversa-
tion tone is heard.

Programming Manual 2-297

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 DISA Internal 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an In- 30 seconds 20-31-21
Paging Time ternal Page placed by a DISA caller.
If the Page continues longer than
this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.
10 DISA External 0 ~ 64800 seconds This is the maximum length of an 30 seconds 20-31-22
Paging Time External Page placed by a DISA
caller. If the Page continues longer
than this time, the system termi-
nates the DISA call.
11 VRS/DISA An- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Sets up the time the system waits 0 second
Program swer Delay Time after receiving an incoming VRS/
DISA call before the system auto-
matically answers the call.

25
13 VRS/DISA Busy 0 ~ 64800 seconds If a DISA caller dials a busy exten- 5 seconds
Tone Interval sion (and Program 25-04 = 0), the
system plays busy tone for this time
before disconnecting.
14 Delayed VRS An- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Assign the delay time from switching 10 seconds
swer Time from a normal incoming status to
DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the
call switches to DID mode immedi-
ately.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-298 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There are Program
15 users each with one 6-digit password.

Input Data

DISA User Number 01 ~ 15

25
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Password Dial (Fixed - six digits) No Setting
0 ~ 9, *, #

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2-299

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each
user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the
user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of

25
Service options in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for
each Night Service mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Function Class 1 ~ 15 1

Conditions

• DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.

• Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-300 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when Program
a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06.
Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA

25
Class of Service (1 ~ 15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the
password the DISA caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Route Table Number 0 ~ 25 1
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2-301

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description
Program For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign a
Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you
enter in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the

25
DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.
When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 2

Conditions

• Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2-302 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route selected Program
when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA
caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by the password the caller dials. When

25
programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.
Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk routes.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1 ~ 15

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Route Table Number 0 ~ 25 1
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

• You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual 2-303

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial before
the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program also is used
to define additional DISA call options.

25 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 VRS Message Access 1 ~ 9, 0, *, # Enter the password DISA callers must dial No Setting
Password (Fixed six digits) before the system allows them to record,
listen to and/or erase the VRS messages.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)

2-304 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-15 : DISA Transfer Target Setup to assign a Speed Dial number when a dial tone Program
times-out, or when the wrong number is received and the target extension does not answer or is busy.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

25
Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 DISA Transfer Target Area At Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999 999 25-03-01
Wrong Dial
02 DISA Transfer Target Area At Speed Dial bin number 0 ~ 999 999 25-04-01
No Answer or Busy

Conditions

• Related to Programs 25-03-01 25-04-01.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual 2-305

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) Service
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service (ARS/F-Route) to define the system
options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).

26 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 ARS Service 0 = Disabled (ARS Enable or disable ARS. 0 26-02
service is OFF.) 26-03
1 = Enabled (ARS serv- 26-04
ice is ON.)
02 Network Outgo- 0 ~ 64800 seconds With Networking, this time replaces 30 20-03-04
ing Inter-Digit 20-03-04 when determining if all
ARS Time network protocol digits have been
received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this time can be programmed for
5 (500 ms) at Site A. If ARS is disa-
bled and Site B is using F-Route for
outbound dialing, this time should
be programmed for 30 (three sec-
onds) at Site A.
03 ARS Misdialed 0 = Route to Trunk If a user dials a number not pro- 0 21-02
Number Han- Group 1 grammed in ARS, this option deter-
dling 1 = Play Warning Tone mines if the system should route
to Dialer over Trunk Group 1 or play error
tone.
06 Class of Service 0 = Disabled (ARS This enables/disables the ARS class 0 26-02
Match Access service is OFF.) of service settings.
1 = Enabled (ARS serv-
ice is ON.)
07 F-Route Access 0 = F-Route 0 26-02
COS Reference 1 = ARS 44-05

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-306 Program 26 : ARS Service

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS to set pre-transaction tables for selecting Program
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route).
• Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk group.
• Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.
26
Input Data

Dial Analysis Table Number 1 ~ 400

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Dial Maximum of 16 digits (0 ~ 9, *, #, @) No Setting
02 ARS Service Type 0 = No Service (Call Restricted) 0
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access
03 Additional Data/Service If Service Type 1 (in 26-02) : Select Trunk Group 0 44-04
Number Number 44-05
0 ~ 25 (Trunk Group Number 0 = No Route)
101 ~ 104 (Networking ID) (V1.5 Added)
If Service Type 2 (in 26-02) :
F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0 ~ 100
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on
page 2-395.
F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0 ~ 100
(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection
for Time Schedule on page 2-394.
04 ARS Class of Service 0 ~ 16 0
0 = No ARS Class (Call Restricted)
05 Dial Treatment for ARS 0 ~ 15 0
07 Network Specified Parameter 0 ~ 16 0 26-12
Table

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual 2-307

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS
dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The
ARS Dial Treatment options are:

26
• An - For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1 ~ 4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a
Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identifies which
code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for
outbound calls by ISDN trunks.
• DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234
outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0 ~ 9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code
counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like :
D05P1234.
• Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
• P - Pause in analog trunk.
• R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.
• E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
• X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system to output the
extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911 feature.

Input Data

Dial Treatment Table Number 1 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Treatment Code Maximum 36 characters No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-308 Program 26 : ARS Service

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an extension. Program
Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route
extension calls.

Input Data 26
Extension Number Up to eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Class 0 ~ 16 0
0 = No Class

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual 2-309

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for Alternate carrier
access, which is referred from Program 26-03.

26 Input Data

Transit Network ID Table 1~4

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Transit Network ID (Carrier ID) 0000 ~ 9999 Table No. 1 ~ 4 = No
(Fixed four digits or No Setting) Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-310 Program 26 : ARS Service

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 26 : ARS Service

26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the Network Specific Program
Parameter Table.

Input Data

Network Specific Parameter Table 1 ~ 16

26
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Called Party Number - 0 = System Default This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07 0
Type of Number Se- 1 = Unknown and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
lection 2 = International No.
3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.
02 Called Party number - 0 = System Default This setting is used by Programs 26-02-07 0
Numbering Plan Iden- 1 = Unknown and 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element.
tification Selection 2 = ISDN Plan
3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard
Plan
6 = Private Plan

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-311

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system DSS Consoles.
The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS Consoles. The available options are:
• Regular (Business) Mode (0)

30 • Hotel Mode (1)

Input Data

DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 DSS Operation Mode 0 = Business Mode 0
1 = Hotel Mode

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
• Hotel/Motel

2-312 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS Program
Consoles connected.
• Up to 12 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension can have up to

30
four 60-button DSS Consoles (12 is the maximum allowed per system).

When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. There
are 12 Console Numbers (01 ~ 12). Console Numbers can be assigned to extensions. When entering
data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally made first.

Input Data

60-button DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Extension Number Up to eight digits The extension number for the multiline ter- No Setting
minal connected with the DSS console.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Programming Manual 2-313

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment to customize the key assignments for 60-
button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function with up to eight digits (e.g.,
extension number or Service Code).

30 To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an extension programmed
key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be cleared + 00 or *00 (If using WebPro or
PC Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system before
proceeding.)] Without clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp
display, although the DSS function works correctly.

If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected, either
by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back in to
reset the console lamping.

Input Data

Index 1

DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Index 2

Item No. Key Number Function Number Additional Data

01 001 ~ 114 0 ~ 99, #0 ~ #99 (General Refer to Table 2-7 Function
Functional Level) Number List on page 2-314.
*00 ~ *99 (Appearance
Functional Level)

Table 2-7 Function Number List

[1] General functional level (00 ~ 99, #00 ~ #99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication Note
Number
01 DSS/One-Touch Extension Number or On (Red) : DSS Ext. Busy
any Numbers (up to Off : DSS Ext. Idle, DND External, DND
36 digits) Transfer, CFW Busy, CFW Noans, CFW
Busy/Noans, CFW Both, CFW FL ME
Fast Blink (Red) : DND Intercom, DND
All, CFW Imm
02 Microphone Key (ON/ On (Red) : Mic On
OFF) Off : Mic Off
03 DND Key On (Red) : DND Setup
04 BGM (ON/OFF) On (Red) : Active
05 Headset On (Red) : Headset Operation
06 Transfer Key None

2-314 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication Note
Number
07 Conference Key On (Red) : Conference Operation
08 Incoming Call ID List Fast Blink (Red) : Existing New CID
On (Red) : Existing Checked CID
Off : No CID
09 Day/Night Mode Switch Mode Number (1 ~ 8) On : While each mode
10 Call Forward - Immedi- On (Red) : Setup
ate
11 Call Forward - Busy On (Red) : Setup
12 Call Forward - No An- On (Red) : Setup
swer Program
13 Call Forward - Busy/No On (Red) : Setup
Answer
14

15
Call Forward - Both
Ring
Follow Me
On (Red) : Setup

Fast Blink (Red) : Setup

30
Slow Blink (Red) : To be setup
18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers On (Red) : Setup
(01 ~ 20)
19 External Group Paging External Paging Num- On (Red) : Active
ber (1 ~ 6)
20 External All Call Paging On (Red) : Active
21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Num- On (Red) : Active
ber (01 ~ 32)
22 Internal All Call Paging None
23 Meet-Me Answer to In- None
ternal Paging
24 Call Pickup None
25 Call Pickup for Another None
Group
26 Call Pickup for Specified Call Pickup Group None
Group Number (1 ~ 32)
27 Speed Dial - System/ None or Speed Dial None
Private Number (00 ~ 99 or
000 ~ 999)
28 Speed Dial - Group None or Speed Dial None
Number (00 ~ 99 or
000 ~ 999)
29 Repeat Redial On (Red) : Repeat Dialing
30 Saved Number Redial None
31 Memo Dial None
32 Meet-me Conference None
33 Override (Off-Hook Sig- None
naling)
34 Barge-In None
35 Camp On On (Red) : Active
36 Department Step Call None
37 DND/FWD Override Call None
38 Message Waiting None
39 Room Monitoring Slow Blink (Red) : Monitoring
Fast Blink (Red) : To be monitored

Programming Manual 2-315

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication Note
Number
41 Secretary Buzzer Extension Number (8 On (Red) : Calling party
digits) Fast Blink : Called party
42 Boss - Secretary Call Extension Number (8 On (Red) : Active
Pickup digits)
43 Series Call None
44 Common Hold None
45 Exclusive Hold None
46 Department Group Log On (Red) : Withdrawing
Out
Program 49 Call Redirect Extension Number or None
Voice Mail Number ( 8
digits)

30 50
52
Account Code
Automatic Answer with
Delay Message Setup
None
Incoming Group Num- On (Red) : Setup
ber (01 ~ 25)
53 Automatic Answer with On (Red) : Delay Message Answering
Delay Message Starting
54 External Call Forward On (Red) : Setup
by Door Box Setup
55 Extension Name Edit None
56 General Purpose LED 001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Off
Operation
57 General Purpose LED 001 ~ 100 : (Red) On Off
Indication
58 Department Incoming Extension Group Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Call - Immediate Number (01 ~ 32) Off : Cancel
59 Department Incoming Extension Group Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Call - Delay Number (01 ~ 32) Off : Cancel
60 Department Incoming Extension Group Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Call - DND Number (01 ~ 32) Off : Cancel
62 Flash Key None
63 Outgoing Call Without On (Red) : Mode enabled
Caller ID (ISDN)
66 CTI (V3.0 Deleted) On (Red) : CTI active
72 Keypad Facility Key
73 Keypad Hold Key
74 Keypad Retrieve Key
75 Keypad Conference Key
76 Application Key None
77 Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Number or Fast Blink (Red) : Existing new message
Pilot Number (8 digits)
78 Conversation Recording 0 = Conversation re- Fast Blink (Red) : Recording
(In0skin VM) cording
1 = Delete, Re-record-
ing
2 = Delete
79 Automated Attendant Extension Number or On (Red) : Setup - All calls
(In-Skin) Pilot Number (8 digits) Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer
calls
(125msec on/125msec off/125msec on/
625msec off) (Red) : Setup - busy calls
Slow Blink (Red) : Setup – busy/noans
calls

2-316 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication Note
Number
80 Tandem Ringing Set Up 0 = Cancel On (Red) : Master Side
Key 1 = Set Slow Blink (Red) : Slave Side
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring (8 dig-
its)
81 Automatic Transfer to Trunk Line Number Off : Cancel
Transfer Key 001 ~ 084 Slow Blink (Red) : Set
83 Conversation Recording 0 = Pause
Function 1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page Program
84 Line Drop (send long
flash)
86

87
Private Call Refuse

Caller ID Refuse
None

None
Off : Cancel
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
Off : Cancel
30
Slow Blink (Red) : Set
88 Dial-In Mode Switching Program 22-17, Table Off : pattern 1, pattern 5 ~ 8
No. 1 ~ 500 On (Red) : pattern 2
Slow Blink (Red) : pattern 3
91 Live Monitoring Key Slow Blink (Red) : Set
92 Wake Up Call Indication None Set : On
No Set : Off
No answer : Blink(On (125ms)/Off
(125ms)
93 Room Status Indication None ON : Checked In and Clean
OFF : Checked Out (clean and available)
SLOW blink : Maid Required [On
(500ms)/Off (500ms)]
MEDIUM blink : Maid in Room [On
(250ms)/Off (250ms)]
FAST blink : Inspect Room [On
(125ms)/Off (125ms)]
94 Call Attendant Fast Blink (Red) : Setup - No answer
calls
(125msec:on
125msec:off
125msec:on
625msec:off) (Red) : Setup - Busy
calls
On (Red) : Setup - Busy/No answer calls
95 Page Switching None Red On : Page 1
Slow Blink (Red) Page 2
97 Door Box Access Key Doorphone No. (1 ~ On (Red) : Door Box Busy
6) Off : Door Box Idle
Fast Blink (Red) : Door Box Incoming
98 Message Waiting Indi- None ON : New Message
cation Key OFF : No Message
99 Alternate Answer Key None

Programming Manual 2-317

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Table 2-8 Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 752)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

*01 Trunk Key Trunk Line Number 001 ~ 084 Fast Blink (Red) : Incoming
On (Red) : Speaking
Slow Blink (Red) : Holding/
Transferring/Recall

*04 Park Key Park Number (01 ~ 64) Slow Blink (Red) : Holding/
Recall

*07 Station Park Hold None

Program

Default

30 • The DSS keys 001 ~ 060 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 101 ~ 160.
• The DSS keys 061 ~ 114 of all DSS consoles = No Setting.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

2-318 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS console station in Program
case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS console).

Input Data

Index 1
30
DSS Console Number 01 ~ 12

Index 2

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 DSS Console Alternate Answer Alternate DSS No. 01 ~ 12 0 = No Setting
(0 = No setting)

Conditions

• Related extension is assigned in Program 30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is assigned at
Program 30-03.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-319

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for functions on the DSS
consoles.

30 Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Idle Extension 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 0
02 Busy Extension 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 7
03 DND Extension 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 3
04 ACD Agent Busy (V1.5 Added) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 7
05 Out of Schedule (ACD DSS) (V1.5 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 0
Added)
06 ACD Agent log Out (ACD DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 5
(V1.5 Added)
07 ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS) (V1.5 1 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 4
Added)
09 Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 7
10 Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 1
11 Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 2
12 Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 3
13 Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 5
14 Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 3
15 Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 6
16 Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 4
17 Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 3
18 Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 0
19 Hotel Status Code * (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 4
20 Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 5
21 VM Message Indication 0 ~ 7 (Lamp Pattern Data) 3

2-320 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

L E D P a tte rn 0 :[O F F ]

On

O ff
L E D P a tte rn 1 :[F L : O n (5 0 0 m s)/Off(5 0 0 m s)]

On

O ff
L E D P a tte rn 2 :[W K : O n (2 5 0 m s)/Off(2 5 0 m s)]

On

O ff
L E D P a tte rn 3 :[R W : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]

On Program
O ff

30
L E D P a tte rn 4 :[IR : O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/ O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(6 2 5 m s)]
On

O ff

L E D P a tte rn 5 :[IL O n (8 7 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]

On

O ff

L E D P a tte rn 6 :[IW O n (6 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)/O n (1 2 5 m s)/Off(1 2 5 m s)]

On

O ff

L E D P a tte rn 7 :[O N ]

On

O ff

LED Patterns for DSS Console

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Programming Manual 2-321

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options for
Internal/External Paging.

The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when

31 entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character,
twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to
display the lower case letter.

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ... When you want to ...
1 Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2 Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В

* Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead
to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 All Call Paging Up to 12 Characters Assign a name to each All Call Inter- Group all 11-12-19
Zone Name nal Paging zone. The name shows 31-02-02
on the display of the telephone mak-
ing the announcement.
02 Page Announce- 0 ~ 64800 seconds This timer sets the maximum length 1200 seconds
ment Duration of Page announcements. (Affects
External Paging only)

2-322 Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
04 Privacy Release 0 ~ 64800 seconds Once the user initiates a Meet-Me 90 seconds
Time Conference or Voice Call Confer-
ence, the system waits this time for
the Paged party to join the call.

Conditions

None

Program

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External
• Paging, Internal
31

Programming Manual 2-323

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group can
receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 32 paging groups. An extension can be in

31
only one Internal Paging Group.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Internal Paging Group 0 ~ 32 Assign extensions to Internal Paging Port 1 ~ 16 = 1
Number (0 = No setting) Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system al- (Group 1),
lows up to 32 Internal Paging Groups. An Port 17 ~ = 0
extension can be in only one Internal Pag-
ing Group.
02 Internal All Call Pag- 0 = Off Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for 0
ing Receiving 1 = On each extension. If allowed, extension can
place and receive All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If prevented, extensions
can only make (not receive) All Call Inter-
nal Paging announcements. If combined,
Paging zones should be restricted as well,
change the internal page zone group in
Program 31-07-01 to 0.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, Internal

2-324 Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups Program
(i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.

The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character,
twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to
display the lower case letter.
31
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.
Use this keypad digit ... When you want to ...
1 Enter characters : 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } ÁÀÂÃÅÆÇÉÊìó0
2 Enter characters : A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters : D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters : G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters : J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters : M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters : P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters : T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters : W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters : 0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô õ ú å ä æ ö ü α ε θ В

* Enter characters : * + , - . / : ; < = > ? π Σ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex : TOM).
Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead
to accept and/or add a space.)
Clear/Back Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Flash Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data

Internal Paging Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Internal Paging Group Up to 12 Characters Assign name to Internal Paging Groups Refer below
Name (i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the
name you program on the telephone dis-
play.

Programming Manual 2-325

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Default

Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name

Extension Paging Group Name

01 Group 1
02 Group 2
: :
32 Group 32

Program Conditions

None

31
Feature Cross Reference
• Paging, Internal

2-326 Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an Program
External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to
the external zone.

To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group the same
number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.). 31
Input Data

External Speaker Number 1~3

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Paging Group Number 0 ~ 3 (0 = No setting, 1 ~ 3= Group number) Speaker 1 (Basic) = 1
(Group 1)
Speaker 2 (Expan-
sion1) = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 (Expan-
sion2) = 3 (Group 3)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External

Programming Manual 2-327

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal Night Answer
ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a separate entry for each External
Paging zone. For UNA ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

31 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

External Speaker Number 1~3

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Universal Night Answer/Ring 0 = No Ringing (No) 0
1 = Ringing (Yes)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service
• Paging, External

2-328 Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker using Program
an amplifier.

Input Data

External Speaker Number 1~3

31
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Broadcast Splash 0 = No Tone (None) Use this option to enable or disable splash 2
Tone Before Paging 1 = Splash Tone tone before Paging over an external zone.
(Paging Start Tone) 2 = Chime Tone If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash
tone before the External Paging an-
nouncement.
02 Broadcast Splash 0 = No Tone (None) Use this option to enable or disable splash 2
Tone After Paging 1 = Splash Tone tone after Paging over an external zone. If
(Paging End Time) 2 = Chime Tone enabled, the system broadcasts a splash
tone at the end of an External Paging an-
nouncement.
03 Speech Path 0 = Both Way (Duplex) Determine if the external speaker will be 1
1 = One Way (Simplex) used for talkback (As this option is not
available with the CPU external page
zone, speaker 9 should be left at 1).
04 CODEC Transmit 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 32
Gain Setup dB)
05 CODEC Receive Gain 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5 32
Setup dB)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External

Programming Manual 2-329

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Group (0 ~ 3) to
an Internal Paging Zone (0 ~ 32) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined
Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone.

31 Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1 ~ 3) to an External Page Group (0 ~ 3).

Input Data

External Paging Group Number 0 ~ 3 (0 = All External Paging)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Internal Paging Group Number 0 ~ 32 (0 = All Internal Paging) 1

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External
• Paging, Internal

2-330 Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each External Program
Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over the zone when it is idle.

Input Data

External Speaker Number 1~3

31
Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 BGM 0 = BGM Prevented (No) Use this option to allow or prevent the Ex- 0
1 = BGM allowed (Yes) ternal Paging zone you select from broad-
casting Background Music when it is idle.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Background Music
• Paging, External

Programming Manual 2-331

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 31-10 : External Paging Group Basic Setting assigns the name of external paging
group and defines the splash tone for external paging.

31 Input Data

External Speaker Number 01 ~ 03

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 External Speaker Name Up to 12 Characters External Speaker Num-
ber 01 = Group 1
External Speaker Num-
ber 02 = Group 2
External Speaker Num-
ber 03 = Group 3

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-332 Program 31 : Paging Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for the Door Box. Program
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.

Input Data 32
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Door Box Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds A user can answer the door box during the 30 seconds
Time time specified in this program.
02 Door Lock Cancel 0 ~ 64800 seconds When a user activates the door lock re- 10 seconds
Time lease relay, this program specifies the
amount of time the door strike remains
open.
03 Off-Premise Call For- 0 ~ 64800 seconds Define the conversation period for an Off- 60 seconds
ward by Door Box Premise Call Forward by Door Box call.
Disconnect Timer When this timer expires, the caller hears
busy tone for three seconds (fixed time),
and the call is then disconnected.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

Programming Manual 2-333

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which rings when a caller
presses the associated Door Box call button.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.

32 Input Data

Door Box Number 1~6

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Door Box Ring Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Extension Number Maximum eight digits Door Box Ringing
Member 1 = 101
Other : No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

2-334 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each Door Program
Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in 80-01 : Service Tone
Setup. on page 2-449
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.
32
Input Data

Door Box Number 1~6

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Chime Pattern 0 = None Per door box specify the chime pattern for Door Box 1 = 1
1 = Door Box Ring 1 ringing. Door Box 2 = 2
2 = Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 = 3
3 = Door Box Ring 3 Door Box 4 = 4
4 = Door Box Ring 4 Door Box 5 = 5
5 = Door Box Ring 5 Door Box 6 = 6
6 = Door Box Ring 6
02 CODEC Transmit 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ This program controls the gain levels from 32
Gain Setup + 15.5 dB) the system to the door box.
03 CODEC Receive Gain 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dB ~ This program controls the gain levels from 32
Setup + 15.5 dB) the door box to the system.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

Programming Manual 2-335

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box.
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and using a multiline terminal.

32 Input Data

Door Box Number 1~6

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Per door box assign a name up to 12 char- Door Box Name
acters long. 1 = DOOR-1
Door Box Name
2 = DOOR-2
Door Box Name
3 = DOOR-3
Door Box Name
4 = DOOR-4
Door Box Name
5 = DOOR-5
Door Box Name
6 = DOOR-6

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

2-336 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings for each E&M Tie line. Program

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

34
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 DID/E&M Start 0 = 2nd Dial Tone Set the start signaling mode for DID 1 22-02
Signaling 1 = Wink and Tie trunks. DID and Tie trunks
2 = Immediate can use either immediate start or
3 = Delay wink start signaling.

02 Receive Dial 0 = DP 1 10-09

Type for E&M Tie 1 = DTMF
Line 2 = MF
03 E&M Dial-In 0 = Specify Extension Determine if the incoming Tie Line 0 22-11
Mode Number (Intercom) call should be directed as an inter-
1 = Use Conversion Ta- com call or if it should follow the DID
ble (NTT) Translation Table in Program 22-11.
04 E&M Line Dial 0 = Disable (No) Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send 1
Tone 1 = Enable (Yes) dial tone to the calling system after
the call is set up. Enter 0 if the Tie
Line should not send dial tone.
05 System Toll Re- 0 = System Determine if an incoming Tie Line 0 21-05
striction 1 = Each Extension call should be subject to Toll Restric-
tion. If it is set to 0 then it will use
the Program 21-05-13, if it is set to 1
then it will used Programs 21-05-01
~ 21-05-13.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-337

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a Tie line (there
are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program 20-14. For
each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

34 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Class 1 ~ 15 1 20-14

Conditions

• Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-338 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route 01 ~ Program
25) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If
the system has Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route), dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate

34
entry for each Tie Line - for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Route Table Number 00 ~ 25 1
(0 = No setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-339

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each
Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For
each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.

34 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 2 21-05
14-01-08

Conditions

• Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-340 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing Program
trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line). For each inbound trunk group,
enable or disable access to each CO trunk group.

Input Data 34
Incoming Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

Trunk Group Number 01～25

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Outgoing Trunk Group Number 0 = Enable (Y-Tandem) 0
1 = Restricted (N-Tandem)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-341

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should add or
delete for Tie Lines.
• Delete Digit

34
Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side. This
program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.
If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could delete all digits
including the extension number.
• Add Digit
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the
location can be added to the received digits.

Input Data

Incoming Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Delete Digit 0 ~ 255 (255 = delete all digits) 0
02 Additional Dial Digits Up to four digits (0 ~ 9, *, #) No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-342 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
34
01 First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3 seconds
Start)
02 First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start) 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
03 First Digit Pause (LD Trunk) 0 ~ 64800 seconds 3 seconds
04 LD Trunk Guard Time 0 ~ 64800 seconds 0
05 Trunk Answer Detect Timer for 0 ~ 64800 seconds 30 seconds
E&M

Conditions

• If Program 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the station that performed the
transfer when not answered.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-343

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data for
E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.

34 Input Data

Class of Service 01 ~ 15

Table No. 01 ~ 20

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Dial Data Up to 10 Digits (0 ~ 9, *, #) No Setting 21-05-13

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-344 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI/DNIS service option setup for Program
E&M Class of Service.

Input Data

Class of Service 01 ~ 15
34
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Receive Format 0 = Address Use this option to specify the format COS 01 = 0 34-01-02
1 = * ANI* of the ANI/DNIS data received from COS 02 ~ 15 = 0 34-09-02
2 = * DNIS* the Telco. Make sure your entry is
3 = * ANI* Address* compatible with the service the Tel-
4 = * ANI* DNIS* co provides. The character* indi-
5 = * DNIS* ANI* cates a delimiter.
(* = Delimiter Code)
If Program 34-01-02 is selected
to 2 (MF), this Program works
only as 4 =*ANI*DNIS*.
02 Delimiter Dial 1 ~ 9, 0, #, * This option defines the character COS 01 = * 34-09-01
Code Telco uses as a delimiter (see en- COS 02 ~ 15 = *
tries 1 ~ 5 in Item 1 above). Valid
entries are 0 ~ 9, #, and *.
03 Route Setup of 0 = Fixed Route (Item This option specifies the source of COS 01 = 0 22-09-01
Receive Dial 08) (No Routing) the data the system uses to route in- COS 02 ~ 15 = 0 22-11-01
1 = Routes on Re- coming ANI/DNIS calls. If option 2 is 34-09-04
ceived DNIS or Ad- selected, refer to Program 34-09-04. 34-09-08
dress Data
2 = Routes on Re-
ceived ANI Data

Programming Manual 2-345

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
04 Route Table Set- 0 = SPD Table The option sets how the system COS 01 = 0 13-04
up of Target Dial (Program 13-03) uses the route data (gathered in COS 02 ~ 15 = 0 22-11-03
1 = DID Table Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS 34-09-05
(Program 22-11) calls.
If option 2 is selected, and the call is
to be routed using the DID table (1),
up to eight digits can be matched.
The number of expected digits set in
Program 22-09-01 must match the
ANI digits defined in Program
22-11-01. For example, if an ANI/
DNIS number received was
Program *2035551234*3001* and Program
22-09- 01 = 4, the entry in 22-11-01
must be 1234 with the defined target
extension.

34
If the call is to be routed using the
ABB table (0), up to 36 digits can be
matched. Define the range of the
ABB table to be used in Program
34-09-06. The data is compared to
the entries in Program 13-04-01 and
then routed according to Program
13-04-03.
05 ANI/DNIS Display 0 = Display Off Use this option to set whether or not COS 01 = 1 13-04
as Target Dial 1 = Display On ANI data should appear on tele- COS 02 ~ 15 = 0 20-09-02
Name phone displays as part of Caller ID 22-11-03
display. 23-09-04
06 Routing SPD Ta- Start = 0, 100 ~ 900 Use this option to define which part COS 01 = 13-04
ble Setup End = 0, 99 ~ 999 of the ABB Table set up in Program Start = 900
13-04 the system uses for ANI/DNIS End = 999
Caller ID look-ups and ANI/DNIS COS 02 ~ 15 =
routing. Start = 0
This is required if Items 4 and 5 End = 0
above are 1 (Caller ID on). When
you specify a starting and end ad-
dress, the system uses the part of
the table for look-ups.
When you specify a starting address
and length, the system uses that
part of the table for routing. If the in-
coming ANI/DNIS number data
matches the Number entry in the ta-
ble, the system routes according to
the associated Name data. That da-
ta can be an extension, Department
Group pilot number, the voice mail
master number or a trunk ring
group.
07 Routing on ANI/ 0 = Play Busy Tone to This option lets you determine how COS 01 = 1 25-03
DNIS Error Caller the system handles an ANI/DNIS COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
1 = Route Caller to call if a data error is detected in the
Ring Group Specified incoming data string.
in Program 25-03
(Transfer)
08 Routing When 0 = Play Busy or Ring- This option lets you determine how COS 01 = 0 25-04
Destination Busy back Tone to Caller the system handles an ANI/DNIS COS 02 ~ 15 = 0
or No Answer (Busy/ NoAns) call if destination is busy or does not
1 = Route Caller to answer.
Ring Group Specified
in Program 25-04
(Transfer)

2-346 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 Calling Number 1~8 When Item 01 = 0 (ANI/DNIS re- COS 01 = 7 34-09-01
Address Length ceive format is the address), use COS 02 ~ 15 = 7
this option to specify the address
length. The choices are from 1 ~ 8
digits.

Conditions

None
Program

Feature Cross Reference

None 34

Programming Manual 2-347

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 34-10 : Digit Delete for T1 ANI to delete the Information Digits received from the
Network on Feature Group D Trunks.

34 Input Data

Incoming Trunk Group Number 001 ~ 025

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Delete digit 0 ~ 9 (0 = No delete) Example : 2
ANI Information = 111222
Delete = 2 digits
After digit been deleted = 1222

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-348 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-01 : SMDR Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) options Program
for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its
range and default setting.

Input Data 35
SMDR Port Number 1~2

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting (SMDR This option specifies the type of connec- SMDR port1 : 3
disabled) tion used for SMDR. The baud rate for the SMDR port2 : 0
3 = LAN (SMDR enabled COM port should be set in Program
and sent out of the LAN 10-21-02 or 15-02-19.
port.)
03 Header Language 0 = English Specify the language in which the SMDR 0
1 = German header should be printed.
2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish
04 Omit Digits 0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied) The number of digits entered in this option 0
does not print on the SMDR report. For ex-
ample, if the entry is 10, the first 10 digits a
user dials do not appear on the SMDR re-
port.
05 Minimum Digits 0 ~ 24 (0 = Not applied) Outgoing calls must be at least this num- 0
ber of digits for inclusion in the SMDR re-
port.
06 Minimum Call Dura- 0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 = The duration of the call must be at least 0
tion All) this time to be included on the SMDR re-
port.
07 Minimum Ring Time 0 ~ 65535 seconds (0 = A call must ring for at least this time to be 0
(For Incoming Calls) All) included on the SMDR report.
08 Format Selection 0 = Format1 Type (North 0
America)
1 = Format2 Type (Over-
seas)

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-349

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording

Program

35

2-350 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) Program
output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each
option, its range and default setting.

Input Data 35
SMDR Port Number 1~2

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Toll Restricted Call 0 = Not Displayed SMDR can include or exclude calls 1
1 = Displayed blocked by Toll Restriction.
02 PBX Calls 0 = Not Displayed When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR 1
1 = Displayed can include all calls (1) or just calls dialed
using the PBX trunk access code (0).
03 Trunk Number or 0 = Name Select whether the system should display 1
Name 1 = Number the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on
SMDR reports.
If this option is set to 1, Program
35-02-14 must be set to 0.
04 Summary (Daily) 0 = Not Displayed Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR re- 1
1 = Displayed port provides a daily summary (at midnight
every night).
05 Summary (Weekly) 0 = Not Displayed Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR re- 1
1 = Displayed port provides a weekly summary (every
Saturday at midnight).
06 Summary (Monthly) 0 = Not Displayed Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR re- 1
1 = Displayed port provides a monthly summary (at mid-
night on the last day of the month).
07 Toll Charge Cost 0 = Not Displayed Set this option to (1) have the SMDR re- 1
1 = Displayed port include toll charges.
08 Incoming Call 0 = Not Displayed Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR 1
1 = Displayed report include incoming calls. If you disa-
ble this option (0), incoming calls do not
print.
09 Extension Number or 0 = Name Set this option (1) to have the SMDR re- 1
Name 1 = Number port include extension numbers. Set this
option (0) to have the SMDR report include
extension names.
10 All Lines Busy (ALB) 0 = Not Displayed Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indi- 0
Output 1 = Displayed cation should be displayed.
11 Walking Toll Restric- 0 = Not Output 1
tion Table Number 1 = Output
12 DID Table Name Out- 0 = Not Displayed Determine if the DID table name should be 0
put 1 = Displayed displayed.

Programming Manual 2-351

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
13 CLI Output When DID 0 = Not Displayed Determine if the CLI output should be dis- 0
to Trunk 1 = Displayed played for DID.
14 Date 0 = Not Displayed Determine whether or not the date should 0
1 = Displayed be displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the trunk
name is set to be displayed in Program
35-02-03.
15 CLI/DID Number 0 = CLI (CLIP) Determine whether or not the CLI/DID 0
Switching 1 = DID Calling Number Number Switching should be displayed.
2 = Calling Party Name
Program 16 Trunk Name or Re- 0 = Trunk Port Name Determine how the SMDR should print in- 0
ceived Dialed Number 1 = Received Dialed coming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If
Number set to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS
2 = Both digits. If set to (0) trunk names are printed

35 17 Print Account Code

or Caller Name of In-
0 = ACC
1 = CNAME
instead.
Determine if SMDR should print Account
Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call.
0

coming Call
18 Print Mode for Caller 0 = Normal Determine how SMDR should print Caller 0
Name of Incoming 1 = Line Feed Name of Incoming Call.
Call
19 Dialed Number Out- 0 = Display from the first Determine if the dialed number should dis- 0
put Format digit play from the first digits or from the last
1 = Display from the last digits. This option is only available for out-
digit going calls.
20 External Information 0 = Transfer Information Determine which information is displayed 0
CFW Mode 1 = Incoming Information in the "STATION" area for a transferred
call when the extension has Call Forward
set with an Abbreviated Dial number as
the destination. Selecting "0" (Transfer In-
fo) will display the extension number which
called the extension with external Call For-
ward set. Selecting "1" (Incoming Info) will
display the extension number which has
the external Call Forward set.
This option only applies when Call For-
ward is set using a service code (Pro-
grams 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-07) and the desti-
nation uses an Abbreviated Dial bin. It
does not include Off-Premise or Centrex
transfers.
21 S-Point Terminal 0 = MSN Number 0
Number 1 = Extension Number
22 Security Auto Dialing 0 = No Output Emergency call from Watch Mode. Define 1
1 = Output SMDR output on/off. Output is SAD (Se-
curity auto dialing).
23 Watch Auto Dialing 0 = No Output Emergency call from Remote Inspection. 1
1 = Output Define SMDR output on/off. Output is
WAD (Watch auto dialing )
25 Call Waiting (V4.0 0 = No Output Define Call Waiting output on/off 1
Added) 1 = Output

Conditions

None

2-352 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording

Program

35

Programming Manual 2-353

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for each
trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where the incoming SMDR information
should be sent.

35 Input Data

Trunk Group Number 01 ~ 25

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 SMDR Port No. 1~2 1

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording
• Trunk Group Routing

2-354 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR port for Program
each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the SMDR port where the outgoing
SMDR information should be sent.
There are 32 available Department Groups.
35
Input Data

Department Group Number 01 ~ 32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 SMDR Port No. 1~2 1

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording

Programming Manual 2-355

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension
Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06.

35 Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Account Code Mode 0 = Account Codes Disa- Use this option to select the Account Code 0
bled Mode (0 ~ 3).
1 = Account Codes Op-
tional (This is for the ac-
count code entry fea-
ture.)
2 = Account Code Re-
quired Not Verified
(Forced Account Codes
enabled, no verification
with the system re-
quired)
3 = Account Code Re-
quired and Verified
(Forced Account Codes
enabled, verification with
PRG 35-06-01 required)
02 Forced Account Code 0 = Account Codes for Use this option enable Account Codes for 0
Toll Call Setup ALL calls all calls or just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3 in
1 = Account Codes for Item 01 above).
TOLL calls
03 Account Codes for In- 0 = Disabled (User can- Use this option to allow users to enter Ac- 0
coming Calls not enter an account count Codes for incoming calls. If disabled,
code.) any codes entered dial out on the connec-
1 = Enabled (User can ted trunk.
enter an account code
while on an incoming
call.)
04 Hiding Account Co- 0 = Account Codes dis- Use this option to either hide or show the 0
des played Account codes on a telephone display.
1 = Account Codes not
displayed

Conditions

None

2-356 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Feature Cross Reference

• Account Code Forced/Verified/Unverified

Program

35

Programming Manual 2-357

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account
Code list. You can enter up to 800 codes with 1 ~ 16 digits, using the characters 0 ~ 9 or #. Use the
LK1 to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234 means the user can enter 0234-9234.

35 Input Data

Verified Account Code Bin Number 1 ~ 800

Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Verified Account 1 ~ 9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild If PRG 35-05-01 is set to a (3), required No Setting
Code card) and verified, this is where the verified ac-
(Up to 16 digits) count code list is created in the system.
Up to 800 account codes with 1 ~ 16 digits
can be entered.
Wild cards can be entered by using the @
symbol. For example @234 means the
user can enter 0234 ~ 9234 as valid ac-
count codes.
The digit * cannot be used in the account
code because this digit is used to start and
end the account code entry.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Account Codes - Forced/Verified/Unverified

2-358 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to set the Basic setting of Voice Mail. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
40
01 Fixed Channel for Voice Mail 0 ~ 16 0
02 Time Stamp 0 = Disable 1
1 = Enable
03 Conversation recording mode after 0 = Stop 1
Transfer 1 = Continue
04 Automated Attendant 0 = Disable 1
1 = Enable
05 Maintenance Time 0000 ~ 2359 0000
(0000 = No setting)
06 Automatic Erase Mail 0 ~ 180 (Day) 0
07 Escape from DSPDB-VM while At- 0 = Disable 0
tendant Message 1 = Enable
08 Display caller ID while recording 0 = Disable 1
message playing 1 = Enable
10 Department group call when the 0 = Disable 0
automated attendant is activate 1 = Enable

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-359

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the language to be
used for the VRS prompts.

40 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Voice Prompt Language Assign- 01 = US English 1
ment for VRS 02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

2-360 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level:
IN

Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for the Voice Program
Announcement feature.

Input Data
40
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 VRS Fixed Mes- 0 = Disable (VRS fixed Enable (1) or disable (0) the system 0
sage message will not be ability to play the fixed VRS mes-
played.) sages (such as You have a mes-
1 = Enable (VRS fixed sage).
message will be
played.)
02 General Message 0 ~ 100 This item assigns the VRS message 0
Number (0 = No General Mes- number to use for the General Mes-
sage Service) sage.
03 VRS No Answer 0 ~ 25 This item assigns the transferred 0 (No Setting)
Destination (Incoming Ring Group Ring Group when the VRS is unan-
Number) swered after Call Forwarding with
Personal Greeting Message.
04 VRS No Answer 0 ~ 64800 seconds If an extension has Personal Greet- 0
Time ing enabled and all VRS ports are
busy, a DIL or DISA call to the ex-
tension waits this time for a VRS
port to become free.
05 Park and Page 0 ~ 64800 seconds If a Park and Page is not picked up 0
Repeat Timer during this time, the Paging an-
(VRS Msg Re- nouncement repeats.
send)
06 Set VRS Mes- 0 = No Message This item assigns the VRS Message 0 14-01-27
sage for Private Played number to be used as Private Call
Call Refuse (VRS 1 ~ 100 = VRS Mes- Refuse.
Msg Private Call) sage 1 ~ 100 When Fixed message is set, VRS
101 = VRS Fixed mes- message guidance is: “Your call
sage (Message will on- cannot go through.”
ly play if PRG 40-10-01
is enabled.)
07 Set VRS Mes- 0 = No Message This item assigns the VRS Message 0 14-01-27
sage for Caller ID Played number to be used as Caller ID Re-
Refuse (VRS Msg 1 ~ 100 = VRS Mes- fuse.
CID) sage 1 ~ 100 When Fixed Message is set, VRS
101 = VRS Fixed mes- message guidance is: “Your call
sage (Message will on- cannot go through.”
ly play if PRG 40-10-01
is enabled.)
08 Call Attendant 0 ~ 100 0 15-01-08
Busy Message (0 = No message)

Programming Manual 2-361

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
09 Call Attendant 0 ~ 100 0 15-01-09
No Answer Mes- (0 = No message)
sage
10 Call Forward Re- 0 = Do not play Flag that control the playback of the 1 40-10-01
mainder An- 1 = Play VRS announcements for 'on the for-
nouncement warded phone'.
(V2.0 Added)
11 Call Forward No- 0 = Do not play Flag that control the playback of the 1 40-10-01
tification An- 1 = Play VRS announcements for 'towards
nouncement the incoming call'.
(V2.0 Added)
Program

Conditions
40 None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Response System (VRS)

2-362 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number to be used Program
as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call, the
assigned VRS message is sent to the outside caller.

Input Data 40
Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 VRS Message Number 0 ~ 100 (0 = No Service) 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual 2-363

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-01 : System Options for ACD
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Program Description
In Program 41-01 : System Options for ACD define the system options for the ACD feature.

41 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
03 ACD MIS Connection Ports 0 = None 0
3 = LAN (CPU)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2-364 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, to set the name of Abbreviated Dial Group
Name. for each ACD extension number, assign an ACD Group (01 ~ 02). An ACD Group number is
assigned to each Work Period number (1 ~ 8).

The assigned extension works as an ACD agent extension in the following cases:
41
• The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent is logged in.
• An extension transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number.
• An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an ACD pilot number.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

ACD Work Period Mode Number 01 ~ 08

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 ACD Group No. 0~2 Designate for each incoming trunk, wheth- 0
0 = No Setting er or not Night Announcement Service is
assigned.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-365

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group for each incoming trunk
group set up in Program 22-05, designate which ACD Group (01 ~ 02) the trunks should ring for each

41 of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority
or normal. Use Program 41-06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use
Program 41-07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week.

Input Data

Incoming Ring Group Number 01 ~ 25

ACD Work Period Mode Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 ACD Group Number 0~2 For each incoming trunk group set up in 0
0 = No Setting Program 22-05, designate which ACD
Group (1 ~ 2) the trunks should ring for
each of the eight Work Periods.
02 Night Announcement 0 = No Designate for each incoming trunk, wheth- 0
Service 1 = Yes er or not Night Announcement Service is
assigned.
03 Priority Data 0, 1 ~ 7 Determine whether or not an incoming call 0
0 = No Priority to a trunk ring group should follow a priori-
1 = Highest Priority ty assignment.
7 = Lowest Priority

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
• Ring Groups

2-366 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents
and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the
eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules in this program, assign them to days of the week in
Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.) 41
ACD extensions can log in only during their work period. ACD extensions receive the following calls
when they are logged in.
• ACD Call on a Trunk
When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Programs 41-03 and 41-06).
• ACD Pilot Number Call
Any time - if ACD extensions are available.

Input Data

ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern 1~4

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Work Period 1~8 (Start) 0000
Mode Number (End) 0000
Start Time 0000 ~ 2359
End Time 0000 ~ 2359

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-367

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each
Work Schedule (1 ~ 4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After

41 you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same
program used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules.)

Input Data

ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1~4

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Work Period 1~8 (Start) 0000
Mode Number (End) 0000
Start Time 0000 ~ 2359
End Time 0000 ~ 2359

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2-368 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules (1 ~ 4) to
days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work
Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06).
41
Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Day Number 1 = Sunday 0
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Time Pattern 0~4
0 = No ACD

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-369

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-08 : ACD Overflow Options
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
For each ACD Group (01 ~ 02), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the overflow
mode (0~9), destination and announcement message types. Delay Announcement functions are not

41 available for ACD pilot number calls. Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options. The table
below outlines the entry options.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Overflow Operation 0 = No Overflow (None) Assign the overflow mode (0 ~ 9), destina- 0
Mode 1 = Overflow with No An- tion and announcement message types.
nouncement Delay Announcement functions are not
2 = No Overflow with available for ACD pilot number calls. Each
First Announcement On- ACD Group can have unique overflow op-
ly tions.
3 = No Overflow with
First & Second An-
nouncements
4 = Overflow with First
Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First &
Second Announcement
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = No Overflow with
Second Announcement
Only
9 = Overflow with Sec-
ond Announcement Only
02 ACD Overflow Desti- 0 = No Setting Assign the overflow mode (0 ~ 9), destina- 0
nation 1 ~ 2 = ACD Group tion and announcement message types.
3 = Overflow Table (Pro- Delay Announcement functions are not
gram 41-09) available for ACD pilot number calls. Each
4 = Voice Mail Integra- ACD Group can have unique overflow op-
tion tions.
5 = System Speed (Pro-
gram 41-08-05)
6 = Incoming Ring
Group (Program
41-08-06)
03 Delay Announcemen 1 = VRS Assign the overflow mode (0 ~ 9), destina- 1
Source Type 2 = InMail tion and announcement message types.
Delay Announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number calls. Each
ACD Group can have unique overflow op-
tions.

2-370 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
04 ACD Overflow Trans- 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Define the time before ACD overflow oc- 30
fer Time curs. Each ACD Group can have unique
overflow options.
05 System Speed Dial 0 ~ 999 (Used when Assign the speed dial bin to be used as 999
Bin 41-08-02 is set to 5) the ACD overflow destination. Using a
speed dial bin for ACD Overflow is suppor-
ted only for off premise calls.
06 Incoming Ring Group 01 ~ 25 (Used when Assign the Ring Group for ACD overflow 1
when Overflow 41-08-02 is set to 6) calls to go to.

Program
Conditions

41
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-371

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call is
transferred when overflow occurs.

41 Input Data

ACD Group No. 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 1~3 0~3 Define the ACD group to which a call is 0
0 = No Setting transferred when overflow occurs.
3 = In-Skin Voice Mail In-
tegration

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2-372 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to use as the
message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages. Refer to Program 41-08 for
more on setting up the ACD overflow options.

This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in
41
Program 41-08-03.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Delay Message Start 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Input the time before the 1st Delay Mes- 0
Timer sage Starts.
02 1st Delay Message 0 ~ 101 Input the VRS Message to be played as 0
Number 0 = No Message the 1st Delay Message.
101 = Fixed Message
03 1st Delay Message 0 ~ 255 Input the number of times the 1st Delay 0
Sending Count Message is sent. If set to 0, the message
is not played.
04 2nd Delay Message 0 ~ 101 Input the VRS Message to be played as 0
Number 0 = No Message the 2nd Delay Message.
101 = Fixed Message
05 2nd Waiting Message 0 ~ 255 Input the number of times the 2nd Delay 0
Sending Count Message is sent. If set to 0, the message
is not played.
06 Tone Kind at Message 0 = Ring Back Tone Input what is heard between the Delay 0
Interval 1 = MOH Tone messages.
2 = BGM Source
07 ACD Forced Discon- 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Mes- 60
nect Time after the (0 = No Disconnect) sage is played, before the call is discon-
2nd DelayMessage nected.
08 Queue Depth An- 0 = Disable Input when the Queue Depth Announce- 0
nouncement 1 = After 1st (1st) ment is played.
2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-373

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Program

41

2-374 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-12 : Night Announcement Setup
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to set Night Announce time for each ACD group.
Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The night
announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number calls.
41
Input Data

ACD Group Number 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
03 ACD Night Announce 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Define the time the ACD night Announce- 30
Sending Time ment plays. Night announcement availabil-
ity depends on the setting in Program
41-03-02.

Conditions

• The Night Announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-375

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define the VRS message
number to use as the night announcement. This program is activated when the night announcement

41 source is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12-01.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 VRS Message Num- 0 ~ 100 Input the VRS message number to be 0
ber 0 = No Message used as the night announcement.
02 Tone Kind at Message 0 = Ring Back Tone Input what is heard between the Night An- 0
Interval 1 = MOH Tone nouncements.
2 = BGM Source

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2-376 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-14 : ACD Options Setup
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options Setup to set various options for ACD Groups. When you set an
option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all agents in the group. The chart
below shows each of the ACD options, the entries available, and the default entry.
41
Input Data

ACD Group No 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
02 Automatic Wrap Up 0 = After wrap up the Enable/Disable Automatic Wrap Up mode. 0
Mode mode key is pressed.
(Manual)
1 = After call is finished
automatically. (Auto)
03 ACD Priority for Over- 0 = Own group priority Determines whether the ACD group 0
flow Calls 1 = Priority order by Pro- should use its own priority assignment or if
gram 41-03-03 it should follow the priority assigned in Pro-
gram 41-03-03.
04 Automatic Answer at 0 = Off Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic Answer 0
Headset 1 = On for agents using headsets.
06 Call Queuing after 0 = Enable (Yes) Determine whether the caller should hear 0
2nd Announcement 1 = Disable (No) the 2nd Delay Announcement and then be
taken out of queue (1), or be placed back
into queue (0).
07 Automatic Off Duty 0 = No change to Off Enable (1)/Disable (0) Automatic Off Duty 0
for SLT Duty mode (rest) mode for agents with single line tele-
1 = Change to Off Duty phones.
mode automatically
(Skip)
08 ACD Off Duty Mode 0 = Cannot receive inter- Enable (1)/Disable (0) the agent's ability to 0
nal call receive internal calls in ACD Off Duty
1 = Can receive internal Mode.
call
09 Automatic Wrap Up 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Input the time the agent is in Automatic 0
End Time Wrap Up End Time when Wrap key is
pressed, or automatically put into Wrap
mode.
10 ACD No Answer Skip 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Set the time a call to the ACD Group rings 10
Time an idle extension before routing to the next
agent.
12 Start Headset Ear 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Set the ringing start time for the headset 0
Piece Ringing (for ear piece on a single line telephone.
SLT)

Programming Manual 2-377

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
17 CTI : Operation mode 0 = Transfer to ACD This program allows CTI Server transfers 0
when transfer no log- group a trunk call to ACD Pilot number which
in ACD groups 1 = Error notice group has no login agent in 3rd Party CTI.

Conditions

None

Program
Feature Cross Reference

41
• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2-378 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD threshold call
overflow and the mode for each ACD group.

Input Data
41
ACD Group No. 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Number of Calls in 0 ~ 84 Define the maximum number of calls al- 0
Queue 0 = No Limitation lowed in the ACD queue before overflow
occurs.
02 Operation Mode for 0 = The last waiting call Define how the system should handle calls 0
ACD Queue is transferred when the number of calls in queue ex-
1 = The longest waiting ceeds the threshold.
call is transferred
2 = Send Busy Tone

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-379

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign InMail Master Mailboxes
(Program 47-03) as ACD Delay Announcement Mailboxes.

41 Input Data

ACD Group Number 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Delay Message Start 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Determine the time the system waits be- 0
Timer fore playing the Delay Message.
02 Mailbox Number for Dial (up to eight digits) Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement No Setting
1st Announcement Mailbox as the message source for the 1st
Message Announcement Message.
03 1st Delay Message 1 ~ 255 Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending 0
Sending Count 0 = No message is Count. This entry must be set to 1 or high-
played. er for the message to play.
04 Mailbox Number for Dial (up to eight digits) Assign the Voice Mail ACD Announcement No Setting
2nd Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for the
Message 2nd Announcement Message.
05 2nd Delay Message 1 ~ 255 Determine the 2nd Delay Message Send- 0
Sending Count 0 = No message is ing Count. This entry must be set to 1 or
played. higher for the message to play.
06 Wait Tone Type at 0 = Ring Back Tone Determine what the caller hears between 0
Message Interval 1 = Music On Hold Tone the messages.
2 = Background Music
Source
07 ACD Forced Discon- 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Assign the time the system should wait af- 0
nect Time after 2nd ter the end of the ACD Delay Message be-
Announcement fore disconnecting.
08 Delay Message Inter- 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Set the time for the interval between the 20
val Time Delay Messages.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-380 Program 41 : ACD Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD Queue Status
Display feature. This program allows the Queue Status Display, and causes an alarm to sound, when
the parameters in this program are met.
41
Input Data

ACD Group No. 01 ~ 02

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Number of Calls in 0 ~ 84 Set the number of calls that can accumu- 0
Queue 0 = No Display late in the ACD queue before the Queue
Status Display (and optional queue alarm)
occurs.
02 Queue Status Display 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Set the time the Queue Status display re- 5 (seconds)
Time mains on the telephone display.
03 Queue Status Display 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Determine whether or not an incoming call 60 (seconds)
Interval to a trunk ring group should follow a priori-
ty assignment. Set the time that refreshes
the Queue Status Alarm time in queue dis-
play and causes the optional queue alarm
to occur on phones active on a call, logged
out, or in wrap-up.
04 ACD Call Waiting 0 = Disable (Off) Enable/Disable the queue alarm. 0
Alarm 1 = Enable (On)
05 ACD Call Waiting 0 ~ 64800 (seconds) Set the time the Call Waiting Alarm should 0
Alarm Hold Time sound.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2-381

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/Motel
Service.

42 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Answering Message 0 = MOH (Hold Time) 0
Mode for Wake Up 1 = VAU Message
Call (Hotel Mode) 2 = VAU Message +
Time
02 Wake Up Call Mes- 0 ~ 100 VAU Message for Wake Up Calls. You 0
sage Assignment (0 = No setting) must make an entry for this program if you
have selected 1 or 2 in Item 01 above.
03 Wake Up Call No An- 0 = No Transfer 0
swer 1 = Transfer to the Oper-
ator
04 Setup Message Mode 0 = Confirmation Tone 0
for Wake Up Call (Ho- 1 = VAU Message
tel Mode) 2 = Time Stamp + VAU
Message
05 Wake Up Call Mes- 0 ~ 100 0
sage Assignment (0 = No setting)
06 Flexible Room Status 0 = Off When PRG42-01-06 is set to on, any room 0
(V2.0 Added) 1 = On status change from any status can be
made.
Ex)
Hotel Status Code 4 -> 3
Hotel Status Code 4 -> 4

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

2-382 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/Motel Program
extensions.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

42
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Hotel Mode 0 = Normal If you want an extension to operate in the 0
1 = Hotel Hotel/Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the
telephone to operate in the business
mode, enter 0.
02 Toll Restriction Class 1 ~ 15 Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class 1
When Check In when it is checked in. The system has 15
Toll Restriction Classes (1 ~ 15). The entry
you make in this option affects the tele-
phone in all Night Service modes. (Refer
to Programs 21-05 and 21-06 to set up the
Toll Restriction dialing options.) When the
extension is checked out, it uses the Toll
Restriction Class set in Program 21-04.
03 Room Status (Refer- Read Only: This Program shows the hotel room status -
ence Only) (V2.0 Add- 1 = Room Clean (Occu- of each Hotel extension.
ed) pied)
2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Re-
quest
6 = Out of Order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Va-
cant)
* = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual 2-383

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service
(COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone
Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS

42
option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01 ~ 15

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Check-In Operation 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
1 = On 1
02 Check-Out Operation 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
1 = On 1
03 Room Status Output 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
1 = On 1
04 DND Setting for Other 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
Extension 1 = On 1
05 Wake up Call Setting 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
for Other Extension 1 = On 1
06 Room Status Change 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
for Other Extension 1 = On 1
07 Restriction Class 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
Changing for Other 1 = On 1
Extension
08 Room to Room Call 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
Restriction 1 = On 1
09 DND Setting for Own 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
Extension 1 = On 1
10 Wake Up Call Setting 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
for Own Extension 1 = On 1
11 Change Room Status 0 = Off Class 01 ~ 15 =
for Own Extension 1 = On 1
12 SLT Room Monitor 0 = Off Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line tele- Class 01 ~ 15 =
1 = On phone ability to use Room Monitor. 1

Conditions

None

2-384 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service
• Hotel/Motel

Program

42

Programming Manual 2-385

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit
service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (01 ~ 32), you
enter the destination for each single digit code (1 ~ 9, 0, *, #). The destination can be any code with

42
up to eight digits, such as an extension number or access code.

Input Data

Department (Extension) Group Number 01 ~ 32

Received Dial 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Co- Destination Number No Setting
des Up to eight digits

Conditions

• The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time expires before
executing.

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

2-386 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the LAN port to output the Hotel Data Program
(Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/ Motel feature.

Input Data
42
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0
3 = LAN
03 Wake Up Call No Answer Data 0 = Not Output 0
1 = Output
04 Check-Out Sheet 0 = Not Output 0
1 = Output

Conditions

• Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port.

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual 2-387

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V2.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 42-09 : Flexible Setup for Room Status to enable dial room status codes. Note the
code definitions only apply to the system itself.

42 Input Data

Room Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Flexible Setup for Room Status 1 = Room Clean (Occupied) 1 - # = None
2 = Maid Required
3 = Maid in Room
4 = Inspection Required
5 = Maintenance Request
6 = Out of order
7 = Reserve 1
8 = Reserve 2
9 = Reserve 3
0 = Room Clean (Vacant)
* = Reserve 5
# = Reserve 6

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

2-388 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the ARS/F- Program
Route feature.

Input Data
44
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 ARS/F-Route Time 0 = Not Used If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table 0
Schedule 1 = Used selected is determined only by the digits
dialed without any relation to the day or
time of the call.
If this option is set to 1, the system first re-
fers to PRG 44-10. If there is a match, the
pattern defined in that program is used. If
not, the F-Route pattern in PRG 44-09 and
time setting in 44-08 are used.
02 Dial Tone Simulation 1 digit (0 ~ 9) When first dialed digit matches with the None
(V2.0 Added) data set in this Program, system send si-
*, # cant be used mulated DT to calling party after receiving
first digit. Numbering plan for the dial
needs to configure as F-Route at PRG
11-01.
03 Tone Kind (V2.0 Add- 0 = Internal DT Set simulated DT kind which can change 0
ed) 1 = External DT the tone used at PRG 44-01-02 and PRG
44-02-04.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual 2-389

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table
for selecting ARS/F-Route.

44 Input Data

Dial Analysis Table Number 001 ~ 120

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Dial Up to eight digits Set the number of digits to be analyzed by No Setting
(Use line key 1 for a the system for ARS routing.
Don’t Care digit, @)
02 Service Type 0 = No setting (None) • Service Type 1 (Extension Number) 0
1 = Extension Call (Own) The number goes to an extension after
2 = ARS/F-Route Table deleting the front digit(s).
(F-Route) Additional Data
3 = Dial Extension Ana- Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top
lyze Table (Option) of the number for extension number us-
age. At least one digit must be deleted.
• Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)
The number is controlled by ARS/F-
Route table.
Additional Data:
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not
used, assign the ARS/F-Route table
number for Program 44-05.
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is
used, assign the ARS/F-Route selection
number for Program 44-04.
• Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze
Table)
The total length of the number exceeds
more than 8 digits.
Additional Data:
Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table
number to be used in Program 44-03.
03 Additional Data 1 = Delete Digit = 0 ~ For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, 0
255 (255 = Delete All enter the additional data required.
Digits) • 1 : Delete Digit = 0 ~ 255
2 = 0 ~ 100 (0 = No Set- (255 = Delete All Digits)
ting) • 2 : [Program 44-01 : 0]
3 = Dial Extension Ana- ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0 ~ 100
lyze Table Number = 0 ~ (0 = No Setting)
4 (0 = No Setting) Refer to Program 44-05.
[Program 44-01 : 1]
ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0
~ 100 (0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-04.
• 3 : Dial Extension Analyze Table Num-
ber = 0 ~ 4 (0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-03.

2-390 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
04 Dial Tone Simulation 0 = Off If enabled, this option sends dial tone to 0
1 = On the calling party after the routing is deter-
mined. This may be required if the central
office at the destination does not send dial
tone.

Conditions

None
Program

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route) 44

Programming Manual 2-391

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level:
IN

Description
Program When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set
the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than
eight digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1 ~ 250, table number 252 is

44
used to refer to the next Extension Table Area (1 ~ 4) to be searched. If the received digits are not
identified in tables 1 ~ 250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.

Input Data

Extension Table Area Number 1~4

Dial Analysis Table Number 1 ~ 252

Dial Analysis Table Number : 1 ~ 250

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Dial Up to 36 digits No Setting
Digits = 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)
02 ARS/F-Route Select Table Number 0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) 0
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.

Dial Analysis Table Number : 251

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
03 ARS/F-Route Select Table Number 0 ~ 100 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) 0
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.

Dial Analysis Table Number : 252

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
04 Next Table Area Number 0~4 0

2-392 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Program

44

Programming Manual 2-393

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/ F-Route
Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are eight
time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.

44 Input Data

ARS/F-Route Selection Number 001 ~ 100

ARS/F-Route Time Mode 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 ARS/F-Route Table Number 0 ~ 100 0
(0 = No Service)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-394 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four kinds of Program
order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is used. If a lower priority route
is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.

Input Data 44
ARS/F-Route Table Number 001 ~ 100

Priority Number 1~4

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Trunk Group Number 0 = No Setting Select the trunk group number to use for 0
1 ~ 25 = Trunk Group the outgoing ARS call.
101 ~ 104 = Networking
(V1.5 Added)
255 = Extension Call
02 Delete Digits 0 ~ 255 Enter the number of digits to be deleted 0
(255 = Delete All) from the dialed number.
03 Additional Dial Num- 0 ~ 100 Enter the table number (defined in Pro- 0
ber Table gram 44-06) for additional digits to be di-
aled.
04 Beep Tone 0 = Off Select whether or not a beep is heard if a 0
1 = On lower priority trunk group is used to dial
out.
05 Gain Table Number 0 ~ 100 Select the gain table number to use for the 0
for Internal Calls 0 = No Setting internal call (defined in Program 44-07).
06 Gain Table Number 0 ~ 100 Select the gain table number to use for the 0
for Tandem Connec- 0 = No Setting tandem call (defined in Program 44-07).
tions
07 ARS Class of Service 0 ~ 16 Select the ARS Class of Service to use for 0
0 = No ARS Class (Call the table. An extension ARS COS is deter-
Restricted) mined in Program 26-04-01.
08 Dial Treatment 0 ~ 15 Select the Dial Treatment to use for the ta- 0
ble. If a Dial Treatment is selected, Pro-
grams 44-05-02 and 44-05-03 are ignored
and the Dial Treatment defined in Program
26-03-01 is used instead.
09 Maximum Digit 0 ~ 24 Input the maximum number of digits to 0
send when using the F-Route.
11 Network Specified Pa- 0 ~ 16 Enter a table number from Program 26-12. 0
rameter Table

Programming Manual 2-395

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Program

44

2-396 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed Program
ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03.

Input Data

Additional Dial Table Number 001 ~ 100

44
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Additional Dial Up to 36 digits No Setting
Enter : 1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter
a pause)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual 2-397

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an extension
dials ARS/F-Route number:
• The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.

44 • The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings.

If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route:

• The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.
• The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming
line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Programs 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not
activated.

Input Data

Gain Table Number 001 ~ 100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Incoming Transmit 1 ~ 63 32 (0 dB)
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
02 Incoming Receive 1 ~ 63 32 (0 dB)
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
03 Outgoing Transmit 1 ~ 63 32 (0 dB)
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)
04 Outgoing Receive 1 ~ 63 32 (0 dB)
(- 15.5 dB ~ + 15.5 dB)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-398 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/F- Program
Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Programs 44-09 and
44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

Input Data 44
Schedule Pattern Number 01 ~ 10

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Time Number 01 ~ 20
Start Time 0000 ~ 2359
End Time 0000 ~ 2359
Mode 1~8

Default

All Schedule Patterns = 0 : 00 - 0 : 00, Mode 1

Example :

Pattern 1
0 :0 0 8 :0 0 1 8 :0 0 2 2:0 0 0 :0 0
M ode 3 M ode 1 M ode 2 M ode 3

Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 08 : 00 Mode 3

Time Number 02 = 08 : 00 - 18 : 00 Mode 1

Time Number 03 = 18 : 00 - 22 : 00 Mode 2

Time Number 04 = 22 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 3

Pattern 2
0:00 0:00
Mode 2

Time Number 01 = 00 : 00 - 00 : 00 Mode 2

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-399

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Program

44

2-400 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using Program
ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

Day Number 1 = Sunday

44
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Schedule Pattern Number 0 ~ 10 Sunday ~ Saturday =
(0 = No Setting) Pattern 1

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

Programming Manual 2-401

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-
Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is
defined in Program 44-08-01.

44 Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Date 0101 ~ 1231 -
Schedule Pattern Number 0 ~ 10 (0 = No Setting) Date 0101 - 1231 = Pattern 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS/F-Route)

2-402 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration Program
options.

Input Data
45
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Voice Mail De- 0 ~ 32 Assign which Extension (Depart- 0
partment Group 0 = No Voice Mail ment) Group number is to be as-
Number signed as the voice mail group.
02 Voice Mail Mas- Up to 12 Characters Enter the Voice Mail Master Name. VOICE MAIL
ter Name
03 Voice Mail Call 0 = Off Enable/disable the ability to process 0 45-01-11
Screening 1 = On the Call Screening commands (1 +
extension number) sent from the
Voice Mail. You should normally en-
able this option to allow for Voice
Mail Call Screening. Disable this op-
tion if your system has been modi-
fied so that extensions begin with
the digit 1(e.g., 101, 102, etc.). Also
see the “Flexible System Number-
ing” feature.
04 Park and Page 0 = Off Enable/disable the system ability to 1 45-01-12
1 = On process the Voice Mail Park and
Page (*) commands. You should
normally enable this option.
05 Message Wait 0 = Off Enable/disable the system ability to 1 45-01-13
1 = On process the Voice Mail Message
Wait (#) commands. You should nor-
mally enable this option. If enabled,
be sure that the programmed Mes-
sage Notification strings don’t con-
tain the code for trunk access.
06 Record Alert 0 ~ 64800 seconds This time sets the interval between 30
Tone Interval Voice Mail Conversation Record
Time alerts.
07 Centralized Voice Dial (Up to 8 digits) Assign this number the same as the No Setting
mail Pilot No. extension number or pilot number.
(V1.5 Added)
08 Centralized Voice 0 ~ 32 Assign which Extension (Depart- 0
Mail Department 0 = No Voice Mail As- ment) Group Number is used as the
Group Number signed Centralized Voice Mail group.
(V1.5 Added)
09 Centralized Voice Up to 12 characters Assign the Centralized Voice Mail C.V.M.
Mail master Master Name.
Name (V1.5 Add-
ed)

Programming Manual 2-403

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
10 New NSL Proto- 0 = Off (Disable) 0
col support 1 = On (Enable)
11 Prefix for Call Dial (One digit) 1 45-01-03
Screening
12 Prefix for Park Dial (One digit) * 45-01-04
and Page
13 Prefix for Mes- Dial (One digit) # 45-01-05
sage Wait
15 Analog Voice 0 = Fixed Assigns whether fixed codes are 0 45-04
Mail Protocol Se- 1 = Program used or the codes used in Program 11-11-50/5
Program lection 45-04 are used for analog voice mail 1
protocol.
16 Voice Mail Fax Up to four digits Assign up to four digits in front of No Setting 15-03-16

45
Digit Add As- the station number sent to the SLT
signment port when a call is forwarded.
17 Reply Mailbox 0 = No Whether or not to include the mail- 1 45-04
Number 1 = Yes box number in the analog voice mail
protocol.
18 Trunk Number 2~3 Assign the digits of trunk number 2
Mapping mapping.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

2-404 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
45
01 Send DTMF tone or 6KD message 0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port 1
1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port
02 Forced Send Dial Tone 0 = Normal 0
1 = Forced
03 Send 51A Message 0 = Off 1
1 = On
04 NSL over LAN 0 = Off 1
1 = On
05 Send 4PM message 0 = Off 0
1 = On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-405

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.

Input Data
45 Item
No.
Item Input Data Default Related
Program
01 Remote Logon (Internal) Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
02 Direct Logon Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
03 Transfer Message Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
04 Forward-All Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
05 Forward-Busy Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
06 Forward RNA Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
07 Remote Logon Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
08 Conversation Recording Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15
09 Clear Down String Up to four digits No Setting 45-01-15

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-406 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional
Digits
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits to send trunk
number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45-04-XX is left
blank and 45-01-15 is set to "Program".
45
Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
01 Remote Log-On Internal 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-01
02 Direct Log-On 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-02
03 Transfer Message/QVM 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-03
04 Forward-All 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-04
05 Forward-Busy 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-05
06 Forward RNA 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-06
07 Remote Log-On 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-07
08 Conversation Recording 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-08
09 Clear Down String 0 = Off 0 45-01-15
1 = On 45-04-09

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-407

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : InMail System Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-01 : InMail System Options to set up the InMail system-wide options.

Input Data
47 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

02 InMail Master Name Up to 12 characters (MasterName) InMail ##

The CPU must be reset for a change to (The system
this program to take effect. substitutes the
Use this option to modify the name for all port number for
InMail ports. The system briefly displays the # when call-
this name when a display multiline terminal ing the port.)
user calls a Voice Mail port (either by
pressing Message, their voice mail key, or
by dialing the master number). You should
always end the name with the ## charac-
ters. The system substitutes the port num-
ber for the last #. Using the default name
InMail ##, for example, the telephone dis-
play shows InMail #1 when calling port 1.
03 Incoming Message 1 ~ 4095 seconds (Subs Msg Length) 120 seconds
Length Use this option to set the maximum length
of recorded messages for:
• Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to
record and send a message.
• Extension users leaving a message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.
• Outside Automated Attendant callers ac-
cessing a mailbox via a GOTO com-
mand and then dialing RS to record and
send a message.
• Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.
• Announcement Messages.
• Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.
The length of a Conversation Record
is 10 times the Subscriber Message
Length. Since the Conversation Re-
cord time cannot exceed 4095 sec-
onds, any setting in Subscriber Mes-
sage Length larger than 4095 has no
effect on the length of recorded con-
versations.
04 Non-Subscriber Mes- 1 ~ 4095 seconds (Mbox Msg Length) 120 seconds
sage Length Use this option to set the maximum length
of recorded messages for:
• Automated Attendant callers leaving a
message or Quick Message in a Sub-
scriber Mailbox.
• Outside callers transferred by an exten-
sion user to a Subscriber Mailbox.

2-408 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
05 Message Backup/Go 1 ~ 6015 seconds (Msg Bkup/Adv Time) 5 seconds
Ahead Time Use this option to set the backup/ go
ahead time. This time sets how far InMail
backs up when a user dials B while listen-
ing to a message. This interval also sets
how far InMail jumps ahead when a user
dials G while listening to a message.
07 Digital Pager Callback Digits (Pager CBack) X*M#
Number (12 maximum, using 0 ~ Use this option to set the Digital Pager
9, # and*) Callback Number portion of the Message
M (Number of messages Notification callout number for a digital
- entered by pressing pager. This is the portion of the callout
LK1) number that is appended to the pager Program
X (Extension number - service telephone number. Normally, this
entered by pressing option should be X*M#, where:
LK2) • X is the number of the extension that
InMail automatically re-
places the X command
with the number of the
extension that initially re-
generated the notification.
• * is a visual delimiter (to make the pag-
er display easier to read).
• M is the number of new messages in the
47
ceived the message. extension mailbox.
• # is the digit normally used by the pager
service for positive disconnect.
08 Delay in Dialing Digi- 0 ~ 99 seconds (Pager Dial Delay) 30 seconds
tal Pager Callback Use this option to set the delay (0 ~ 99
Number seconds) that occurs just before InMail di-
als the Digital Pager Callback Number por-
tion of the Message Notification callout
number for a digital pager.
Set this delay so the pager service has
enough time to connect to the digital pager
before sending the callback number.
Your pager service may be able to help
you determine the best value for this op-
tion (0 ~ 99 seconds).
By default, this option is 9 seconds. When
placing a digital pager notification, the sys-
tem: Seizes the trunk specified. Dials the
user-entered notification number (in Mes-
sage + OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in Dialing Digi-
tal Pager Callback Number interval.
Dials the number entered in 47-01-07:
Digital Pager Callback Number.
The system assumes that the notification
number completes dialing approximately 4
seconds after trunk seizure. This means
that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback
Number is dialed into the pager service
about 13 seconds after trunk seizure.
09 Wait Between Digital 1 ~ 255 minutes (Notify Pager Intvl) 15 minutes
Pager Callout At- Use this option to set the minimum time (1
tempts ~ 255 minutes) between unacknowledged
or unanswered digital pager Message No-
tification callouts. (A subscriber acknowl-
edges a digital pager notification by log-
ging onto their mailbox.)
After this time expires, InMail tries the cal-
lout again (for up to the number of times
set in 47-01-14: Number of Callout At-
tempts).
If the system dials the callout number and
the pager service is busy, it retries the
number in one minute.

Programming Manual 2-409

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
10 Wait Between Non- 1 ~ 255 minutes (Notify N-Pgr Intvl) 20 minutes
Pager Callout At- Use this option to set the minimum time (1
tempts ~ 255 minutes) between non-pager Mes-
sage Notification callouts in which the des-
tination answers, says Hello, dials 1 to ac-
knowledge and then enters the wrong se-
curity code.
11 Wait Between Busy 1 ~ 255 minutes (Notify Busy Intvl) 15 minutes
Non-Pager Callout At- Use this option to set how long InMail
tempts waits (1 ~ 255 minutes) after it dials a busy
non-pager callout destination, before retry-
ing the callout number.
Program
12 Wait Between RNA 1 ~ 255 minutes (Notify RNA Intvl) 30 minutes
Non-Pager Callout At- Use this option to set how long InMail
tempts waits (1 ~ 255 minutes), after it dials an

47
unanswered non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered non-pag-
er callouts:
• If the callout rings the destination longer
than the 47-01-13: Wait for Answer Non-
Pager Callout Attempts option.
• If the destination answers, says Hello (or
the system detects answer supervision)
and then hangs up without dialing 1 to
log onto their mailbox. This typically
happens if someone unfamiliar with noti-
fication answers the callout, or if the cal-
lout is picked up by an answering ma-
chine.
• If the destination answers and then
hangs up without saying Hello. This typi-
cally happens if someone unfamiliar with
the notification answers the callout (like
the above example), or if the call is
picked up by an answering machine with
insufficient outgoing message volume.
13 Number of RNA rings 1 ~ 99 rings If a non-pager callout rings the destination 5 rings
(V1.5 Changed) longer than this interval (1 ~ 99 rings), In-
Mail marks the call as unanswered (Ring
No Answer) and hangs up.
14 Number of Cascading 1 ~ 99 rings Use this option to set how many times (1 ~ 1 ring
Attempts (V1.5 99 rings) InMail retries an incomplete Mes-
Changed) sage Notification callout.
This total includes unacknowledged cal-
louts, callouts to a busy destination, and
callouts to an unanswered destination.
This option applies to pager and non-pag-
er callouts.
15 Send Pager Callout 0 = No (Disabled) (Retry Until Ack) 0
Until Acknowledged 1 = Yes (Enabled) When this option is enabled (1), InMail
continues to retry a digital pager Message
Notification callout until the notification is
acknowledged.
If this option is disabled (0), InMail retries a
digital pager Message Notification the
number of times specified in 47-01-14
Number of Callout Attempts. This option
does not apply to Message Notification
callouts to telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is considered
acknowledged when the recipient logs on-
to the mailbox.
16 Name Format 0 = First-Last Specify if names are displayed in First- 0
1 = Last-First Last format or Last-First.

2-410 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
17 InMail Port 0 ~ 113 (V3.5 Changed) When using V3.5 or higher software the In- 0
(Can only use the port Mail can be assigned to ports 113-128 and
numbers provided in the will not affect the total station and trunk
description section.) ports. In addition when the SL1100 is de-
faulted with an InMail CF mounted the In-
Mail is automatically assigned to ports
113-128 and when a SL1100 is upgraded
to V3.5 or higher software the InMail ports
can be moved to 113-128.
The first port of InMail must start with one
of the following ports:
5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33, 37, 41, 45, 49,
53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77, 81, 85, 89, 93,
97, 101, 105, 109, 113. Only able to set Program
61~113 with V3.5 or higher.
18 Play PAD Control 1 ~ 63 32

19 Record PAD Control

(- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5
dBm)
1 ~ 63 32
47
(for Networking) (- 15.5 dBm ~ + 15.5
dBm)

Conditions

• When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new setting to take effect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-411

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension mailbox. Station
mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. Normally, InMail Station Mailbox
numbers 1 ~ 64 should correspond to extensions 101-164.

47 Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or Master. You can also set up
Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.

Input Data

Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Mailbox Type 0 = None Use this option to enable or disable the Mailbox 1 ~ 64 :
1 = Personal mailbox. An extension mailbox is not ac- 1
2 = Group cessible when it is disabled (even though Mailbox 65 ~
its stored messages and configuration are 128 : 1 (V3.5
retained in memory.) If disabled, a user Changed)
pressing Message initiates a remote logon
and is asked to enter their mailbox num-
ber. A voice prompt then announces: “That
mailbox does not exist.”
To make programming easier, consider as-
sociating a mailbox number with a station
port. For example, mailbox 1 could corre-
spond to port 1, which in turn corresponds
to extension 101.
02 Mailbox Number Up to eight digits Use this option to select the extension Mailbox 1 = 101
number associated with the mailbox you Mailbox 2 ~ 64 =
are programming. Normally, mailbox 1 102 ~ 164
should use Mailbox Number 101, mailbox Mailbox 65 ~ 112
2 should use Mailbox Number 201, 101 = 165 ~ 212
etc. (V3.5 Changed)
To make programming easier, consider as- Mailbox 113 ~
sociating a mailbox number with a station 128 = 250 ~ 265
port. For example, mailbox 1 could corre- (V3.5 Changed)
spond to port 1, which in turn corresponds
to extension 101.
03 Number of Messages 0 ~ 99 messages Use this option to set the maximum num- Mailbox 1 = 99
To conserve storage ber of messages that can be left in the Mailbox 2 ~ = 20
space, enter 0 for all un- Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to
used mailboxes. leave a message after this limit is reached,
they hear : “That mailbox is full.” InMail
then hangs up.
04 Message Playback 0 (FIFO = first-in/ first- Use this option to set the Subscriber Mail- 0
Order out, or oldest messages box message playback order. When a sub-
first). scriber listens to their messages, InMail
1 (LIFO = last-in/ first- can play the oldest messages first (first-in/
out, or newest messages first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messag-
first) es first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).

2-412 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
05 Auto Erase/Save of 0 = Erase Use this option to determine what happens 1
Messages After the subscriber lis- when a Subscriber Mailbox user complete-
tens to the entire new ly listens to a new message and then exits
message and hangs up, the mailbox without either saving (SA) or
InMail erases the mes- erasing (E) the message. Depending on
sage. the setting of this option, InMail either au-
1 = Save tomatically saves or erases the message.
After the subscriber lis- If the mailbox user hangs up before listen-
tens to the entire new ing to the entire new message, InMail re-
message and hangs up, tains the message as a new message.
InMail saves the mes-
sage.
06 Message Retention 0 ~ 99 Days Use this option to determine how long a 0 Program
(0 = Indefinite) Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved
messages. If a message is left in a Sub-
scriber Mailbox longer than this interval,

07 Recording Conversa-
tion Beep
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
InMail deletes it.
(Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the
1 47
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all
parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep
when the extension user initiates Conver-
sation Record. If disabled, the voice
prompt and beep do not occur. When you
disable the Conversation Record beep, the
following voice prompts do not occur while
InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity
is reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
Provides an additional Conversation Re-
cord beep. This beep repeats according to
the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice
Mail Integration Options : Record Alert
Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds).
To disable the Conversation Record beep,
enter 0 for this option.
08 Message Waiting 0 = No (Disabled) (Update MW Lamp) 1
Lamp 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable Mes-
sage Waiting lamping at the extension as-
sociated with the Subscriber mailbox. For
Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave
this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes,
you should leave this option disabled.
09 Auto Attendant Direct 0 = No (Disabled) (Auto-ATT DND) 0
to Voice Mail 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a sub-
scriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller
routes directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a message.
A subscriber can also enable Auto Attend-
ant Do Not Disturb while recording their
mailbox greeting.

Programming Manual 2-413

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
10 Forced Unscreened 0 = No (Disabled) (Forced UTRF) 0
Transfer 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto-
mated Attendant Forced Unscreened
Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If ena-
bled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the
extension is converted to an Unscreened
Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened
Transfers from the Automated Attendant
occur normally.
11 Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto 0
1 = Yes (Enabled) Time
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If ena-
Program bled, after the subscriber listens to a mes-
sage InMail announces the time and date
the message was left. Auto Time Stamp al-
so announces the message sender (if

47 known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time
Stamp from their mailbox.
12 System Administrator 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to designate the Subscrib- Mailbox 1 (101)
1 = Yes (Enabled) er Mailbox as a System Administrator. This =1
allows the subscriber to use the SA op- Mailbox 2 ~= 0
tions after logging onto their mailbox.
13 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disabled) Dialing Option provides additional dialing 0
1 = Yes (Enabled) options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls
(see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If
enabled, a caller who accesses the Sub-
scriber Mailbox to leave a message can di-
al any of the options in the Next Call Rout-
ing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled,
the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next
Call Routing Mailbox 0 action).
14 Next Call Routing Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) 1
Mailbox Number (1 ~ 3 digits, 00 Use this option to assign a Next Call Rout-
~ 32) ing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
(00 = Undefined) This provides callers with additional dialing
No entry (Entered by options while listening to a Subscriber
pressing CLEAR) Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The
digits the caller can dial depend on the set-
ting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox op-
tions.
15 Directory List Number 0 = None 0
1 ~ 8 = List Number
* = All
16 Voice Prompt Lan- Refer to Ta- Station Mailbox
guage ble 2-9 47-02-16 Default Number
Table on page 2-415. 1
17 Enable Paging 0 = No (Disabled) 0
1 = Yes (Enabled)
18 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0
1 = Immediately
19 Telephone User Inter- 0 = Numeric 0
face Type 1 = Mnemonic
20 Enable E-mail Notifi- 0 = No 0
cation 1 = Yes
21 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting
22 Include Message as 0 = No 1
Attachment 1 = Yes
23 All Message Notifica- 0 = No 1
tion Enabled 1 = Yes

2-414 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
24 All Find-Me Follow- 0 = No 0
Me Enabled 1 = Yes
25 Security Code Option 0 = Always 0
1 = Remote Logon only
26 Auto Play (V1.5 Add- 0 = Disabled 0
ed) 1 = Enable
27 Email message Save/ 0 = No Change 0
Delete Option (V1.5 1 = Save
Added) 2 = Delete
28 Queuing (V3.0 Added) 0 = Disabled Use this option to enable or disable Mes- 0
1 = Enable sage Notification Queuing. If enabled, Program
Message Notification is stored in queue
when there is no active notification desti-
nation.

Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default Table

47
Item Name Input Data
47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-415

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (01 ~ 32). A
Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber or Call Routing.

47 Input Data

Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
02 Mailbox Number Up to eight digits (Mailbox Number) Group Mailbox
No Setting (entered by The Group Mailbox Number is the same 1-31 =
pressing Hold) as the Department Group master (pilot) 3101-3131 (V3.5
number. Use this option to select the De- Changed)
partment Group master (pilot) number as- Group Mailbox
sociated with the Group Mailbox you are 32 = No Setting
programming. (V3.5 Changed)
03 Mailbox Type 0 = None (Mailbox Type) 1
1 = Subscriber Use this option to set the Group Mailbox
2 = Routing type. There are three types of InMail mail-
boxes : None (0), Subscriber (1) and Rout-
ing (2).
03 Routing Mailbox 01 ~ 32 1
Number

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-416 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a Program
Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03 : Master Mailbox Type.

Input Data

Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Number of Messages 00 ~ 99 messages Use this option to set the maximum num- 20
To conserve storage ber of messages that can be left in the
space, enter 0 for all un- Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to
used mailboxes. leave a message after this limit is reached,
they hear, “That mailbox is full.” InMail
then hangs up.
02 Message Playback 0 (FIFO = first-in/ first- Use this option to set the Subscriber Mail- 0
Order out, or oldest messages box message playback order. When a sub-
first). scriber listens to their messages, InMail
1 (LIFO = last-in/ first- can play the oldest messages first (first-in/
out, or newest messages first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messag-
first). es first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).
03 Auto Erase/Save of 0 = Erase Use this option to determine what happens 1
Messages After the subscriber lis- when a Subscriber Mailbox user complete-
tens to the entire new ly listens to a new message and then exits
message and hangs up, the mailbox without either saving (SA) or
InMail erases the mes- erasing (E) the message. Depending on
sage. the setting of this option, InMail either au-
1 = Save tomatically saves or erases the message.
After the subscriber lis- If the mailbox user hangs up before listen-
tens to the entire new ing to the entire new message, InMail re-
message and hangs up, tains the message as a new message.
InMail saves the mes-
sage.
04 Message Retention 0 ~ 90 days Use this option to determine how long a 0
(0 = Indefinite) Subscriber Mailbox retains held and saved
messages. If a message is left in a Sub-
scriber Mailbox longer than this interval,
InMail deletes it.

Programming Manual 2-417

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
05 Recording Conversa- 0 = No (Disabled) (Rec Conv Beep) 1
tion Beep 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all
parties on a call hear the voice prompt
“Recording”, followed by a single beep
when the extension user initiates Conver-
sation Record. If disabled, the voice
prompt and beep do not occur. When you
disable the Conversation Record beep, the
following voice prompts do not occur while
InMail records the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
Program That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity
is reached)

47
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
Provides an additional Conversation Re-
cord beep. This beep repeats according to
the setting of Program 45-01-06 : Voice
Mail Integration Options : Record Alert
Tone Interval Time (0 ~ 64800 seconds).
To disable Conversation Record beep, en-
ter 0 for this option.
06 Message Waiting 0 = No (Disabled) (Update MW Lamp) 1
Lamp 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable Mes-
sage Waiting light at the extension associ-
ated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Sub-
scriber Mailboxes, you should leave this
option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you
should leave this option disabled.
07 Auto Attendant Direct 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto 0
to Voice Mail 1 = Yes (Enabled) Attendant Direct to VM. When a subscriber
enables Auto Attendant Direct to VM, an
Automated Attendant caller routes directly
to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is
asked to leave a message. A subscriber
can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to
VM while recording their mailbox greeting.
08 Forced Unscreened 0 = No (Disabled) (Forced UTRF) 0
Transfer 1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto-
mated Attendant Forced Unscreened
Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If ena-
bled, each Screened Transfer (TRF) to the
extension is converted to an Unscreened
Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened
Transfers from the Automated Attendant
occur normally.
09 Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Auto 0
1 = Yes (Enabled) Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If
enabled, after the subscriber listens to a
message InMail announces the time and
date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp also announces the message send-
er (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time
Stamp from their mailbox.
10 System Administrator 0 = No (Disabled) (System Admin) 0
1 = Yes (Enabled) Use this option to designate the Subscrib-
er Mailbox as a System Administrator. This
allows the subscriber to use the options af-
ter logging onto their mailbox.

2-418 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
11 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disabled) Dialing Option provides additional dialing 0
1 = Yes (Enabled) options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls
(see Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If
enabled, a caller who accesses the Sub-
scriber Mailbox to leave a message can di-
al any option in the Next Call Routing Mail-
box Dial Action Table. If disabled, the call-
er can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call
Routing Mailbox 0 action).
12 Next Call Routing 0 ~ 32 (Next CR Mbox) 1
Mailbox (0 = Undefined) Use this option to assign a Next Call Rout- (Call Routing
ing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. Mailbox 01)
This provides callers with additional dialing By default, Call Program
options while listening to a Subscriber Routing Mailbox
Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The numbers are 01
digits the caller can dial depends on the = 16.
setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox
and Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox
options.
47
13 Directory List Number 0 = None Specify the Directory List number to which 0
1 ~ 8 = List Number the Group Mailbox belongs.
* = All
14 Voice Prompt Lan- Refer to Ta- 1
guage ble 2-10 47-06-14 De-
fault Table on
page 2-420.
15 Enable Paging 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
16 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0
1 = Immediate
17 Telephone User Inter- 0 = Numeric interface 0
face 1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)
18 Enable Email Notifica- 0 = No 0
tion 1 = Yes
19 Email Address Up to 48 characters No Setting
20 Include Msg as At- 0 = No 1
tachment 1 = Yes
21 All Message Notifica- 0 = No 1
tion Enabled 1 = Yes
22 All Find-Me Follow- 0 = No 0
Me Enabled 1 = Yes
23 Security Code Option 0 = Always 0
1 = Remote Logon only
24 Auto Play (V1.5 Add- 0 = Disabled 0
ed) 1 = Enabled
25 Email message Save / 0 = No Change 0
Delete Option (V1.5 1 = Save
Added) 2 = Delete
26 Queuing (V3.0 Added) 0 = Disabled Use this option to enable or disable Mes- 0
1 = Enabled sage Notification Queuing. If enabled,
Message Notification is stored in queue
when there is no active notification desti-
nation.

Programming Manual 2-419

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Table 2-10 47-06-14 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
Program 13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese

47
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-420 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-07 : InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing Mailboxes. Routing Program
Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing Mailboxes.

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
02 Routing Mailbox Type 0 = None (Mailbox Type) Mailboxes 01 ~
1 = Call Routing Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox 08 = 1 (Call
2 = Announcement type. Routing)
3 = Directory Mailboxes 09 ~
4 = Distribution 32 = 2 (An-
nouncement)
03 Prompt Language Refer to Ta- 1
ble 2-11 47-07-03 De-
fault Table on
page 2-422.
04 Telephone User Inter- 0 = Numeric interface 0
face 1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)

Programming Manual 2-421

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Table 2-11 47-07-03 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-07-03 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
Program 13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese

47
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-422 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Program
Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Dial Action Table 1 ~ 32 (Dial Action Table Use this option to assign the Dial Action 1 (Dial Action Ta-
1 ~ 32) (V3.0 Changed) Table to the Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial ble 1)
Action Table defines the dialing options for
the call Routing Mailbox.
02 Screened Transfer 0 ~ 255 seconds (Scrn Trf Timeout) 15 seconds
Timeout Entering 0 causes imme- Use this option to set how long a Screened
diate recall. Transfer (TRF) from the Automated At-
tendant rings an unanswered extension
before recalling.
This option has a similar function as Cus-
tomize: Mailbox Options: Call Routing:
[Call Handling] Options: Delay Rings Be-
fore Redirect Transfer in InMail.
03 Time Limit for Dialing 0 ~ 99 seconds (Dialing Timeout) 5 seconds
Commands Entering 0 causes the This option determines how long InMail
Automated Attendant to waits for an Automated Attendant caller to
immediately route callers dial before routing the call to the Timeout
to the Timeout destina- destination.
tion programmed in the Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a
active Dial Action Table. Timeout action programmed.
If the caller waits too long to dial:
When the associated Dial Action Table has
a Timeout action programmed, the caller
routes to that destination.
When the associated Dial Action Table
does not have a Timeout action program-
med, the Instruction Menu repeats three
times and then InMail hangs up.
04 Fax Detection 0 = No (Disabled) Use this option to enable or disable Fax 0
1 = Yes (Enabled) Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox. In
enabled, the InMail Automated Attendant
(when using this Call Routing Mailbox) de-
tects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax call
then routes to the company fax machine
according to the setting of 47-01-06 : Fax
Extension. If disabled, the Automated At-
tendant does not detect incoming fax calls.
05 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No Setting

Programming Manual 2-423

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

2-424 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as Program
Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

47
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Next Call Routing Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) 0
Mailbox Number (01 ~ 32) If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to
Next Call Routing Mail- answer Automated Attendant calls, use
box 00 ~ 32 this option to provide additional routing op-
00 = Undefined tions to the Automated Attendant callers.
This option interacts with Repeat Count
and Hang Up After below.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the InMail System Guide.
02 Repeat Count 0 ~ 10 (Announcement Enter the number of times you want the 0
repeats 1 ~ 10 times) Announcement Mailbox message to repeat
(0 = No Repeats) to callers. After an Announcement Mailbox
caller initially listens to the message, it re-
peats the number of times specified in this
option. This option interacts with Next Call
Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when
providing routing options.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the InMail System Guide.
03 Hang Up After 0 = None (HangUp) 0
1 = Goodbye Use this option along with Next Call Rout-
2 = Silent ing Mailbox and Repeat Count above to
provide additional routing options to Auto-
mated Attendant callers.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in
the InMail System Guide.

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-425

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

2-426 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : InMail Trunk Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-10 : InMail Trunk Options to assign InMail options for each trunk. Currently, only Program
47-10-01 : Answer Table Assignment is available.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

47
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Answer Table Assign- Answer Table (1 ~ 16) (Answer Table) 1
ment (V3.0 Changed) Use this option to assign an InMail Answer
Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the
Automated Attendant should answer. The
Automated Attendant follows the routing
specified by the selected Answer Table.
02 Record PAD Control 1 ~ 63 (- 15.5 dBm ~ 32
+ 15.5 dBm)
03 Voice Prompt Lan- Refer to Ta- 1
guage ble 2-12 47-10-03 De-
fault Table on
page 2-428.
04 Telephone User Inter- 0 = Numeric interface 0
face (V4.0 Deleted) 1 = Mnemonic interface

Programming Manual 2-427

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Table 2-12 47-10-03 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
Program 13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese

47
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 = Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
26 = Russian (V3.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-428 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-11 : InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer Tables. InMail Program
provides eight Answer Tables (1 ~ 16 (V3.0 higher) ). To set up the schedules for each Answer Table,
go to 47-12 : InMail Answer Table Schedule.

Input Data 47
Answer Table Number 1 ~ 16 (V3.0 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Answer Schedule Override (Sched- 0 = No (Disabled) 0
ule Override) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable
Answer Schedule Override for the se-
lected Answer Table. If enabled (and
you make an entry for Override Mail-
box below), the active Answer Table
routes calls to the Override Mailbox.

Programming Manual 2-429

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
02 Override Mailbox Category (Over- 0 = Undefined Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. 0
ride MB Ctg) 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - setting
Use this option to specify the category STA Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
of the mailbox where Automated At- 2 = Master Mailbox be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed). re-
tendant calls should route when you 3 = Routing Mailbox fer to <47-02 : InMail Station
enable Answer Schedule Override. Mailbox Options on page 2-412>
• If the Override Mailbox is a Sub- Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
scriber Mailbox, the outside caller be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : In-
hears the mailbox greeting (if recor- Mail Group Mailbox Options on
ded) and can leave a message. page 2-416>
• If the Override Mailbox is a Master Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
Mailbox, the outside caller shears be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : In-
the recorded announcement. De- Mail Routing Mailbox Options on
Program pending on how the Announcement page 2-421>
Mailbox is programmed, InMail then
hangs up, reroutes the call, or pro-

47
vides additional dialing options.
• If the Override Mailbox is a Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the instruction menu and can dial
any option allowed by the associ-
ated Dial Action Table.
If any of the Input Data values are
entered, the terminal displays the
Override Mailbox Number selec-
tion (below).
Override Mailbox Number (Override Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ 9) Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. No setting
MB Num) setting
Use this option to specify the mailbox Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
where Automated Attendant calls be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed). re-
should route when you enable Answer fer to <47-02 : InMail Station
Schedule Override. The mailbox num- Mailbox Options on page 2-412>
ber you select in this option should Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
match the mailbox category specified be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : In-
in 47-11-02 : Override Mailbox Cate- Mail Group Mailbox Options on
gory above. page 2-416>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : In-
Mail Routing Mailbox Options on
page 2-421>

2-430 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
03 Default Mailbox Category(Default 0 = Undefined Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. Answer Table
MB Ctg) 1 = Subscriber Mailbox - setting 1=3
Use this option to specify the category STA Category 1 = Mailbox No. should Answer Table
of mailbox used as the Default Mail- 2 = Master Mailbox be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed). re- 2~8=0
box. 3 = Routing Mailbox fer to <47-02 : InMail Station
• If the Default Mailbox is a Sub- Mailbox Options on page 2-412>
scriber Mailbox, the outside caller Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
hears the mailbox greeting (if recor- be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : In-
ded) and can leave a message. Mail Group Mailbox Options on
• If the Default Mailbox is a Master page 2-416>
Mailbox, the outside caller hears Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
the recorded announcement. De- be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : In-
pending on how the Announcement Mail Routing Mailbox Options on
Mailbox is programmed, InMail then page 2-421> Program
hangs up, reroutes the call, or pro-
vides additional dialing options.

47
• If the Default Mailbox is a Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the instruction menu and can dial
any option allowed by the associ-
ated Dial Action Table.
If any of the Input Data values are
entered, the terminal displays the
Override Mailbox Number selec-
tion (below). If any of the Input
Data values are entered, the termi-
nal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number (Default Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ 9) Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. Answer Table
MB Num) setting 1=1
Use this option to set the Answer Ta- Category 1 = Mailbox No. should Answer Table
ble Default Mailbox number. InMail be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed). re- 2 ~ 8 = No
uses the Default Mailbox when an An- fer to <47-02 : InMail Station setting
swer Schedule is not in effect. By de- Mailbox Options on page 2-412>
fault, this occurs at all times other Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
than Monday through Friday from be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : In-
8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. Mail Group Mailbox Options on
page 2-416>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : In-
Mail Routing Mailbox Options on
page 2-421>
04 Next Answer Table Answer Table (0 ~ 16) (V3.0 0
When 10 Answer Schedules in an An- Changed)
swer Table are not sufficient, use this 0 = Undefined
option to link two Answer Tables to-
gether. InMail treats the two linked ta-
bles as a single 20 entry Answer Ta-
ble.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-431

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-12 : InMail Answer Schedules to set up the InMail Automated Attendant Answer
Schedules. There are 16 (V3.5 or higher) Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer Schedules in each
Answer Table.

47 Input Data

Answer Table Number 1 ~ 16 (V3.0 Changed)

Schedule Entry Number 1 ~ 10

2-432 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.
01 Schedule Type 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/ (Entryxx Schedule Type)
1 = Day of the Week Schedule 1 = 2 Use this option to assign a Sched-
2 = Range of Days All other schedules = ule Type to the selected Answer
3 = Date 0 Schedule. The Schedule Type de-
termines how the Answer Schedule
answers calls.
The schedule can be one of the fol-
lowing types:
• 1. Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs
on a specific day of the week.
For this type of schedule, you se-
lect: Program
- The day of the week the
schedule should run:
- The schedule start time.

47
- The schedule end time.
- The Call Routing or Announce-
ment Mailbox used to answer
calls.
• 2. Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs
for a range of days. For this type
of schedule, you select:
- The day of the week the
schedule should start.
- The day of the week the
schedule should stop.
- The time on the start day the
schedule should start.
- The time on the stop day the
schedule should stop.
- The Call Routing or Announce-
ment Mailbox used to answer
the calls.
• 3. Date
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs
only on a specific day of the year.
For this type of schedule, you se-
lect:
- The specific date the schedule
should run.
- On the selected date, the time
the schedule should start.
- On the selected date, the time
the schedule should stop.
- The Call Routing or Announce-
ment Mailbox used to answer
the calls.

Programming Manual 2-433

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.
02 Answering Mailbox Catego- 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/ Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. set-
ry 1 = Subscriber Mailbox Schedule 1 = 3 ting
(Entryxx MB Ctg) - STA All Other Schedules Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
Use this option to specify the 2 = Master Mailbox =0 be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed). refer
category of mailbox to which 3 = Routing Mailbox to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
Automated Attendant calls Options on page 2-412>
should route when the sched- Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
ule is in effect. be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail
If the Answering Mailbox is a Group Mailbox Options on
Subscriber Mailbox, the out- page 2-416>
side caller hears the mailbox Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
greeting (if recorded) and can be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail
leave a message. Routing Mailbox Options on
Program If the Answering Mailbox is a page 2-421>
Master Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the recorded an-

47
nouncement. Depending on
how the Announcement Mail-
box is programmed, InMail
then hangs up, reroutes the
call, or provides additional di-
aling options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a
Routing Mailbox, the outside
caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option
allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.
Answering Mailbox Number Up to 3 digits (using 0 ~ Answer Table 1/ Category 0 = Skip Mailbox No. set-
(Entryxx MB Num) 9) Schedule 1 = 1 ting
Use this option to set the num- All Other Answer Category 1 = Mailbox No. should
ber of the Answering Mailbox Schedules = No set- be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed). refer
the Automated Attendant uses ting to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
when the selected schedule is Options on page 2-412>
in effect. This mailbox is de- Category 2 = Mailbox No. should
fined in 47-12-02 : Answering be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-03 : InMail
Mailbox Category. Group Mailbox Options on
page 2-416>
Category 3 = Mailbox No. should
be 1 ~ 32. refer to <47-07 : InMail
Routing Mailbox Options on
page 2-421>
03 Day of the Week 1 = Sunday All Schedules = 1
(Entryxx Day) 2 = Monday
For Day of the Week (Type 1) 3 = Tuesday
Answer Schedules, use this 4 = Wednesday
option to select the day of the 5 = Thursday
week the Answer Schedule 6 = Friday
should be active. 7 = Saturday
04 Start Day 1 = Sunday Answer Table 1/
(Entryxx Start Day) 2 = Monday Schedule 1 = 2
For Range of Days (Type 2) 3 = Tuesday All Other Schedules
Answer Schedules, use this 4 = Wednesday =1
option to select the day of the 5 = Thursday
week the Answer Schedule 6 = Friday
should start. 7 = Saturday
05 End Day 1 = Sunday Answer Table 1/
(Entryxx End Day) 2 = Monday Schedule 1 = 6
For Range of Days (Type 2) 3 = Tuesday All Other Answer
Answer Schedules, use this 4 = Wednesday Schedules = 1
option to select the day of the 5 = Thursday
week the Answer Schedule 6 = Friday
should end. 7 = Saturday

2-434 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.
06 Date MMDD All Schedule = 0000
(Entryxx Date) For example :
For Date (Type 3) Answer - 0101 = January 1
Schedules, use this option to - 1231 = December 31
select the date the Answer (0000 = Undefined)
Schedule should be active.
07 Schedule Start Time HHMM (24-hour clock) Answer Table 1/
(Entryxx Start Time) For example : Schedule 1 = 0830
Use this option to specify the - 0130 = 1 : 30 AM All other schedules
time the Answer Schedule - 1700 = 5 : 00 PM are 0000.
should start. It applies to Day (0000 = Undefined)
of the Week (Type 1), Range
of Days (Type 2), and Date Program
(Type 3) schedules. (To make
a schedule run continuously,
make the same entry for
47-12-07 : Schedule Start
Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule
End Time.)
47
08 Schedule End Time HHMM (24-hour clock) Answer Table 1/
(Entryxx End Time) For example : Schedule 1 = 1700
Use this option to specify the - 0130 = 1 : 30 AM All Other Schedules
time the Answer Schedule - 1700 = 5 : 00 PM = 0000
should end. It applies to Day (0000 = Undefined)
of the Week (Type 1), Range
of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make
a schedule run continuously,
make the same entry for
47-12-07 : Schedule Start
Time and 47-12-08 : Schedule
End Time.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-435

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-13 : InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the InMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial
Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is
associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an

47
Answer Table is active, its associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which
provides dialing options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default InMail
system. There are 32 (V3.0 or higher) Dial Action Tables.

Input Data

Dial Action Table Number 01 ~ 32 (V3.0 Changed)

Key Number 0 ~ 9, *, #, TIMEOUT

2-436 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item No. Name Input Data Description

01 Action 0 = UND (Undefined) • TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
1 = TRF (Transfer) • UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
2 = UTRF (Unscreened Transfer) • REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1)
3 = REC1 • REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4)
4 = REC2 (REC2)
5 = LOGON • LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)
6 = Hang Up • Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
7 = GOTO • GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
• UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
Data Up to 8 digits • Digits
(0 ~ 9, *, #) Entry : 0 ~ 9, #, and * (8 digits max.)
X = Caller Dialed Digits Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attend-
I = Ignore Digits ant call to a specific location (such as an extension). For
N = No Routing example, to set up a TRF Action to route to extension 305, Program
P = Pause for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305 for the correspond-
ing Number.

47
• Caller Dialed Digits
Entry : X(Entered by pressing LK2)
Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call
based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents
one caller dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF Action
to route to any caller dialed extension in the 301 ~ 399
range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corre-
sponding Number.
• Ignore Digits
Entry : I(Entered by pressing LK3)
Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the Auto-
mated Attendant caller that PZ-VM21 InMail ignores for
routing. An example of this is REC action assigned to the *
key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action is REC2
and the Number is IXXX. This means that a caller can dial
* + any mailbox number to leave a Quick Message in that
mailbox. InMail ignores the first digit dialed by the caller
(*), and routes according to the next 3 digits dialed.
• No Routing
Entry : N(Entered by pressing LK1)
Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant
routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the
LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter
a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example),
for the # key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the cor-
responding Number. When the caller dials #, they hear,
Please enter the mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the
pound key.
• Pause
Entry : P(Entered by pressing LK4)
Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant
to pause while dialing.

Defaults

Dial Action Table Default Settings

Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16
Key
Action Data Action Data
1 2 (UTRF) XXX 0 (UND) 0
2 2 (UTRF) (V3.5 XXX (V3.5 Changed) 0 (UND) 0
Changed)
3 2 (UTRF) XXXX 0 (UND) 0
4 0 (UND) 0 0 (UND) 0
5 0 (UND) 0 0 (UND) 0
6 0 (UND) 0 0 (UND) 0

Programming Manual 2-437

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Dial Action Table Default Settings

Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 2 ~ 16
Key
Action Data Action Data
7 0 (UND) 0 0 (UND) 0
8 0 (UND) 0 0 (UND) 0
9 6 (Hang Up) 0 0 (UND) 0
0 2 (UTRF) 101 0 (UND) 0

* 3 (REC1) IXXX 0 (UND) 0

# 5 (LOGON) IXXX 0 (UND) 0

Program TIMEOUT 2 (UTRF) 101 0 (UND) 0

TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.

47 Note
If Action is set 0 or 6 skip Data setting.
"XXX"= change as it fit
The “Data” data needs to follow these rules below.
0 (UND) = none
1 (TRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P
2 (UTRF) = dial data (any), X, I, N, or P
3 (REC1) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
4 (REC2) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
5 (LOGON) = mailbox number (subscriber or group)
6 (HANGUP) = none
7 (GOTO) = routing mailbox number index (1 ~ 32)
Otherwise it will not be routed properly.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-438 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox Program
Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type) was set to Type 4
(Directory).

Input Data 47
Master Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Minimum Number of Letters Re- 1~3 1
quired
02 Directory List Number to Use 1~8 1
03 Name Match 0 = First 0
1 = Last
04 Transfer Option 0 = TRF 0
1 = UTRF
05 Screened Transfer Timeout 0 ~ 255 15
06 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0 ~ 99 5
07 Fax Detection 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
08 Next Call Routing Mailbox 0 ~ 32 0
09 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-439

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program 47-07-02
is set to 4 (Distribution).

47 Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Entry Number 01 ~ 20

Item
Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Distribution Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 0
Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox 1 = Station Changed). refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox
Number setting. Mailbox Options on page 2-412>
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting 2 = Group Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer
Mailbox Number to 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 Mailbox to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on
Changed) page 2-416>
(Program 47-02).
Use Group Number (2) for setting
Group Mailbox (1 ~ 32)
(Program 47-03).
Distribution Mailbox Number Up to 3 digits Category 1 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 128 (V3.5 No Set-
Changed). refer to <47-02 : InMail Station Mailbox ting
Options on page 2-412>
Category 2 = Mailbox No. should be 1 ~ 32. refer
to <47-03 : InMail Group Mailbox Options on
page 2-416>

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-440 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-18 : SMTP Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-18 : SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
47
01 SMTP Enabled 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
02 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting
03 SMTP Port 0 ~ 65535 25
04 Encryption 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
05 Authentication 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
2 = POP3
06 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting
07 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting
08 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting
09 Reply to Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-441

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-19 : POP3 Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-19 : POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification.

Input Data
47 Item
No.
Item Input Data Default

01 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

02 POP3 Port 0 ~ 65535 110
03 Encryption 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
04 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting
05 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-442 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Station Program
Mailbox Message Notification Options.

Input Data

Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

47
Index Number 1~5

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Notification 0 = Off 0
1 = On
02 Notification Begin Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
03 Notification End Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
04 Notification Type 0 = Undefined 1
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting
06 Notification Busy Attempts 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 5
07 Notification RNA Attempts 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 5
08 Notification Security 0 = Off 1
1 = On
09 Notification Day of week - Sunday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
10 Notification Day of week - Monday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
11 Notification Day of week - Tuesday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
12 Notification Day of week - Wednes- 0 = Disabled 1
day (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
13 Notification Day of week - Thurs- 0 = Disabled 1
day (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
14 Notification Day of week - Friday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
15 Notification Day of week - Saturday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled

Programming Manual 2-443

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

2-444 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 47 : InMail
47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Station Program
Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options.

Input Data

Station Mailbox Number 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

47
Index Number 1~3

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Find-Me Follow-Me 0 = Off 0
1 = On
02 Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
03 Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
04 Find-Me Follow-Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting
05 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Sunday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
06 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Monday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
07 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Tuesday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
08 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Wednesday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
09 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Thursday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
10 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Friday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
11 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Saturday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-445

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-22 : Group Mailbox Message Notification Options to define the IntraMail Group
Mailbox Message Notification Options.

47 Input Data

Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Index Number 1~5

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Notification 0 = Off 0
1 = On
02 Notification Begin Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
03 Notification End Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
04 Notification Type 0 = Undefined 1
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
05 Notification Number Up to 16 digits No Setting
06 Notification Busy Attempts 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 5
07 Notification RNA Attempts 1 ~ 99 (attempts) 5
08 Notification Security 0 = Off 1
1 = On
09 Notification Day of week - Sunday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
10 Notification Day of week - Monday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
11 Notification Day of week - Tuesday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
12 Notification Day of week - Wednes- 0 = Disabled 1
day (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
13 Notification Day of week - Thurs- 0 = Disabled 1
day (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
14 Notification Day of week - Friday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
15 Notification Day of week - Saturday 0 = Disabled 1
(V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled

2-446 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

47

Programming Manual 2-447

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to define the IntraMail Group
Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options.

47 Input Data

Group Mailbox Number 01 ~ 32

Index Number 1~3

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Find-Me Follow-Me 0 = Off 0
1 = On
02 Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
03 Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour 00 ~ 23 00
(00 (12 : 00 AM) ~ 23 (11 : 00 PM))
04 Find-Me Follow-Me Number Up to 16 digits No Setting
05 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Sunday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
06 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Monday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
07 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Tuesday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
08 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Wednesday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
09 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Thursday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
10 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Friday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled
11 Find-Me Follow-Me Day of week - 0 = Disabled 1
Saturday (V1.5 Added) 1 = Enabled

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-448 Program 47 : InMail

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is Program
defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.

Input Data

Service Tone Number 01 ~ 64

80
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Repeat Count 0 ~ 255 (0 = Endless) Refer below

Unit Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
02 Basic Tone Number 0 ~ 33 Refer below
(0 = No Tone)
(33 = Default Time Slot)
03 Duration Count 0 ~ 255 (0, 100 ~ 25500 ms) Refer below
04 Gain Level (dB) 0 ~ 63 (- 15.5 ~ + 15.5) Refer below

Table 2-13 Basic Tones

Basic Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB)

01 400 - 13
02 520 - 13
03 580 - 13
04 660 - 13
05 700 - 13
06 800 - 13
07 880 - 13
08 1050 - 13
09 350 / 440 - 16 / - 16
10 440 / 480 - 16 / - 16
11 480 / 620 - 21 / - 21
12 440 -16
13 -- Reserve -- -
14 520 / 650 -19 / -13

Programming Manual 2-449

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Basic Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB)

15 650 / 780 -19 / -13
16 780 / 1040 -19 / -13
17 520 / 650 -13 / -19
18 650 / 780 -13 / -19
19 780 / 1040 -13 / -19
20 1040 -13
21 450 -13
22 950 -13
23 1800 -13
Program
24 400 / 450 -13/-13
25 -- Reserve -- -

80 26
27
-- Reserve --
-- Reserve --
-
-
28 -- Reserve -- -
29 -- Reserve -- -
30 -- Reserve -- -
31 -- Reserve -- -
32 -- Reserve -- -

Default

Serv- Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level (dB)
ice Count No.
Tone
No.
1 No tone 0 1 0 10 32 (0 dB)
2 Internal Dial Tone 0 1 9 10 32 (0 dB)
3 Stutter Dial Tone 0 6 0 2 32 (0 dB)
(Special Dial Tone) 9 1 32 (0 dB)
0 1 32 (0 dB)
9 1 32 (0 dB)
0 1 32 (0 dB)
9 77 32 (0 dB)
4 Internal Recall Dial Tone 2 2 9 1 32 (0 dB)
(Transfer Dial Tone) 0 1 32 (0 dB)
5 Trunk Dial Tone 0 1 9 10 32 (0 dB)
6 Internal Busy Tone 0 2 0 5 20 (- 6 dB)
(Busy Tone) 11 5 20 (- 6 dB)
7 DND Busy Tone 0 2 0 2 32 (0 dB)
1 2 32 (0 dB)
8 B-busy Tone 0 2 0 5 20 (- 6 dB)
11 5 20 (- 6 dB)
9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 2 11 3 20 (- 6 dB)
(Congestion Tone) 0 2 20 (- 6 dB)
10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 2 11 3 20 (- 6 dB)
(Warning Tone) 0 2 20 (- 6 dB)
11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
(Confirmation Tone) 9 1 32 (0 dB)
12 Internal Hold Tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0 dB)

2-450 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Serv- Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level (dB)
ice Count No.
Tone
No.
13 External Hold Tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0 dB)
14 Internal Ring-back Tone 0 2 10 10 20 (- 6 dB)
(Internal Audible Ring) 0 30 20 (- 6 dB)
(Ring Back Tone)
15 Override Tone 1 1 12 5 32 (0 dB)
16 Lock-out Tone 0 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
17 Clock alarm tone 0 4 6 1 32 (0 dB)
0 1 32 (0 dB) Program
6 1 32 (0 dB)
0 7 32 (0 dB)
18
19
BGM
Doorphone chime 1
0
3
0
6
0
4
4
0
2
2
32 (0 dB)
38 (+ 3 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
80
2 3 38 (+ 3 dB)
2 4 26 (- 3 dB)
2 6 14 (- 9 dB)
0 5 32 (0 dB)
20 Doorphone chime 2 3 6 7 2 38 (+ 3 dB)
7 2 26 (- 3 dB)
5 3 38 (+ 3 dB)
5 4 26 (- 3 dB)
5 6 14 (- 9 dB)
0 5 32 (0 dB)
21 Doorphone chime 3 3 6 8 2 38 (+ 3 dB)
8 2 26 (- 3 dB)
6 3 38 (+ 3 dB)
6 4 26 (- 3 dB)
6 6 14 (- 9 dB)
0 5 32 (0 dB)
22 Doorphone chime 4 3 6 4 1 38 (+ 3 dB)
4 1 26 (- 3 dB)
2 2 38 (+ 3 dB)
2 2 26 (- 3 dB)
2 3 14 (- 9 dB)
0 2 32 (0 dB)
23 Doorphone chime 5 3 6 7 1 38 (+ 3 dB)
7 1 26 (- 3 dB)
5 2 38 (+ 3 dB)
5 2 26 (- 3 dB)
5 3 14 (- 9 dB)
0 2 32 (0 dB)
24 Doorphone chime 6 3 6 8 1 38 (+ 3 dB)
8 1 26 (- 3 dB)
6 2 38 (+ 3 dB)
6 2 26 (- 3 dB)
6 3 14 (- 9 dB)
0 2 32 (0 dB)
25 Service Set Tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
9 1 32 (0 dB)
26 Service Clear Tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
9 1 32 (0 dB)
27 Talk-Back Tone 2 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
29 Door Relay Tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)

Programming Manual 2-451

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Serv- Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level (dB)
ice Count No.
Tone
No.
30 Doorphone Call Tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
31 Paging Tone 2 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
32 Splash Tone 1 1 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
33 Splash Tone 2 2 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
Program 34 Splash Tone 3 3 2 0 1 32 (0 dB)
6 1 32 (0 dB)
35 1 Sec Signal Tone 1 1 6 10 32 (0 dB)

80 36

37
External audible ring tone

External reorder tone

0

0
2

2
10
0
0
10
30
2
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
32 (0 dB)
11 3 32 (0 dB)
38 External busy tone 0 2 0 5 32 (0 dB)
11 5 32 (0 dB)
39 Special audible ring-busy 0 6 0 5 32 (0 dB)
tone 11 5 32 (0 dB)
0 5 32 (0 dB)
11 5 32 (0 dB)
10 10 32 (0 dB)
0 20 32 (0 dB)
40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 1 12 2 32 (0 dB)
(Transfer, Call Waiting
Tone)
41 Intrusion tone 1 1 12 5 32 (0 dB)
42 Conference tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0 dB)
43 Intrusion tone 2 0 0 0 0 32 (0 dB)
44 External Dial Tone 0 1 9 1 26 (- 3 dB)
(DUD,DISA Dial Tone)
45 External Ring Back Tone 0 2 10 10 32 (0 dB)
(Ring Tone DDI) 0 30 32 (0 dB)
46 External Busy Tone 0 2 0 5 32 (0 dB)
(Busy Tone DDI) 11 5 32 (0 dB)
47 Number unobtainable tone 0 1 11 0 32 (0 dB)
48 VM message indication 0 2 9 1 32 (0 dB)
tone 0 1 32 (0 dB)
50 External special audible ring 0 3 10 10 32 (0 dB)
tone 12 2 32 (0 dB)
0 30 32 (0 dB)
51 External intercept tone 0 2 12 3 32 (0 dB)
4 2 32 (0 dB)
52 External call waiting tone 1 1 12 3 32 (0 dB)
53 External executive override 1 1 12 10 32 (0 dB)
tone
54 Progress Tone (V4.0 Add- 0 2 0 6 32 (0 dB)
ed) 1 1 32 (0 dB)
55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1 0 1 3 0 32 (0 dB)
56 Warning Beep Tone Signal- 1 1 2 8 32 (0 dB)
ing

2-452 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Serv- Service Tone Name Repeat Unit Count Basic Tone Duration Gain Level (dB)
ice Count No.
Tone
No.
57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing 0 5 0 2 32 (0 dB)
Tone 2 1 32 (0 dB)
0 1 32 (0 dB)
2 1 32 (0 dB)
0 20 32 (0 dB)
58 Opening Chime tone 1 8 2 2 32 (0 dB)
2 2 26 (- 3 dB)
14 2 32 (0 dB)
14 2 26 (- 3 dB)
15 2 32 (0 dB)
15 2 26 (- 3 dB) Program
16 6 32 (0 dB)
16 4 26 (- 3 dB)
59 Ending Chime tone 1 8 20
20
19
19
2
2
2
2
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
32 (0 dB)
26 (- 3 dB)
80
18 2 32 (0 dB)
18 2 26 (- 3 dB)
17 6 32 (0 dB)
17 4 26 (- 3 dB)
60 Splash tone 1 (Mute) 1 2 0 1 8 (- 12dB)
6 1 8 (- 12 dB)
61 Splash tone 2 (Mute) 2 2 0 1 8 (- 12dB)
6 1 8 (- 12 dB)
62 Splash tone 3 (Mute) 3 2 0 1 8 (- 12dB)
6 1 8 (- 12 dB)
63 EXT SPK Ring-back Tone 0 2 10 10 32 (0 dB)
0 30 32 (0 dB)
64 Special Hold Tone 0 4 11 2 35 (+ 1.5 dB)
0 3 32 (0 dB)
11 2 35 (+ 1.5 dB)
0 12 32 (0 dB)

Conditions

• The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

Programming Manual 2-453

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
Level:
MF

Description
Program Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for
DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. Make separate entries for duration
and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone.

80 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Duration 1 ~ 255 5 (100 ms)
02 Pause 1 ~ 255 5 (100 ms)
03 Tone Level (Low) (dB) 1 ~ 97 65 (- 13 dB)
(- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)
04 Tone Level (High) 1 ~ 97 69 (- 11 dB)
(- 45.0 ~ 0 = + 3)

Duration

Pause

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-454 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF

Description
Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the Program
DTMF Tone Receiver.

DTMF Tone Receiver Type :

• 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension
• 2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk
80
• 3 ~ 5 = Reserved

Input Data

DTMF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension

2 = DTMF Receiver for Trunk
3 = --- Reserved ---
4 = --- Reserved ---
5 = --- Reserved ---

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Detect Level 0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm Used to select the systems DTMF tone de- Refer below
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm tection levels.
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
02 Start Delay Time 0 ~ 255 (0.25 ms ~ 64 Refer below
ms)
03 Min. Detect Level 0 ~ 15 Refer below
DTMF Tone 0 = - 10
dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 1 = - 15
dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 2 = - 20
dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 3 = - 25
dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 4 = - 30
dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 5 = - 35
dBm (0) to - 50 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 6 = - 40
dBm (0) to - 55 dBm (15)

Programming Manual 2-455

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
04 Max. Detect Level 0 ~ 15 Refer below
DTMF Tone 0 = 0 dBm
(0) to - 15 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 1 = - 5 dBm
(0) to - 20 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 2 = - 10
dBm (0) to - 25 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 3 = - 15
dBm (0) to - 30 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 4 = - 20
dBm (0) to - 35 dBm (15)
DTMF Tone 5 = - 25
dBm (0) to - 40 dBm (15)
Program DTMF Tone 6 = - 30
dBm (0) to - 45 dBm (15)
05 Forward Twist Level 0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB) Refer below

80 06
07
Backward Twist Level
ON Detect Time
0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB)
1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~
Refer below
Refer below
3825 ms)
08 OFF Detect Time 1 ~ 255 (15 + 15 ms ~ Refer below
3825 ms)
09 Area Type 0 = Other Refer below
1 = Aust

Default

Item Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5

No
01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0
02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0
03 Min. detect level 10 (- 20 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 10 (- 20 dBm) 10 (- 20 dBm)
04 Max. detect level 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm)
05 Forward twist level 5 (6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm)
06 Backward twist level 0 (1 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 0 (1 dBm) 0 (1 dBm)
07 ON detect time 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)
08 OFF detect time 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)
09 Area Type 0 0 0 0 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-456 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level:
MF

Description
Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers for Program
the Call Progress Tone Detector.

Tone Detector Type :

• 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk
• 2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
80
• 3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
• 4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
• 5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk

Input Data

Tone Detector Type Number 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk

2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4 = Special Busy Tone for Trunk
5 = Special Ring Back Tone for Trunk

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Detection Level 0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm Refer below
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
02 Min. Detection Level 0 ~ 15 Refer below
0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15)
6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15)
03 S/N Ratio 0 ~ 4 (0 dB ~ - 20 dB) Refer below
04 No Tone Time 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) Refer below
(0 = not detect)
1 ~ 255 = 60 ~ 7680 ms
The formula is 30 + 30N
When set to N = 1, it means 30 + 30 * 1 = 60.
When set to N = 255, it means 30 + 30 * 255 =
7680.
05 Pulse Count 1 ~ 255 Refer below
06 ON Minimum Time 1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) Refer below
07 ON Maximum Time 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) Refer below

Programming Manual 2-457

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
08 OFF Minimum Time 1 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) Refer below
09 OFF Maximum Time 0 ~ 255 (30 + 30 ~ 7680 ms) Refer below
12 Frequency No. 1 1~8 Refer below
(Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
13 Frequency No. 2 0 ~ 8 (0 = Not Used) Refer below
(Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)
14 Twist Level 0 ~ 10 (1 dB ~ 10 dB) Refer below
(0 = Not Used)

Program
Default

80 Item
1
Name
Detect Level
Type 1 (DT)
0 (- 25 dBm)
Type 2 (BT)
0 (- 25 dBm)
Type 3 (RBT)
0 (- 25 dBm)
Type 4
0
Type 5
0
2 Min. detect level 15 (- 25 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 15 (- 25 dBm) 0 0
3 S/N ratio 4 (- 20 dB) 4 (- 20 dB) 4 (- 20 dB) 0 0
4 No tone time 132 (3990 ms) 132 (3990 ms) 132 (3990 ms) 0 0
5 Pulse Count 1 1 1 0 0
6 ON min. time 9 (300 ms) 12 (390 ms) 25 (780 ms) 0 0
7 ON max. time 0 20 (630 ms) 40 (1230 ms) 0 0
8 OFF min. time 1 (60 ms) 12 (390 ms) 83 (2520 ms) 0 0
9 OFF max. time 1 (60 ms) 20 (630 ms) 115 (3480 ms) 0 0
12 Frequency No 1 1 3 2 1 1
13 Frequency No 2 2 4 3 0 0
14 Twist Level 0 0 0 0 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-458 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level:
MF

Description
Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format when printing Program
out the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.

Input Data
80
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Date Format 0 = American Format (Month / Day / Year) 0
1 = Japanese Format (Year / Month / Day)
2 = European Format (Day / Month / Year)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-459

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level:
MF

Description
Program Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the frequency of the
detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.

80 Input Data

Frequency Table Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Frequency 0, 10 ~ 255 Frequency Table No. 1
(100 ~ 2550 Hz) = 35 (350 Hz)
(0 = Not used) Frequency Table No. 2
= 44 (440 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 3
= 48 (480 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 4
= 62 (620 Hz)
Frequency Table No. 5
=0
Frequency Table No. 6
=0
Frequency Table No. 7
=0
Frequency Table No. 8
=0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-460 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-08 : MFC Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-08 : MFC Tone Setup to define the duration (On time) and pause (Off time) for MFC Program
dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. And also it is possible to adjust the level of
tone.

Input Data 80
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Duration (On time) 1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms) 5 (100 ms)
02 Pause (Off time) 1 ~ 255 (20 ms ~ 5100 ms) 5 (100 ms)
03 Tone Level 1 ~ 97 (- 45 dB ~ + 3 dB) 77 (- 7 dB)

Duration

Pause

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-461

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-09 : Short Ring Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SL1100 multiline terminals.

Input Data
80 Short Ring Number 01 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Frequency 1 00 = No setting, 01 ~ 15 Refer to Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table Refer below
on page 2-462.
02 Frequency 2 00 = No setting, 01 ~ 15 Refer to Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table Refer below
on page 2-462.
03 Ring Cycle 00 = No setting, 01 ~ 14 Refer to Table 2-15 Ring Cycle Table on Refer below
page 2-463.

When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value.

Table 2-14 Frequency 1/2 Table

Data Frequency (Hz)

01 392
02 440
03 494
04 523
05 587
06 659
07 698
08 784
09 880
10 988
11 1046
12 1175
13 1318
14 1397
15 1568

2-462 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Table 2-15 Ring Cycle Table

Data Ring Cycle (ms)

01 125 (On) / Off
02 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
03 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
04 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / 125 (Off) / 125 (On) / Off
05 250 (On) / Off
06 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
07 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off
08 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / 250 (Off) / 250 (On) / Off Program
09 325 (On) / Off

80
10 325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / Off
11 325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / 325 (Off) / 325 (On) / Off
12 500 (On) / Off
13 500 (On) / 500 (Off) / 500 (On) / Off
14 1000 (On) / Off

Table 2-16 Default Table

Short Ring No. Short Tone Name Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Ring Cycle
1 Confirmation Tone 8 8 1
2 Error Tone 8 8 14
3 Alarm Tone for long 4 4 14
conversation call
4 Not defined 0 0 0
: : : : :
32 Not defined 0 0 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-463

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
MF

Description
Program Use Program 80-10 : MF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various level and time for MF Tone
Receiver.

80 Input Data

MF Tone Receiver Type Number 1 = MF Receiver for Extension

2 = MF Receiver for Trunk
3 = -- Reserve --
4 = -- Reserve --
5 = -- Reserve --

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Detect Level 0 = 0 dBm ~ - 25 dBm Refer below
1 = - 5 dBm ~ - 30 dBm
2 = - 10 dBm ~ - 35 dBm
3 = - 15 dBm ~ - 40 dBm
4 = - 20 dBm ~ - 45 dBm
5 = - 25 dBm ~ - 50 dBm
6 = - 30 dBm ~ - 55 dBm
02 Start delay time 0 ~ 255 (0.25 step, 0 ms ~ 64 ms) Refer below
03 Min. detect level 0 ~ 15 Refer below
detect level 0 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
detect level 1 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
detect level 2 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
detect level 3 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
detect level 4 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
detect level 5 = - 35 dBm (0) ~ - 50 dBm (15)
detect level 6 = - 40 dBm (0) ~ - 55 dBm (15)
04 Max. detect level 0 ~ 15 Refer below
detect level 0 = 0 dBm (0) ~ - 15 dBm (15)
detect level 1 = - 5 dBm (0) ~ - 20 dBm (15)
detect level 2 = - 10 dBm (0) ~ - 25 dBm (15)
detect level 3 = - 15 dBm (0) ~ - 30 dBm (15)
detect level 4 = - 20 dBm (0) ~ - 35 dBm (15)
detect level 5 = - 25 dBm (0) ~ - 40 dBm (15)
detect level 6 = - 30 dBm (0) ~ - 45 dBm (15)
05 twist level 0 ~ 9 (1 dB ~ 10 dB) Refer below
06 S/N ratio 0 ~ 4 (- 5 step, 0 dB ~ - 20 dB) Refer below
07 ON detect time 1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms) Refer below
08 OFF detect time 1 ~ 255 (15 step, 30 ms ~ 3840 ms) Refer below

2-464 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Default

Item Item Name Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5

No.
01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0
02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0
03 Min. detect level 10 (- 20 dBm) 10 (- 20 dBm) 10 (- 20 dBm) 10 (- 20 dBm) 10 (- 20 dBm)
04 Max. detect level 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm) 2 (- 2 dBm)
05 twist level 5 (6 dBm) 5 ( 6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm) 5 (6 dBm)
06 S/N ratio 2 (- 10 dBm) 2 (- 10 dBm) 2 (- 10 dBm) 2 (- 10 dBm) 2 (- 10 dBm)
07 ON detect time 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) Program
08 OFF detect time 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms) 1 (30 ms)

Conditions
80
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-465

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 80-12 : Caller ID Receiver Setup defines the type and level for Caller ID detection of
DSP.

80 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Type 0 = NTT 1
1 = Other
2 = Korea
02 Level (Mark) 0 ~ 32766 50
03 Level (Space) 0 ~ 32766 50
04 Bit Sampling Type 0 = Other 0
1 = Malaysia
05 1st Bit Offset 0 ~ 32766 10
06 Minimum Seizure Count 0 ~ 32766 10
07 Guard Time when Mark 0 ~ 32766 1
08 CAS detect time (V4.0 Added) 0 = 20 ms 0 = 20 ms
1 = 25 ms
2 = 30 ms
3 = 35 ms
4 = 40 ms
5 = 45 ms
6 = 50 ms
7 = 55 ms
8 = 60 ms
9 = 65 ms
10 = 70 ms
11 = 75 ms
12 = 80 ms

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-466 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-01 : CO Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data parameters for the Program
COIU.

Input Data
81
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 PCM Encoding Method Specifica- 0 = μ-law 0 (μ-law)
tion 1 = A-law
02 Loop Current Detection Time 1 ~ 255 60 (600 ms)
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detec- 1 ~ 255 61 (305 ms)
tion Time (5 ~ 1275 ms)
04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum 1 ~ 255 10 (100 ms)
Time (10 ~ 2550 ms)
05 Single Ringing Detection Minimum 0 ~ 255 66 (660 ms)
Time (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
06 Double Ringing Detection Mini- 0 ~ 255 10 (100 ms)
mum Off Time (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
07 Double Ringing Detection Maxi- 0 ~ 255 40 (400 ms)
mum Off Time (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
08 Ringing Signal not Detection Mini- 1 ~ 255 70 (700 ms)
mum (10 ~ 2550 ms)
09 Time Ringing Signal Stop Detec- 1 ~ 255 60 (6000 ms)
tion Time (100 ~ 25500 ms)
10 Continuous Ringing Minimum 0 ~ 255 30 (300 ms)
Time (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
11 Continuous Ringing Maximum 0 ~ 255 70 (700 ms)
Time (0, 10 ~ 2550 ms)
14 Hook Flash 1 Time 1 ~ 255 80 (800 ms)
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
15 Hook Flash 2 Time 1 ~ 255 25 (2500 ms)
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
16 Pause Time 1 ~ 255 10 (1000 ms)
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
17 PFT Idle Detection Time 1 ~ 255 30 (3000 ms)
(100 ~ 25500 ms)
20 Loop Reverse Detect Minimum 1 ~ 255 10 (100 ms)
Time (10 ~ 2550 ms)
21 Loop Reverse Detect Maximum 1 ~ 255 86 (860 ms)
Time (10 ~ 2550 ms)
22 Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum 1 ~ 255 40 (400 ms)
Time (10 ~ 2550 ms)

Programming Manual 2-467

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
23 Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum 1 ~ 255 64 (640 ms)
Time (10 ~ 2550 ms)
27 Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps) 1 ~ 255 12 (60 ms)
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
28 Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps) 1 ~ 255 8 (40 ms)
(5 ~ 1275 ms)
29 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1 ~ 255 80 (800 ms)
(10 ~ 2550 ms)
36 Long Ringing Detection Minimum 1 ~ 255 24 (2400 ms)
Time (100 ~ 25500 ms)
Program

81
Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-468 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-05 : ISDN PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description
Use Program 81-05 : ISDN PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data Program
for layer 2 of ISDN PRI.

Input Data
81
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Timer T200 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 Specify the timer value in 1/100ths of a 10 (1 sec)
ms) second at the end of which transmission of
a frame may be initiated.
02 Timer T201 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a 10 (1 sec)
ms) second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
03 Timer T202 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 Specify the minimum time in 1/100ths of a 20 (2 sec)
ms) second between retransmissions of the
TEI Identity check messages.
04 Timer T203 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 Specify the maximum time in 1/100ths of a 250 (25 sec)
ms) second allowed without exchanging
frames.
05 N200 1 ~ 255 Specify the retransmission count. 3
06 N201 1 ~ 65535 (Byte) Specify the frame lengths in ocelots. 260
07 N202 1 ~ 255 Specify the maximum number of transmis- 3
sions from a TEI identity request message
when the user requests a TEI.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-469

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-06 : ISDN PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 81-06 : ISDN PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for
layer 3 of ISDN PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04).

81 Input Data

Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1~5

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 T301 0, 180 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 180
second of the timer to be started when the
ALERT message is received.
02 T302 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 15
second of the timer to be started when the
SETUP ACK is sent. Timer is also restar-
ted when INFO is received.
03 T303 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second of the timer to be started when
SETUP is sent.
04 T304 0 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 30
second of the timer to be started when the
SETUP ACK is received. Timer is also re-
started when INFO is received.
05 T305 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 30
second of the timer to be started when
DISC without progress No. 8 is sent.
06 T306 0 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 30
second of the timer to be started when
DISC with progress indicator No. 8 is sent.
This timer is valid for Network side use on-
ly.
07 T307 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 180
second of the timer to be started when
SUSPEND ACK is sent. This timer is valid
only for Network side use only.
08 T308 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second of the timer to be started when
REL is sent.
09 T309 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 90
second upon data link disconnection.
10 T310 0 ~ 180 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 180
second of the timer to be started when
CALL PROC is sent.

2-470 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
11 T312 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 6
second of the timer to be started when
SETUP is sent or re-sent on broadcast da-
ta link. This timer is only valid for Network
side use only.
12 T313 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second of the timer to be started when
connection request is sent. Valid range 1 ~
4 seconds in 1 second increments. Value
of 0 indicates timer not used.
13 T314 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second of the timer to be started when Program
message segment is received.
14 T316 (T317 + 1) ~ 254 sec- Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 120

81
onds second of the timer to be started when RE-
START is sent.
15 T317 1 ~ (T316-1) Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 60
second of the timer to be started when RE-
START is received.
16 T318 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second of the timer to be started when
RES is sent. This timer is valid for user
side use only.
17 T319 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second of the timer to be started when
SUSPEND is sent. This timer is valid for
user side use only.
18 T320 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 30
second when B-channel access: connec-
tion is received or D-channel access: DL-
ESTABLISH confirmation or indication is
received.
19 T321 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 30
second of the timer to be started when
STATUS ENQ is received.
20 T322 1 ~ 254 seconds Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths of a 4
second upon D-channel failure.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Programming Manual 2-471

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the CODEC (QSLAC)
Filter for each analog trunk port.

81 Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 084

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 CODEC Filter Type 0 = Type 0 2
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
6 = Type 6
7 = Type 7
8 = Type 8
9 = Type 9
10 = Type 10
11 = Type 11
12 = Type 12
13 = Type 13
14 = Type 14
15 = Type 15

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-472 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each T1 Trunk type. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
81
01 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 15 (60 ms)
(Loop)
02 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 15 (60 ms)
(Ground)
03 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 15 (60 ms)
(DID)
04 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 15 (60 ms)
(E&M)
05 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 15 (60 ms)
(OPX)
06 Clear Signal Detection Time (Loop) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
07 Clear Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
(Ground)
08 Clear Signal Detection Time (DID) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
09 Answer Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
(E&M)
10 Clear Signal Detection Time (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
11 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 10 (80 ms)
(Loop)
12 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 10 (80 ms)
(Ground)
13 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 10 (80 ms)
(DID)
14 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 10 (80 ms)
(E&M)
15 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 10 (80 ms)
(OPX)
16 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 50 (5000 ms)
Time (Loop)
17 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 50 (5000 ms)
Time (Ground)
18 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 50 (5000 ms)
Time (DID)
19 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 50 (5000 ms)
Time (E&M)

Programming Manual 2-473

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
20 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 50 (5000 ms)
Time (OPX)
21 Loop Current Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 40 (160 ms)
(Loop)
22 Loop Current Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 40 (160 ms)
(Ground)
23 Loop Current Detection Time (DID) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 40 (160 ms)
24 Loop Current Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 40 (160 ms)
(E&M)

Program 25 Loop Current Detection Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 40 (160 ms)
(OPX)
26 DP Break Send Time (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 15 (60 ms)

81 27
28
DP Make Send Time (ALL)
DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL)
1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms)
1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms)
10 (40 ms)
7 (700 ms)
29 HookFlash Send Time (Loop) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)
30 HookFlash Send Time (Ground) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)
31 HookFlash Send Time (DID) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)
32 HookFlash Send Time (E&M) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)
33 HookFlash Send Time (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)
34 Pause Send Time (ALL) 1 ~ 255 (1 sec ~ 255 sec ) 3 (3 sec)
35 Wink Send Duration Time (DID) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 25 (200 ms)
36 Delay Send Duration Time (DID) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 25 (200 ms)
37 Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 3 (300 ms)
38 Wink Send Duration Time (E&M) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 25 (200 ms)
39 Delay Send Duration Time (E&M) 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 25 (200 ms)
40 Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 3 (300 ms)
41 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 48 (4800 ms)
Time (DID)
42 Receive Wink Duration Min. Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 12 (96 ms)
(DID)
43 Receive Wink Duration Max. Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 45 (360 ms)
(DID)
44 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 48 (4800 ms)
Time (E&M)
45 Receive Wink Duration Min. Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 12 (96 ms)
(E&M)
46 Receive Wink Duration Max. Time 1 ~ 250 (8 ms ~ 2000 ms) 45 (360 ms)
(E&M)
47 Receive DP Make Min. Time (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 3 (12 ms)
48 Receive DP Make Max. Time (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 19 (76 ms)
49 Receive DP Break Min. Time (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 3 (12 ms)
50 Receive DP Break Max. Time (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 25 (100 ms)
51 Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 125 (500 ms)
(ALL)
52 Receive HookFlash Duration Min. 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 3 (300 ms)
Time (E&M)
53 Receive HookFlash Duration Max. 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
Time (E&M)

2-474 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
54 Receive HookFlash Duration Min. 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 3 (300 ms)
Time (OPX)
55 Receive HookFlash Duration Max. 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
Time (OPX)
56 Loop Off Guard Time (Loop) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2000 ms)
57 Loop Off Guard Time (Ground) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2000 ms)
58 Loop Off Guard Time (DID) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2000 ms)
59 Loop Off Guard Time (E&M) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2000 ms)
60 Loop Off Guard Time (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2000 ms)
Program
61 Double Ringing Send Time 1 (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)
62 Double Between Ringing Send 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 5 (500 ms)

81
Time 1 (OPX)
63 Double Ringing Send Time 2 (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 25 (2500 ms)
64 Double Between Ringing Send 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 30 (3000 ms)
Time 2 (OPX)
65 Single Ringing Send Time (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 10 (1000 ms)
66 Single Between Ringing Send Time 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 9 (900 ms)
(OPX)
67 Guard Time 1 (LOOP) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 9 (900 ms)
68 Guard Time 1 (GROUND) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 9 (900 ms)
69 Guard Time 1 (DID) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 9 (900 ms)
70 Guard Time 1 (E&M) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 9 (900 ms)
71 Guard Time 1 (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 9 (900 ms)
72 Guard Time 2 (ALL) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 3 (12 ms)
73 Dial Sending Complete Time 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2000 ms)
74 ON-HOOK bit Send Time 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 40 (4000 ms)
75 Open Loop Time (LOOP) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
76 Open Loop Time (GROUND) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
77 Open Loop Time (DID) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
78 Open Loop Time (E&M) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
79 Open Loop Time (OPX) 1 ~ 255 (100 ms ~ 25500 ms) 6 (600 ms)
80 Close Loop Time (LOOP) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 13 (52 ms)
81 Close Loop Time (DID) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 13 (52 ms)
82 Ring GND Time (GROUND) 1 ~ 250 (4 ms ~ 1000 ms) 13 (52 ms)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-475

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting data (when
Program 81-07 is set to 4).

81 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0 ~ 255 43
02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0 ~ 255 102
03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0 ~ 255 228
04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0 ~ 255 58
05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0 ~ 255 75
06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0 ~ 255 189
07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0 ~ 255 58
08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0 ~ 255 194
09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0 ~ 255 45
10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0 ~ 255 194
11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0 ~ 255 219
12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0 ~ 255 45
13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0 ~ 255 178
14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0 ~ 255 208
15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0 ~ 255 178
16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0 ~ 255 208
17 AISN and Analog Gains 0 ~ 255 17
18 Z Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 250
19 Z Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 173
20 Z Filter Coefficients (3) 0 ~ 255 50
21 Z Filter Coefficients (4) 0 ~ 255 165
22 Z Filter Coefficients (5) 0 ~ 255 59
23 Z Filter Coefficients (6) 0 ~ 255 70
24 Z Filter Coefficients (7) 0 ~ 255 106
25 Z Filter Coefficients (8) 0 ~ 255 175
26 Z Filter Coefficients (9) 0 ~ 255 163
27 Z Filter Coefficients (10) 0 ~ 255 79
28 Z Filter Coefficients (11) 0 ~ 255 179
29 Z Filter Coefficients (12) 0 ~ 255 83

2-476 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
30 Z Filter Coefficients (13) 0 ~ 255 84
31 Z Filter Coefficients (14) 0 ~ 255 31
32 Z Filter Coefficients (15) 0 ~ 255 1
33 R Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 170
34 R Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 192
35 R Filter Coefficients (3) 0 ~ 255 187
36 R Filter Coefficients (4) 0 ~ 255 32
37 R Filter Coefficients (5) 0 ~ 255 203
Program
38 R Filter Coefficients (6) 0 ~ 255 42
39 R Filter Coefficients (7) 0 ~ 255 171
40
41
42
R Filter Coefficients (8)
R Filter Coefficients (9)
R Filter Coefficients (10)
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
165
42
35
81
43 R Filter Coefficients (11) 0 ~ 255 67
44 R Filter Coefficients (12) 0 ~ 255 91
45 R Filter Coefficients (13) 0 ~ 255 43
46 R Filter Coefficients (14) 0 ~ 255 37
47 X Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 202
48 X Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 48
49 X Filter Coefficients (3) 0 ~ 255 37
50 X Filter Coefficients (4) 0 ~ 255 187
51 X Filter Coefficients (5) 0 ~ 255 170
52 X Filter Coefficients (6) 0 ~ 255 189
53 X Filter Coefficients (7) 0 ~ 255 162
54 X Filter Coefficients (8) 0 ~ 255 163
55 X Filter Coefficients (9) 0 ~ 255 165
56 X Filter Coefficients (10) 0 ~ 255 204
57 X Filter Coefficients (11) 0 ~ 255 164
58 X Filter Coefficients (12) 0 ~ 255 165
59 GR Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 202
60 GR Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 160
61 GX Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 58
62 GX Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 178

Conditions

• This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-477

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level:
MF

Program Description
Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a user

82
hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1 ~ 4), also
called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in
Program 22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each range there are three frequency
Types : High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming
calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to
make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in Items 1
and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and Modulation for each
Type, for each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each
Type in each Range.

Input Data

Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)

2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern
6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern
7 = Pattern 5 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
8 = Pattern 6 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
9 = Pattern 7 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)
10 = Pattern 8 (Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Added)

Ringing Tone Type Number 1 = High

2 = Mid
3 = Low

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Frequency 1 1 = 520 Hz Refer below
2 = 540 Hz
3 = 660 Hz
4 = 760 Hz
5 = 1100 Hz
6 = 1400 Hz
7 = 2000 Hz
02 Frequency 2 1 = 520 Hz Refer below
2 = 540 Hz
3 = 660 Hz
4 = 760 Hz
5 = 1100 Hz
6 = 1400 Hz
7 = 2000 Hz

2-478 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
03 Modulation 0 = No Modulation Refer below
1 = 8 Hz Modulation
2 = 16 Hz Modulation
3 = Envelope

Default

Table 2-17 82-01 Default Table

Incoming Ringing Program

Tone Type Frequency 1 (Hz) Frequency 2 (Hz) Modulation
Tone Number
Pattern 1 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 16 Hz Modulation

82
(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Modulation
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Modulation
Pattern 2 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
Pattern 3 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 16 Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) Mid 1400 Hz 660 Hz 16 Hz Modulation
Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 16 Hz Modulation
Pattern 4 High 2000 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) Mid 1400 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
Low 1100 Hz 540 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
Pattern 5 High 1100 Hz 1400 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
(Intercom Incoming Pat- Mid 660 Hz 760 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
tern) Low 520 Hz 660 Hz 8 Hz Modulation
Pattern 6 High 760 Hz 760 Hz No Modulation
(Alarm Sensor Pattern) Mid 760 Hz 760 Hz No Modulation
Low 760 Hz 760 Hz No Modulation
Pattern 7 High 1400Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Middle 760Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation
Added) Low 660Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation
Pattern 8 High 1400Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Middle 760Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation
Added) Low 660Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation
Pattern 9 High 2000Hz 1100Hz 16Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 16Hz Modulation
Added) Low 1100Hz 760Hz 16Hz Modulation
Pattern 10 High 2000Hz 1100Hz 8Hz Modulation
(Trunk Incoming) (V3.0 Middle 2000Hz 540Hz 8Hz Modulation
Added) Low 1100Hz 760Hz 8Hz Modulation

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns
• Selectable Ring Tones

Programming Manual 2-479

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Program Description
Use Program 82-04 : ASTU Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the SLT.

82 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Companding Method Type 0 = μ-law 0
1 = A-law
02 Ringing Frequency 0 = 25 Hz 1 (20 Hz)
1 = 20 Hz
2 = 16 Hz
03 Minimum Break Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 2 (10 ms)
04 Maximum Break Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 20 (100 ms)
05 Minimum Make Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 2 (10 ms)
06 Maximum Make Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 20 (100 ms)
07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 21 (105 ms)
08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 200 (1000 ms)
09 Minimum Ground Flash Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 21 (105 ms)
10 Minimum Off-Hook Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 21 (105 ms)
11 No Detection Time after Off-Hook 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 60 (300 ms)
12 No Detection Time after Pulse Dial 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 70 (350 ms)
Detection
13 Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal 1 ~ 255 (10 ms ~ 2550 ms) 60 (600 ms)
Time
14 Ring, Message Wait Period Time 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 ms) 150 (750 ms)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-480 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-05 : ISDN PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup
Level:
MF

Description Program

Use Program 82-05 : ISDN PRI Layer2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup to set the basic data for the

82
Layer 2 of ISDN PRI S-Point.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Timer T200 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 10 (1 sec)
02 Timer T201 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 10 (1 sec)
03 Timer T202 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 20 (2 sec)
04 Timer T203 1 ~ 255 (100 ~ 25500 ms) 30 (3 sec)
05 N200 1 ~ 255 3
06 N201 1 ~ 65535 (Byte) 260
07 N202 1 ~ 255 3

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-481

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-06 : ISDN PRI Layer3 (S-point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Program Description
Use Program 82-06 : ISDN PRI Layer3 (S-Point) Timer Setup to set the basic timer for the layer 3 of

82
ISDN PRI S-Point.

Input Data

Layer3 Timer Type No. 1~5

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 T301 0, 180 ~ 254 (sec) 180 (sec)
02 T302 1 ~ 254 (sec) 10 (sec)
03 T303 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)
04 T304 0 ~ 254 (sec) 20 (sec)
05 T305 1 ~ 254 (sec) 30 (sec)
06 T306 0 ~ 254 (sec) 30 (sec)
07 T307 1 ~ 254 (sec) 180 (sec)
08 T308 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)
09 T309 1 ~ 254 (sec) 90 (sec)
10 T310 0 ~ 180 (sec) 30 (sec)
11 T312 1 ~ 254 (sec) 6 (sec)
12 T313 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)
13 T314 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)
14 T316 (T317 + 1) ~ 254 (sec) 120 (sec)
15 T317 1 ~ (T316 - 1) (sec) 60 (sec)
16 T318 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)
17 T319 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)
18 T320 1 ~ 254 (sec) 30 (sec)
19 T321 1 ~ 254 (sec) 30 (sec)
20 T322 1 ~ 254 (sec) 4 (sec)

Conditions

None

2-482 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

82

Programming Manual 2-483

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level:
IN

Program Description
Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter value of the

82
CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port.

Input Data

Station Port Number 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 CODEC Filter Type 0 = Type 0 2
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5
6 = Type 6
7 = Type 7
8 = Type 8
9 = Type 9
10 = Type 10
11 = Type 11
12 = Type 12
13 = Type 13
14 = Type 14
15 = Type 15

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS)

2-484 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup
Level:
MF

Description Program

Use Program 82-08 : Sidetone Volume Setup for adjusting the telephone sidetone volume. There

82
are two levels, based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Sidetone Volume Input Data ( Digital Sidetone Level : Analog Side- 6
tone Level )
0 ( - 54 dB : - 54 dB )
1 ( - 48 dB : - 54 dB )
2 ( - 42 dB : - 54 dB )
3 ( - 36 dB : - 48 dB )
4 ( - 30 dB : - 42 dB )
5 ( - 24 dB : - 36 dB )
6 ( - 18 dB : - 30 dB )
7 ( - 12 dB : - 24 dB )
8 ( - 12 dB : - 18 dB )
9 ( - 12 dB : - 12 dB )

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2-485

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Program Description
Use Program 82-09 : SLIU CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data (when Program

82
82-07 is set to 4).

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 B1 Filter Setup (1) 0 ~ 255 105
02 B1 Filter Setup (2) 0 ~ 255 122
03 B1 Filter Setup (3) 0 ~ 255 166
04 B1 Filter Setup (4) 0 ~ 255 42
05 B1 Filter Setup (5) 0 ~ 255 227
06 B1 Filter Setup (6) 0 ~ 255 46
07 B1 Filter Setup (7) 0 ~ 255 169
08 B1 Filter Setup (8) 0 ~ 255 242
09 B1 Filter Setup (9) 0 ~ 255 151
10 B1 Filter Setup (10) 0 ~ 255 41
11 B1 Filter Setup (11) 0 ~ 255 122
12 B1 Filter Setup (12) 0 ~ 255 135
13 B1 Filter Setup (13) 0 ~ 255 168
14 B1 Filter Setup (14) 0 ~ 255 112
15 B2 Filter Setup (1) 0 ~ 255 45
16 B2 Filter Setup (2) 0 ~ 255 1
17 AISN and Analog Gains 0 ~ 255 14
18 Z Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 178
19 Z Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 162
20 Z Filter Coefficients (3) 0 ~ 255 53
21 Z Filter Coefficients (4) 0 ~ 255 83
22 Z Filter Coefficients (5) 0 ~ 255 42
23 Z Filter Coefficients (6) 0 ~ 255 171
24 Z Filter Coefficients (7) 0 ~ 255 194
25 Z Filter Coefficients (8) 0 ~ 255 43
26 Z Filter Coefficients (9) 0 ~ 255 106
27 Z Filter Coefficients (10) 0 ~ 255 163

2-486 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
28 Z Filter Coefficients (11) 0 ~ 255 43
29 Z Filter Coefficients (12) 0 ~ 255 169
30 Z Filter Coefficients (13) 0 ~ 255 166
31 Z Filter Coefficients (14) 0 ~ 255 159
32 Z Filter Coefficients (15) 0 ~ 255 1
33 R Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 220
34 R Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 1
35 R Filter Coefficients (3) 0 ~ 255 58
Program
36 R Filter Coefficients (4) 0 ~ 255 32
37 R Filter Coefficients (5) 0 ~ 255 35
38
39
40
R Filter Coefficients (6)
R Filter Coefficients (7)
R Filter Coefficients (8)
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
0 ~ 255
202
195
174
82
41 R Filter Coefficients (9) 0 ~ 255 74
42 R Filter Coefficients (10) 0 ~ 255 51
43 R Filter Coefficients (11) 0 ~ 255 170
44 R Filter Coefficients (12) 0 ~ 255 171
45 R Filter Coefficients (13) 0 ~ 255 74
46 R Filter Coefficients (14) 0 ~ 255 197
47 X Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 1
48 X Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 17
49 X Filter Coefficients (3) 0 ~ 255 1
50 X Filter Coefficients (4) 0 ~ 255 144
51 X Filter Coefficients (5) 0 ~ 255 1
52 X Filter Coefficients (6) 0 ~ 255 144
53 X Filter Coefficients (7) 0 ~ 255 1
54 X Filter Coefficients (8) 0 ~ 255 144
55 X Filter Coefficients (9) 0 ~ 255 1
56 X Filter Coefficients (10) 0 ~ 255 144
57 X Filter Coefficients (11) 0 ~ 255 1
58 X Filter Coefficients (12) 0 ~ 255 144
59 GR Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 1
60 GR Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 17
61 GX Filter Coefficients (1) 0 ~ 255 35
62 GX Filter Coefficients (2) 0 ~ 255 32

Conditions

• This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Programming Manual 2-487

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

82

2-488 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-11 : SLIU Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description Program

Use Program 82-11 : SLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various timers for SLIU.

Input Data 82
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Bounce Protect Time 0 = No setting Specify a time for detection of a valid off- 3
1 ~ 15 = 100 ms ~ 1.5 Hook indication that is long enough to pre- (300 ms)
sec vent an unintentional bounce of the receiv-
er from being detected as a new Off-Hook
indication from a Single Line Telephone.
02 HookFlash Start Time 0 = 40 ms Specify the minimum hookflash time from 5
1 ~ 15 = 90 ms ~ 790 ms a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice (290 ms)
Mail system before it is detected as the be-
ginning of a valid hookflash.
03 HookFlash End Time 0 = HST + 0 ms Specify the maximum hookflash duration 7
1 ~ 15 = HST + 100 ms from a Single Line Telephone to receive a (990 ms)
~ HST + 1500 ms second dial tone.
(HST = Hookflash Start
Time)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-489

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Program Description
Use Program 82-12 : OPX Initial Data Setup to define the various initial data for OPX packages.

82 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Bounce Protect Time 0 = No setting Specify a time for detection of a valid off- 3
1 ~ 15 = 100 ms ~ 1.5 Hook indication that is long enough to pre- (300 ms)
sec vent an unintentional bounce of the receiv-
er from being detected as a new Off-Hook
indication from a single line telephone.
02 HookFlash Start Time 0 = 40 ms Specify the minimum hookflash time from 5
1 ~ 15 = 90 ms ~ 790 ms a single line telephone or analog Voice (290 ms)
Mail system before it is detected as the be-
ginning of a valid hookflash.
03 HookFlash End Time 0 = HST + 0 ms Specify the maximum hookflash duration 7
1 ~ 15 = HST + 100 ms from a single line telephone to receive a (990 ms)
~ HST + 1500 ms second dial tone.
(HST = Hookflash Start
Time)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-490 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line
Telephone
Level:
IN

Program
Description
Use Program 82-14: Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone to define the Handset/
Headset Gain Level for Multi Line Telephone. 82
Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Handset/Headset Transmit Gain 0 = Fixed 0
level (9 = + 12.5 dB)
1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 3.5 ~ + 58.5 dB
02 Handset/Headset Receive Gain lev- 0 = Fixed 0
el (13 = 0 dB)
1 ~ 32 = LR value : - 24 ~ + 38.0 dB

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-491

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for

Extension
82-21 : Sensor Setup
Level:
IN

Program Description
Use Program 82-21 : Sensor Setup to setup the Sensor for SL1100.

82 Input Data

Sensor Number 1~6

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Sensor Type 0 = Close Detect Set sensor type. 0
1 = Open Detect
02 Sensor Alarm Detect 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 Set minimum level for Alarm detection. 24 (120 ms)
Minimum Level ms)
03 Sensor Idle Detect 1 ~ 255 (5 ms ~ 1275 Set minimum level for Idle detection. 24 (120 ms)
Minimum Level ms)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-492 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic setup Program
information of H.225 and H.245.

Input Data
84
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 H.225 Alerting Time 0 ~ 255 seconds 180
02 H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 9
03 H.225 Setup Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 4
04 H.225 Info Ack Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 9
05 H.225 Call Proceeding Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 10
07 H.245 Master Slave Determination 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
Timer
08 H.245 Master Slave Determination 0 ~ 255 seconds 3
Retry Count
09 H.245 Capability Exchange Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
10 H.245 Logical Channel Establish- 0 ~ 255 seconds 50
ment Timer
11 H.245 Mode Request Procedures 0 ~ 255 seconds 50
Timer
12 H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 50
13 H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 50
14 H.245 Maintenance Loop 0 ~ 255 seconds 50
15 RAS GRQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
16 GRQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2
17 RAS RRQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
18 RRQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 3
19 RAS URQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 3
20 URQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 1
21 RAS ARQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
22 ARQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2
23 RAS BRQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
24 BRQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2
25 RAS IRR Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
26 IRR Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2
27 RAS DRQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 8
28 DRQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2

Programming Manual 2-493

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
29 RAS LRQ Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 5
30 LRQ Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2
31 RAS RAI Timer 0 ~ 255 seconds 3
32 RAI Retry Count 0 ~ 255 2
33 Call Signaling Port Number 0 ~ 65535 : 1730
0 ~ 1719, 1721 ~ 65535
35 Fast Start Mode 0 = Disable 1
1 = Enable
36 RAS Unicast Port Number 0 ~ 65535 20001
Program
37 Terminal Type setting 0 ~ 255 60

84 Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-494 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to Central Program
Firmware Download for IP Phones.

Input Data
84
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Server Mode 0 = TFTP 0
1 = FTP
02 File Server IP Ad- 0.0.0.0 ~ 0.0.0.0
dress 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.254.254
03 Login Name Up to 20 Characters Enable only 84-07-01 is 1 None
04 Password Up to 20 Characters Enable only 84-07-01 is 1 None

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-495

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data. I/F No.2 The packets send from LAN I/F
on VoIPDB is set the VLAN tag.

84 Input Data

Interface Number 1~2

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 VLAN 0 = Disable (Off) 0
1 = Enable (On)
02 VLAN ID 0 ~ 4094 0
03 Priority 0~7 0

Conditions

• System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-496 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-10 : ToS Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data. Program

Input Data

Protocol Type 1 ~ 3 = Not used

4 = Networking (V1.5 Changed)
84
5 = RTP/RTCP
6 = SIP
7 = Not used
8 = SIP-MLT
9 = SIP Trunk
10 = Not used

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 ToS Mode 0 = Disable (Invalid) When Input Data is set to 1, Item No. 07 is 0
1 = IP Precedence invalid. When Data is set to 2, Item No. 02
2 = Diffserv ~ 06 are invalid.
02 Priority, IP Prece- 0~7 1 = Router queuing priority 0
dence 0 = Low
7 = High
03 Low Delay 0~1 1 = Optimize for low delay routing 0
0 = Normal Delay, Low
Delay
04 Wideband (Through- 0~1 1 = Optimize for high bandwidth routing 0
out) 0 = Normal Throughput
1 = High Throughput
05 High Reliability 0~1 1 = Optimize for reliability routing 0
0 = Normal Reliability
1 = Low Reliability
07 Priority (D.S.C.P. - Dif- 0 ~ 63 DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) 0
ferentiated Services
Code Point)

Conditions

• The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-497

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V1.5 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice (RTP packet)
encoding parameters.

84 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Number of G.711 Au- 1 = 10 ms 3
dio Frames 2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
02 G.711 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 1
1 = µ-law
04 G.711 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms 30
(min)
05 G.711 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms 60
(average)
06 G.711 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms 120
(max)
07 Number of G.729 Au- 1 = 10 ms 3
dio Frames 2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
5 = 50 ms
6 = 60 ms
08 G.729 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
09 G.729 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 ms 30
(min)
10 G.729 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 ms 60
(average)
11 G.729 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 ms 120
(max)
12 Number of G.723 Au- 1 = 30 ms 1
dio Frames 2 = 60 ms
14 G.723 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 ms 30
(min)
15 G.723 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 ms 60
(average)
16 G.723 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 300 ms 120
(max)

2-498 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3
3 = Adaptive Immediate-
ly
18 VAD Threshold 01 ~ 30 (19 db ~ +10 db) 20
1 = -19 dB (-49 dBm)
:
20 = 0 dB (-30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm(-21 dBm)
30 = 10 dBm(-20 dBm)
28 Audio Capability Pri- 0 = G.711_PT 0
ority 1 = G.723_PT Program
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT

84
30 Echo Auto Gain Con- 0~5 0
trol
31 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable If VoIPU, the systems refers to PRG 1 (V2.0
1 = RFC2833 84-06-10 setting. Changed)
2 = VoIPU
32 Fax Relay 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
2 = Each Port Mode
33 Number of G.722 Au- 1 = 10 ms 3
dio Frame 2 = 20 ms
3 = 30 ms
4 = 40 ms
35 G.722 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms 30
(min)
36 G.722 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms 60
(average)
37 G.722 Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms 120
(max)
38 RTP Filter 0 = Disable To avoid incorrect voice pass connection, 1
1 = Enable this Program checks the sending side ad-
dress from received RTP packet at
VoIPDB.
39 DTMF Level Mode 0 = VoIPU default value Used only by VoIPDB. 0
1 = Main soft value
40 DTMF Level High 0 = Disable Used only by VoIPDB. 28
1 = -33 dBm
:
28 = -6 dBm
41 DTMF Level Low 0 = Disable Used only by VoIPDB. 28
1 = -33 dBm
:
28 = -6 dBm

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2-499

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the basic CODEC
options for SIP trunks.

84 Input Data

Profile 1~2
(V5.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Number of G.711 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G711 Audio 2
Audio Frame 2 = 20 ms Frames. When the voice is encoded
3 = 30 ms using the PCM (Pulse Code Modu-
4 = 40 ms lation) method, a unit is a frame of
10ms.
02 G.711 Silence 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence 0
Detection (VAD) 1 = Enable with G.711. When there is silence,
Mode the RTP packet is not sent.
03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law Set the type of G.711. 1
1 = μ-law
04 G.711 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G.711 20
fer - Minimum Jitter Buffer.
05 G.711 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average value of the G.711 40
fer - Minimum Jitter Buffer.
06 G.711 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum value of the G.711 80
fer - Maximum Jitter Buffer.
07 G.729 Audio 1~6 Maximum number of G729 Audio 2
Frame (1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms, Frames. G.729 assumes the audio
etc.) signal made by a specimen by 8
kHz and the frame of 10 ms is as-
sumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by the
encoding compressed method.
08 G.729 Silence 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence 0
Compression 1 = Enable with G.729. When there is silence,
(VAD) Mode the RTP packet is not sent.
09 G.729 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 300 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 20
fer - Minimum Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between pack-
ets arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.
10 G.729 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 300 ms Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. 40
fer - Standard
11 G.729 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buf- 80
fer - Maximum fer.
12 Number of G.723 1 = 30 msec Maximum number of the G.723 Au- 1
Audio Frame 2 = 60 msec dio Frame.

2-500 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
14 G.723 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 300 ms Set the minimum value of the G.723 30
fer - Minimum Jitter Buffer.
15 G.723 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 300 ms Set the average value of the G.723 60
fer - Standard Jitter Buffer.
16 G.723 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum value of the G. 120
fer - Maximum 723 Jitter Buffer.
17 Jitter Buffer 1 = static Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 3
Mode 3 = adaptive immedi- 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for
ately the codec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range
for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range Program
for the codec is used and adjusts at
any time, regardless of silence.
18 Silence Com-
pression (VAD)
Threshold
1 ~ 30
(self-adjustment and -
19 dB ~ + 10dB)
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm)
Set the voice level judged to be si-
lence. Change value based .30
This entry is ignored if silence com-
pression is disabled in 84-01-03 with
20
84
: G.711 or 84-01-06 with G.729.
20 = 0dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10dBm (- 20 dBm)
28 Priority Codec 0 = G.711 PT The option selected here deter- 0
Setting 1 = G.723 PT mines what other codec options are
2 = G.729 PT applied by priority.
3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT
5 = iLBC PT
6 = G.711 Only (V1.5
Added)
7 = G.729 Only (V1.5
Added)
30 EchoAuto Gain 0~5 Define the Auto Gain Control. 0
Control
31 DTMF Payload 96 ~ 127 Define the DTMF Payload Number. 110
Number
32 DTMF Relay 0 = Disable Determine the DTMF setup. 0
Mode 1 = RFC2833
33 G.722 Audio 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G.722 Audio 3
Frame 2 = 20 ms Frames. G.722 assumes the audio
3 = 30 ms signal made by a specimen by 16
4 = 40 ms kHz and the frame of 10 ms is as-
sumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by the
encoding compressed method.
35 G.722 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 30
fer - Minimum Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between pack-
ets arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.
36 G.722 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer. 60
fer - Standard
37 G.722 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buf- 120
fer - Maximum fer.
38 G.726 Audio 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G.726 Audio 3
Frame 2 = 20 ms Frames. G.726 assumes the audio
3 = 30 ms signal made by a specimen by 16
4 = 40 ms kHz and the frame of 10 ms is as-
sumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by the
encoding compressed method.

Programming Manual 2-501

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
39 G.726 Silence 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence 0
Compression 1 = Enable with G.726. When there is silence,
Mode the RTP packet is not sent.
40 G.726 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter 30
fer - Minimum Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between pack-
ets arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.
41 G.726 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer. 60
fer - Standard
42 G.726 Jitter Buf- 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buf- 120
Program fer - Maximum fer.
43 iLBC Audio 2 = 20 ms Maximum number of iLBC Audio 3
Frame 3 = 30 ms Frames. iLBC assumes the frame of

84 45
4 = 40 ms
iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms
- Minimum
10 ms is a unit.
Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the var-
30

iation in the time between packets

arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.
46 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer. 60
- Standard
47 iLBC Jitter Buffer 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer. 120
- Maximum
48 ILBC Payload 96 ~ 127 The payload number of iLBC is set. 98
Number However, the same number as Item
31 cannot be set.
49 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
50 Fax Relay mode 0 = Disable Set the FAX Relay Mode. 0
1 = T.38 (V4.0
Changed) 2:Path Through Mode has more
2 = Path Through (V4.0 detail setting at PRG 84-32
Added) (V4.0 Added)

51 T.38 Protocol 0 = R/U (V1.5 1

mode Changed)
1 = U/R (V1.5
Changed)
2 = RTP (V1.5
Changed)
3 = UDPTL (V1.5
Changed)
52 Fax Max Rate 1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps 5
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5 = V.17, 14400 bps
56 Low Speed Data 0~2 0
Redundancy
57 High Speed Data 0~2 0
Redundancy
58 TCF Handling 0 = Local 1
1 = Network
61 T.38 RTP Format 96 ~ 127 100
Payload Number
62 DTMF Level 0 = VoIPDB Unit 0
mode 1 = Main Soft
63 DTMF Level High 1 = - 33 dBm 28
:
28 = - 6 dBm

2-502 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
64 DTMF Level Low 1 = - 33 dBm 28
:
28 = - 6 dBm
65 VAD Negotiation 0 = Disable This PRG is used to determine the 0
on SDP (Future) 1 = Enable VAD determination method setting
(V2.0 Added) VAD information on SDP.
This PRG is effective when VAD is
enabled on each codec.
G.711 and G.729 are targets at
this time.
66 Voice Band Data 0 = Disable This PRG is used for setting VBD to 0 15-03-03
(VBD) (Future) 1 = Enable is "Enable/Disable". Program
(V2.0 Added) This PRG is necessary to set the 1:
Special in PRG15-03-03 for target

84
terminal.
67 VBD Payload 96 ~ 127 This PRG is specifies the Payload 97 15-03-03
Type (Future) Type number used by VBD.
(V2.0 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-503

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup for SIP trunks.

Input Data
84 Profile
(V5.0 Added)
1~2

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 INVITE ReTx Count 0 ~ 255 7
Specifies the number of
times the INVITE mes-
sage is sent.
02 Request ReTx Count 0 ~ 255 11
Specifies the number of
times Request mes-
sage except INVITE
are sent.
03 Response ReTx 0 ~ 255 7
Count
Specifies the number of
times the Response
message is sent.
04 Request ReTx Start 0 ~ 65535 5 (500 ms)
Time (0 ms ~ 6553.5 seconds)
(Use Profile 1 Only)
(V5.0 Added)
05 Request Maximum 0 ~ 65535 40 (4000 ms)
ReTx Interval (0 ms ~ 6553.5 seconds)
(Use Profile 1 Only)
(V5.0 Added)
06 SIP Trunk Port Num- 1 ~ 65535 5060 (Profile1)
ber (V5.0 Changed)
5062 (Profile2)
(V5.0 Added)
07 Session Timer Value 0 ~ 65535 0
08 Minimum Session 0 ~ 65535 1800
Timer Value
09 Called Party Informa- 0 = Request URI 0
tion 1 = To Header
10 URL Type 0 = SIP-URL 0
1 = TEL-URL
11 URL/To HeaderSetting 0 = Proxy Server Do- 0
Information main
1 = SIP UA Domain

2-504 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
13 SIP Trunk Incoming/ 0 = Off 0
Outgoing via 1 = Mode 1 (V3.0
E164SIP_URI (V1.5 Changed)
Added) 2 = Mode 2 (V3.0
Changed)
3 = Mode 3 (V3.0 Add-
ed)
15 100rel Settings (V1.5 0 = Use default Settings 0
Added) 1 = Use opposite Default
Setting
16 SIP Trunk SIP-URI E. 0 = OFF 0
164 Incoming Mode 1 = Mode 1 Program
(V2.0 Added) 2 = Mode 2
17 Call Forward Moved 0 = Disabled When enabled a 302 Moved temporarily 0

84
Temporarily Support 1 = 302 Return response is sent for external call forward
(V3.0 Added) destinations.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-505

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-15 : SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-15 : SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive Configuration of the SIP
phone.

84 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Registration Informa- 0 = Disable When set to 1 (Enable), the registration in- 0
tion Automatic Dele- 1 = Enable formation is automatically deleted (for H.
tion 323).
02 Keep Alive Message 1 ~ 10 minutes Time interval that system sends a Ping to 1
Interval the terminal.
03 Keep Alive Message 1 ~ 10 seconds Time that system waits for a Ping re- 5
Timeout sponse from the terminal.
04 Keep Alive Timeout 1 ~ 5 times How many times the system waits for a 3
non response before determining the ter-
minal is down.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-506 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-16 : VoIPDB Limiter Control Gain Setup to set the Limiter Control Gain Program
configuration of VoIPDB.

Input Data
84
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 RX Limiter Control 0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 Gain setting to control limiter in the direc- 15 (0 dBm)
Gain dBm) tion of IP PCM.
0 = - 15 dBm This option adds gain to the voice input
1 = - 14 dBm from the LAN and removes it from the
: voice output to highway.
15 = 0 dBm
:
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
02 TX Limiter Control 0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 Gain setting to control limiter in the direc- 15 (0 dBm)
Gain dBm) tion of PCM IP.
0 = - 15 dBm This option adds the gain to the voice input
1 = - 14 dBm from highway and removes it from the
: voice output to the LAN.
15 = 0 dBm
:
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
03 RX Limiter Control 0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 This option controls the limiter gain for a 15 (0 dBm)
Gain (COIU) dBm) COIU call in the IP to PCM direction.
0 = - 15 dBm
1 = - 14 dBm
:
15 = 0 dBm
:
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm
04 TX Limiter Control 0 ~ 30 (- 15 dBm ~ + 15 This option controls the limiter gain for a 15 (0 dBm)
Gain (COIU) dBm) COIU call in the PCM to IP direction.
0 = - 15 dBm
1 = - 14 dBm
:
15 = 0 dBm
:
29 = 14 dBm
30 = 15 dBm

Conditions

None

Programming Manual 2-507

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

84

2-508 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the CODEC Program
information for the SIP extensions.

Input Data
84
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Number of G.711 Au- 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames. 2
dio Frame 2 = 20 ms When the voice is encoded using the PCM
3 = 30 ms (Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is
4 = 40 ms a frame of 10ms.
02 G.711 Silence Detec- 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0
tion (VAD) Mode 1 = Enable G.711. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law Set the type of G.711. 1
1 = μ-law
04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter 20
Minimum Buffer.
05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter 40
Standard Buffer.
06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter 80
Maximum Buffer.
07 G.729 Audio Frame 1~6 Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames. 2
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20ms, G.729 assumes the audio signal made by
etc.) a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10
ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
08 G.729 Silence Com- 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0
pression (VAD) Mode 1 = Enable G.729. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 20
Minimum of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the buf-
fer allows this variation to be absorbed.
10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. 40
Standard
11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer. 80
Maximum
12 Number of G.723 Au- 1 = 30 msec Maximum number of the G.723 Audio 1
dio Frame 2 = 60 msec Frame.
14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter 30
Minimum Buffer.
15 G.723 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the average value of the G.723 Jitter 60
Standard Buffer.

Programming Manual 2-509

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
16 G.723 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum value of the G.723 Jitter 120
Maximum Buffer.
17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 3
3 = adaptive immediately 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the co-
dec.
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used and adjust at any time, re-
gardless of silence.
18 Silence Compression 1 ~ 30 Set the voice level judged to be silence. 20
Program (VAD) Threshold (self-adjustment and - 19 Change value based .30
dB ~ + 10 dB) This entry is ignored if silence compres-
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm) sion is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711 or
: 84-01-06 with G.729.

84
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10 dBm (- 20 dBm)
28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G.711 PT The option selected here determines what 0
1 = G.723 PT other codec options are applied by priority.
2 = G.729 PT For the system to utilize the G.723 or iLBC
3 = G.722 Codecs, program 84-27-02 must be set to
4 = G.726 G.723/iLBC.
5 = iLBC
30 EchoAuto Gain Con- 0~5 Define the Auto Gain Control. 0
trol
31 DTMF Payload Num- 96 ~ 127 Define the DTMF Payload Number. 96
ber
32 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable Determine the DTMF setup used between 0
1 = RFC2833 the SIP extensions. It is effective when a
terminal call is made through the VoIPDB.
33 G.722 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. 3
2 = 20 ms G.722 assumes the audio signal made by
3 = 30 ms a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10
4 = 40 ms ms is assumed to be a unit to 64 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
35 G.722 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30
Minimum of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the buf-
fer allows this variation to be absorbed.
36 G.722 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer. 60
Standard
37 G.722 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer. 120
Maximum
38 G.726 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G.726 Audio Frames. 3
2 = 20 ms G.726 assumes the audio signal made by
3 = 30 ms a specimen by 16 kHz and the frame of 10
4 = 40 ms ms is assumed to be a unit to 32 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
39 G.726 Silence Com- 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0
pression (VAD) Mode 1 = Enable G.726. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
40 G.726 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30
Minimum of G.726 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the buf-
fer allows this variation to be absorbed.
41 G.726 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer. 60
Standard

2-510 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
42 G.726 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer. 120
Maximum
43 iLBC Audio Frame 2 = 20 ms Maximum number of iLBC Audio Frames. 3
3 = 30 ms iLBC assumes the frame of 10ms is a unit.
4 = 40 ms
45 iLBC Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30
Minimum of iLBC is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the buf-
fer allows this variation to be absorbed.
46 iLBC Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer. 60
Standard
Program
47 iLBC Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer. 120
Maximum

84
48 ILBC payload number 96 ~ 127 The payload number of iLBC is set. How- 98
ever, the same number as Item 31 cannot
be set.
49 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1
1 = Enable
50 Fax Relay mode 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
51 T.38 Protocol mode 0 = R/U (V1.5 Changed) 1
1 = U/R (V1.5 Changed)
2 = RTP (V1.5 Changed)
3 = UDPTL (V1.5
Changed)
52 Fax Max Rate 1 = V.27ter, 4800 bps 5
3 = V.29, 9600 bps
5 = V.17, 14400 bps
56 Low Speed Data Re- 0~2 0
dundancy
57 High Speed Data Re- 0~2 0
dundancy
58 TCF Handling 0 = Local 1
1= Network
61 T.38 RTP Format Pay- 96 ~ 127 100
load Number
62 DTMF Level mode 0 = VoIPDB Unit 0
1 = Main Soft
63 DTMF Level High 1 = - 33 dBm 28
:
28 = - 6 dBm
64 DTMF Level Low 1 = - 33 dBm 28
:
28 = - 6 dBm

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-511

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy information, session
timers, called party information and expire value of invite.

84 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Registrar/Proxy Port 1 ~ 65535 5070
02 Session Timer Value 0 ~ 65535 180 seconds
03 Minimum Session 0 ~ 65535 180 seconds
Timer Value
04 Called Party Info 0 = Request URI 0
1 = To Header
05 Expire Value of Invite 0 ~ 256 seconds Arrival of a message is ended when this 180 seconds
time expires and there is no cut from the
caller.
06 Expire Value of Invite 1 ~ 3600 seconds The expiration time is set for the Invite 180 seconds
(send) message.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-512 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 84-22 : DR700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DR700 Multiline logon Program
information.

Input Data

Personal ID Index 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed)

84
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 User ID Up to 32 characters Input the User ID when using manual or No Setting
auto registration (10-46-01).
02 Password Up to 16 characters Input the Password when using manual or No Setting
auto registration (10-46-01).
Web pro indicates password as * mark.
(V3.0 Added)
03 User ID Omission 0 = Off Input the Personal ID from terminal auto- 0
1 = On matically when log on again.
04 Log Off 0 = Off Input the Personal ID from terminal auto- 1
1 = On matically when log on again.
05 Nick Name Up to 32 characters Input the Personal ID from terminal auto- No Setting
matically when log on again.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-513

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-23 : DR700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic information for the
DR700 Multiline Terminal.

84 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Registration Expire 60 ~ 65535 seconds The Expires value of the REGISTER mes- 180 seconds
Timer sage which received from DR700 terminal
is out of range or when the Expire value is
not set up, in case it assigns the effective
time to the DR700 terminal. The timer for
supervising whether DR700 terminal is
connected or not.
02 Subscribe Expire Tim- 60 ~ 65535 seconds The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and 3600 seconds
er receive the terminal operation instructions
between the Main Device and DR700 ter-
minal.
03 Session Expire Timer 60 ~ 65535 seconds Set effective time for supervising the Voice 180 seconds
Path.
04 Minimum Session Ex- 60 ~ 65535 seconds Set minimum value of effective time for su- 180 seconds
pire Timer pervising the Voice Path.
05 Invite Expire Timer 60 ~ 65535 seconds Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing 180 seconds
call when the Expire value is not set in the
INVITE message received from DR700
terminal.
06 Signal Type of Serv- 0x00 ~ 0xFF Set Type of Service value which applied to 00
ice (0 ~ 9, A ~ F) send SIP Message Packet from DR700
terminal to Main Device.
07 Error Display Timer 0 ~ 65535 seconds 0
08 Digest Authorization 0 ~ 4294967295 sec- 0
Registration Expire onds
Timer
09 Temporally Password Read Only: None
(V3.5 Deleted) Maximum 16 characters
(0 ~ 9, a ~ f, A ~ F)
10 Number of Password 0 ~ 255 Input the number of times an incorrect 0
Retries (0 = No Limit) password can be entered when the securi-
ty key is pressed.
11 Password Lock Time 0 ~ 120 0
(0 = No Limit)
12 Reference Number Up to 32 digits No Setting
(0 ~ 9, *, #, P, R, @)
13 Media Type of Service 0x00 ~ 0xFF 00
(0 ~ 9, A ~ F)

2-514 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
14 Refer Expire Timer 0 ~ 65535 seconds 60 seconds

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference Program

None

84

Programming Manual 2-515

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-24 : DR700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the codec of each
type of DR700 Multiline Telephone.

84 Input Data

Type 1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Number of G.711 Au- 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames. 2
dio Frame 2 = 20 ms When the voice is encoded using the PCM
3 = 30 ms (Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is
4 = 40 ms a frame of 10ms.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone
communicates to a TDM device it will al-
ways use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms
or 40 ms.
02 G.711 Silence Detec- 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0
tion (VAD) Mode 1 = Enable G.711. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop
sending silence packets but the IP phone
will continue to transmit silence packets.
03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law Set the type of G.711. 1
1 = μ-law
04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter 20
Minimum Buffer.
05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter 40
Standard Buffer.
06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter 80
Maximum Buffer.
07 G.729 Audio Frame 1~4 Maximum number of G.729 Audio Frames. 2
(1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms, G.729 assumes the audio signal made by
etc.) a specimen by 8 kHz and the frame of 10
ms is assumed to be a unit to 8 kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone
communicates to a TDM device it will al-
ways use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms
or 40 ms.

2-516 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
08 G.729 Silence Com- 0 = Disable Select whether to compress silence with 0
pression (VAD) Mode 1 = Enable G.729. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.
When VAD is enabled the CPU will stop
sending silence packets but the IP phone
will continue to transmit silence packets.
09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 20
Minimum of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the buf-
fer allows this variation to be absorbed.
10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer. 40
Standard Program
11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 300 ms Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer. 80
Maximum
17 Jitter Buffer Mode Set 1 = static 1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the co-
the mode of the Jitter 3 = adaptive immediately dec.
Buffer. 2 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used.
3
84
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used and adjust at any time, re-
gardless of silence.
18 Silence Compression 1 ~ 30 Set the voice level judged to be silence. 20
(VAD) Threshold (self-adjustment and - 19 Change value based .30
dB ~ + 10dB) This entry is ignored if silence compres-
1 = - 19 dB (- 49 dBm) sion is disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711, or
: 84-01-06 with G.729.
20 = 0 dB (- 30 dBm)
:
29 = 9 dBm (- 21 dBm)
30 = 10dBm (- 20dBm)
28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT The option selected here determines what 0
2 = G729 PT other codec options are applied by priority.
3 = G.722 PT
30 EchoAuto Gain Con- 0~5 Define the Auto Gain Control. 0
trol
31 DTMF Payload Num- 96 ~ 127 96
ber
32 G.722 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. 3
2 = 20 ms G.722 assumes the audio signal made by
3 = 30 ms a specimen by 16kHz and the frame of
4 = 40 ms 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by
the encoding compressed method.
The Audio frame size setting is only from
IP phone to IP phone. When the IP phone
communicates to a TDM device it will al-
ways use a 20 ms frame size.
Softphone (SP310) only supports 20 ms.

34 G.722 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer 30
Minimum of G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the buf-
fer allows this variation to be absorbed.
35 G.722 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer. 60
Standard
36 G.722 Jitter Buffer - 0 ~ 255 ms Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer. 120
Maximum
37 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1
1 = Enable

Programming Manual 2-517

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
38 DTMF Level mode 0 = Use the Default of 0
VoIPDB Unit
1 = Use the Main Sys-
tem
39 DTMF Level High 1 = - 33 dBm 28
:
28 = - 6 dBm
40 DTMF Level Low 1 = - 33 dBm 28
:
28 = - 6 dBm

Program

Conditions

84 None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-518 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup (DSP)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-26 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the IP address and the port of VoIP. Program

Input Data

Slot Number 0
84
VoIPDB GW Number
1
GW Number will not be shown in Telephone Programming mode.

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 172.16.0.20 ~
02 RTP Port Number 0 ~ 65534 VoIP GW １ =
10020~10051
03 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 VoIPDB GW1 = 10021

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-519

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-27 : VoIP Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode of the VoIPDB.

Input Data
84 Slot Number 0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 DTMF Relay Setup 0 = DTMF Relay disa- 2
bled
1 = In-Band DTMF Relay
- Do not report to host
processor
2 = Out Band Relay - Do
not pass tones as voice
02 Setup CODEC Mode 0 = Default Default means the system uses another 0
1 = Mode 1 (G.723/ CODEC except G.723.
iLBC) Mode 1 means the system uses all CO-
DECs, but the limitation of the total num-
ber of available DSP will be applied.
03 SRTP Mode Setup 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable
04 SRTP Mode Select 0 = Mode1 0
06 H.245 Port Number 0 ~ 65535 10100
07 Preparation Comple- 0 ~ 65535 4000
tion Response Port
Number
08 DTMF Duration 0 = Use RFC2833 0
25 ~ 2000 ms
09 DTMF Pause 0 = Use RFC2833 0
25 ~ 2000 ms
10 DTMF Twist Positive 0 ~ 24 dB 5
Level
11 DTMF Twist Negative 0 ~ 24 dB 0
Level
12 DTMF Duration 30 ~ 2000 ms 100
13 DTMF Level 1 ~ 61 (- 36 dB ~ + 24 25 (- 12 dB)
dB
1 = - 36 dB
2 = - 35 dB
:
37 = 0 dB
:
60 = 23 dB
61 = 24 dB

2-520 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
14 ICMP REDIRECT 0 = Enabled, Voice pack- 1
ets will follow ICMP redi-
rect messages.
1 = Disabled, Voice
packets will NOT follow
the ICMP redirect mes-
sage.
15 DTMF Detect Mini- 23 ~ 2000 ms This setting is the minimal time setting to 30
mum Duration distinguish DTMF tones for the IPLB. If the
signal is shorter than the value set, the sig-
nal is deemed not a DTMF.
16 DTMF Detect Mini- 0: -40dbm This setting is the minimal level setting to 2 (-38dbm) Program
mum Level 1: -39dbm distinguish DTMF tones. If the signal is
2: -38dbm shorter than the value set, the signal is
: deemed not a DTMF.

84
31: -9dbm
17 DTMF Detect Mini- 0: -9db This is a frequency ratio setting of the 6 (-3db)
mum S/N Ratio 1: -8db DTMF for the frequency other than the
: DTMF tone. When this value comes to
6: -3db 0db, the DTMF is distinguished only when
7: -2db the signal level except DTMF is low. In
8: -1db case of wrong DTMF detection by a per-
9: 0db son’s voice, there is the possibility that the
level except DTMF is large. The system
will be able to protect a wrong DTMF de-
tection by choosing 0db value or so.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-521

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-28 : DR700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware name to download
for the IP Phone.

84 Input Data

1 ~ 3 = Not used
Terminal Type
4 = IP4WW-24TIXH

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Firmware Directory Maximum 64 characters No Setting
02 Firmware File Name Maximum 30 characters No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-522 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the CODEC data of Program
the SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast.

Input Data

1 = Type 1 (Multicast)
84
2 = Type 2 (reserved)
Type 3 = Type 3 (reserved)
4 = Type 4 (reserved)
5 = Type 5 (reserved)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Audio Capability 1 = G.711 A-law 2
2 = G.711 μ-law
3 = G.729
5 = G.722
02 Number of Audio Frames 1 ~ 4 (V2.0 Changed) 2
1 = 10 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
2 = 20 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
3 = 30 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
4 = 40 ms (G.711 / G.722 / G.729)
5 = 50 ms (G.729) (V2.0 Deleted)
6 = 60 ms (G.729) (V2.0 Deleted)
03 RTP Filter 0 = Disable 1
1 = Enable

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-523

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 84-31 : VoIPDB Echo Canceller Setup to sets VoIPDB echo canceller value.

Input Data
84 Type 1 = H.323 Trunk
2 ~ 6 = Not Used (V1.5 Changed)
7 = Networking (V1.5 Changed)
8 = SIP Trunk Profile 1 (V5.0 Changed)
9 = SIP Extension
10 = Not used
11 = DR700 Type 1
12 = DR700 Type 2
13 = DR700 Type 3
14 = DR700 Type 4
15 = DR700 Type 5
16 = Not used
17 = Reserved (IPG) (V5.0 Added)
18 = SIP Trunk Profile 2 (V5.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 TDM Echo Can- 0 = Disable Select echo Canceler on/off at re- 1
celler mode 1 = Enable ceiving (TDM) side. (V5.0 Added)
02 TDM Echo Can- 0 = Disable Select Echo Compression Mode for 1
celler NLP 1 = Enable remaining echo. Effective when
mode(2W) 2 = Echo Path Mode PRG 84-31-01 = 1 (V5.0 Added)
3 = Echo Path Auto De-
tect Mode
03 TDM Echo Can- 0 = Disable Normally not used. Select comfort 1 84-31-01
celler Com- 1 = Enable noise as background noise. (V5.0
fortNoise mode Changed)
(V2.0 Added) Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
04 TDM Echo Can- 0 ~ 15 12
celler NLP
Threshold
05 TDM Echo Can- 0 ~ 89 (0 ms ~ 890 ms) Normally not used. (V5.0 Changed) 0 84-31-01
celler Tail Dis- Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
placement (V2.0
Added)
06 TDM Echo can- 1 = 32 ms Normally not used. (V5.0 Changed) 7 84-31-01
celler tail length 2 = 48 ms Select length of echo. Effective
(V2.0 Added) 3 = 64 ms when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
4 = 80 ms
5 = 96 ms
6 = 112 ms
7 = 128 ms

2-524 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
07 TDM Echo Can- 0 ~ 6 (- 9 dB ~ + 9 dB) Normally not used. (V5.0 Changed) 5 84-31-01
celler Default 0 = - 9 dB Select length of echo. Effective
ERL Level (V2.0 1 = - 6 dB when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
Added) 2 = - 3 dB
:
5 = 6 dB
6 = 9 dB
08 TDM Echo Can- 1 = Line Echo Cancel- Select echo canceller type: 1
celler Echo Type ler 1: Based upon ITU-T G.168
(V5.0 Added) 2 = Acoustic Echo Can- 2: Based upon ITU-T G.167
celler Effective when PRG 84-31-01 = 1
09 TDM Max ERLE 0 ~ 10 (24 dB ~ 54 dB) 2 (30 dB) Program
(V5.0 Added) 0 = 24 dB
1 = 27 dB
:

84
9 = 51 dB
10 = 54 dB
10 TDM TX Level 0 = Disable Select transmit level control mode. 3
Control (V5.0 1 = TX Control Mode
Added) 2 = TX Automatic Level
Control Mode
3 = TX HLC (high Lev-
el)
11 TDM TX Voice 0 ~ 16 (-24 dB ~ +24 Effective when PRG 84-31-10 = 1 8
Level Control dB)
Mode (V5.0 Add- 0 = -24 dB
ed) 1 = -21 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
:
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
12 TDM TX Auto- 0 ~ 12 (-42 dBm ~ -6 Normally not used. Select target 7
matic Level Con- dBm) gain. Effective when PRG 84-31-10
trol Level (V5.0 0 = -42 dBm =2
Added) 1 = -39 dBm
:
7 = -21 dBm
:
11 = -9 dBm
12 = -6 dBm
13 TDM TX HLC 0 ~ 42 (-42 dBm ~ 0 Select HLC threshold level. 41
Threshold (V5.0 dBm) Effective when PRG 84-31-10 = 3
Added) 0 = -42 dBm
1 = -41 dBm
:
41 = -1 dBm
42 = 0 dBm
14 TDM TX Gain 0 = Disable Transmit Gain Compression on or 1
Compression 1 = Enable off. Effective when PRG 84-31-10 =
Mode (V5.0 Add- 3
ed)
15 TDM TX Gain 0 ~ 42 (-42 dBm ~ 0 Transmit Gain Compression thresh- 41
Compression dBm) old. Effective when PRG 84-31-14 =
Threshold (V5.0 0 = -42 dBm 1
Added) 1 = -41 dBm
:
41 = -1 dBm
42 = 0 dBm
16 TDM RX Level 0 = Disable Normally not used. Select receive 0
Control (V5.0 1 = RX Level Control level control mode.
Added) Mode
2 = RX Automatic Level
Control Flag

Programming Manual 2-525

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
17 TDM RX Level 0 ~ 16 (-24 dB ~ +24 Normally not used. Select receive 8
Control Level dB) voice level. Effective when PRG
(V5.0 Added) 0 = -24 dB 84-31-16 = 1
1 = -21 dB
:
8 = 0 dB
:
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB
18 TDM RX Auto- 0 ~ 12 (-42 dBm ~ -6 Normally not used. Select target 7
matic Level Con- dBm) gain. Effective when PRG 84-31-16
trol Level (V5.0 0 = -42 dBm =2
Program Added) 1 = -39 dBm
:
7 = -21 dBm
:

84 19 RTP Echo Can-

11 = -9 dBm
12 = -6 dBm
0 = Disable 0
celler mode 1 = Enable
20 RTP Echo Can- 0 = Disable 0
celler NLP mode 1 = Enable
21 RTP Echo Can- 0 = Disable Do not change the setting unless 1 84-31-19
celler Com- 1 = Enable asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
fortNoise mode Deleted)
(V2.0 Added) Select comfort noise as background
noise on or off. (V5.0 Deleted)
Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
(V5.0 Deleted)
22 RTP Echo Can- 0 ~ 15 12
celler NLP
Threshold
23 RTP Echo Can- 0 ~ 89 (0 ms ~ 890 ms) Do not change the setting unless 0 84-31-19
celler Tail Dis- asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
placement (V2.0 Deleted)
Added) Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
(V5.0 Deleted)
24 RTP Echo Can- 1 = 32 ms Do not change the setting unless 7 84-31-19
celler Tail Length 2 = 48 ms asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
(V2.0 Added) 3 = 64 ms Deleted)
4 = 80 ms Select length of echo. (V5.0 De-
5 = 96 ms leted)
6 = 112 ms Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
7 = 128 ms (V5.0 Deleted)
25 RTP Echo Can- 0 ~ 6 (- 9 dB ~ + 9 dB) Do not change the setting unless 5 84-31-19
celler Default 0 = - 9 dB asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
ERL Level (V2.0 1 = - 6 dB Deleted)
Added) 2 = - 3 dB Select length of echo. (V5.0 De-
: leted)
5 = 6 dB Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
6 = 9 dB (V5.0 Deleted)
26 RTP Echo Can- 0 = Disable Select echo canceler type: (V5.0 0
celler Echo Type 1 = Line Echo Cancel- Added)
ler 1: Based upon ITU-T G.168 (V5.0
2 = Acoustic Echo Can- Added)
celler 2: Based upon ITU-T G.167 (V5.0
Added)
27 RTP Max ERLE 0 ~ 10 (24 dB ~ 54 dB) Do not change the setting unless 2 84-31-19
(V2.0 Added) 0 = 24 dB asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
1 = 27 dB Deleted)
: Select maximum echo return loss
9 = 51 dB level. (V5.0 Deleted)
10 = 54 dB Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
(V5.0 Deleted)

2-526 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
28 RTP Tx Level 0 = Disable Type 1, Type 7 ~
Control 1 = Tx Level Control 8 = 3 (V1.5
mode (V5.0 Changed) Changed)
2 = Tx Automatic Level Type 9, 11~15 =
Control mode (V5.0 0
Changed) Type 18 = 3
3 = HLC (V5.0 Added)
29 RTP Tx Level 0 ~ 16 (- 24 ~ 24 dB) 8
Control Level 0 = - 24 dB
1 = - 21 dB
2 = - 18 dB
:
8 = 0 dB Program
:
14 = 18 dB
15 = 21 dB

30 RTP Tx Automa-
ticLevelControl
16 = 24 dB
0 ~ 12 (- 42 dbm ~ - 6
dbm)
Do not change the setting unless
asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
7 84-31-28 84
Level (V2.0 Add- 0 = - 42 dBm Deleted)
ed) 1 = - 39 dBm Select target gain. (V5.0 Deleted)
: Effective when PRG 84-31-28 = 2
7 = - 21 dBm (V5.0 Deleted)
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
31 RTP Tx HLC 0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 Type 1, Type 7 ~
Threshold dBm) 8 = 36 (V1.5
0 = - 42 dBm Changed)
1 = - 41 dBm Type 9, 11~15 =
: 42
42 = 0 dBm Type 18 = 36
(V5.0 Added)
32 RTP Tx Gain 0 = Disable Type 1, Type 7 ~
Compression 1 = Enable 8 = 1 (V1.5
mode Changed)
Type 9, 11~15 =
0
Type 18 = 1
(V5.0 Added)
33 RTP Tx Gain 0 ~ 42 (- 42 dBm ~ 0 Type 1, Type 7 ~
Compression dBm) 8 = 36 (V1.5
Threshold 0 = - 42 dBm Changed)
1 = - 41 dBm Type 9, 11~15 =
: 42
42 = 0 dBm Type 18 = 36
(V5.0 Added)
34 RTP Rx Level 0 = Disable Do not change the setting unless 0
Control (V2.0 1 = RX Level Control asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
Added) Mode Deleted)
2 = RX Automatic Level Select receive level control mode.
Control (V5.0 Deleted)
Flag
35 RTP Rx Level- 0 ~ 16 (- 24 dB ~ + 24 Do not change the setting unless 8 84-31-34
Control Level dB) asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
(V2.0 Added) 0 = - 24 dB Deleted)
1 = - 21 dB Select receive voice level. (V5.0 De-
: leted)
8 = 0 dB Effective when PRG 84-31-34 = 1
: (V5.0 Deleted)
15 = 21 dB
16 = 24 dB

Programming Manual 2-527

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
36 RTP Rx Automa- 0 ~ 12 (- 42 dBm ~ - 6 Do not change the setting unless 7 84-31-34
ticLevelControl dBm) asked to change by engineer. (V5.0
Level (V2.0 Add- 0 = - 42 dBm Deleted)
ed) 1 = - 39 dBm Select target gain. (V5.0 Deleted)
: Effective when PRG 84-31-34 = 2
7 = - 21 dBm (V5.0 Deleted)
:
11 = - 9 dBm
12 = - 6 dBm
37 TDM Echo Can- 0 = Disable Select Echo Compression Mode for 1
celler NLP mode 1 = Enable remaining echo. (V5.0 Added)
(4W) 2 = Echo Path Mode Effective when PRG 84-31-19 = 1
Program 3 = Echo Path Auto De- (V5.0 Added)
tect Mode

84 Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-528 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-32 : FAX Over IP CODEC Setup
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 84-32 : FAX Over IP CODEC Setup to program the CODECs used when faxing across
SIP Trunk. Note these settings must match in both systems for faxing across SIP Trunk to work.

Input Data
84
Type 1 = Reserved
(V5.0 Added) 2 = SIP Trunk Profile 1
3 = SIP Trunk Profile 2
4 = Reserved

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 FAX CODEC 1 = G.711 a-law Set up FAX over IP CODEC. 2
2 = G.711 u-law
3 = G.726
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0
Added)
When the G.711 a-
law is selected in
Item 01, it is possi-
ble to set "8".
When the G.711 u-
law is selected in
Item 01, it is possi-
ble to set "0".
When the G.726 u-
law is selected in
Item 01, it is possi-
ble to set "2". (V5.0
Added)
02 Payload Size 1 ~ 4 (10 ms base) Set up payload size when using SIP Trunk. 2
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0
Added)
03 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static Set up Jitter Buffer settings when using 1
2 = Self adjusting SIP Trunk.
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0
Added)
04 Jitter Buffer (min) 0 ~ 300 Set up minimum Jitter Buffer settings when 20
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0 using SIP Trunk.
Added)
05 Jitter Buffer (average) 0 ~ 300 Set up average Jitter Buffer settings when 40
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0 using SIP Trunk.
Added)
06 Jitter Buffer (max) 0 ~ 300 Set up maximum Jitter Buffer settings 80
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0 when using SIP Trunk.
Added)

Programming Manual 2-529

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
07 RTP Payload Type 0, 2, 8, 96 ~ 127 Set up RTP Payload type when settings 103
(SIP Profile:1-2) (V5.0 when using SIP Trunk.
Added) This setting should be used as default.
When the G.711 a-
law is selected in
Item 01, it is possi-
ble to set "8".
When the G.711 u-
law is selected in
Item 01, it is possi-
ble to set "0".
When the G.726 u-
Program law is selected in
Item 01, it is possi-
ble to set "2".

84 Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2-530 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIPDB

84-39 : SIP Trunk message customize
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Description Program
This program is not available for Web Programming or Telephone Programming. You can only change
setting using Script Function of PC Programming.

Use Program 84-39 : SIP Trunk message customize to check the Message customize. 84
Input Data

Profile 1~2
(V5.0 Added)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Option 1 0 ~ 255 0
: : : :
99 Option 99 0 ~ 255 0

There are Items from 01 to 99. This chart only shows the beginning and end but Default, Input Data they
are all same.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-531

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-01 : Installation Date
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the system.

Input Data
90 Item
No.
Item Input Data Default

01 Year 00 ~ 99 00 (No Setting)

02 Month 01 ~ 12 00 (No Setting)
03 Day 01 ~ 31 00 (No Setting)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-532 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For password Program
entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a:
• Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
• Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0 ~ 9, # and *)
• Password level 90
The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The SA or SB level
password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the
Description heading is the program access level. You can only use the program if your access level
meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB
programs, and SB level password can access to SB programs only.)

It is NOT recommended to change these data. If you must change these Data
make sure you keep the ID/Password or you will never be able to enter the
program unless you clear all the System Data/Setting.

Input Data

User Number 1~8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 User Name Maximum 10 characters Refer below
02 Password Up to eight digits Refer below
03 User Level 0 = Prohibited User Refer below
2 = IN (Installer Level)
3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming Administer Mode
Level 1)

Default

User No. User Name Password Level Level Description

1 necam ***** 1 (MF) Manufacture Level - Access to all system
program
2 sltech 12345678 2 (IN) Installer Level - Access to all IN level pro-
grams.
3 ADMIN1 0000 3 (SA) System Administrator Level 1 - Restricted
Access
4 ADMIN2 9999 4 (SB) System Administrator Level 2 - More Re-
stricted Access

Programming Manual 2-533

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

User No. User Name Password Level Level Description

5 USER1 1111 5 (UA) User Programming Administer Mode Lev-
el 1

Conditions

• More than one extension can be in the programming mode.

Feature Cross Reference

Program
None

90

2-534 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-03 : Save Data
Level:
SA

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the CF Card. This program should
be used after changing the programmed data.

Input Data
90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Save Data Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) -

Conditions

• Before Uploading Customer Database please make sure you reset the system either by using 90-08
or Power down/up the system.
• When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ-VM21 the system MUST be powered off. Never
install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-535

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-04 : Load Data
Level:
SA

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted CF Card into the PZ-VM21
Daughter Board installed to the system.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Load Data Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) -

Conditions

• After uploading the data the display will change to a next Program. Then make sure you EXIT the
Program order for upload to complete. Now some of the setting needs to have system reset order
for setting to be effective (example: IP Address, Line Key Assignment) so we Recommend to reset
the system.
• When installing a compact flash card onto the PZ-VM21 the system MUST be powered off. Never
install or uninstall the compact flash card while the system is under power.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-536 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-05 : Slot Control
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Program
Programming.

Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) units (slots 0 ~ 15 (V3.5 or higher)).

Delete allows you to completely uninstall the unit. You should do this if you want to remove a unit and
plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If a different type of interface unit is
90
being installed in a slot previously used, the slot should be deleted (option 1) first before installing the
new interface unit.

Reset allows you to send a reset code.

Input Data

1 = Delete
2 = Reset
Menu Number
3 = Set Busy Out
4 = Reset Busy Out

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Slot Control Slot Number 0 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed) -

Conditions

• When you delete or reset a unit, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05. When
reusing the slot for another unit, you must plug the unit in or reset the system before the system can
use the slot again.
• When you delete or reset a unit, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is set back to default.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-537

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-06 : Trunk Control
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a unit from
placing outgoing calls (just like placing the unit switch down). Once busied out, none of the ports on
the unit can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down.

90 Input Data

0 = Set Busy Out

Menu Number
1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Trunk Control Trunk Port Number : 1
001 ~ 084

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-538 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-07 : Station Control
Level:
SA

Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Program
Programming.

Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance.

Input Data
90
1 = Hardware Reset
Menu Number
2 = Software Reset

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Extension Control Extension Number (up to eight digits) -

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-539

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-08 : System Reset
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 System Reset Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold key only to can- -
cel.)

Conditions

• Some of changes made to a program may need to reset the system order for the change to be
effective.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-540 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for the system to Program
automatically reset.

Input Data
90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Month 00 ~ 12 00
If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the sys-
tem is automatically reset every month on the
predefined day.
02 Day 00 ~ 31 00
If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and
Minute) is set, the system automatically resets
every day at the predefined time.
03 Hour 00 ~ 23 00
04 Minute 00 ~ 59 00

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-541

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate
an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm information is
reported to the pre-defined destination.

90 Input Data

Alarm Number 001 ~ 100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Alarm Type 0 = Not Set -
1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm
02 Report 0 = Not Report (No autodial) -
1 = Report (autodial)

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm

Alarm Re- Content of Alarm

Type Name Cause Action Recovery
No. port Alarm Status
1 2 0 PKG Initi- 1. The PKG 1. PKG not inser- 1. Insert PKG During initiali- ERR
alize Er- failed to ini- ted firmly. firmly. zation, the REC
ror. tialize. 2. PKG was re- 2. Insert PKG PKG is rec-
2. The PKG moved, but firmly. ognized.
did not start not reinserted 3. Delete slot in-
normally. firmly. formation in
3. Old PKG data Program
still reported 90-05 and in-
due to no initi- sert the PKG
alization. again.
2 2 0 PKG The unit did not 1. The package 1. Please insert When unit is ERR
Mounting step on a regu- is not com- the package reconfirmed, REC
Error lar procedure pletely inser- firmly. the error is
and it was ted. 2. Please try recovered.
pulled out. 2. The package again after ini-
Or, it is not nor- is out of order. tializing the
mally inserted. system data
once when
LED doesn't
blink normally.
3. Exchange
packages.

2-542 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Alarm Re- Content of Alarm

Type Name Cause Action Recovery
No. port Alarm Status
3 2 0 Connec- The error occur- 1. The unit is not 1. Please insert When unit is ERR
tion fault red when com- completely in- the unit firmly. confirmed, REC
between municating with serted. 2. The power- the error is
CPU and the package. 2. The power- supply voltage recovered.
other When the pack- supply voltage must use an-
PKGs. age is broken, it of the system other power
recognizes it as is outside rat- supply when is
a communica- ings. in the range of
tion fault. 3. The equip- ratings or
ment that gen- measuring
erates the with the volt-
noise in the meter, and de-
same power viating from
supply system the rated Program
as the power range.
supply origin 3. Please use the

90
of the system power supply
is connected, besides the
and it malfunc- equipment
tions because with the possi-
of the power bility of the
supply noise. noise source.
4. The equip- 4. Please sepa-
ment to which rate as much
it is adjacent as possible
to of a main and use a
device, and main device
has put out from the
the radiation equipment by
noise exists, which you
and it malfunc- seem may
tions because generate the
of the radia- radiation
tion noise. noise.
5. The chassis is 5. Please ground
not properly the chassis
grounded. correctly.
4 2 0 PKG S/W The unit pro- 1. The package 1. Delete slot in- Please ex- ERR
Download gram could not software is not formation that change units, REC
Error be downloaded stored in the corresponds though it is
normally. downloaded by Program likely to re-
The unit could USB memory. 90-05-01 to store by
not able to be 2. The stored delete pack- mounting the
started normally. package soft- age informa- unit again.
ware is illegal. tion that was When the unit
Package infor- installed be- program is
mation that fore. normally
was installed 2. There is a downloaded,
before re- possibility that the error is
mains. the unit pro- recovered.
gram is broken
though an ex-
ternal factor of
the noise etc.
is thought.
3. Please load in-
to the USB
memory and
try again when
you back up
the unit pro-
gram.
4. Please Check
with maker on
uncertain
points.

Programming Manual 2-543

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Alarm Re- Content of Alarm

Type Name Cause Action Recovery
No. port Alarm Status
6 0 0 Blocking The link of ter- 1. Terminal Confirm the termi- The error is ERR
minals connec- Breakdown. nal connected with recovered REC
ted with the ESI 2. Faulty wiring same ESI. If they when con-
package came and wiring ter- work normally, con- necting or ex-
off. mination. firm the breakdown changing it.
3. External or the wiring for the
noise. terminal.
4. ESI package Exchange the ter-
Breakdown. minal that doesn't
work and the work-
ing terminal, and
confirm it’s work-
ing. An external
Program factor of the noise
etc. is thought.
Please reconfirm

90
wiring and the in-
stallation, etc.
Please inquire of
the manufacturer
when the problem
occurs after it con-
firms it.
8 1 0 RAM RAM backup Check the battery The error is ERR
Backup battery on the connector. If it is recovered REC
Battery CPU unit is un- connected correct- once the bat-
Error plugged or de- ly, replace the bat- tery is re-
fective. tery. placed.
10 0 0 ISDN Link Layer1 link of 1. Check Con- 1. Confirm the When the ERR
Error ISDN lines nection be- data of Pro- connection REC
came off. tween main gram 10-03. returns nor-
device and 2. Confirm wiring mally, the er-
ISDN line. and the instal- ror is recov-
2. DSU Break- lation of DSU. ered.
down. 3. Check with the
3. The setting of manufacturer
Program if the problem
10-03 does occurs again.
not corre-
spond to an
actual line.
11 0 0 CTI Link The link with the 1. LAN cable de- 1. Confirm the When the ERR
Error CTI server fective. CTI server, connection REC
came off. 2. Connected wiring, and the returns nor-
HUB broken. connection. mally, the er-
3. The CTI serv- 2. Check the ror is recov-
er doesn't manufacturer ered.
start normally. if the problem
occurs again.
14 0 0 LAN Link The link with 1. LAN cable de- Confirm the opera- When the ERR
Error LAN on CPU fective. tion of LAN con- connection REC
came off. 2. Connected nector, LAN cable, returns nor-
HUB broken. and HUB again. mally, the er-
3. Defective ror is recov-
CPU. ered.
15 0 0 Network 1. The net- 1. LAN cable is 1. Confirm that When the ERR
Keep work con- defective. the defect is connection REC
Alive nection has 2. Net side trou- on the Net- returns nor- WAR
(V1.5 been cut. ble. work side. mally, the er-
Added) 2. Network 3. Packet 2. Confirm the ror is recov-
Keep Alive blocked by settings of ered.
restoration. firewall. HUB and the
3. Response 4. Repetition of router, etc.
notification IP address.
on network
Keep Alive.

2-544 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Alarm Re- Content of Alarm

Type Name Cause Action Recovery
No. port Alarm Status
17 1 0 Denial of The system re- Service outage Confirm whether to WAR
service ceived illegal (Dos attack) find abnormality on
packet. the net side.
18 1 0 Connec- Digital Station The wiring connec- Check all wiring in MAJ
tion Error Wiring Error tion between the between the Multi-
Multiline terminal line terminal and
and the system the digital station
has an issue. card.
30 2 0 SMDR The temporary 1. Problem of 1. Confirm When the ERR
Buffer full buffer for SMDR wiring to con- whether there output is re- REC
in main device nect main de- is problem in started, the
overflowed, and vice with PC. wiring to con- error is recov- Program
a part of output 2. PC Problem. nect a main ered.
SMDR data dis- device with However, the
appeared be- PC. SMDR data

90
cause it could 2. Execute the after the error
not output reactivation of occurs is not
SMDR data. PC. recorded.
31 1 0 Security Sensor detected Sensor detected Especially, any- INF
Sensor abnormality. abnormality. thing need not be
detected done.
32 1 0 Automatic Remote watch Remote watch Especially, any- INF
Transmis- function did auto function did auto thing need not be
sion from dialing. dialing. done.
Remote
Surveil-
lance
50 1 0 System The system The system was No action needed.
Start Noti- started. started.
fication
51 0 0 System CPU Upgrade is No action needed.
Data performed or
change Programming
change is made.
54 2 0 License A new TCP/IP Maximum 512 li- Please delete li- WAR
Manage- terminal and the cense information cense information
ment Ta- DSP board were on the TCP/IP ter- on an unnecessary
ble Full not able to be minal is registered, TCP/IP terminal
added to the ap- and a new terminal with Program
plication license cannot be regis- 90-44.
management ta- tered.
ble.
• The license
management
table is regis-
tering full.
55 2 0 Regular The regular • The regular Please do the The excess ERR
mainte- maintenance maintenance ex- maintenance ex- on the regular REC
nance ex- exchange day change day that changes of perti- maintenance
change has passed. had been set nent parts, and set exchange
notifica- with Program the next regular day is can-
tion. 90-51 exceeded maintenance ex- celed by
it. change day with changing
Program 90-51. Program
90-51 or
when the
function is in-
validated, the
error is recov-
ered.

Programming Manual 2-545

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Alarm Re- Content of Alarm

Type Name Cause Action Recovery
No. port Alarm Status
57 2 0 IP Colli- Check the IP Collision IP Ad- Check the IP Ad- Recover the WAR
sion error Address colli- dress in the net- dress in the net- IP Address
sion (CPU, work. work. collision.
VOIPDB, Pro-
gram 84-26-01
GW : 1 ~ 8).
59 2 0 Network- Total number of • New extension Reduce extensions When the to- ERR
ing port ports exceeded or trunk ports or trunks not to ex- tal number of
limit ex- the limit of 168 are added. ceed 168 ports in ports be-
ceeded ports in the net- • A new system is the network. comes 168 or
(V1.5 work. added in Pro- less, the error
Added) gram 10-27-01. is recoverd.
Program • A new system is
connected to the
network.
• EXIFU is con-

90 60 2 0 SIP Reg-
istration
1. The regis-
tration of
1.
nected.
The setting of 1.
the system da-
Confirm the
following sys-
The error is
recovered
ERR
REC
Error No- the SIP ta is wrong. tem data set- when normal-
tification. trunk to the 2. The setting of ting -- Pro- ly connecting
SIP server the router is grams 10-12, it.
failed. wrong. 10-28, 10-29,
2. The regis- 3. It is an error to 10-30, and
tration of the link of 10-36.
the SIP LAN. 2. Confirm the
trunk to the 4. Net side trou- setting of rout-
SIP server ble. ers.
failed in the 3. Confirm
authentica- whether ab-
tion. normality oc-
3. There is no curs on the net
response side.
from the 4. Confirm the
SIP server authentication
to the SIP system data
registration setting.
request. 5. Confirm wiring
and the sys-
tem data set-
ting. Please in-
quire on un-
certain points
of the maker.
61 0 0 SIP ex- 1. Failed reg- 1. The registered 1. Confirm wiring ERR
tension istration of port is used by and the sys- REC
trouble in- the SIP ex- other exten- tem data set-
formation. tension ter- sion. ting.
minal. 2. The license is 2. Confirm
2. The SIP ex- insufficient. whether each
tension ter- 3. DSP of equipment
minal was VoIPDB not such as ac-
not ac- acquired. cess points
quired: works normal-
• At Regist of ly.
the SIP exten-
sion terminal
to SL1100.
• When you
cannot ac-
quire the DSP
resource
when it sent.

2-546 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Alarm Re- Content of Alarm

Type Name Cause Action Recovery
No. port Alarm Status
63 0 0 SIP-MLT 1. The trouble 1. The packet Confirm whether WAR
trouble in- occurred by loss occurred each equipment
formation. the SIP- on the network such as wirings
MLT rela- or the wiring and HUB is nor-
tion. cutting occur- mal.
2. The DSP red.
resource 2. DSP of
could not VoIPDB not
be acquired acquired.
at incom-
ing/outgo-
ing.
3. The nego-
tiation with Program
VoIPDB
failed.
64 1 0 VoIPDB
LAN Link
Error.
The link of LAN 1.
of VoIPDB came
off. 2.
LAN cable is
defective.
Connected
HUB broken.
1.

2.
Confirm LAN
connector and
wiring.
Check with
When the
connection
returns nor-
mally, the er-
ERR
REC
90
3. Defect CPU. maker on un- ror is recov-
certain points. ered.
65 0 0 VOIPDB When DSP of VoIPDB. Defective. 1. Possibility of WAR
trouble in- VoIPDB notifies defective hard-
formation. Error. ware.
2. Check with
maker on un-
certain points.
66 2 0 SIP ex- More than the • Wrong number 1. Confirm the When the WAR
tension number of licen- of licenses. number of li- number of
License ses to which the censes for SIP registration of
Error. SIP extension extension ter- SIP extension
terminal was minals. terminals falls
turned on at 2. Check with below the
REGISTER. maker on un- number of li-
certain points. censes.
67 0 0 SIP illegal The system re- A client or network Check with maker INF
Packet ceived illegal was illegal state. on uncertain point,
received packet. when happening
frequently when
operating it.
68 2 0 VoIPDB 1. Provides Not enough DSP Install VMDB with
DSP All alert when resources in sys- more DSP resour-
Busy all DSP re- tem. ces.
Alarm sources are
being used.
2. Used to
trouble-
shoot or
alerting
when up-
grade is
needed.
76 0 0 SIP Op- No Response Network Error or Check PRG
tion Keep from SIP Option Set the wrong IP 10-23-02, PRG
Alive Keep Alive Address of Sender. 10-29-03, 06.
(V4.0
Added)

Conditions

• The entire terminal that has an Alarm Display setting can be set at Program 90-50-01.

Programming Manual 2-547

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

• System Alarm Type is shown despite the setting done at 90-10-01. If multiple Alarm Display Setting
is set, only one highest priority alarm will be shown on a LCD Display.
• The priority level (highest -> lowest) : Alarm 55 > Alarm 7 > Alarm 5 > Alarm 30 > Alarm 8 > Alarm
52> Alarm 29 > Free Demo License Period.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

90

2-548 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-11 : Alarm Report SMTP Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-11 : Alarm Report SMTP Setting to define the details of the system alarm report. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default Related
Program
90
02 Report Method 0 = No Report When alarm reports are e-mailed, 0
1 = E-mail Address set this option to 1. E-mail address
set in 90-11-08.
06 SMTP Host Name Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, No Setting
set the SMTP name (ex : smtp.your-
isp.com). Contact your ISP (internet
service provider) for the correct en-
try if needed.
07 SMTP Host Port 0 ~ 65535 When alarm reports are e-mailed, 25
Number set the SMTP host port number.
Contact your ISP (internet service
provider) for the correct entry if nee-
ded.
08 To E-mail Ad- Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, No Setting
dress set this e-mail address to which the
report should be sent.
09 Reply Address Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, No Setting
set the e-mail address where replies
should be e-mailed.
10 From Address Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, No Setting
set this e-mail address for the sta-
tion sending the report.
11 DNS Primary Ad- 0.0.0.0 ~ When alarm reports are e-mailed, 0.0.0.0
dress 255.255.255.255 set the DNS primary address.
12 DNS Secondary 0.0.0.0 ~ When alarm reports are e-mailed, 0.0.0.0
Address 255.255.255.255 set the DNS secondary address.
13 Customer Name Up to 255 Characters When alarm reports are e-mailed, No Setting
enter a name to identify the particu-
lar system.
14 Use Standard 0 = No In case of YES uses a PRG47-18 0 90-11-08
SMTP Settings 1 = Yes SMTP client.( MEMDB/CF mounting 90-25-01
(V2.0 Added) is required.) 47-18
To Address (PRG 90-11-08), CC 90-11
Mail Address (PRG 90-25-01) Up to
48 characters.
In case of No uses a PRG 90-11
SMTP client.

Programming Manual 2-549

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
15 DIMLOG Notifica- 0 = No PRG 90-11-14=YES (PRG 47-18 0 90-11-14
tion (V2.0 Added) 1 = Yes SMTP Client uses) and CF mount
are necessary.
In the case of System Fault, Dim-
last.gz and Dimdump.gz are noti-
fied.

Conditions

None
Program

90 Feature Cross Reference

None

2-550 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program has Program
six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report
and set the system alarm options. The system can have up to 50 reports.

Input Data 90
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting Indicate the type of connection used for 0
5 = Compact Flash the System Alarms.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-551

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-13 : System Information Output
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the system
information output.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting Indicate the type of connection used to 0
5 = Compact Flash print the system information.
05 Output Command Dial 1 + press Hold This program only be able to access by -
(Press Hold only to can- Telephone programming.
cel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-552 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-16 : Main Software Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on the Program
CPU.

Input Data
90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Version Number Read Only: ASCII Code
01.00 ~ 99.99 (5 Bytes)
02 Software Release Date Read Only: ASCII Code
May 22 2002 17 : 53 : 46 (20 Bytes)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-553

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-17 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the various system
units.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 DSP Firmware Version No. Read Only: BCD Code (2 Byte)
00.00.00.00 ~ 15.15.15.15

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-554 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level:
SA

Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Program
Programming.

When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension is
released from the Dial Block restriction.
90
Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Delete IP Telephone [Release ?] : Dial 1 + This assignment removes the station num- -
press Hold ber association with the MAC address of
(Press Hold only to can- the IP station.
cel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Code Restriction/Toll Restriction

Programming Manual 2-555

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report.

Input Data
90 Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default

01 Call Traffic Output 0 = Not Measured 0

1 = Measure
03 All Line Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0
1 ~ 256
(Report when the data
reaches the defined val-
ue)
04 DTMF Receiver Busy 0 = Not Detected 0
Output 1 ~ 256
(Report when the data
reaches the defined val-
ue)
05 Dial Tone Detector 0 = Not Detected 0
Busy Output 1 ~ 256
(Report when the data
reaches the defined val-
ue)
06 Caller ID Receiver 0 = Not Detected 0
Busy Output 1 ~ 256
(Report when the data
reaches the defined val-
ue)
07 Voice Mail Channel 0 = Not Detected 0
All Busy Output 1 ~ 256
(Report when the data
reaches the defined val-
ue)
09 Attendant Channel All 0 = Not Detected 0
Busy Output 1 ~ 256
(Report when the data
reaches the defined val-
ue)
11 Security Sensor Dial 0 = Not Recorded Record Security sensor dialing and Re- 1
Record 1 = Recorded mote Inspection dialing to security report

Conditions

None

2-556 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Feature Cross Reference

• Traffic Reports

Program

90

Programming Manual 2-557

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic report
output.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Output Port Type 0 = No setting 0
3 = LAN

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Traffic Reports

2-558 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC Program
Programming.

Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP telephone
from the system.
90
Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Delete IP Telephone [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press This assignment removes the station num- -
Hold ber association with the MAC address of
(Press Hold only to can- the IP station.
cel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-559

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the date and time for the
alarm report to print.

90 Input Data

Notification Number 1 ~ 12

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Month 00 ~ 12 (0 = Not Set) 00
02 Day 00 ~ 31 (0 = Not Set) 00
03 Hour 00 ~ 23 00
04 Minute 00 ~ 59 00

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-560 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive the Program
system alarm report CC Mail setup.

Input Data

CC Number 1~5
90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 CC Mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-561

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access level required to
change a system program.

90 Input Data

Program Numbers 1001 ~ 9903

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Maintenance Level Level 1 = MF Level Refer to the Level indi-
Level 2 = IN Level cation for each individ-
Level 3 = SA Level ual program (located in
Level 4 = SB Level the upper left corner at
the beginning of each
program).

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-562 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password used to enter the Program
user programming mode.

Input Data

Extension Numbers Maximum eight digits

90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Password Fixed four digits 1111

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-563

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic Information
Maintenance) access over the LAN, and to define the user name and password. DIM is a maintenance
tool used by engineering to extract trace level information.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Access Enabling 0 = Disable 0 (Disable)
1 = Enable
02 Username 20 characters SL1100
(alphanumeric)
03 Password 20 characters 12345678
(alphanumeric)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-564 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-33 : Preselected Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use 90-33 : Preselected Data Setup to setup the system to preselected setting.

Input Data 90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 China Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
02 Chile Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
04 Taiwan Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
05 Korea Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
06 Hong Kong Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
07 Brazil Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
08 Malaysia Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
09 Thailand Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below
10 India Dial 1 + press Hold (Press Hold only to cancel.) Refer below

Default

China

Program No. Name Default

10-02-01 Country Code 86
(For China)
14-02-09 Busy Tone Detection 1
(All trunks : On)
14-02-18 Busy Tone Detection on talking 1
(All trunks : On)
15-03-15 Disconnect without dial after hooking hold 1
(All stations = Disconnect)
20-01-09 Camp-on cancel time 30
20-02-12 Mode setting for incoming call from extension 1
(Signaling call)
20-17-01 Operator’s Extension number 101 (Operator 1 = 101)
20-31-02 Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 30
20-31-07 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 30
20-31-08 DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 30
20-31-19 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer 180

Programming Manual 2-565

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

21-03-01 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 1
(All trunks : All modes : Group1)
22-01-03 Incoming ring no answer alarm start Timer 30
22-01-04 Normal DIL incoming no answer Timer 30
22-01-08 DID (DDI) Pilot Call No answer timer 30
22-08-01 Second IRG Setup for unanswered 1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
25-03-01 DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at Wrong dialing 1
(All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
25-04-01 DUD/DISA Transfer Ring Group at No answer/ 1
Program Busy (All trunks : All modes : IRG1)
25-07-07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Timer 180

90
30-02-01 DSS Console Extension Assignment 101 (Console No.1 = 101)
80-04-06 ON min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) 9
80-04-07 ON max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) 12
80-04-08 OFF min. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) 9
80-04-09 OFF max. time (Busy Tone for Trunk) 12
80-04-12 Frequency No 1 (Busy Tone for Trunk) 2
80-04-14 Twit Level-Rcv1/Rcv2/Rcv3 1
80-05-01 Date Format 1
(yy/mm/dd)
80-07 Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup (Ta- 45
ble2)
81-01-09 Time ringing signal stop detection time 70
(4.5 s)
82-04-08 Maximum hook flash time 132
(660 ms)
15-03-09 Caller ID Function 1
15-03-14 Forwarded Caller ID display mode 1
40-07 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS 15
47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language (All Station Mailbox Num- 15
ber)
47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language (All Group Mailbox Num- 15
ber)
47-07-03 Prompt Language (All Routing Mailbox Number) 15
47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language (All Trunk port Number) 15

Chile

Program No. Name Default

10-01-01 - Year 5
10-01-02 - Month 7
10-01-03 - Day 10
10-01-04 - Week (1 : SUN) 4
10-01-05 - Hour 18
10-01-06 - Minute 30
10-01-07 - Second 0

2-566 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

80-01-02 Basic Tone No 1
(Svc Tone 2 Unit 1)
12-01-02 Automatic night mode switch 0
20-02-07 Display mode of Date and Time 8
20-02-09 Disconnect Supervision 1
20-02-12 Mode setting for incoming call from extension 1
20-07-11 Force Trunk disconnection (Analog trunk only) 1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-07-12 Trunk port disable 1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
Program
20-08-08 Dial Block 1
(Class 1 ~ 15)

90
20-09-04 Notification for Incoming Call List existence 0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-11-12 External Call Forward (Off-Premise) 1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-13-01 Long conversation alarm 0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-13-15 Break-In 0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-13-16 Broken-in 0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-13-20 Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert 0
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-13-26 Group listening service 1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
20-13-31 Connected Line identification (COLP) 1
(Class 1 ~ 15)
21-01-06 Dial pause at first digit 1
21-08-01 Time of Repeat Dial 5
21-08-02 Interval of Repeat Dial 15
21-08-03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer 10
24-02-01 Transfer to busy extension 1
24-02-03 No answer time for call forward 30
25-07-07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time 0
25-07-08 DISA Conversation Disconnect Timer 0
40-10-01 VRS Fixed Message 0
14-01-06 SMDR print-out 1
(All Trunk)
14-01-13 Trunk to Trunk transfer 1
(All Trunk)
14-02-09 Busy Tone Detection 1
(All Trunk)
11-12-16 Trunk access via Networking 715
11-12-29 Direct extension call pickup 866
20-17-01 Operator’s Extension number 101 (Operator 1 = 101)
30-02-01 DSS Console Extension Assignment 101 (DSS Console No.1 = 101)
10-02-01 Country Code 56
15-02-01 Display Language Selection 12

Programming Manual 2-567

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

40-07-01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System 7
based
47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language 7
47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language 7
47-07-03 Prompt Language 7
47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language 7

Taiwan

Program No. Name Default

Program
15-01-01 Extension Name -
(Delete all station name)

90 20-02-12
21-04-01
Forced Intercom Ringing
Toll Restriction Class for Extensions 1
1

(Class 1, EXT 200 ~ 295, mode 1 ~ 4)

21-05-07 Permit code table Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
21-05-08 Restriction table Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
21-06-06 Permit code table PmitTBL 1 = None
PmitTBL 2 = None
PmitTBL 3 = 080, 081
PmitTBL 4 = 110, 119
21-06-07 Restriction table TollRes 1 = 0204
TollRes 2 = 00, 01, 0204, 100, 108
TollRes 3 = 0, 100, 18, 108
TollRes 4 = @
31-02-01 Internal Paging Group Assignment 1
(All stations)
31-02-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment 1
(All stations)
14-02-10 Caller ID 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
22-04-01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Set to 101-108 (IRG1)
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code 0
11-01-01 System Numbering 0 for Type 3 Trunk access code
9 for Type 5 operator
10-20-01 LAN Setup for External Equipment (SMDR) DEVICE 5 set to 1
35-01-01 SMDR-Output Port Type 1
(Port 1 only)
35-01-04 SMDR-Omit Digits 0
(Port 1 only)
35-02-09 SMDR-Extension Number or Name 1
(Port 1 only)
35-02-14 SMDR-Date 1
(Port 1 only)
20-02-07 Time and Date Display Mode 5
15-03-03 Terminal Type 1
(All stations)
21-01-06 Dial pause at first digit 1

2-568 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

20-13-01 Long Conversation Alarm 0
(Class 1 only)
20-13-22 Called Party Status 1
(Class 1 only)
20-09-04 Notification for Incoming Call List existence 0
(Class 1 only)
14-02-18 Busy tone detection on talking 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-19 Busy tone detection frequency 3
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-20 Busy tone detection interval 10
Program
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
80-04-06 ON Minimum RCV2 time 7
80-04-08
14-02-09
80-04-12
OFF Minimum RCV2 time
Busy tone detection
TONE RCV 2 frequency 1
7
1
1
90
(Table 1)
80-04-13 TONE RCV 2 frequency 2 2
(Table 2)
80-07-01 Call progress TONE detector frequency TABLE 1 set to 48
TABLE 2 set to 62
14-02-04 Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect 0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
81-01-14 Flash (Hooking 1) 20
81-01-15 Flash (Hooking 2) 30
20-19-02 Caller ID Wait Timer 2
20-07-01 Manual Night Service Enabled 1
(Class 1 only)
25-03-01 DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dial- 1
ing (Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1)
25-04-01 DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/ 1
Busy (Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1)
25-07-02 DID/DISA No Answer Time 16
25-07-11 DID/DISA Answer Delay Timer 3
32-02-01 Door Box Ring Assignment Set to EXT.101-108; DOOR 1; Mode 1-2
40-07-01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice 9
Mail
81-07-01 CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Ports 0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
25-07-03 Disconnect after DID/DISA re-transfer to IRG 180
20-02-11 Default Setting of Microphone of Key Telephone 0
24-02-03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 16
14-02-02 Ring Detect Type This option to sets Extended 1
Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the (Trunks 1 ~ 27)
trunk
20-07-11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk only) Ena- 1
bles/disables an extension’s ability to use Forced (Class 1 only)
Trunk Disconnect
20-03-04 Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT 1
25-02-01 DID/DISA Talkie to assign the VRS message num- Trunks 1 ~ 27 Talkie = 1
ber Mode 1 data = 1 (Day Mode)
Mode 2 data = 2 (Night Mode)

Programming Manual 2-569

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

25-05-01 VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment 4
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2)
40-10-08 Call Attendant Message - when Busy 8
40-10-09 Call Attendant Message - when No Answer 9
25-06-02 DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup MSG (1, 2, 4, 8, 9) Recv. 9 data=101
14-01-13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
21-03-01 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27 Mode 1, 2)
20-11-12 Call Forwarding Off-Premise 1
Program (Class 1 only)
25-07-07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time 0

90
12-02-01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 ~ 02 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
12-02-01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 ~ 01 set to 08 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
12-02-01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 ~ 03 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
12-02-01 Automatic night service Patterns 01 ~ 02 set to 17 : 30 Mode Group 1 only
10-02-01 Country Code 886
80-01-01 Repeat count 6

Korea

Program No. Name Default

10-02-01 Country Code 82
11-01-01 Dial * Digit 1
11-09-02 2nd TRK Access 6
11-10-20 Ope VRS Msg #716
11-12-27 Call Pickup *
12-02-01 Automatic night service Patterns ( Start of time ) ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 =
00:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 =
09:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 =
18:00
12-02-02 Automatic night service Patterns ( End of time ) ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 =
09:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 =
18:00
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 =
00:00
12-02-03 Automatic night service Patterns ( Mode No. ) ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 01 =
Mode3
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 02 =
Mode1
ModeGrp 1-4, Time Pattern 01, Set Time 03 =
Mode2
12-03-01 Night mode week setting sun = Pttrn 3, sat = Pttrn 2
Mode Group 1-4
14-01-13 TRK-TRK Transfer 1
14-02-04 Flash for timed Flash or Disconnect 0
14-02-05 DTD-Manual Dl 0
14-02-09 Busy Tone Detection 1
14-02-10 Caller ID 1

2-570 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

14-02-18 Busy Tone Detection Talking 1
15-01-01 Extension Name -
15-03-09 Extension Display 1
15-03-15 Hook disconnect mode 1
16-01-03 Auto Step Call 1
16-01-04 Hunting Mode 1
16-01-08 Max Queue No 32
20-02-04 Transfer Retrieve 1
20-02-11 Microphone of Key telephone 0
Program
20-02-12 ICM Call Type 1
20-03-03 SLT DTMF Dial 0
20-03-04
20-03-07
Dial Start
Forced Dial
1
0
90
20-07-01 Manual night Service Enabled 1
20-08-09 Hotline 1
20-08-20 Hot key Pad 1
20-13-01 Long Conversation Alarm 0
20-13-22 Call Party Status 1
20-17-01 Attendant 101
20-19-02 Caller ID wait timer 0
21-01-06 1st Digit P 1
21-01-09 Hotline Start 3
21-04-01 T/R Class for Extension 1
21-05-07 Permit code table Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
21-06-06 Permit code table PmitTBL 1 = None
PmitTBL 2 = 119, 112, 113, 080
21-05-08 Restriction Table Class 1 set 1
Class 2 set 2
Class 3 set 3
Class 4 set 4
21-15-01 2nd TRK Ace Route TBL 2
22-01-11 Msg Interval 10
22-14-01 Message1 Start Time 1
22-14-03 MSG1 Count 1
22-14-05 MSG2 Count 1
22-14-07 Disconnect Time 1
22-15-01 Message1 Start Time 1
22-15-03 MSG1 Count 1
22-15-05 MSG2 Count 1
22-15-07 Disconnect Time 1
24-02-03 CFW not answer Time 15
24-02-04 TRF Recall time 15
25-01-02 without Password 0

Programming Manual 2-571

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

25-07-01 VRS Dial Time 5
25-07-02 DISA No Answer Time 60
25-07-03 DISA Disconnect Retransfer to IRG 30
31-02-01 Internal Paging Group 1
31-02-02 Internal all Paging Group 1
32-01-02 Door Box Lock Cancel 1
35-01-04 SMDR-Omit Digits 0
35-02-09 SMDR-Extension Number or Name 1
35-02-14 SMDR-Date 1
Program
80-04-06 ON Minimum RCV2 Time 7
80-04-08 OFF Minimum RCV2 Time 7

90 80-04-12
80-04-13
TONE RCV 2 Frequency 1
TONE RCV 2 Frequency 2
2
3
80-07-01 Busy Tone Frequency table 2 ~ 48, table 3 ~ 62
81-01-09 Signal Stop Dtct 80
81-01-14 Flash (Hooking 1) 20
81-01-15 Flash (Hooking 2) 30
81-07-01 CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Ports 0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
82-04-04 Max. Break TM 14
82-04-07 Min. Flash TM 17
82-04-08 Max. Flash TM 120

Hong Kong

Program No. Name Default

14-01-13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-02 Ring Detect Type 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-04 Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect 0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-09 Busy Tone Detection 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-10 Caller-ID 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking 1
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-19 Busy Tone Detention Frequency 3
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
14-02-20 Busy Tone Detention Interval 10
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
20-02-12 Forced Intercom Ringing 1
20-03-03 SLT DTMF Dial 1
20-03-04 Trunk Call Dial Sending Time by SLT 1
20-07-01 Manual Night Service Enabled 1
(Class 1 only)

2-572 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

20-13-01 Long Conversation Alarm 0
(Class 1 only)
20-13-22 Called Party Status 1
(Class 1 only)
20-17-01 Operator Extension Number 101
20-19-02 Caller ID Wait Timer 0
21-01-06 Dial pause at first digit of dialing 1
22-01-11 VRS Waiting Message Interval Time 10
24-02-03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 15
31-02-01 Internal Paging Group Number 1 Program
(All stations)
31-02-02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving 1

90
(All stations)
32-01-02 Door Lock Cancel Time 2
80-01-02 Tone 14 Intercom Ring-Back Tone (Unit1Basic TN) 10
80-01-02 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone 10
(Unit1Basic TN)
80-01-02 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone 0
(Unit2Basic TN)
80-01-03 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone 10
(Unit1Duration)
80-01-03 Tone 39 Special Audible Ring-Busy Tone 20
(Unit2Duration)
80-04-12 TONE RCV2 (Frequency 1) 2
80-04-13 TONE RCV2 (Frequency 2) 3
80-07-01 Table 2 (Frequency) 48
80-07-01 Table 3 (Frequency) 62
81-01-14 Flash (Hooking 1) 25
81-07-01 CODEC Filter Type for analog trunk port 0
(Trunks 1 ~ 27)
10-02-01 Country Code 852

Brazil

Program No. Name Default

10-20-01 TCP Port SMDR Ex - Dev 5 60000
11-01-01 System Numbering - ACC Operator Dial = 9 (1 = Digit)
Type (5 = Opr)
11-01-01 System Numbering - ACC Trunk Dial = 0 (1 = Digit)
Type (3 = Trunk)
11-09-01 Trunk Access Code for Type 3 0
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1700, M1
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 1) Set Time 05 = S 1700, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1

Programming Manual 2-573

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0800, M2
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Set Time 02 = S 0800, E 1200, M1
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Set Time 03 = S 1200, E 1300, M3
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Set Time 04 = S 1300, E 1600, M1
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 2) Set Time 05 = S 1600, E 0000, M2
ModeGrp 1
12-02-01 Automatic Night Service Pattern (Time Pattern 3) Set Time 01 = S 0000, E 0000, M2
Program
ModeGrp 1
12-03-01 Weekly Night Service Switching 01 = Sunday, 3

90
ModeGrp 1
12-07-01 Text Data for Night Mode
Day / Night Mode 1 Dia
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 2 Noite
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 3 Almoço
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 4 -
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 5 -
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 6 -
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 7 -
(Mode Grp 1)
Day / Night Mode 8 -
(Mode Grp 1)
14-01-01 Trunk Name Linha 01 ~ 51
14-01-13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 1
(All Trunk)
14-01-14 Long Conversation Cut Off 1
(All Trunk)
14-01-15 Long Conversation Alarm before Cut Off 1
(All Trunk)
14-01-17 Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone For Long Conversa- 1
tion Alarm (All Trunk)
14-01-18 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 1
(All Trunk)
14-02-04 Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect 1
(All Trunk)
14-02-09 Busy Tone Detection 1
(All Trunk)
14-02-12 Detect Network Disconnect Signal 1
(All Trunk)
15-01-01 Extension Name 101: 101 ~ 184: 184
15-02-12 Off Hook Signaling Type 4
(All stations)
15-02-33 Multi Language Calendar Display on LCD 1
(All stations)

2-574 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

15-02-34 Call Register Mode 1
(All stations)
15-03-12 Fixed Cadence 0
(All stations)
15-07-01 Programmable Function Key Key 21 : 00
Key 22 : 00
(All stations)
20-01-01 Operator Access Mode 1
20-02-07 Time and Date Display Mode 5
20-02-09 Disconnect Supervision 1
20-02-11 Default Setting Microphone of KTS 0 Program
20-02-12 Forced Intercom Ringing 1

90
20-07-01 Manual Night Service Enabled 1
(Class 1 Only)
20-07-11 Forced Trunk Disconnect 1
(Class 01 ~ 15)
20-13-01 Long Conversation Alarm 0
(Class 01 ~ 15)
20-15-01 Normal Incoming Call of Trunk 11
20-15-03 Internal Incoming Call 10
20-15-05 DID 11
20-15-09 Call Back 10
20-16-01 Selectable Display Message
Message Number 1 REUNIÃO_# # : # #
Message Number 2 SERVIÇO_EXTERNO
Message Number 3 RETORNA_ # # : # #
Message Number 4 LIGAR _ # # # # # # # # # #
Message Number 5 LIGAR_APÓS_ # # : # #
Message Number 6 ALMOÇO
Message Number 7 VIAGEM _ ATÉ # # / # #
Message Number 8 FÉRIAS_ ATÉ # # / # #
Message Number 9 FORA DE SERVIÇO
Message Number 10 AUSENTE_ATÉ # # / # #
20-31-02 Callback / Trunk queuing cancel time 7200
(Class 01 ~ 15)
22-09-01 Expected Number of Digits 2
(TRK G.10 only)
24-02-01 Busy Transfer 1
25-01-02 DISA User ID 0
(All Trunk)
26-02-01 Dial Data
Dial Analysis Table number 151 00@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 152 01@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 153 02@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 154 03@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 155 04@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 156 05@@@@@@@@@@

Programming Manual 2-575

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

Dial Analysis Table number 157 06@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 158 07@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 159 080@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 160 081@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 161 082@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 162 083@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 163 084@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 164 085@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 165 086@@@@@@@@@
Program
Dial Analysis Table number 166 087@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 167 088@@@@@@@@@

90 Dial Analysis Table number 168

Dial Analysis Table number 169
089@@@@@@@@@
090@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 170 091@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 171 092@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 172 093@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 173 094@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 174 095@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 175 096@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 176 097@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 177 098@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 178 099@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 179 1@@
Dial Analysis Table number 180 2@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 181 3@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 182 4@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 183 5@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 184 6@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 185 7@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 186 8@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 187 90@@@@@@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 188 91@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 189 92@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 190 93@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 191 94@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 192 95@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 193 96@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 194 97@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 195 98@@@@@
Dial Analysis Table number 196 99@@@@@
26-02-02 Service Type
Dial Analysis Table number 151 1
Dial Analysis Table number 152 1

2-576 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

Dial Analysis Table number 153 1
Dial Analysis Table number 154 1
Dial Analysis Table number 155 1
Dial Analysis Table number 156 1
Dial Analysis Table number 157 1
Dial Analysis Table number 158 1
Dial Analysis Table number 159 1
Dial Analysis Table number 160 1
Dial Analysis Table number 161 1
Program
Dial Analysis Table number 162 1
Dial Analysis Table number 163 1
Dial Analysis Table number 164
Dial Analysis Table number 165
1
1
90
Dial Analysis Table number 166 1
Dial Analysis Table number 167 1
Dial Analysis Table number 168 1
Dial Analysis Table number 169 1
Dial Analysis Table number 170 1
Dial Analysis Table number 171 1
Dial Analysis Table number 172 1
Dial Analysis Table number 173 1
Dial Analysis Table number 174 1
Dial Analysis Table number 175 1
Dial Analysis Table number 176 1
Dial Analysis Table number 177 1
Dial Analysis Table number 178 1
Dial Analysis Table number 179 1
Dial Analysis Table number 180 1
Dial Analysis Table number 181 1
Dial Analysis Table number 182 1
Dial Analysis Table number 183 1
Dial Analysis Table number 184 1
Dial Analysis Table number 185 1
Dial Analysis Table number 186 1
Dial Analysis Table number 187 1
Dial Analysis Table number 188 1
Dial Analysis Table number 189 1
Dial Analysis Table number 190 1
Dial Analysis Table number 191 1
Dial Analysis Table number 192 1
Dial Analysis Table number 193 1
Dial Analysis Table number 194 1
Dial Analysis Table number 195 1

Programming Manual 2-577

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

Dial Analysis Table number 196 1
26-02-03 Additional Data
Dial Analysis Table number 151 10
Dial Analysis Table number 152 10
Dial Analysis Table number 153 10
Dial Analysis Table number 154 10
Dial Analysis Table number 155 10
Dial Analysis Table number 156 10
Dial Analysis Table number 157 10
Program
Dial Analysis Table number 158 10
Dial Analysis Table number 159 10

90 Dial Analysis Table number 160

Dial Analysis Table number 161
10
10
Dial Analysis Table number 162 10
Dial Analysis Table number 163 10
Dial Analysis Table number 164 10
Dial Analysis Table number 165 10
Dial Analysis Table number 166 10
Dial Analysis Table number 167 10
Dial Analysis Table number 168 10
Dial Analysis Table number 169 10
Dial Analysis Table number 170 10
Dial Analysis Table number 171 10
Dial Analysis Table number 172 10
Dial Analysis Table number 173 10
Dial Analysis Table number 174 10
Dial Analysis Table number 175 10
Dial Analysis Table number 176 10
Dial Analysis Table number 177 10
Dial Analysis Table number 178 10
Dial Analysis Table number 179 10
Dial Analysis Table number 180 10
Dial Analysis Table number 181 10
Dial Analysis Table number 182 10
Dial Analysis Table number 183 10
Dial Analysis Table number 184 10
Dial Analysis Table number 185 10
Dial Analysis Table number 186 10
Dial Analysis Table number 187 10
Dial Analysis Table number 188 10
Dial Analysis Table number 189 10
Dial Analysis Table number 190 10
Dial Analysis Table number 191 10

2-578 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Name Default

Dial Analysis Table number 192 10
Dial Analysis Table number 193 10
Dial Analysis Table number 194 10
Dial Analysis Table number 195 10
Dial Analysis Table number 196 10
26-02-06 LCR Carrier Table
Dial Analysis Table number 151 1
Dial Analysis Table number 152 2
Dial Analysis Table number 153 2
Program
Dial Analysis Table number 154 2
Dial Analysis Table number 155 2
Dial Analysis Table number 156
Dial Analysis Table number 157
2
2
90
Dial Analysis Table number 158 2
Dial Analysis Table number 160 2
Dial Analysis Table number 161 2
Dial Analysis Table number 162 2
Dial Analysis Table number 163 2
Dial Analysis Table number 164 2
Dial Analysis Table number 165 2
Dial Analysis Table number 166 2
Dial Analysis Table number 167 2
Dial Analysis Table number 168 2
Dial Analysis Table number 170 2
Dial Analysis Table number 171 2
Dial Analysis Table number 172 2
Dial Analysis Table number 173 2
Dial Analysis Table number 174 2
Dial Analysis Table number 175 2
Dial Analysis Table number 176 2
Dial Analysis Table number 177 2
Dial Analysis Table number 178 2
26-05-01 Delete Digits
Carrie LCR Tabela 1 4
Carrie LCR Tabela 2 3
34-01-05 System Toll Restriction 1
(All Trunk)
35-01-01 Output Port Type 1
(Port 1 only)
35-01-04 Omit Digits 0
(Port 1 only)
35-02-09 Extension Number or Name 1
(Port 1 only)
35-02-14 Date data 1
(Port 1 only)

Programming Manual 2-579

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program No. Name Default

35-02-16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number 2
(Port 1 only)
40-07-01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 9
40-08-01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 9
80-04-04 No Tone Time Type 2 BT 7
80-04-06 On Minimum Time Type 2 BT 6
80-04-07 On Maximum Time Type 2 BT 8
80-04-08 Off Minimum Time Type 2 BT 6
80-04-09 Off Maximum Time Type 2 BY 8
Program
80-07-01 Frequency Table 1 42
80-08-01 Duration 200

90 82-04-04
82-04-06
82-04-07
Maximum Break Time
Maximum Make Time
Minimum Hook Flash Time
14
14
16
82-04-08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 70
10-02-01 Country Code 55
15-02-01 Display Language Selection 1
47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language 13
47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language 13
47-07-03 Prompt Language 13
47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language 13

Brazil - PRG80-01 Service Tone Setup -

Service Tone Setup Unit 80-01-01 80-01-02 80-01-03 80-01-04

Internal Dial Tone TONE 2 1 0 0 1 32
2 - 1 10 32
Special Dial Tone TONE 3 1 0 0 1 32
2 - 1 1 32
Busy Tone TONE 6 1 0 0 2 32
2 - 1 2 32
Ring Back Tone TONE 14 1 0 0 40 32
2 - 1 10 32
External Ring Back Tone TONE 45 1 0 0 40 32
2 - 1 10 32
3 - - - -
4 - - - -
External Busy Tone TONE 46 1 0 0 2 32
2 0 1 2 32

Malaysia

Program No. Name Default

10-02-01 Country Code 60

2-580 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Thailand

Program No. Name Default

10-02-01 Country Code 66

India

Program No. Name Default

10-02-01 Country Code 91

Conditions Program

None

90
Feature Cross Reference
None

Programming Manual 2-581

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-34 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware units installed in
the system.

90 Input Data

Slot Number 00 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Package Name Read Only: -
PKG Name
02 Firmware Version Number Read Only: -
00.00 ~ 15.15
03 VOIPDB Software Version Read Only: -
DEV/PR/REL - 00.00.00.00.00.00
DEV/PR/REL - FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF
04 DSP Project Number Read Only: -
00000000 - FFFFFFFF
05 Vocallo Firmware Version Read Only: -
00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF
06 OCT1010ID Version Read Only: -
00.00.00.00 - FF.FF.FF.FF

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-582 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance level for Wizard
Programming.

Input Data
90
Wizard Number 1 ~ 250

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Maintenance Level 0 = All (Display Data) 0
3 = SB (System Administrator B) (Display Data)
4 = SA (System Administrator A) (Display Data)
5 = IN (Installer Level) (Display Data)
6 = MF (Manufacture Level) (Display Data)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-583

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the firmware update
feature. This data is available to set from the PC Programming FW update feature.

90 The following firmware is available to update with this feature:

• main.bin
• Dspdbu.bin
• dsp.bin
• intradbu.bin is not supported

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.
01 Firmware Update Sched- Read Only: 0 Set the time to update the firmware us-
ule Time Year : 0 ~ 99 ing a compact flash card.
Month : 0 ~ 12 Time registration fails if an expired
Day : 00 ~ 31 time is registered.
Hour : 00 ~ 23
Minute : 00 ~ 59
02 Update mode Read Only: 0 Activate the Firmware Update feature.
0 = Non Active If this setting is 1, new firmware on the
1 = Activated compact flash card updates according
to the setting at 90-36-01.
03 Update Report Read Only: - Output a report when the update is
Maximum 256 charac- executed and saves one copy on the
ters system. If a new update occurs, the
new report overwrites the old report.
Refer to the Sample Report on
page 2-584 shown.

Sample Report

Result Report Display

Update Success Update Success
Update Fail Update is fail. Since ‘A’ drive is not available.
Update Fail Update is fail. Since main up is not exist on A drive.
Update Fail Update is fail. Since Time is expired.

2-584 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Program

90

Programming Manual 2-585

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-37 : Set Temporary License
Level:
IN
(This Program is available for V4.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 90-37 : Set Temporary License to set the effective days of the temporary license.

90 Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Set Number of Days for Temporary 00 ~ 10 days 0
License 00 = Temporary license is invalid

Conditions

• Switch reset is required for changes to take effect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-586 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-38 : User Programming Data Level Setup sets system data to turn on/off each Program
User Programming Feature.

Input Data
90
Item Item Input Data Default Related
No. Program
01 Time setting 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 10-01
1 = Turn On (11-10-03)
02 Change of music on hold 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 10-04
tone 1 = Turn On (11-10-02)
03 Automatic Night Service Pat- 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 12-02
tern 1 = Turn On
04 Weekly Night Service Switch- 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 12-03
ing 1 = Turn On
05 Text Data for Night Mode 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 12-07
1 = Turn On
06 Holiday Night Service 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 12-04
Switching 1 = Turn On
07 DISA User ID Setup 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 25-08
1 = Turn On
08 Mail Box Setup 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 40-02
1 = Turn On
09 Text Messages Setup 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 20-16
1 = Turn On
10 Incoming Ring Group Setup 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 22-04
1 = Turn On
11 Abbreviated Dial Number 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-10-04
and Name 1 = Turn On 13-04
12 Night-mode switching Other 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-10-12
Group 1 = Turn On
13 DSS Key Assignment 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 30-03
1 = Turn On
14 Doorphone Ringing Assign- 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 32-02
ment 1 = Turn On
15 Extension Numbering 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-02
1 = Turn On
16 Extension Name 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 15-01-01
1 = Turn On
17 Night-mode switching Own 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-10-01
Group 1 = Turn On

Programming Manual 2-587

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program
18 Call Forward-Immediate/No 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-11-01
Answer /Both Ring 1 = Turn On 11-11-03
11-11-05
19 Call Forward-Busy 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-11-02
1 = Turn On
20 Trunk Incoming Ring Tone 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-11-20
1 = Turn On 15-02-02
21 Internal Incoming Ring Tone 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-11-20
1 = Turn On 15-02-03
22 Display Language Selection 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 15-02-01
Program 1 = Turn On
23 Toll Restriction Override 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 21-07
Password 1 = Turn On

90 24

25
User Programming Pass-
word
Programmable Function Key
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On
0 = Turn Off
1 = Turn On

1 = Turn On
90-28

15-07
1 = Turn On
26 Virtual Extension Ring As- 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 15-09
signment 1 = Turn On
27 One Touch Key Assignment 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 15-14
1 = Turn On
28 Trunk Name 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 14-01-01
1 = Turn On
29 Automatic Transfer per Trunk 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-10-06
1 = Turn On 11-10-07
30 SPD Area No. 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 11-10-08
1 = Turn On 24-04
31 Telephone Data Copy 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 92-01
1 = Turn On
32 Dial in Name 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 22-11-03
1 = Turn On
33 LCD Line Key Name Assign- 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 15-20
ment 1 = Turn On
34 IntraMail Station Mailbox Op- 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On 47-02
tions 1 = Turn On

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Maintenance

2-588 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.

Input Data 90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Virtual Loop Back Reset [Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold -
(Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• PC Programming

Programming Manual 2-589

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the Primary DNS
Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data Roaming Server address.

90 Input Data

Server Information 1 ~ 13

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Server Address Type 0 = IPv4 0
1 = IPv6
02 Server Address IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) None
IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx)
03 Port Number 0 ~ 65535 0

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-590 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-42 : DR700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the hardware version Program
and firmware version of the DR700 MLT Terminal.

Input Data

Terminal Type 1 ~ 3 = Not used

90
4 = IP4WW-24TIXH

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Software Version 00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00
02 Hardware Version 00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-591

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DR700 to delete the terminal license information
delivered to the DR700 terminal.

90 Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Delete Terminal License [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold -
(Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-592 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the terminal license
information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.

Input Data
90
License Delete Code 000-000-000
~
999-999-999

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Delete Terminal License [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold -
(Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-593

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline
Telephone
Level:
IN

Description
Program
Note: This program is available via telephone programming and WebPro not through PC
Programming.

90 Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to change the
Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Temporary Password Change Re- 00.00.00.00 ~ FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00
quest Change? (Yes = 1)

Conditions

• This Program is activated when the Program 10-46-07 set to “1”.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-594 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report display. Program

Input Data

Index Number 01 ~ 50
90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 System Alarm Display Telephone Up to eight digits No Setting

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-595

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for the maintenance
exchange of parts that need regular maintenance.

90 Input Data

Index 1 ~ 10

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Display Name Up to 16 characters Refer below
02 Year 00 ~ 99 00
03 Month 01 ~ 12 00
04 Day 01 ~ 31 00

Index Default
01 --- No setting ---
02 Backup battery
03 --- No setting ---
04 ~ 10 --- No setting ---

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-596 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.

Input Data 90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Save All Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes) -
02 Save New Alarm Reports Print New? (1 = Yes) -

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-597

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Clear All Alarm Reports All Clear? ( 1 = Yes) -

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-598 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-54 : PC/Web Programming
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-54 : PC/Web Programming sets parameters for PC and Web Programming. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Description Default
90
01 Web Pro TCP port 1 ~ 65535 The port number of TCP of the Web pro- 80
number gramming is set. The port number of new
TCP is not reflected from the Web Pro to
the logout of all users of the Web Pro who
is logging in the system after data is
changed in the setting.
02 PC Pro TCP port 1 ~ 65535 The port number of TCP of the PC pro- 8000
Number gramming is set. The port number of new
TCP is not reflected from the PCPro to the
logout of all users of the PCPro who is log-
ging in the system after data is changed in
the setting.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• PC Programming

Programming Manual 2-599

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-55 : Free License Select
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Start Free License 0 = Stop 0
1 = Start

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-600 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-56 : NTP Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
90
01 NTP Synchronize 0 = No 0
1 = Yes
02 Server Address IPv4 form : No Setting
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IPv6 form :
xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-601

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level:
SA

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the Compact Flash
memory on the CPU and to make the recovery data.

90 Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Backup Recovery Data [Backup?] : Dial 1 + press Hold -
(Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-602 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level:
SA

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in the Compact
Flash memory of the CPU. After this command is executed, the system restarts automatically.

Input Data
90
Data ID 1~5

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Restore Recovery Data [Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1 + press Hold -
(Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-603

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level:
SA

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data stored in the
Compact Flash memory of the CPU.

90 Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Delete Recovery Data [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Hold -
(Press Hold only to cancel.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-604 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status information for T1 Program
packages.

Input Data

Slot No. 00 ~ 15 (V3.5 Changed)

90
Item Item Input Data Default
No.
01 Link Status Read Only: None
- = No Link
0 = Link
N/A = No card seen in slot

Conditions

This program can be viewed in WebPro or PC Pro. (V3.0 or higher)

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-605

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-62 : Security ID Information
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 90-62 : Security ID Information to view the information for Security ID.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Security ID Read Only: -
0 ~ 9, A ~ F (Maximum 32 characters)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-606 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-63 : DR700 Control
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-63 : DR700 Control to adjust settings of the DR700. Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
90
01 Priority Timer 0 ~ 255 80

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-607

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Program Use Program 90-65 : 1st Party CTI Authentication Password Setup to set the authentication
password.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default

No.
01 Password Up to 16 characters Sets the authentication password when nec-i
the 1st Party CTI application is connected
to the system via a NAT router. If a pass-
word is not set, the system does not certify
it.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-608 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-66 : FTP Firmware Update setup to setup the Login info to connect to the FTP Program
Server.

Input Data
90
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 User Name Up to 32 characters SLSYSTEM
02 Password Up to 32 characters Dra#0ftp
03 FTP Server Host Up to 255 characters Input URL or IP Address of FTP Server. ftp.necii.com
Name Use xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format in case of IP
Address.
04 FTP Server TCP Port 0 ~ 65535 21
05 DNS Primary Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 0.0.0.0
126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254
06 DNS Secondly Ad- 0.0.0.0 ~ 0.0.0.0
dress 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~
191.255255.254
192.0.0.1 ~
223.255.255.254

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-609

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 90-67 : Backup Data Auto-save Interval Time Set to set time interval D-RAM data
that is saved in F-ROM memory.

D-RAM memory : Configuration information such as call transfer and Do Not Disturb.

90 Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.
01 Interval time 0 ~ 255 48 (24 hr)
0 = Do not Auto-save
1 = 30 min
2 = 60 min
3 = 90 min
:
255 = 30 min (127 hr)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-610 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 90-68 : Side Tone Auto Setup to setup the volume level of Side Tone for each Analog
Trunk Port.

This program will change the setting of "PRG 81-07 CODEC Filter Setup for analog Trunk Port" If the
Analog Port is in used or if it is other than a Analog Trunk Port then it will give out the error message.
90
Input Data

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Adjustment Start Trunk Port Number This will start the Adjustment of Side No Setting 81-07-01
001 ~ 084 Tone for each Analog Trunk Port. If 21-01-05
it is successful it will change the 21-01-06
PRG 81-07. If it is successful it will 14-01-07
ask to change it for all Analog Trunk 21-06-06
Port.. If you select to change the 21-05-07
Setting All Analog Trunk Port it will
change all the Port in 81-07.
02 1 digit data Dial (1 dight) This setting will ask to use the digit 0 -
after Line is retrieved.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-611

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-01 : Copy Program
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another multiline terminal,
port, group, or other number. Refer to the following charts to see which programs can be copied.

92 Input Data

Program Number XX ~ XX

Item No. Item Input Data Description

Source Number • For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number Enter the extension, trunk, group
001 ~ 084 or other number from which the
• For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group data is to be copied.
Number 01 ~ 25
Destination Number (From) • For Extension Base : Extension Num- Enter the first extension, trunk,
ber Maximum eight digits group or other number to which
• For Department Group Base : De- the information is to be copied.
01 Destination Number (To) partment Group Number 01 ~ 32 Enter the last extension, trunk,
• For DSS : DSS Console Number 01 group or other number to which
~ 12 the information is to be copied. If
• For Door Phone: Door phone num- the information is being copied
ber : 1 ~ 6 only to one extension, trunk,
group or other number, enter the
information entered in the Desti-
nation Number (From) entry.

The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs :

Trunk Port Base

Program No. Program Name

14-01 Trunk Basic Data Setup
Copy all data except Trunk Name (Item 01).

14-02 Analog Trunk Data Setup

14-04 Behind PBX Setup
14-08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks
14-09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk
20-30 Timer Class for Trunk
21-03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
21-12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
21-21 Toll Restriction for Trunks
21-22 CO Message Waiting Indication

2-612 Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program No. Program Name

22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup
22-03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup
22-05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk
22-08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG
31-05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker
81–07 Codec Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port

Trunk Group Base

Program No. Program Name Program

35-03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Extension Base

Program No. Program Name

92
15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Extension)
Copy all data except extension name (item 01).

15-02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension
15-07 Programmable Function Key
15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
15-17 CO Message Waiting Indication
15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options
20-06 Class of Service for Extension
20-29 Timer Class for Extension
21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
21-11 Hotline Assignment
23-02 Call Pickup Groups
23-03 Ringing Line Preference
23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
24-03 Park Group Assignment
31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment
82-14 Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone

Programming Manual 2-613

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Department Base

Program No. Program Name

16-01 Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup
Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01).

35-04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group

DSS Console Base

Program No. Program Name

Program 30-01 DSS Console Operation Mode

30-03 DSS Key Assignment

92 Door Box Base

Program No. Program Name

32-02 Door Box Ring Assignment

Conditions

• Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys, copies all keys
whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming is being copied. This may cause
confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the
terminal (displays as DUPLICATE DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or
copy only from an extension which has the same or fewer numbers of keys than the extension to
which the programming is being copied.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-614 Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension numbers <Program
11-02>, <Program 11-04>. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted.

Input Data
92
Item Item Input Data Description Default
No.
01 Extension Number Delete Yes : 1 [Dial 1] + Hold key (Only press Hold key is -
canceled.)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-615

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level:
IN

Description
Program Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming.

Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the data of each
outside line.

92 Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

Item No. Item Input Data Description

01 Source Number • For Trunk Base : Trunk Port Number Enter the port number from where
001 ~ 084 the data is to be copied.
• For Trunk Group Base : Trunk Group
02 Destination Number (From) Number 01 ~ 25 Enter the first port number to
• For Extension Number : 001 ~ 128 where the information is to be
(V3.5 Changed) copied
03 Destination Number (To) Including Virtual Extension : 01 ~ 178 Enter the last port number to
(V3.5 Changed) where the information is to be
• For Department Group Base : De- copied. If the information is to be
partment Group Number 01 ~ 32 copied only to one port, enter the
• For DSS : (DSS Console Number 01 information entered in the Desti-
~ 12 nation Number (From) entry.

Refer to Program 92-01 Copy Program on page 2-612 for program that can be copied.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-616 Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level:
IN

Description
Note: This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC Programming. Program
Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions.

Input Data 92
Item No. Item Input Data
01 1st Extension Number Up to eight digits.
2nd Extension Number

The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.

Program Number Program Name

11-02 Extension Numbering
12-05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
13-03 Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions
13-06 Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name
15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup
15-02 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension
15-07 Programmable Function Key
15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension
15-14 Programming One-Touch Keys
15-17 CO-Message Waiting Indication
15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options
16-02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions
20-06 Class of Service for Extension
20-29 Timer Class for Extensions
21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extension
21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extension
21-07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
21-10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions

Programming Manual 2-617

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program Number Program Name

21-11 Hotline Assignment
21-13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-18 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-19 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
21-20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension
22-04 Incoming Ring Group Setup
22-06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode
23-02 Call Pickup Group
Program
23-03 Ringing Line Preference
23-04 Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension

92 24-03
24-09
Park Hold Group Assignment
Call Forward Split Settings
26-04 ARS Class of Service
31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment
41-02 ACD Agent Extension Assignment for ACD Group (V1.5 Added)
42-02 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup
82-14 Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone
90-28 User Programming Password Setup
92-05 Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-618 Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit password for each Program
extension to allow Extension Data Swap.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits.

92
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program
01 Password Fixed four digits (No Password required on a per station No Setting 11-15-12
setting at default) basis when utilizing the station swap
feature.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-619

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-06 : Fill Command
Level:
IN

Description
Program Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number of each extension
group or each table.

92 Input Data

Program Number XX - XX

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Source Number Each extension port = 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed) (Program 11-02)
Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04)
Destination Number (From) Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)
Destination Number (To) Each ACD Group = 1 ~ 2 (V1.5 Added)

The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.

Program Number Program Name

11-02 Extension Numbering
11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering
11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
11-17 ACD Group Pilot Number (V1.5 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-620 Program 92 : Copy Program

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-07 : Delete Command
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number of each Program
extension group or each table.

Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

92
Item No. Item Input Data
01 Destination Number (From) Each extension port = 001 ~ 128 (V3.5 Changed) (Program
11-02)
Destination Number (To) Each virtual extension port = 01 ~ 50 (Program 11-04)
Each extension group = 1~32 (Program 11-07)
Each ACD Group = 1 ~ 2 (V1.5 Added)

The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.

Program Number Program Name

11-02 Extension Numbering
11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering
11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number
11-17 ACD Group Pilot Number (V1.5 Added)

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2-621

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 93 : System Information

93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 93-01 : Day/Night Mode Information to display day/night mode for night mode service
group.

93 Input Data

Night Mode Service Group No. 1~4

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Day/Night mode 1 = Mode 1 Read Only: No Setting 12-XX
2 = Mode 2 Indicates current day/night mode
3 = Mode 3 per night mode service group.
4 = Mode 4
5 = Mode 5
6 = Mode 6
7 = Mode 7
8 = Mode 8

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Maintenance

2-622 Program 93 : System Information

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 93 : System Information

93-02 : Trunk Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 93-02 : Trunk Information to display the setting of each trunk.

Input Data 93
Trunk Port Number 1 ~ 84

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Set Automatic 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-10-06
Transfer to 1 = Enable Indicates Automatic Trunk Trasfer
Transfer setting status.
02 Trunk Port Disa- 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-10-27
ble by Service 1 = Enable Indicates Trunk Port Disable (Busy
code out) status.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Maintenance

Programming Manual 2-623

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 93 : System Information

93-03 : Extension Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 93-03 : Extension Information to display the settings of each extension.

93 Input Data

Extension Up to 8 digits

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Call Forward- 0 = Call Forwarding off Read Only: No Setting 11-11-01
All/No Answer/ 1 = Call Forwarding Indicates Call Forward-All/No An- 11-11-03
BothRing with Both Ringing swer/BothRing setting statsus per 11-11-04
2 = Call Forwarding extension. 11-11-05
when No Answer 24-09-01
3 = Call Forwarding All
Call
02 Call Forwarding 0 ~ 9, *, #, P, R, @ Read Only: No Setting 11-11-01
Destination for (Up to 36 digits) Indicates Call Forward-All/No An- 11-11-03
Both Ring, All swer/BothRing destination number 11-11-04
Call, No Answer set per extension. 11-11-05
24-09-02
03 Call Forward- 0 = Call Forward-Off Read Only: No Setting 11-11-02
Busy 1 = Call Forward-Busy Indicates Call Forward-Busy setting 11-11-04
or No answer status per extension. 24-09-01
2 = Call Forward-Busy
04 Call Forwarding 0 ~ 9, *, #, P, R, @ Read Only: No Setting 11-11-02
Busy destination (Up to 36 digits) Indicates Call Forward-Busy desti- 11-11-04
nation number set per extension. 24-09-04
05 Call Forwarding 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-07
– Follow-Me 1 = Enable Indicates Call Forward-Follow-Me
setting status per extension.
06 Call Forwarding Extension Number (Up Read Only: No Setting 11-11-07
Follow-Me desti- to 8 digits) Indicates Call forwarding follow-me
nation extension number set per extension.
07 Do Not Disturb 0 = No Setting Read Only: No Setting 11-11-08
1 = DND External Indicates DND setting status per ex-
2 = DND intercom tension.
3 = DND Transfer
4 = DND All
08 Message Waiting Extension Number (Up Read Only: No Setting 11-11-09
(Set) to 8 digits) Indicates extension number which
you set Message Waiting.
09 Message Waiting Extension Number (Up Read Only: No Setting 11-11-09
(Rec) to 8 digits) Indicates extension number when
left Message Waiting.

2-624 Program 93 : System Information

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
10 Alarm Clock 1 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-12
1 = Enable Indicates Alarm Clock 1 setting sta-
tus.
11 Preset time at Time set in Alarm Clock Read Only: No Setting 11-11-12
Alarm 1 1. Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock
1.
When
PRG93-03-11 is
"0", 「00：00」
is indicated.
12 Alarm Clock 2 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-12
1 = Enable Indicates Alarm Clock 2 setting sta-
tus. Program
13 Preset Time at Time set in Alarm Clock Read Only: No Setting 11-11-12
Alarm 2 2. Indicates the time set in Alarm Clock
When
PRG93-03-11 is
"0", 「00：00」
2.
93
is indicated.
14 Forced Intercom 0 = Disable(Voice1) Read Only: No Setting 11-11-15
Ring (ICM Call 1 = Enable(Signal) Indicates ICM Call Type per exten- 11-11-16
Type) sion.
15 BGM 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-18
1 = Enable Indicates BGM setting status per ex-
tension.
16 Key Touch Tone 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-19
1 = Enable Indicates Key Touch Tone setting
status per extension.
17 Dial Block 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-33
1 = Enable Indicates Dial Block setting status
per extension.
18 Repeat Dial 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting
1 = Enable Indicates Repeat Dial setting status
per extension.
19 Headset Mode 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-65
Switching 1 = Enable Indicates Headset Mode Switching
setting status per extension.
20 Headset Ringing 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-43
Mode Switching 1 = Enable Indicates Headset Ringing Mode
Switching setting status per exten-
sion.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Maintenance

Programming Manual 2-625

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

Program 93 : System Information

93-04 : Redial List
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)

Program Description
Use Program 93-04 : Redial List to display the redial list of each extension.

93 Input Data

Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Redial Last Number 10

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Redial Data Dial Data Read Only: No Setting 15-02-13
1 ~ 9, 0, *, #, P, R, @ Indicates the number stored in Out- 15-02-39
(Up to 36 digits) going call history.
02 Name Up to 12 characters Read Only: No Setting 15-01-01
Indicates the name stored in Outgo- 13-04-02
ing call hitory.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Maintenance

2-626 Program 93 : System Information

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

Program 93 : System Information

93-05 : Department Group Information
Level:
SA
(This Program is available for V3.0 or higher)

Description Program
Use Program 93-05 : Department Group Information to display the settings of each department
group.

Input Data
93
Department Group Number 1 ~ 32

Item Item Input Data Description Default Related

No. Program
01 Set Automatic 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-25
transfer at De- 1 = Enable Indicates Automatic transfer setting
partment Group status per Department Group.
call
02 Set Delayed 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-28
transfer at De- 1 = Enable Indicates Delayed transfer setting
partment Group status per Department Group.
call
03 Set DND at De- 0 = Disable Read Only: No Setting 11-11-30
partment Group 1 = Enable Indicates DND setting status per
call Department Group.

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference

• Maintenance

Programming Manual 2-627

 SL1100 ISSUE 6.0

MEMO

Program

93

2-628 Program 93 : System Information

ISSUE 6.0 SL1100

MEMO

Programming Manual 2-629

Programming Manual
NEC Corporation

ISSUE 6.0